The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutHMAC - Specifications - Bid Documents 10312024December 5, 2022 PROJECT MANUAL OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RENTON CITY HALL HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS 1719 SE MAPLE VALLEY HWY Renton, WA 98057 PROJECT NO. CAG 24 -218 CITY OF RENTON PUBLIC WORKS/FACILITIES 1055 SOUTH GRADY WAY RENTON, WASHINGTON 98057 Armondo Pavone, Mayor November 18, 2024 This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS SECTION 00 00 03 - BID PROPOSAL FORM Bid Form Page 1 of 6 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs CITY OF RENTON HAND DELIVER TO: OFFICE OF THE CITY CLERK RENTON CITY HALL – LOBBY 1055 S. GRADY WAY, RENTON, WA, 98057 for the HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER UPGRADES CAG 24-218 Bids Due: 2:00 PM December 16, 2024 Bidder’s Name: Address: Telephone: (MUST BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED) Having carefully examined the Bidding Documents and Instructions to Bidders, the Project site and conditions affecting the Work, and all Addenda, the undersigned Bidder certifies that: (i) it has the personnel and means to complete the Work and (ii) it will furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and management to perform all Work required by, and in strict accordance with, the above‐named documents for the following sum within the time fixed. All Bid amounts shall include overhead, profit, bonds, insurance, and any other expense required to complete the Work (excluding Washington State Sales Tax). The undersigned Bidder certifies that it is, at the time of submitting the Bid, and shall remain throughout the period of the Contract, licensed by the State of Washington to perform the type of work required under the Contract Documents. It further certifies that it is skilled and regularly engaged in the general class and type of work called for in the Contract Documents. A. BASE BID The Bidder agrees to complete the Work for this Project for the following lump sum Base Bid amount: DOLLARS $ Base Bid Amount Written Numeric Do not include in the Base Bid amount Washington State Sales Tax. That amount will be paid based on the Contract Sum. B I D F O R M DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS SECTION 00 00 03 - BID PROPOSAL FORM Bid Form Page 2 of 6 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs B. ALTERNATES Alternate 1 – Scope of Work Replace All Activity Pool Tiles $ _ (Alternate 1 Amount Written) (Numeric) Alternate 2 – Scope of Work $ _ (Alternate 2 Amount Written) (Numeric) C. SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING If Bid Amount is $1,000,000 or more, as required by RCW 39.30.060, Bidder must complete and provide the included Subcontractor listing forms (Form C) in accordance with the applicable timing requirements. D. RECEIPT OF ADDENDA Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. All requirements therein are included in the appropriate Bid amount. E. CONDITIONS OF PROPOSAL 1. Determination of Low Bidder: a. The City of Renton (alternatively referred to as “Owner” or “City”) reserves the right to award the Contract for the Project based on the Contractor’s Base Bid and any selected Alternates(s), in whatever manner is in the City’s best interest. 2. Overhead and Profit: a. All of the above Bid Prices shall include overhead, profit, bonds, insurance, and any other expense required to complete the Work (excluding Washington State Sales Tax). F. PERIOD OF BID VALIDITY/ACCEPTANCE OF BID The undersigned hereby agrees that this Bid shall be a valid and firm offering for the period of sixty (60) days from the Bids Due date. Within sixty (60) days from the Bids Due date, the City will act either to accept the Bid Form the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, or to reject all Bids. The City reserves the right to request extensions of such Bid acceptance period. DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS SECTION 00 00 03 - BID PROPOSAL FORM Bid Form Page 3 of 6 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs The acceptance of a Bid will be evidenced by a written Notice of Intent to Award Contract to the Bidder whose Bid is under consideration for acceptance, together with a request to furnish a bond (if required), evidence of required insurance to execute the Agreement set forth in the Contract Documents, and other designated documents. G. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT If the written Notice of Intent to Award Contract is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered via facsimile to the undersigned within the period of Bid validity noted above, or any time thereafter before this Bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days after the date of such notification, execute the City of Renton Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum (“Agreement”) set forth in the Contract Documents. H. TIME FOR COMPLETION Substantial Completion ‐ The undersigned hereby agrees to Substantially Complete all the Work under the Base Bid (and accepted Alternates) no later than 120 days following Notice to Proceed. Notice to Proceed – January 31 , 2025. Final Completion – All the Work shall achieve Final Completion in accordance with the contract documents within 30 calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion. I. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES The undersigned agrees to pay the Owner of liquidated damages the sum of $1,200.00 for each calendar day beyond the date upon which Substantial Completion of the entire Work is required to be complete until Substantial Completion is achieved, in accordance with the Contract Documents. J. BID SECURITY (As per the Bidding Documents) If applicable, Bid Security must be submitted with the Bid Form. K. ACKNOWLEDGMENT The undersigned acknowledges that it has read, understands, and agrees to comply with all federal and state non‐discrimination laws, regulations, and policies during the performance of the Work. DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS SECTION 00 00 03 - BID PROPOSAL FORM Bid Form Page 4 of 6 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH PREVAILING WAGE PAYMENT STATUTES The undersigned Bidder hereby certifies, under the penalty of perjury, that within the three‐ year period immediately preceding the Bid Submission date, the Bidder has not been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and Industries, or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction, to have willfully violated, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any provision of chapters 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW. I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of Washington that the foregoing is true and correct. Legal Name of Person or Entity Submitting Bid Signature of Authorized Official* Printed Name Legal Name of Person or Entity Submitting Bid: NOTE: If Bidder is a corporation, write State of Incorporation; if a partnership, give full names and addresses of all parties below. Authorized Signatory: Title: Printed Name: Address: City: State: Zip Code: Date: Telephone: Fax: Washington Contractor's License No.: Federal Tax ID #: E‐mail address: Washington State UBI No.: Expiration Date: DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS SECTION 00 00 03 - BID PROPOSAL FORM Bid Form Page 5 of 6 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs Title Date City State Check One: Sole Proprietorship ☐ Partnership ☐ Joint Venture ☐ Corporation ☐ LLC ☐ State of Incorporation, or if not a corporation, State where business entity was formed: If a co‐partnership, give firm name under which business is transacted: *If a corporation, proposal must be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice‐president (or any other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign). If a co‐partnership, proposal must be executed by a partner. NON‐COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT Being duly sworn, deposes and says, that he/she is the identical person who submitted the forgoing proposal or bid, and that such bid is genuine and not sham or collusive or made in the interest or on behalf of any person not therein named, and further, that the deponent has not directly induced or solicited any other Bidder on the foregoing work or equipment to put in a sham bid, or any other person or corporation to refrain from bidding, and that deponent has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure to himself or to any other person any advantage over the other Bidder or Bidders. AND CERTIFICATION RE: ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI‐TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER Vendor and purchaser recognize that in actual economic practice overcharges resulting from anti‐trust violations are in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore, vendor hereby assigns to purchaser any and all claims for such overcharges as to goods and materials purchased in connection with this order or contract, except as to overcharges resulting from anti‐trust violations commencing after the date of the bid, quotation, or other event establishing the price under this order or contract. In addition, vendor warrants and represents that such of his suppliers and subcontractors shall assign any and all such claims to purchaser, subject to the aforementioned exception. AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT FORM I, the undersigned, having been duly sworn, deposed, say and certify that in connection with the performance of the work of this project, I will pay each classification of laborer, workman, or mechanic employed in the performance of such work; not less than the prevailing rate of wage or not less than the minimum rate of wages as specified in the principal contract: that I have read the above and foregoing statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein is true to my knowledge and belief. DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS SECTION 00 00 03 - BID PROPOSAL FORM Bid Form Page 6 of 6 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs FOR: NON‐COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT, ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI‐TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT Henry Moses Aquatic Center Upgrades / City of Renton Name of Bidder's Firm Signature of Authorized Representative of Bidder Subscribed and sworn to before me on this day of , 20 . End of Bid Form HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER UPGRADES - Permit I Bid Set 10/30/2024 SECTION 00 01 07 SEALS PAGE ARCHITECT ARCHITECTURE RESOURCES COLLABORATIVE PAUL CURTIS, PRINCIPAL, AIA, LEED BD+C 119 S MAINSTREET, SUITE 200 SEATTLE, WA 98104-2579 TELEPHONE: (206)322-3322 EMAIL: CURTIS@ARCARCHITECTS.COM LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT MIG/SVR MELANIE DAVIE, SR LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT DAVIN DAWSON, LANSCAPE ARCHITECT 119 PINE STREET, SUITE 400 SEATTLE, WA 98101 TELEPHONE: (206 )223-0326 EMAIL: MELANIED@MIGCOM.COM EMAIL: DDAWSON@MIGCOM.COM CIVIL ENGINEER MIG/SVR MARK DAVIES, PRINCIPLE 119 PINE STREET, SUITE 400 SEATTLE, WA 98101 TELEPHONE: (206 )2 2 3 - 0 3 2 6 EMAIL: MDAVIES@MIGCOM.COM ELECTRICAL ENGINEER CROSS ENGINEERS LEAD ENGINEER 923 MARTIN LUTHER KING JR. WAY TACOMA, WA, 98405 TELEPHONE: (206)759-0118 EMAIL: BRICEA@CROSSENGINEERS.COM MECHANICAL/PLUMBING ENGINEER GDM ENGINEERS JESSE BARKSDALE, PROJECT MANAGER 4317 6TH AVENUE SE, SUITE 300 LACEY, WA 98503 TELEPHONE: (360)318-7095 EMAIL: JBARKSDALE@GDM-AE.COM AQUATIC DESIGNER AQUATIC DESIGN GROUP JUSTIN CARON, PRINCIPAL 2226 FARADAY AVE CARLSBAD, CA 92008 TELEPHONE: (760)438-8400 EMAIL: JCARON@AQUATICDESIGNGROUP.COM END OF SECTION Project No. CAG 24-218 000107-1/1 Seals Page This page intentionally left blank October 31, 2024 HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS - Permit | Bid 00 01 10 SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 00 ‐‐ PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 00 03 – Bid Proposal Form 00 01 07 ‐ Seals Page 00 01 10 ‐ Table of Contents 00 11 13 – Advertisement for Bid 00 20 00 – Bidders Qualification Statement 00 23 00 – Supplementary Instructions 00 42 10 – Bid Submittal Checklist 00 52 00 – Agreement Between Owner and Contractor 00 72 00 – General Conditions 00 80 00 – Forms 00 80 00a – Form A Proposal Bid Bond 00 80 00b – Form B List of Subcontractors 00 80 00c – Form C Contractor Qualifications 00 80 00d – Form D Qualifications of Project Key Personnel 00 80 00e – Form E Contract Bond Template SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 ‐‐ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 – Summary of Work 01 11 30 – Hazardous Materials 01 12 00 – Delegated Design 01 14 00 – Work Restrictions 01 20 00 – Payment Procedures PROJECT No. CAG 24-218 Table of Contents October 30, 2024 HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS - Permit | Bid Set PROJECT NO. CAG 24-218 00 01 10 - 2/5 Table of Contents 01 21 00 – Prevailing Wage Rates 01 25 00 ‐ Substitution Procedures 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements 01 30 01 – Electronic Data Request and Agreement 01 32 16 – Construction Schedule 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 58 00 – Temporary Project Signage 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 74 00 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals DIVISION 02 ‐‐ EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 – Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE DIVISION 04 – MASONRY DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 40 00 – Cold Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 ‐‐ WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry DIVISION 07 ‐‐ THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 ‐‐ OPENINGS 08 11 13 ‐ Hollow Metal Doors October 30, 2024 HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS - Permit | Bid Set PROJECT NO. CAG 24-218 00 01 10 - 2/5 Table of Contents 08 32 13 – Sliding Aluminum‐Clad Glass Windows 08 54 13 – Fiberglass Windows DIVISION 09 ‐‐ FINISHES 09 29 00 ‐ Gypsum Board HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS - Permit | Bid Set October 30, 2024 09 65 13 – Resilient Base and Accessories 09 91 23 – Interior Painting DIVISION 10 ‐‐ SPECIALTIES 10 14 23 – Panel Signage DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 ‐‐ FURNISHINGS 12 32 16 – Manufactured Plastic - Laminate – Faced Cabinets 12 36 23 ‐ Countertops DIVISION 13 ‐‐ SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION 14 ‐‐ CONVEYING EQUIPMENT DIVISION 20 ‐‐ MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 21 ‐‐ FIRE SUPPRESSION DIVISION 22 ‐‐ PLUMBING 22 05 23 – General‐Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 53 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 07 19 – Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 30 00 – Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 – Plumbing Fixtures DIVISION 23 ‐‐ HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR‐CONDITIONING (HVAC) PROJECT NO. CAG 24-218 Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 3/5 HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS - Permit | Bid October 30, 2024 PROJECT NO. CAG 24-218 00 01 10 - 4/5 o Table of Contents 23 05 53 – Mechanical Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing HVAC 23 21 00 – Sleeves and Seals for HVAC Piping and Equipment DIVISION 25 ‐‐ INTEGRATED AUTOMATION DIVISION 26 ‐‐ ELECTRICAL 26 01 26- Maintenance Testing for Electrical Systems 26 05 00 -Common Work Results for Electrical Systems 26 05 19 -Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 33 -Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 27 26 -Wiring Devices 26 28 13 -Fuses 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS - Permit | Bid Set October 30, 2024 Table of Contents PROJECT NO. CAG 24-218 00 01 10 - 5/5 DIVISION 27 ‐‐ COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 28 – Pathways for Communications Systems 27 200 00 – Data and Voice Infrastructure DIVISION 28 ‐‐ ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY DIVISION 31 ‐‐ EARTHWORK DIVISION 32 ‐‐ EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS DIVISION 33 ‐‐ UTILITIES DIVISION 34 ‐‐ TRANSPORTATION DIVISION 40 ‐‐ PROCESS INTEGRATION DIVISION 46 ‐‐ WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 11 13 – ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 11 13 - 1 October 28, 2024 Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs The City of Renton invites interested and qualified contractors to submit sealed bids for the following project: TITLE: HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER UPGRADES ESTIMATED BASE BID COST: $1,953,000.00 excluding WSST. PRE-BID CONFERENCE: 1:00 PM, December 2, 2024 at 1719 SE Maple Valley, Renton, WA 98057 Attendance at the pre‐bid conference is highly encouraged but is not mandatory. SUBMITTAL TIME/DATE/LOCATION: Prior to 2:00 PM on December 16, 2024 Bids must be hand delivered to: Office of the City Clerk Lobby, Renton City Hall 1055 S. Grady Way, Renton, WA, 98057 PUBLIC BID OPENING: Approximately 3:00 PM via Zoom on December 16, 2024 via Zoom. Teams Invite Information The work, to be substantially completed from the date of commencement under this contract, but shall not exceed a Substantial Completion date of Number days following Notice To Proceed; shall include, but not be limited to: Brief Description. Project consists Brief Description of the Project as required for the City of Renton, Washington, all as shown and described on the Contract Documents prepared by Architect and Engineers, dated October 30, 2024. Bid documents will be available Date Plans and Specifications may be viewed on the City of Renton website via the following link City of Renton - Call For Bid and at Builder’s Exchange of Washington. Free-of-charge access to project bid documents (plans, specifications, addenda, and Bidders List) is provided to Prime Bidders, Subcontractors, and Vendors by going to www.bxwa.com and clicking on "Posted Projects", "Public Works", and "City of Renton". This online plan room provides Bidders with fully usable online documents with the ability to: download, view, print, order full/partial plan sets from numerous reprographic sources, and a free online digitizer/take-off tool. It is recommended that Bidders “Register” in order to receive automatic e-mail notification of future addenda and to place themselves on the “Self-Registered Bidders List". Bidders that do not register will not be automatically notified of addenda and will need to periodically check the on -line plan room for addenda issued on this project. Contact Builders Exchange of Washington at (425) 258-1303 should you require assistance with access or registration. Public Bid Opening Teams Information: Click or use this link to join the Pre-Bid Teams Conference: DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 11 13 – ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 11 13 - 2 October 28, 2024 Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs Please direct questions regarding this project to Debbie Boodell, dboodell@rentonwa.gov. Document clarification questions must be submitted in writing no later than 1:00 PM on December 9, 2024. The City’s fair practices/non-discrimination policies and the State of Washington prevailing wage rates are applicable for this public works project located in King County. Bidders are responsible to verify and use the most recent prevailing wage rates. The “Effective Date” for this project is the Bid Form due date above. The applicable prevailing wage rates may be found on the Department of Labor & Industries website located at https://lni.wa.gov/licensing‐permits/public‐works‐projects/prevailing‐wage‐rates/. A Bid Bond in the amount of 5% of the total amount of the bid must accompany each bid. The City reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive any informalities or irregularities in bids received. The City’s Fair Practices and Non-Discrimination policies and State Prevailing Wage Rates apply to this project. Bids shall be in a sealed envelope marked “HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER UPGRADES” THE CITY OF RENTON Jason Seth, City Clerk Published: Daily Journal of Commerce on November 18, 2024. Office of Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises on November 18, 2024. DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 20 00 – Bidder’s Qualification Statement PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Each Bidder submitting a proposal on work included in these specifications shall prepare and submit as part of this bid, the following information. 1. Name of Bidder: 2. Business Address: 3. Telephone: 4. How many years has said Bidder been engaged in the contracting business under the present firm name? 5. Contracts now in hand (Gross Amount): $ 6. Experience with similar projects: List at least three (3) projects accomplished within the last five (5) years in which the Bidder constructed comparable projects of similar scope of Work and value. Include the name, telephone number and email address of the Owner or Owner’s Representative responsible for the project. Describe how the project met customer satisfaction. The City of Renton will discuss performance with the named references. a. Provide FORM C – Contractor Qualifications, per Section 00 80 00 FORMS. 7. Work Plan: Provide a Gantt chart or comparable of how the work will be done within the time window allowed. Include a schedule of activities planned. 8. Assigned Key Personnel: Provide a resume for the Project Manager, Superintendent, Foreman, and other key personnel that will be assigned and committed to this project. a. Provide FORM D – Qualifications of Project Key Personnel, per Section 00 80 00 FORMS. PART 2 – NOT USED. PART 3 – NOT USED. END OF SECTION Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 20 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 23 00 – Supplementary Instructions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 23 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 1.1 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS A. The City’s fair practices and non-discrimination policies, and State Prevailing Wage Rates apply to this project. B. The Notice to Proceed shall be given after the City Council, City Attorney, and Risk Manager approves the Contract, and the Contract is signed by the Mayor. C. Upon Notification of Intent to Award Contract, the following documents must be submitted prior to commencement of the Work and not later than five (5) business days after receipt of Notification of Intent to Award Contract. 1. Standard Form of Agreement 2. Bond To the City of Renton 3. City of Renton Business License 4. Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages 5. Certificate of Liability Insurance; naming the City of Renton as additionally insured. 6. Project Schedule & Time of Completion 1.2 BIDDER SELECTION CRITERIA A. The City reserves the right to reject any and all bids and waive informalities or irregularities in bids received. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 42 10 – Bid Submittal Checklist Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 42 10 - 1 October 28, 2024 1.1 FORMS BELOW MUST BE TIMELY SUBMITTED FOR A BID TO BE CONSIDERED RESPONSIVE: 1. BID PROPOSAL FORM, includes CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH PREVAILING WAGE PAYMENT STATUTE 2. FORM A - PROPOSAL BID BOND 3. FORM B - LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS, (SUBMISSION OF PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTORS) – REQUIRED IF BID EXCEEDS $1,000,000 4. FORM C – CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS/EVALUATION 5. FORM D – QUALIFICATIONS OF PROJECT KEY PERSONNEL 6. FORM E – CONTRACT BOND FORM 1.2 Confirm Items Below Are Complete At Time of Bid Submission: 1. Have you included costs for Base Bid and 1 Alternatives VERIFY as listed on the Bid Form? 2. Do written amounts in the Bid Form agree with amounts shown in figures? 3. Have you certified receipt of addenda? 4. Has the Bid Form been properly signed? 5. Have you completed the Deposit or Contract Bond Form? 6. Has a Bid Bond or certified check been enclosed with your Bid? 7. Is the amount of the Bid Bond at least 5% of the total amount of the Base Bid amount? 8. Are Bid Proposal Form and Form A (Bid Bond) listed above included in a sealed and properly endorsed envelope? 1.3 Form B To Be Completed Within 1 hour of Bid Submission: REQUIRED IF BID EXCEEDS $1,000,000 1. Form B – List of Subcontractors, (Submission of Plumbing, and Electrical Subcontractors) 1.4 Forms To Be Completed By Apparent Low Bidder Within 2 Business Days of Notice by Owner of Apparent Low Bid: 1. Form C – Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation 2. Form D – Qualifications of Key Personnel END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 52 00 – Standard Form of Agreement Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 52 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT CITY OF RENTON BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR WHERE THE BASIS OF PAYMENT IS A STIPULATED SUM DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 52 00 – Standard Form of Agreement Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 52 00 - 2 October 28, 2024 SAMPLE AGREEMENT CONTRACT NO. CAG 24‐218 THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this [Enter Date] day of [Enter Month], [Enter Year] by and between the CITY OF RENTON, Washington, a municipal corporation of the State of Washington, hereinafter referred to as "City” and [Enter Contractor name], hereinafter referred to as "Contractor." Now, therefore the parties agree as follows: 1. Agreement. This agreement incorporates the following documents as prepared by Architect or Engineer Firm Name, dated DATE is fully set forth herein: Contract Bid Documents for the Project, including but not limited to Addenda, Proposal Form, Special Provisions, Contract Plans, and Amendments to the Standard Specifications; Contractor’s Proposal and all documents submitted therewith in response to the City’s Call for Bids Documents; and any additional documents referenced as comprising the Contract and Contract Documents of the Standard Specifications, as revised by the Amendments and Special Provisions included with the City’s Call for Bids and Contract Documents. 2. Project. Contractor shall complete all work and furnish all labor, tools, materials, and equipment for the project entitled HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER UPGRADES, CAG Number, including all changes to the Work and force account work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Payments. City shall pay Contractor at the unit and lump sum prices, and by force account as specified in the Proposal according to the Contract Documents as to time, manner, and condition of payment in a contract amount not to exceed $ , unless modified by an approved change order or addendum. The payments to Contractor include the costs for all labor, tools, materials and equipment for the Work. 4. Substantial Completion Date. Contract time shall commence upon City's Notice to Proceed to Contractor. The Work under this Agreement shall be completed within the time specified in the Contract Bid Documents. If Substantial Completion under this Agreement is not achieved within the time specified, Contractor shall pay liquidated damages and all engineering inspection and supervision costs to City as specified in the Contract Bid Documents. 5. Attorney's Fees. In the event litigation is commenced to enforce this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover its costs, including reasonable attorney's and expert witness fees. 6. Disclaimer. No liability of Contractor shall attach to City by reason of entering into this Agreement, except as expressly provided in this Agreement. 7. Counterparts. This Agreement is executed in two (2) identical counterparts, by the parties, each of which shall for all purposes be deemed an original. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City has caused these presents to be signed by its Mayor and attested by its City Clerk and the Contractor has hereunto set his hand and seal the day and year first above‐written. DIVISION 00 – CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 52 00 – Standard Form of Agreement Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 52 00 - 3 October 28, 2024 CONTRACTOR: CITY OF RENTON: President/Partner/Owner Armondo Pavone, Mayor ATTEST Secretary Jason Seth, City Clerk d/b/a [Enter Firm name] ☐ Limited Liability Company ☐ Partnership ☐ Corporation [Address Line 1] City of Renton [Address Line 2] 1055 South Grady Way [City, State and Zip] Renton, WA 98057 [Enter Phone Number] [Enter Phone Number] [Enter Fax Number or Email Address] [Enter Fax Number or Email Address] Attention: If business is a CORPORATION, the name of the corporation should be listed in full and both the President and Secretary must sign the contract. OR, if one signature is permitted by corporation by‐laws, a copy of the by‐laws shall be furnished to the City and made a part of the contract document. If the business is a PARTNERSHIP, the full name of each partner should be listed followed by d/b/a (doing business as) and firm or trade name. Any one partner may sign the contract. If the business is an limited Liability Company, an authorized managing member or manager must sign followed by his/her title. Contract Template Updated 12/29/2017‐modified May 3, 2022 CHECK ONE: FIRM INFORMATION STATE OF INCORPORATION: [Enter state of incorporation] CONTRACTOR CONTACT INFORMATION: CITY CONTACT INFORMATION: This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Section Description Page Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 1 of 54 October 28, 2024 PART 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 Definitions ............................................................................................................................ 3 1.2 Order of Precedence ............................................................................................................ 5 1.3 Execution and Intent ............................................................................................................ 5 PART 2 – INSURANCE AND BONDS 2.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance............................................................................................. 6 2.2 Coverage Limits ................................................................................................................... 7 2.3 Insurance Coverage Certificates .......................................................................................... 7 2.4 Payment and Performance Bonds ........................................................................................ 8 2.5 Alternative Surety ................................................................................................................. 8 2.6 Builders Risk ........................................................................................................................ 8 PART 3 – TIME AND SCHEDULE 3.1 Progress and Completion ..................................................................................................... 9 3.2 Construction Schedule ......................................................................................................... 9 3.3 Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work for Convenience .......................................................... 10 3.4 Owner’s Right to Stop the Work for Cause ........................................................................... 11 3.5 Delay ................................................................................................................................... 11 3.6 Notice to Owner of Labor Disputes ....................................................................................... 12 3.7 Damages for Failure to Achieve Timely Completion ............................................................. 12 PART 4 – SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 4.1 Discrepancies and Contract Document Review .................................................................... 13 4.2 Project Record ..................................................................................................................... 14 4.3 Shop Drawings..................................................................................................................... 14 4.4 Organization of Specifications .............................................................................................. 15 4.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications & other Documents .................................... 16 PART 5 – PERFORMANCE 5.1 Contractor Control and Supervision ...................................................................................... 17 5.2 Permits, Fees and Notices ................................................................................................... 18 5.3 Patents and Royalties .......................................................................................................... 18 5.4 Prevailing Wages ................................................................................................................. 18 5.5 Hours of Labor ..................................................................................................................... 19 5.6 Nondiscrimination ................................................................................................................ 20 5.7 Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................... 20 5.8 Operations, Material Handling, and Storage Areas ............................................................... 23 5.9 Prior Notice of Excavation .................................................................................................... 24 5.10 Unforeseen Physical Conditions ........................................................................................... 24 5.11 Protection of Existing Structures, Equipment, Vegetation, Utilities, & Improvements ............. 24 5.12 Layout of Work ..................................................................................................................... 24 5.13 Material and Equipment ....................................................................................................... 25 5.14 Availability and Use of Utility Services .................................................................................. 25 DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Section Description Page Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 2 of 54 October 28, 2024 5.15 Tests and Inspections .......................................................................................................... 25 5.16 Correction of Nonconforming Work ....................................................................................... 26 5.17 Clean Up .............................................................................................................................. 28 5.18 Access to Work .................................................................................................................... 28 5.19 Subcontractors and Suppliers .............................................................................................. 28 5.20 Warranty of Construction ...................................................................................................... 30 5.21 Indemnification ..................................................................................................................... 30 PART 6 – PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 6.1 Contract Sum ........................................................................................................................ 31 6.2 Schedule of Values ............................................................................................................... 31 6.3 Application for Payment ........................................................................................................ 31 6.4 Progress Payments ............................................................................................................... 32 6.5 Payments Withheld ............................................................................................................... 33 6.6 Retainage and Bond Claim Rights ......................................................................................... 33 6.7 Substantial Completion ......................................................................................................... 33 6.8 Prior Occupancy .................................................................................................................... 34 6.9 Final Completion, Acceptance, and Payment ........................................................................ 34 PART 7 – CHANGES 7.1 Change in the Work .............................................................................................................. 35 7.2 Change in the Contract Sum ................................................................................................. 36 7.3 Change in the Contract Time ................................................................................................. 43 PART 8 – CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION 8.1 Claims Procedure .................................................................................................................. 45 8.2 Arbitration ............................................................................................................................. 47 8.3 Claims Audits ........................................................................................................................ 47 PART 9 – TERMINATION OF THE WORK 9.1 Termination by Owner for Cause ........................................................................................... 49 9.2 Termination by Owner for Convenience................................................................................. 50 PART 10 – MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 10.1 Governing Law ...................................................................................................................... 51 10.2 Successors and Assigns ....................................................................................................... 51 10.3 Meaning of Words ................................................................................................................. 51 10.4 Rights and Remedies ............................................................................................................ 52 10.5 Contractor Registration.......................................................................................................... 52 10.6 Time Computations ............................................................................................................... 52 10.7 Records Retention ................................................................................................................ 52 10.8 Third-Party Agreements ........................................................................................................ 53 10.9 Antitrust Assignments ............................................................................................................ 53 10.10 Headings and Captions ......................................................................................................... 53 10.11 Diverse Business Participation .............................................................................................. 53 10.12 Apprenticeship Participation .................................................................................................. 53 DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 3 of 54 October 28, 2024 PART 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. “Application for Payment” means a written request submitted by Contractor to Owner and Architect for payment of Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and approved Schedule of Values, supported by such substantiating data as Owner or A/E may require. B. “Architect,” “Engineer,” or “A/E” means a person or entity lawfully entitled to practice architecture or engineering, representing Owner within the limits of its delegated authority. C. “Change Order” means a written instrument signed by Owner and Architect and Contractor stating their agreement upon all of the following: (1) a change in the Work; (2) the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any, and (3) the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. D. “Claim” means Contractor’s exclusive remedy for resolving disputes with Owner regarding the terms of a Change Order or a request for equitable adjustment, as more fully set forth in Part 8. E. “Contract Award Amount” is the sum of the Base Bid and any accepted Alternates. F. “Contract Documents” means the Advertisement for Bids, Instructions for Bidders, completed Bid Form, General Conditions, Modifications to the General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Public Works Contract, other Special Forms, Drawings and Specifications, and all addenda and modifications thereof. G. “Contract Sum” is the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor, for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including all taxes imposed by law and properly chargeable to the Work, except Washington State sales tax. H. “Contract Time” is the number of calendar days allotted in the Contract Documents for achieving Substantial Completion of the Work. I. “Contractor” means the person or entity who has agreed with Owner to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. J. “Day(s): Unless otherwise specified, day(s) shall mean calendar day(s).” K. “Drawings” are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location, and dimensions of the Work, and may include plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams. L. “Final Acceptance” means the written acceptance issued to Contractor by Owner after DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 4 of 54 October 28, 2024 Contractor has completed the requirements of the Contract Documents, as more fully set forth in Section 6.9 B. M. “Final Completion” means that the Work is fully and finally complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, as more fully set forth in Section 6.9 A. N. “Force Majeure” means those acts entitling Contractor to request an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time, as more fully set forth in paragraph 3.5A. O. “Notice” means a written notice which has been delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended or, if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, to the last business address known to the party giving notice. P. “Notice to Proceed” means a notice from Owner to Contractor that defines the date on which the Contract Time begins. Q. “Owner” means the City of Renton, or its authorized representative with the authority to enter into, administer, and/or terminate the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and make related determinations and findings. R. “Person” means a corporation, partnership, business association of any kind, trust, company, or individual. S. “Prior Occupancy” means Owner’s use of all or parts of the Project before Substantial Completion, as more fully set forth in Section 6.8 A. T. “Progress Schedule” means a schedule of the Work, in a form satisfactory to Owner and Architect, as further set forth in Section 3.2. U. “Project” means the total construction of which the Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by Owner or by separate contractors. V. “Project Record” means the separate set of Drawings and Specifications as further set forth in paragraph 4.2A. W. “Schedule of Values” means a written breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each principal category of Work, in such detail as requested by Owner and Architect. X. “Specifications” are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. Y. “Subcontract” means a contract entered into by Subcontractor for the purpose of obtaining supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind for or in connection with the Work. Z. “Subcontractor” means any person, other than Contractor, who agrees to furnish or furnishes any supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind in connection with the DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 5 of 54 October 28, 2024 Work. AA. “Substantial Completion” means that stage in the progress of the Work when the construction is sufficiently complete, as more fully set forth in Section 6.7. AB. “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, and includes, but is not limited to, labor, materials, supplies, equipment, services, permits, and the manufacture and fabrication of components, performed, furnished, or provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE Any conflict or inconsistency in the Contract Documents shall be resolved by giving the documents precedence in the following order: 1. Signed Agreement, including any Change Orders. 2. Supplemental Conditions. 3. Modifications to the General Conditions. 4. General Conditions. 5. Provisions in Division 1 shall take precedence over provisions of any other Division. 6. In case of conflict within the Drawings, large scale drawings shall take precedence over small scale drawings. 7. In case of conflict within the Contract Documents, the greater of quality, extent or greater value shall be provided. 8. Signed and Completed Bid Form. 9. Instructions to Bidders. 10. Advertisement for Bids. 1.3 EXECUTION AND INTENT A. Contractor Representations: Contractor makes the following representations to Owner: B. Contract Sum reasonable: The Contract Sum is reasonable compensation for the Work and the Contract Time is adequate for the performance of the Work, as represented by the Contract Documents; C. Contractor familiar with project: Contractor has carefully reviewed the Contract Documents, visited and examined the Project site, become familiar with the local conditions in which the Work is to be performed, and satisfied itself as to the nature, location, character, quality and quantity of the Work, the labor, materials, equipment, goods, supplies, work, services and other items to be furnished and all other requirements of the Contract Documents, as well as the surface and subsurface conditions and other matters that may be encountered at the Project site or affect performance of the Work or the cost or difficulty thereof; D. Contractor financially capable: Contractor is financially solvent, able to pay its debts as they mature, and possesses sufficient working capital to complete the Work and perform DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 6 of 54 October 28, 2024 Contractor’s obligations required by the Contract Documents; and E. Contractor can complete Work: Contractor is able to furnish the plant, tools, materials, supplies, equipment and labor required to complete the Work and perform the obligations required by the Contract Documents and has sufficient experience and competence to do so. PART 2 – INSURANCE AND BONDS 2.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE A. General insurance requirements: Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall obtain all the insurance required by the Contract Documents and provide evidence satisfactory to Owner that such insurance has been procured. Review of the Contractor’s insurance by Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of Contractor. Companies writing the insurance to be obtained by this part shall be licensed to do business under Chapter 48 RCW or comply with the Surplus Lines Law of the City of Renton. Contractor shall include in its bid the cost of all insurance and bond costs required to complete the base bid work and accepted alternates. Insurance carriers providing insurance in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be acceptable to Owner. B. Term of insurance coverage: Contractor shall maintain the following insurance coverage during the Work and for one year after Final Acceptance, with the exception of Professional Liability insurance, when required, which shall be maintained for a minimum of three years. Contractor shall also maintain the following insurance coverage during the performance of any corrective Work required by Section 5.16. 1. Commercial General Liability Insurance: Commercial General Liability (CGL) on an Occurrence Form. Coverage shall include, but not be limited to: a. Completed operations/products liability; b. Explosion, collapse, and underground, when applicable to the work being performed; and c. Stop loss coverage applicable to the State of Washington. 2. Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance: Required if a commercial vehicle will be used in performance of work or delivery of products by the contractor, beyond normal commutes. 3. Professional Liability: Required if professional services (e.g. architect, engineering, surveying, legal, or medical) are being provided to the Owner and if those professional services are excluded from the CGL policy. Coverage may be on a Claims Made basis, if coverage is maintained at least 3-years beyond the conclusion of work. 4. Excess Liability or Umbrella: Required if needed to reach minimum CGL or auto liability coverage limits. 5. Builders Risk – When applicable to the work being performed, is required up to the amount of the completed value of a new building or major construction project, with no coinsurance provisions. See section 2.6. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 7 of 54 October 28, 2024 6. Pollution Liability – Required if work involves a pollution risk to the environment. Coverage may be included in other required policies. C. Industrial Insurance compliance (Workers’ Compensation): Contractor shall comply with the Washington State Industrial Insurance Act and, if applicable, the Federal Longshoremen’s and Harbor Workers’ Act and the Jones Act. D. Insurance to protect for the following: All insurance coverages shall protect against claims for damages for personal and bodily injury or death, as well as claims for property damage, which may arise from operations in connection with the Work whether such operations are by Contractor or any Subcontractor. E. Owner as Additional Insured: Name the City of Renton as a Primary and Non-contributory Additional Insured on the policy (only applies to Commercial General, Auto Liability, Excess/Umbrella, when applicable). F. Insurance certificate requirements and minimum limits may be waived or modified by the Risk Manager or with Risk Manager approval. 2.2 COVERAGE LIMITS Insurance amounts: The minimum coverage limits shall be as follows for applicable required insurance: A. Limits of General Liability shall not be less than $1,000,000 per each Occurrence; including Personal Injury and Advertising Liability for Each Occurrence and $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate B. $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit for Automobile Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, Each Accident or Loss. C. $1,000,000 for Professional Liability. D. $1,000,000 for Pollution Liability. E. The Owner does not represent that the minimum required insurance coverage or limits are adequate to protect the vendor/contractor/consultant from all liabilities. 2.3 INSURANCE COVERAGE CERTIFICATES A. Certificate required: Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall furnish to Owner a completed and acceptable certificate of insurance coverage showing all required insurance coverage. B. List Project info: All insurance certificates shall name Owner as the certificate holder. The certificate holder should read: City of Renton ATTN: Name 1055 South Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 C. Cancellation provisions: The Owner shall be provided with written notice of any policy cancellation within a minimum of two business days of receipt of such notice by the policy holder. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 8 of 54 October 28, 2024 2.4 PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BONDS Conditions for bonds: Payment and performance bonds for 100% of the Contract Award Amount, plus state sales tax, shall be furnished for the Work, using the City of Renton Contract Bond Form provided. Prior to execution of a Change Order that, cumulatively with previous Change Orders, increases the Contract Award Amount by 15% or more, the Contractor shall provide either new payment and performance bonds for the revised Contract Sum, or riders to the existing payment and performance bonds increasing the amount of the bonds. The Contractor shall likewise provide additional bonds or riders when subsequent Change Orders increase the Contract Sum by 15% or more. No payment or performance bond is required if the Contract Sum is $35,000 or less and Contractor agrees that Owner may, in lieu of the bond, retain 50% of the Contract Sum for the period allowed by RCW 39.08.010. 2.5 ALTERNATIVE SURETY When alternative surety required: Contractor shall promptly furnish payment and performance bonds from an alternative surety as required to protect Owner and persons supplying labor or materials required by the Contract Documents if: A. Owner has a reasonable objection to the surety; or B. Any surety fails to furnish reports on its financial condition if required by Owner. 2.6 BUILDER’S RISK A. Contractor to buy Builders Risk Insurance: When the project involves substantial new building construction, as determined by the Owner, Contractor shall purchase and maintain Builders Risk insurance in the amount of the Contract Sum including all Change Orders for the Work on a replacement cost basis until Substantial Completion. For projects not involving New Building Construction, “Installation Floater” is an acceptable substitute for the Builder’s Risk Insurance. The insurance shall cover the interest of Owner, Contractor, and any Subcontractors, as their interests may appear. B. Losses covered: Contractor property insurance shall be placed on an “all risk” basis and insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, temporary buildings, debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements and shall cover reasonable compensation for A/E’s services and expenses required as a result of an insured loss. C. Waiver of subrogation rights: Owner and Contractor waive all subrogation rights against each other, any Subcontractors, A/E, A/E’s sub-consultants, separate contractors described in Section 5.20, if any, and any of their subcontractors, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this section or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by Owner as fiduciary. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 9 of 54 October 28, 2024 indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. PART 3 – TIME AND SCHEDULE 3.1 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Contractor to meet schedule: Contractor shall diligently prosecute the Work, with adequate forces, achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time, and achieve Final Completion within thirty (30) calendar days thereafter. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Preliminary Progress Schedule: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, Contractor shall, within 14 Days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed, submit a preliminary Progress Schedule. The Progress Schedule shall show the sequence in which Contractor proposes to perform the Work, and the dates on which Contractor plans to start and finish major portions of the Work, including dates for shop drawings and other submittals, and for acquiring materials and equipment. 1. The Schedule Duration shall be based on the Contract Time of Completion listed on the Bid Form. The Owner shall not be obligated to accept any Early Completion Schedule suggested by the Contractor. The Contract Time for Completion shall establish the Schedule Completion Date. 2. If the Contractor feels that the work can be completed in less than the Specified Contract Time, then the Surplus Time shall be considered Project Float. This Float time shall be shown on the Project Schedule. It shall be available to accommodate changes in the work and unforeseen conditions. Neither the Contractor nor the Owner have exclusive right to this Float Time. It belongs to the project. B. Form of Progress Schedule: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, the Progress Schedule shall be in the form of a bar chart, or a critical path method analysis, as specified by Owner and Architect. The preliminary Progress Schedule may be general, showing the major portions and milestones of the Work, with a more detailed Progress Schedule submitted as directed by Owner and Architect. C. Owner comments on Progress Schedule: Owner and Architect shall return comments on the preliminary Progress Schedule to Contractor within 14 Days of receipt. Review by Owner and Architect of Contractor’s schedule does not constitute an approval or acceptance of Contractor’s construction means, methods, or sequencing, or its ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time. Contractor shall revise and resubmit its schedule, as necessary. Owner may withhold a portion of progress payments until a Progress Schedule has been submitted which meets the requirements of this section. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 10 of 54 October 28, 2024 D. Monthly updates and compliance with Progress Schedule : Contractor shall utilize and comply with the Progress Schedule. On a monthly basis, or as otherwise directed by Owner, Contractor shall submit an updated Progress Schedule at its own expense to Owner indicating actual progress. If, in the opinion of Owne r, Contractor is not in conformance with the Progress Schedule for reasons other than acts of Force Majeure as identified in Section 3.5, Contractor shall take such steps as are necessary to bring the actual completion dates of its work activities into conformance with the Progress Schedule, and if directed by Owner, Contractor shall submit a corrective action plan or revise the Progress Schedule to reconcile with the actual progress of the Work. E. Contractor to notify Owner and Architect of delays: Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Architect in writing of any actual or anticipated event which is delaying or could delay achievement of any milestone or performance of any critical path activity of the Work. Contractor shall indicate the expected duration of the delay, the anticipated effect of the delay on the Progress Schedule, and the action being or to be taken to correct the problem. Provision of such notice does not relieve Contractor of its obligation to complete the Work within the Contract Time. 3.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK FOR CONVENIENCE A. Owner may suspend Work: Owner may, at its sole discretion, order Contractor, in writing, to suspend all or any part of the Work for up to 90 Days, or for such longer period as mutually agreed. B. Compliance with suspension; Owner’s options: Upon receipt of a written notice suspending the Work, Contractor shall immediately comply with its terms and take all reasonable steps to minimize the incurrence of cost of performance directly attributable to such suspension. Within a period up to 90 Days after the notice is delivered to Contractor, or within any extension of that period to which the parties shall have agreed, Owner shall either: 1. Cancel the written notice suspending the Work; or 2. Terminate the Work covered by the notice as provided in the termination provisions of Part 9. C. Resumption of Work: If a written notice suspending the Work is cancelled or the period of the notice or any extension thereof expires, Contractor shall resume Work. D. Equitable Adjustment for suspensions: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time, or Contract Sum, or both, for increases in the time or cost of performance directly attributable to such suspension, provided Contractor complies with all requirements set forth in Part 7. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 11 of 54 October 28, 2024 3.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK FOR CAUSE A. Owner may stop Work for Contractor’s failure to perform: If Contractor fails or refuses to perform its obligations in accordance with the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor, in writing, to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. B. No Equitable Adjustment for Contractor’s failure to perform: Contractor shall not be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum for any increased cost or time of performance attributable to Contractor’s failure or refusal to perform or from any reasonable remedial action taken by Owner based upon such failure. 3.5 DELAY A. Force Majeure actions not a default; Force Majeure defined: Any delay in or failure of performance by Owner or Contractor, other than the payment of money, shall not constitute a default hereunder if and to the extent the cause for such delay or failure of performance was unforeseeable and beyond the control of the party (“Force Majeure”). Acts of Force Majeure include, but are not limited to: 1. Acts of God or the public enemy; 2. Acts or omissions of any government entity; 3. Fire or other casualty for which Contractor is not responsible; 4. Quarantine or epidemic; 5. Strike or defensive lockout; 6. Unusually severe weather conditions which could not have been reasonably anticipated; and 7. Unusual delay in receipt of supplies or products which were ordered and expedited and for which no substitute reasonably acceptable to Owner was available. B. Contract Time adjustment for Force Majeure: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time for changes in the time of performance directly attributable to an act of Force Majeure, provided it makes a request for equitable adjustment according to Section 7.3. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum resulting from an act of Force Majeure. C. Contract Time or Contract Sum adjustment if Owner at fault: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Time and may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Sum, if the cost or time of Contractor’s performance is changed due to the fault or negligence of Owner, provided the Contractor makes a request according to Sections 7.2 and 7.3. D. No Contract Time or Contract Sum adjustment if Contractor at fault: Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Time or in the Contract Sum for any delay or failure of DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 12 of 54 October 28, 2024 performance to the extent such delay or failure was caused by Contractor or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible. E. Contract Time adjustment only for concurrent fault: To the extent any delay or failure of performance was concurrently caused by the Owner and Contractor, Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time for that portion of the delay or failure of performance that was concurrently caused, provided it makes a request for equitable adjustment according to Section 7.3 but shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Sum. F. Contractor to mitigate delay impacts: Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to prevent and mitigate the effects of any delay, whether occasioned by an act of Force Majeure or otherwise. 3.6 NOTICE TO OWNER OF LABOR DISPUTES A. Contractor to notify Owner of labor disputes: If Contractor has knowledge that any actual or potential labor dispute is delaying or threatens to delay timely performance in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately give notice, including all relevant information, to Owner. B. Pass through notification provisions to Subcontractors: Contractor agrees to insert a provision in its Subcontracts and to require insertion in all sub -subcontracts, that in the event timely performance of any such contract is delayed or threatened by delay by any actual or potential labor dispute, the Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor shall immediately notify the next higher tier Subcontractor or Contractor, as the case may be, of all relevant information concerning the dispute. 3.7 DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO ACHIEVE TIMELY COMPLETION A. Liquidated Damages 1. Reason for Liquidated Damages: Timely performance and completion of the Work is essential to Owner and time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. Owner will incur serious and substantial damages if Substantial Completion of the Work does not occur within the Contract Time. However, it would be difficult if not impossible to determine the exact amount of such damages. Consequently, provisions for liquidated damages are included in the Contract Documents. 2. Calculation of Liquidated Damages amount: The liquidated damage amounts set forth in the Contract Documents will be assessed not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for breach of the Contract Documents. This amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain. This amount shall be construed as the actual amount of DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 13 of 54 October 28, 2024 damages sustained by the Owner, and may be retained by the Owner and deducted from periodic payments to the Contractor. 3. Contractor responsible even if Liquidated Damages assessed: Assessment of liquidated damages shall not release Contractor from any further obligations or liabilities pursuant to the Contract Documents. B. Actual Damages Calculation of Actual Damages: Actual damages will be assessed for failure to achieve Final Completion within the time provided. Actual damages will be calculated on the basis of direct architectural, administrative, and other related costs attributable to the Project from the date when Final Completion should have been achieved, based on the date Substantial Completion is actually achieved, to the date Final Completion is actually achieved. Owner may offset these costs against any payment due Contractor. PART 4 – SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 4.1 DISCREPANCIES AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT REVIEW A. Specifications and Drawings are basis of the Work: The intent of the Specifications and Drawings is to describe a complete Project to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation, permits, and supplies, and perform the Work required in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Parts of the Contract Documents are complementary: The Contract Documents are complementary. What is required by one part of the Contract Documents shall be binding as if required by all. Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings or shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Contractor to report discrepancies in Contract Documents: Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by Owner. If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor finds a conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission in the Contract Documents, it shall promptly and before proceeding with the Work affected thereby, report such conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission to Owner and Architect in writing. D. Contractor knowledge of discrepancy in documents – responsibility: Contractor shall do no Work without applicable Drawings, Specifications, or written modifications, or Shop Drawings where required, unless instructed to do so in writing by Owner or Architect. If Contractor performs any construction activity, and it knows or reasonably should have known that any of the Contract Documents contain a conflict, error, inconsistency, or DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 14 of 54 October 28, 2024 omission, Contractor shall be responsible for the performance and shall bear the cost for its correction. E. Contractor to perform Work implied by Contract Documents: Contractor shall provide any work or materials the provision of which is clearly implied and is within the scope of the Contract Documents even if the Contract Documents do not mention them specifically. F. Interpretation questions referred to Architect: Questions regarding interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be referred to the Architect. 4.2 PROJECT RECORD A. Contractor to maintain Project Record Drawings and Specifications: Contractor shall legibly mark in ink on a separate set of the Drawings and Specifications all actual construction, including horizontal and vertical locations of sub-structural materials referenced to permanent visible and accessible surface improvements, field changes of dimensions and details, actual suppliers, manufacturers and trade names, models of installed equipment, and Change Order Proposals (COP). This separate set of Drawings and Specifications shall be the “Project Record.” B. Update Project Record weekly and keep on site: The Project Record shall be maintained on the project site throughout the construction and shall be clearly labeled “PROJECT RECORD.” The Project Record shall be updated at least weekly noting all changes and shall be available to Owner and Architect at all times. C. Final Project Record to Owner before Final Acceptance: Contractor shall submit the completed and finalized Project Record to Owner prior to Final Acceptance 4.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Definition of Shop Drawings: “Shop Drawings” means documents and other information required to be submitted to Architect by Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents, showing in detail: the proposed fabrication and assembly of structural elements; and the installation (i.e. form, fit, and attachment details) of materials and equipment. Shop Drawings include, but are not limited to, drawings, diagrams, layouts, schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations, schedules, performance and test data, samples, and similar materials furnished by Contractor to explain in detail specific portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents. For materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, Contractor submittal shall include the name of the manufa cturer, the model number, and other information concerning the performance, capacity, nature, and rating of the item. When directed, Contractor shall submit all samples at its own expense. Owner and Architect may duplicate, use, and disclose Shop Drawings provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Approval of Shop Drawings by Contractor and A/E: Contractor shall coordinate all Shop DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 15 of 54 October 28, 2024 Drawings, and review them for accuracy, completeness, and compliance with the Contract Documents and shall indicate its approval thereon as evidence of such coordination and review. Where required by law, Shop Drawings shall be stamped by an appropriate professional licensed by the City of Renton. Shop Drawings submitted to A/E without evidence of Contractor’s approval shall be returned for resubmission. Contractor shall review, approve, and submit Shop Drawings with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of Owner or Architect or separate contractors. Contractor’s submittal schedule shall allow a reasonable time for A/E review. A/E will review, approve, or take other appropriate action on the Shop Drawings. Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings until the respective submittal has been reviewed and the A/E has approved or taken other appropriate action. A/E shall respond to Shop Drawing submittals with reasonable promptness. Any Work by Contractor shall be in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings. Submittals made by Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action. C. Contractor not relieved of responsibility when Shop Drawings approved: Approval, or other appropriate action with regard to Shop Drawings, A/E shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for any errors or omissions in such Shop Drawings, nor from responsibility for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Unless specified in the Contract Documents, review by A/E shall not constitute an approval of the safety precautions employed by Contractor during construction or constitute an approval of Contractor’s means or methods of construction. If Contractor fails to obtain approval before installation and the item or work is subsequently rejected, Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of correction. D. Variations between Shop Drawings and Contract Documents: If Shop Drawings show variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall describe such variations in writing, separate from the Shop Drawings, at the time it submits the Shop Drawings containing such variations. If A/E approves any such variation, an appropriate Change Order will be issued. If the variation is minor and does not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, a Change Order need not be issued; however, the modification shall be recorded upon the Project Record. E. Contractor to submit electronic files of Shop Drawings: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, Contractor shall submit to Owner and Architect for approval electronic files of all Shop Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, a reviewed electronic file shall be returned to Contractor. 4.4 ORGANIZATION OF SPECIFICATIONS Specification organization by trade: Specifications are prepared in sections which conform generally to trade practices. These sections are for Owner, Architect, and Contractor convenience and shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among the Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of the Work to be performed by any trade. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 16 of 54 October 28, 2024 4.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS A. The City/Owner not Contractor, owns Copyright of Drawings and Specifications : The Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by A/E are instruments of A/E’s contracted service to the City through which the Work to be executed by Contractor is described. Neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by A/E, and A/E shall be deemed the author of them and will, along with any rights of Owner, retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of these documents, except Contractor’s set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to A/E, on request, upon completion of the Work. B. Drawings and Specifications to be used only for this Project: The Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by the A/E, and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of Owner and A/E. Contractor and Subcontractors are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by A/E appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work. C. Shop Drawing license granted to Owner: Contractor and all Subcontractors grant a non- exclusive license to Owner, without additional cost or royalty, to use for its own purposes (including reproduction) all Shop Drawings, together with the information and diagrams contained therein, prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor. In providing Shop Drawings, Contractor and all Subcontractors warrant that they have authority to grant to Owner a license to use the Shop Drawings, and that such license is not in violation of any copyright or other intellectual property right. Contractor agrees to defend and indemnify Owner pursuant to the indemnity provisions in Section 5.3 and 5.22 from any violations of copyright or other intellectual property rights arising out of Owner’s use of the Shop Drawings hereunder, or to secure for Owner, at Contractor’s own cost, licenses in conformity with this section. D. Shop Drawings to be used only for this Project: The Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, or its or their equipment or material suppliers, and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor of any tier, or material or equipment supplier, on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of Owner. The Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Shop Drawings and other submittals appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 17 of 54 October 28, 2024 PART 5 – PERFORMANCE 5.1 CONTRACTOR CONTROL AND SUPERVISION A. Contractor responsible for Means and Methods of construction: Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using its best skill and attention, and shall perform the Work in a skillful manner. Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. Contractor shall disclose its means and methods of construction when requested by Owner. B. Competent Superintendent required: Performance of the Work shall be directly supervised by a competent superintendent who has authority to act for Contractor. The superintendent must be satisfactory to the Owner and shall not be changed without the prior written consent of Owner. Owner may require Contractor to remove the superintendent from the Work or Project site, if Owner reasonably deems the superintendent incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable, provided Owner has first notified Contractor in writing and allowed a reasonable period for transition. C. Contractor responsible for acts and omissions of self and agents: Contractor shall be responsible to Owner for acts and omissions of Contractor, Subcontractors, and their employees and agents. D. Contractor to employ competent and disciplined workforce: Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among all of the Contractor’s employees and other persons performing the Work. Contractor shall not permit employment of persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. Contractor’s employees shall at all times conduct business in a manner which assures fair, equal, and nondiscriminatory treatment of all persons. Owner may, by written notice, request Contractor to remove from the Work or Project site any employee Owner reasonably deems incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable. E. Contractor to keep project documents on site: Contractor shall keep on the Project site a copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, reviewed Shop Drawings, and permits and permit drawings. F. Contractor to comply with ethical standards: Contractor shall ensure that its owner(s) and employees, and those of its Subcontractors, comply with the Ethics in Public Service Act RCW 42.52, which, among other things, prohibits state employees from having an economic interest in any public works contract that was made by, or supervised by, that employee. Contractor shall remove, at its sole cost and expense, any of its, or its Subcontractors’ employees, if they are in violation of this act. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 18 of 54 October 28, 2024 5.2 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES A. Permits: Owner will obtain and pay for the Building Permit. All other permits and fees required to execute the work shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. Prior to Final Acceptance, the approved, signed permits shall be delivered to Owner. B. Contractor to comply with all applicable laws: Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by all federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. 5.3 PATENTS AND ROYALTIES Payment, indemnification, and notice: Contractor is responsible for, and shall pay, all royalties and license fees. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold Owner harmless from any costs, expenses, and liabilities arising out of the infringement by Contractor of any patent, copyright, or other intellectual property right used in the Work; however, provided that Contractor gives prompt notice, Contractor shall not be responsible for such defense or indemnity when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. If Contractor has reason to believe that use of the required design, process, or product constitutes an infringement of a patent or copyright, it shall promptly notify Owner of such potential infringement 5.4 PREVAILING WAGES A. Contractor to pay Prevailing Wages: Contractor shall pay the prevailing rate of wages to all workers, laborers, or mechanics employed in the performance of any part of the Work in accordance with RCW 39.12 and the rules and regulations of the Washington Department of Labor. The schedule of prevailing wage rates for the locality or localities of the Work, is determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries. The State of Washington prevailing wage rates applicable for this public works project, which is in King County, may be found at the following website address of the Department of Labor and Industries: http://www.lni.wa.gov/TradesLicensing/PrevWage/WageRates, based upon the bid submittal deadline for this project. B. Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages: Before payment is made by the Owner to the Contractor for any work performed by the Contractor and subcontractors whose work is included in the application for payment, the Contractor shall submit, or shall have previously submitted to the Owner for the Project, a Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages, approved by the Department of Labor and Industries, certifying the rate of hourly wage paid and to be paid each classification of laborers, workers, or mechanics employed upon the Work by Contractor and Subcontractors. Such rates of hourly wage shall not be less than the prevailing wage rate. C. Affidavit of Wages Paid: Prior to release of retainage, the Contractor shall submit to the DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 19 of 54 October 28, 2024 Owner an Affidavit of Wages Paid, approved by the Department of Labor and Industries, for the Contractor and every subcontractor, of any tier, that performed work on the Project. D. Disputes: Disputes regarding prevailing wage rates shall be referred for arbitration to the Director of the Department of Labor and Industries. The arbitration decision shall be final and conclusive and binding on all parties involved in the dispute as provided for by RCW 39.12.060. E. Statement with pay application; Post Statements of Intent at job site: Each Application for Payment submitted by Contractor shall state that prevailing wages have been paid in accordance with the pre-filed statement(s) of intent, as approved. Copies of the approved intent statement(s) shall be posted on the job site with th e address and telephone number of the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries where a complaint or inquiry concerning prevailing wages may be made. F. Contractor to pay for Statements of Intent and Affidavits: In compliance with chapter 296- 127 WAC, Contractor shall pay to the Department of Labor and Industries the currently established fee(s) for each statement of intent and/or affidavit of wages paid submitted to the Department of Labor and Industries for certification. G. Certified Payrolls: Consistent with WAC 296-127-320, the Contractor and any subcontractor shall submit a certified copy of payroll records with each monthly pay application. 5.5 HOURS OF LABOR A. Overtime: Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of RCW 49.28 and they are incorporated herein by reference. Pursuant to that statute, no laborer, worker, or mechanic employed by Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any other person performing or contracting to do the whole or any part of the Work, shall be permitted or required to work more than eight hours in any one calendar day, provided, that in cases of extraordinary emergency, such as danger to life or property, the hours of work may be extended, but in such cases the rate of pay for time employed in excess of eight hours of each calendar day shall be not less than one and one-half times the rate allowed for this same amount of time during eight hours of service. B. 4-10 Agreements: Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, RCW 49.28 permits a contractor or subcontractor in any public works contract subject to those provisions, to enter into an agreement with its employees in which the employees work up to ten hours in a calendar day. No such agreement may provide that the employees work ten -hour days for more than four calendar days a week. Any such agreement is subject to approval by the employees. The overtime provisions of RCW 49.28 shall not apply to the hours, up to forty hours per week, worked pursuant to any such agreement. 5.6 NONDISCRIMINATION DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 20 of 54 October 28, 2024 A. Discrimination prohibited by applicable laws: The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall comply with all applicable federal and state non-discrimination laws, regulations, and policies and the City of Renton Summary of Fair Practices Policy Adopted by Resolution 4085. No person shall, on the grounds of age, race, creed, color, sex, sexual orientation, religion, national origin, marital status, honorably discharged veteran or military status, or disability (physical, mental, or sensory) be denied the benefits of, or otherwise be subjected to discrimination under any project, program, or activity, funded, in whole or in part, under this Agreement. B. During performance of the Work: 1. Protected Classes: Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability, Vietnam era veteran status, or disabled veteran status, nor commit any other unfair practices as defined in RCW 49.60. 2. Advertisements to state nondiscrimination: Contractor shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or for it, state that all qualified applicants will be considered for employment, without regard to race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability. 3. Contractor to notify unions and others of nondiscrimination: Contractor shall send to each labor union, employment agency, or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the labor union, employment agency, or workers’ representative of Contractor’s obligations according to the Contract Documents and RCW 49.60. 4. Owner and State access to Contractor records: Contractor shall permit access to its books, records, and accounts, and to its premises by Owner, and by the Washington State Human Rights Commission, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with this section of the Contract Documents. 5. Pass through provisions to Subcontractors: Contractor shall include the provisions of this section in every Subcontract. 5.7 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A. In performing this contract, the Contractor shall provide for protecting the lives and health of employees and other persons; preventing damage to property, materials, supplies, and equipment; and avoid work interruptions. For these purposes, the Contractor shall: 1. Follow Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA) regional directives and provide a site-specific safety program that will require an accident prevention and hazard analysis plan for the contractor and each subcontractor on the work site. The Contractor shall submit a site-specific safety plan to the Owner’s representative prior to the initial scheduled construction meeting. 2. Provide adequate safety devices and measures including, but not limited to, the DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 21 of 54 October 28, 2024 appropriate safety literature, notice, training, permits, placement and use of barricades, signs, signal lights, ladders, scaffolding, staging, runways, hoist, construction elevators, shoring, temporary lighting, grounded outlets, wiring, hazardous materials, vehicles, construction processes, and equipment required by all applicable state, federal, and local laws and regulations. 3. Comply with the State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA), Clean Air Act, Shoreline Management Act, and other applicable federal, state, and local statutes and regulations dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of public natural resources. 4. Post all permits, notices, and/or approvals in a conspicuous location at the construction site. B. Provide any additional measures that the Owner determines to be reasonable and necessary for ensuring a safe environment in areas open to the public. Nothing in this part shall be construed as imposing a duty upon the Owner or A/E to prescribe safety conditions relating to employees, public, or agents of the Contractors. C. Contractor safety responsibilities: In carrying out its responsibilities according to the Contract Documents, Contractor shall protect the lives and health of employees performing the Work and other persons who may be affected by the Work; prevent damage to materials, supplies, and equipment whether on site or stored off -site; and prevent damage to other property at the site or adjacent thereto. Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of any public body having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury, or loss; shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection; and shall notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them. D. Contractor to maintain safety records: Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of exposure data on all incidents relating to the Work resulting in death, traumatic injury, occupational disease, or damage to property, materials, supplies, or equipment. Contractor shall immediately report any such incident to Owner. Owner shall, at all times, have a right of access to all records of exposure. E. Contractor to provide HazMat training: Contractor shall provide all persons working on the Project site with information and training on hazardous chemicals in their work at the time of their initial assignment, and whenever a new hazard is introduced into their work area. 1. Information. At a minimum, Contractor shall inform persons working on the Project site of: a. WAC: The requirements of chapter 296-62 WAC, General Occupational Health Standards; b. Presence of hazardous chemicals: Any operations in their work area where hazardous chemicals are present; and c. Hazard communications program: The location and availability of written hazard communication programs, including the required list(s) of hazardous chemicals DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 22 of 54 October 28, 2024 and material safety data sheets required by chapter 296-62 WAC. 2. Training. At a minimum, Contractor shall provide training for persons working on the Project site which includes: a. Detecting hazardous chemicals: Methods and observations that may be used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area (such as monitoring conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, visual appearance or odor of hazardous chemicals when being released, etc.); b. Hazards of chemicals: The physical and health hazards of the chemicals in the work area; c. Protection from hazards: The measures such persons can take to protect themselves from these hazards, including specific procedures Contractor, or its Subcontractors, or others have implemented to protect those on the Project site from exposure to hazardous chemicals, such as appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, and personal protective equipment to be used; and d. Hazard communications program: The details of the hazard communications program developed by Contractor, or its Subcontractors, including an explanation of the labeling system and the material safety data sheet, and how employees can obtain and use the appropriate hazard information. F. Hazardous, toxic or harmful substances: Contractor’s responsibility for hazardous, toxic, or harmful substances shall include the following duties: 1. Illegal use of dangerous substances: Contractor shall not keep, use, dispose, transport, generate, or sell on or about the Project site, any substances now or hereafter designated as, or which are subject to regulation as, hazardous, toxic, dangerous, or harmful by any federal, state or local law, regulation, statute or ordinance (hereinafter collectively referred to as “hazardous substances”), in violation of any such law, regulation, statute, or ordinance, but in no case shall any such hazardous substance be stored more than 90 Days on the Project site. 2. Contractor notifications of spills, failures, inspections, and fines: Contractor shall promptly notify Owner of all spills or releases of any hazardous substances which are otherwise required to be reported to any regulatory agency and pay the cost of cleanup. Contractor shall promptly notify Owner of all failures to comply with any federal, state, or local law, regulation, or ordinance; all inspections of the Project site by any regulatory entity concerning the same; all regulatory orders or fines; and all responses or interim cleanup actions taken by or proposed to be taken by any government entity or private party on the Project site. G. Public safety and traffic: All Work shall be performed with due regard for the safety of the public. Contractor shall perform the Work so as to cause a minimum of interruption of vehicular traffic or inconvenience to pedestrians. All arrangements to care for such traffic shall be Contractor’s responsibilities. All expenses involved in the maintenance of traffic by way of detours shall be borne by Contractor. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 23 of 54 October 28, 2024 H. Contractor to act in an emergency: In an emergency affecting the safety of life or the Work or of adjoining property, Contractor is permitted to act, at its discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury, and Contractor shall so act if so authorized or instructed. I. No duty of safety by Owner or A/E: Nothing provided in this section shall be construed as imposing any duty upon Owner or A/E with regard to, or as constituting any express or implied assumption of control or responsibility over, Project site safety, or over any other safety conditions relating to employees or agents of Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, or the public. 5.8 OPERATIONS, MATERIAL HANDLING, AND STORAGE AREAS A. Limited storage areas: Contractor shall confine all operations, including storage of materials, to Owner-approved areas. B. Temporary buildings and utilities at Contractor expense: Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, offices) and utilities may be provided by Contractor only with the consent of Owner and without expense to Owner. The temporary buildings and utilities shall be removed by Contractor at its expense upon completion of the Work. C. Roads and vehicle loads: Contractor shall use only established roadways or temporary roadways authorized by Owner. When materials are transported in prosecuting the Work, vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the loading capacity recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by federal, state, or local law or regulation. D. Ownership and reporting by Contractor of demolished materials: Ownership and control of all materials or facility components to be demolished or removed from the Project site by Contractor shall immediately vest in Contractor upon severance of the component from the facility or severance of the material from the Project site. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with all laws governing the storage and ultimate disposal. Contractor shall provide Owner with a copy of all manifests and receipts evidencing proper disposal when required by Owner or applicable law. E. Contractor responsible for care of materials and equipment on-site: Contractor shall be responsible for the proper care and protection of its materials and equipment delivered to the Project site. Materials and equipment may be stored on the premises subject to approval of the Owner. When Contractor uses any portion of the Project site as a shop, Contractor shall be responsible for any repairs, patching, or cleaning arising from such use. F. Contractor responsible for loss of materials and equipment: Contractor shall protect and be responsible for any damage or loss to the Work, or to the materials or equipment until the date of Substantial Completion and shall repair or replace without cost to Owner any damage or loss that may occur, except damages or loss caused by the acts or omissions of Owner. Contractor shall also protect and be responsible for any damage or loss to the DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 24 of 54 October 28, 2024 Work, or to the materials or equipment, after the date of Substantial Completion, and shall repair or replace without cost to Owner any such damage or loss that might occur, to the extent such damages or loss are caused by the acts or omissions of Contractor, or any Subcontractor. 5.9 PRIOR NOTICE OF EXCAVATION A. Excavation defined; Use of locator services: “excavation” means an operation in which earth, rock, or other material on or below the ground is moved or otherwise displaced by any means, except the tilling of soil less than 12 inches in depth for agricultural purposes, or road ditch maintenance that does not change the original road grad or ditch flow line. Before commencing any excavation, Contractor shall provide notice of the scheduled commencement of excavation to the owners of underground facilities or utilities, through locator services. 5.10 UNFORESEEN PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. Notice requirement for concealed or unknown conditions: If Contractor encounters conditions at the site which are subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents, or unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then Contractor shall give written notice to Owner promptly and in no event later than 7 Days after the first observance of the conditions. Conditions shall not be disturbed prior to such notice. B. Adjustment in Contract Time and Contract Sum: If such conditions differ materially and cause a change in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, the Contractor may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum, or both, provided it makes a request therefore as provided in Part 7. 5.11 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, VEGETATION, UTILITIES AND IMPROVEMENTS A. Contractor to protect and repair property: Contractor shall protect from damage all existing structures, equipment, improvements, utilities, and vegetation: at or near the Project site. Contractor shall repair any damage resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents or failure to exercise reasonable care in performing the Work. If Contractor fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, Owner may have the necessary work performed and charge the cost to Contractor. 5.12 LAYOUT OF WORK A. Advanced planning of the Work: Contractor shall plan and lay out the Work in advance of operations so as to coordinate all work without delay or revision. B. Layout responsibilities: Contractor shall lay out the Work from Owner-established baselines DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 25 of 54 October 28, 2024 and benchmarks indicated on the Drawings and shall be responsible for all field measurements about the layout. Contractor shall furnish, at its own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms, equipment, tools, materials, and labor required to lay out any part of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for executing the Work to the lines and grades that may be established. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining or restoring all stakes and other marks established. 5.13 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Contractor to provide new and equivalent equipment and materials: All equipment, material, and articles incorporated into the Work shall be new and of the most suitable grade for the purpose intended, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. References in the Specifications to equipment, material, articles, or patented processes by trade name, make, or catalog number, shall be regarded as establishing a standard quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. Contractor may, at its option, use any equipment, material, article, or process that, in the judgment of A/E, is equal to that named in the specifications, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. B. Contractor responsible for fitting parts together: Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching that may be required to make its several parts fit together properly or receive or be received by work of others set forth in, or reasonably implied by, the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not endanger any work by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the Work and shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor unless approved in advance by Owner. C. Owner may reject defective Work: Should any of the Work be found defective, or in any way not in accordance with the Contract Documents, this work, in whatever stage of completion, may be rejected by Owner. 5.14 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES A. Owner to provide and charge for utilities: Owner shall make all reasonable utilities available to Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the Contract Documents, at no cost to the Contractor. 5.15 TESTS AND INSPECTION A. Contractor to provide for all testing and inspection of Work: Contractor shall maintain an adequate testing and inspection program and perform such tests and inspections as are necessary or required to ensure that the Work conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible for inspection and quality surveillance of all its Work and all Work performed by any Subcontractor. Unless otherwise provided, Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 26 of 54 October 28, 2024 approvals. Contractor shall give Owner timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made. Contractor shall maintain complete inspection records and make them available to Owner. B. Owner may conduct tests and inspections: Owner may, at any reasonable time, conduct such inspections and tests as it deems necessary to ensure that the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner shall promptly notify Contractor if an inspection or test reveals that the Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless the subject items are expressly accepted by Owner, such Owner inspection and tests are for the sole benefit of Owner and do not: 1. Constitute or imply acceptance; 2. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for risk of loss or damage to the Work, materials, or equipment; 4. Relieve Contractor of its responsibility to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or 5. Impair Owner’s right to reject defective or nonconforming items, or to avail itself of any other remedy to which it may be entitled. C. Inspections or inspectors do not modify Contract Documents: Neither observations by an inspector retained by Owner, the presence or absence of such inspector on the site, nor inspections, tests, or approvals by others, shall relieve Contractor from any requirement of the Contract Documents, nor is any such inspector authorized to change any term or condition of the Contract Documents. D. Contractor responsibilities on inspections: Contractor shall promptly furnish, without additional charge, all facilities, labor, material and equipment reasonably needed for performing such safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be required by Owner. Owner may charge Contractor any additional cost of inspection or testing when Work is not ready at the time specified by Contractor for inspection or testing, or when prior rejection makes re-inspection or retest necessary. Owner shall perform its inspections and tests in a manner that will cause no undue delay in the Work. 5.16 CORRECTION OF NONCONFORMING WORK A. Work covered by Contractor without inspection: If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the requirements in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by Architect or Owner, be uncovered for Owner’s and Architect’s observation and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense and without change in the Contract Time. B. Payment provisions for uncovering covered Work: If, at any time prior to Final Completion, Owner or Architect desire to examine the Work, or any portion of it, which has been covered, Owner or Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum for the costs of uncovering and DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 27 of 54 October 28, 2024 replacement, and, if completion of the Work is thereby delayed, an adjustment in the Contract Time, provided it makes such a request as provided in Part 7. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay the costs of examination and reconstruction. C. Contractor to correct and pay for non-conforming Work: Contractor shall promptly correct Work found by Owner or Architect not to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed. Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such nonconforming Work, including additional testing and inspections. D. Contractor’s compliance with warranty provisions: If, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or within one year after the date for commencement of any system warranties established under Section 6.8, or within the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from Owner or Architect to do so. Owner or Architect shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. This period of one year shall be extended, with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion, by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. Contractor’s duty to correct with respect to Work repaired or replaced shall run for one year from the date of repair or replacement. Obligations under this paragraph shall survive Final Acceptance. E. Contractor to remove non-conforming Work: Contractor shall remove from the Project site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by Contractor nor accepted by Owner or Architect. F. Owner may charge Contractor for non-conforming Work: If Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time after written notice to do so, Owner may replace, correct, or remove the nonconforming Work and charge the cost thereof to the Contractor. G. Contractor to pay for damaged Work during correction: Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged Work, whether completed or partially completed, caused by Contractor’s correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. H. No Period of limitation on other requirements: Nothing contained in this section shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which Contractor might have according to the Contract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year as described in Section 5.16D relates only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct the Work and has no relationship to the time within which the Contractor’s obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, including the time within which such proceedings may be commenced. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 28 of 54 October 28, 2024 I. Owner may accept non-conforming Work and charge Contractor: If Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum may be reduced as appropriate and equitable. 5.17 CLEAN UP Contractor to keep site clean and leave it clean: Contractor shall at all times keep the Project site, including hauling routes, infrastructures, utilities, and storage areas, free from accumulations of waste materials. Before completing the Work, Contractor shall remove from the premises its rubbish, tools, scaffolding, equipment, and materials. Upon completing the Work, Contractor shall leave the Project site in a clean, neat, and orderly condition satisfactory to Owner. If Contractor fails to clean up as provided herein, and after reasonable notice from Owner, Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to Contra ctor. 5.18 ACCESS TO WORK Owner and A/E access to Work site: Contractor shall provide Owner and A/E access to the Work in progress wherever located. 5.19 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS A. Subcontractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall include the language of this paragraph in each of its first-tier subcontracts and shall require each of its subcontractors to include the same language of this section in each of their subcontracts, adjusting only as necessary the terms used for the contracting parties. Upon request of the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly provide documentation to the Owner demonstrating that the subcontractor meets the subcontractor responsibility criteria below. The requirements of this paragraph apply to all subcontractors regardless of tier. At the time of subcontract execution, the Contractor shall verify that each of its first-tier subcontractors meets the following bidder responsibility criteria: 1. Have a current certificate of registration as a contractor in compliance with chapter 18.27 RCW, which must have been in effect at the time of subcontract bid submittal; 2. Have a current City of Renton business license; 3. Have a current Washington Unified Business Identifier (UBI) number; 4. If applicable, have: a. Industrial Insurance (workers’ compensation) coverage for the subcontractor’s employees working in Washington, as required in Title 51 RCW; b. A Washington Employment Security Department number, as required in Title 50 RCW; c. A Washington Department of Revenue state excise tax registration number, as required in Title 82 RCW; d. An electrical contractor license, if required by Chapter 19.28 RCW; 5. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065 (3). 6. Not be disqualified from bidding or working on any project receiving federal public DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 29 of 54 October 28, 2024 works contract under SAM.gov. 7. On a project subject to the apprenticeship utilization requirements in RCW 39.04.320, not have been found out of compliance by the Washington state apprenticeship and training council for working apprentices out of ratio, without appropriate supervision, or outside their approved work processes as outlined in their standards of apprenticeship under chapter 49.04 RCW for the one-year period immediately preceding the date of the Owner’s first advertisement of the project. Within the three-year period immediately preceding the date of the bid solicitation, not have been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the department of labor and industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction to have willfully violated, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any provision of chapter 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW. B. Provide names of Subcontractors and use qualified firms: Before submitting the first Application for Payment, Contractor shall furnish in writing to Owner the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of all Subcontractors, as well as suppliers providing materials in excess of $2,500. Contractor shall utilize Subcontractors and suppliers which are experienced and qualified, and meet the requirements of the Contract Docum ents, if any. Contractor shall not utilize any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Owner has a reasonable objection and shall obtain Owner’s written consent before making any substitutions or additions. C. Subcontracts in writing and pass-through provision: All Subcontracts must be in writing. By appropriate written agreement, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, so far as applicable to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which Contractor assumes toward Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents. Each Subcontract shall preserve and protect the rights of Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights. Where appropriate, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. However, nothing in this paragraph shall be construed to alter the contractual relations between Contractor and its Subcontractors with respect to insurance or bonds. D. Coordination of Subcontractors; Contractor responsible for Work: Contractor shall schedule, supervise, and coordinate the operations of all Subcontractors. No Subcontracting of any of the Work shall relieve Contractor from its responsibility for the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or any other obligations of the Contract Documents. E. Automatic assignment of subcontracts: Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is hereby assigned by Contractor to Owner provided that: 1. Effective only after termination and Owner approval: The assignment is effective only after termination by Owner for cause pursuant to Section 9.1 and only for those Subcontracts which Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing; and DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 30 of 54 October 28, 2024 2. Owner assumes Contractor’s responsibilities: After the assignment is effective, Owner will assume all future duties and obligations toward the Subcontractor which Contractor assumed in the Subcontract. 3. Impact of bond: The assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under any bond provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. 5.20 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION A. Contractor warranty of Work: In addition to any special warranties provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, Contractor warrants that all Work conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents and is free of any defect in equipment, material, or design furnished, or workmanship performed by Contractor. B. Contractor responsibilities: With respect to all warranties, express or implied, for Work performed or materials furnished according to the Contract Documents, Contractor shall: 1. Obtain warranties: Obtain all warranties that would be given in normal commercial practice; 2. Warranties for benefit of Owner: Require all warranties to be executed, in writing, for the benefit of Owner; 3. Enforcement of warranties: Enforce all warranties for the benefit of Owner, if directed by Owner; and 4. Contractor responsibility for subcontractor warranties: Be responsible to enforce any subcontractor’s, manufacturer’s, or supplier’s warranties should they extend beyond the period specified in the Contract Documents. C. Warranties beyond Final Acceptance: The obligations under this section shall survive Final Acceptance. 5.20 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless Renton, its elected officials, officers, agents, employees and volunteers, from and against any and all claims, losses or liability, or any portion of the same, including but not limited to reasonable attorneys’ fees, legal expenses and litigation costs, arising from injury or death to persons, including injuries, sickness, disease or death of Contractor’s own employees, agents and volunteers, or damage to property caused by Contractor’s negligent act or omission, except for those acts caused by or resulting from a negligent act or omission by Renton and its officers, agents, employees and volunteers. Including Patent infringement: The use of any design, process, or equipment which constitutes an infringement of any United States patent presently issued, or violates any other proprietary interest, including copyright, trademark, and trade secret. Should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this agreement is subject to RCW 4.24.115, (Validity of agreement to indemnify against liability for negligence relative to construction, alteration, improvement, etc., of structure or improvement attached to real estate) then, in the event of liability for damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or damages to DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 31 of 54 October 28, 2024 property caused by or resulting from the concurrent negligence of the contractor and Renton, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers, Contractor’s liability shall be only to the extent of Contractor’s negligence. It is further specifically and expressly understood that the indemnification provided in this Agreement constitute Contractor’s waiver of immunity under the Industrial Insurance Act, RCW Title 51, solely for the purposes of this indemnification. The Parties have mutually negotiated and agreed to this waiver. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement. PART 6 – PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 6.1 CONTRACT SUM Owner shall pay Contract Sum: Owner shall pay Contractor the Contract Sum plus state sales tax for performance of the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Contractor to submit Schedule of Values: Before submitting its first Application for Payment, Contractor shall submit to Owner and Architect for approval a breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each principal category of work, in such detail as requested by Owner or Architect (“Schedule of Values”). The approved Schedule of Values shall include appropriate amounts for demobilization, record drawings, O&M manuals, and any other requirements for Project closeout, and shall be used by Owner and Architect as the basis for progress payments. Payment for Work shall be made only for and in accordance with those items included in the Schedule of Values. 6.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Monthly Application for Payment with substantiation: At monthly intervals, unless determined otherwise by Owner, Contractor shall submit to Owner and Architect an itemized Application for Payment for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the approved Schedule of Values. Each application shall be supported by such substantiating data as Owner or Architect may require. B. Contractor certifies Subcontractors paid: By submitting an Application for Payment, Contractor is certifying that all Subcontractors have been paid, less earned retainage in accordance with RCW 60.28.011, as their interests appeared in the last preceding certificate of payment. By submitting an Application for Payment, Contractor is recertifying that the representations set forth in Section 1.3, are true and correct, to the best of Contractor’s knowledge, as of the date of the Application for Payment. C. Reconciliation of Work with Progress Schedule: At the time, it submits an Application for Payment, Contractor shall analyze and reconcile, to the satisfaction of Owner and Architect, the actual progress of the Work with the Progress Schedule. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 32 of 54 October 28, 2024 D. Payment for material delivered to site or stored off-site: If authorized by Owner, the Application for Payment may include request for payment for material delivered to the Project site and suitably stored, or for completed preparatory work. Payment may similarly be requested for material stored off the Project site, provided Contractor complies with or furnishes satisfactory evidence of the following: 1. Suitable facility or location: The material will be placed in a facility or location that is structurally sound, dry, lighted and suitable for the materials to be stored; 2. Facility or location within 10 miles of Project: The facility or location is located within a 10-mile radius of the Project. Other locations may be utilized, if approved in writing, by Owner; 3. Facility or location exclusive to Project’s materials: Only materials for the Project are stored within the facility or location (or a secure portion of a facility or location set aside for the Project); 4. Insurance provided on materials in facility or location: Contractor furnishes Owner a certificate of insurance extending Contractor’s insurance coverage for damage, fire, and theft to cover the full value of all materials stored, or in transit; 5. Facility or location locked and secure: The facility or location (or secure portion thereof) is continuously under lock and key, and only Contractor’s authorized personnel shall have access; 6. Owner right of access to facility or location: Owner shall have the right of access in company of Contractor; 7. Contractor assumes total responsibility for stored materials: Contractor and its surety assume total responsibility for the stored materials; and 8. Contractor provides documentation and Notice when materials moved to site: Contractor furnishes to Owner certified lists of materials stored, bills of lading, invoices, and other information as may be required, and shall also furnish Notice to Owner when materials are moved from storage to the Project site. 6.4 PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Owner to pay within 30 Days: Owner shall make progress payments, in such amounts as Owner determines are properly due, within 30 Days after receipt of a properly executed Application for Payment. Owner shall notify Contractor in accordance with chapter 39.76 RCW if the Application for Payment does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Withholding retainage; Options for retainage: Owner shall retain 5% of the amount of each progress payment until 45 Days after Final Acceptance and receipt of all documents required by law or the Contract Documents, including, at Owner’s request, consent of surety to release of the retainage. In accordance with chapter 60.28 RCW, Contractor may request that monies reserved be retained in a fund by Owner, deposited by Owner in a bank or savings and loan, or placed in escrow with a bank or trust company to be converted into bonds and securities to be held in escrow with interest to be paid to Contractor. Owner may permit Contractor to provide an appropriate bond in lieu of the retained funds. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 33 of 54 October 28, 2024 C. Title passes to Owner upon payment: Title to all Work and materials covered by a progress payment shall pass to Owner at the time of such payment free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests, and encumbrances. Passage of title shall not, however, relieve Contractor from any of its duties and responsibilities for the Work or materials, or waive any rights of Owner to insist on full compliance by Contractor with the Contract Documents. D. Interest on unpaid balances: Payments due and unpaid in accordance with the Contract Documents shall bear interest as specified in chapter 39.76 RCW. 6.5 PAYMENTS WITHHELD A. Owner’s right to withhold payment: Owner may withhold or, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, nullify the whole or part of any payment to such extent as may be necessary to protect Owner from loss or damage for reasons including but not limited to: 1. Non-compliant Work: Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Remaining Work to cost more than unpaid balance: Reasonable evidence that the Work required by the Contract Documents cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; 3. Owner correction or completion Work: Work by Owner to correct defective Work or complete the Work in accordance with Section 5.16; 4. Contractor’s failure to perform: Contractor’s failure to perform in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 5. Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions: Cost or liability that may occur to Owner as the result of Contractor’s fault or negligent acts or omissions. B. Owner to notify Contractor of withholding for unsatisfactory performance: In any case where part or all of a payment is going to be withheld for unsatisfactory performance, Owner shall notify Contractor in accordance with chapter 39.76 RCW. 6.6 RETAINAGE AND BOND CLAIM RIGHTS Chapters 39.08 RCW and 60.28 RCW incorporated by reference: Chapters 39.08 RCW and 60.28 RCW, concerning the rights and responsibilities of Contractor and Owner with regard to the performance and payment bonds and retainage, are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference as though fully set forth herein. 6.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Substantial Completion defined: Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work (or portion thereof designated and approved by Owner) when the construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so Owner has full and unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities (or portion thereof designated and approved by Owner) for the use for which it is intended. All Work other than incidental corrective or punch list work shall be completed. Substantial Completion shall not have been achieved if all systems and parts are not functional, if utilities are not connected and operating normally, if all required occupancy permits DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 34 of 54 October 28, 2024 have not been issued, or if the Work is not accessible by normal vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes. The date Substantial Completion is achieved shall be established in writing by Owner. Contractor may request an early date of Substantial Completion which must be approved by Change Order. Owner’s occupancy of the Work or designated portion thereof does not necessarily indicate that Substantial Completion has been achieved. 6.8 PRIOR OCCUPANCY A. Prior Occupancy defined; Restrictions: Owner may, upon written notice thereof to Contractor, take possession of or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work (“Prior Occupancy”) at any time prior to Substantial Completion. Unless otherwise agreed in writing, Prior Occupancy shall not: be deemed an acceptance of any portion of the Work; accelerate the time for any payment to Contractor; prejudice any rights of Owner provided by any insurance, bond, guaranty, or the Contract Documents; relieve Contractor of the risk of loss or any of the obligations established by the Contract Documents; establish a date for termination or partial termination of the assessment of liquidated damages; or constitute a waiver of claims. B. Damage; Duty to repair and warranties: Notwithstanding anything in the preceding paragraph, Owner shall be responsible for loss of or damage to the Work resulting from Prior Occupancy. Contractor’s one-year duty to repair any system warranties shall begin on building systems activated and used by Owner as agreed in writing by Owner and Contractor. 6.9 FINAL COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND PAYMENT A. Final Completion defined: Final Completion shall be achieved when the Work is fully and finally completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. The date Final Completion is achieved shall be established by Owner in writing, but in no case, shall constitute Final Acceptance which is a subsequent, separate, and distinct action. B. Final Acceptance defined: Final Acceptance shall be achieved when the Contractor has completed the requirements of the Contract Documents. The date Final Acceptance is achieved shall be established by Owner in writing. Prior to Final Acceptance, Contractor shall, in addition to all other requirements in the Contract Documents, submit to Owner a written notice of any outstanding disputes or claims between Contractor and any of its Subcontractors, including the amounts and other details thereof. Neither Final Acceptance, nor final payment, shall release Contractor or its sureties from any obligations of these Contract Documents or the payment and performance bonds, or constitute a waiver of any claims by Owner arising from Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Final payment waives Claim rights: Acceptance of final payment by Contractor, or any Subcontractor, shall constitute a waiver and release to Owner of all claims by Contractor, or any such Subcontractor, for an increase in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, and for every act or omission of Owner relating to or arising out of the Work, except for those Claims DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 35 of 54 October 28, 2024 made in accordance with the procedures, including the time limits, set forth in Part 8. PART 7 – CHANGES 7.1 CHANGE IN THE WORK A. Changes in Work, Contract Sum, and Contract Time by Change Order: Owner or Architect may, at any time and without notice to Contractor’s surety, order additions, deletions, revisions, or other changes in the Work. These changes in the Work shall be incorporated into the Contract Documents through the execution of Change Orders. If any change in the Work ordered by Owner causes an increase or decrease in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, an equitable adjustment shall be made as provided in Section 7.2 or 7.3, respectively, and such adjustment(s) shall be incorporated into a Change Order. B. Owner may request COP from Contractor: If Owner desires to order a change in the Work, it may request a written Change Order Proposal (COP) from Contractor. Contractor shall submit a Change Order Proposal within 14 Days of the request from Owner, or within such other period as mutually agreed. Contractor’s Change Order Proposal shall be full compensation for implementing the proposed change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, and including compensation for all delays in connection with such change in the Work and for any expense or inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity occasioned by the change in the Work. C. COP negotiations: Upon receipt of the Change Order Proposal, or a request for equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both, as provided in Sections 7.2 and 7.3, Owner may accept or reject the proposal, request further documentation, or negotiate acceptable terms with Contractor. Pending agreement on the terms of the Change Order, Owner may direct Contractor to proceed immediately with the Change Order Work. Contractor shall not proceed with any change in the Work until it has obtained Owner’s approval. All Work done pursuant to any Owner-directed change in the Work shall be executed in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. Change Order as full payment and final settlement: If Owner and Contractor reach agreement on the terms of any change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, such agreement shall be incorporated in a Change Order. The Change Order shall constitute full payment and final settlement of all claims for time and for direct, indirect, and consequential costs, including costs of delays, inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity, related to any Work either covered or affected by the Change Order, or related to the events giving rise to the request for equitable adjustment. E. Failure to agree upon terms of Change Order; Final offer and Claims : If Owner and Contractor are unable to reach agreement on the terms of any change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Contractor may at any time in writing, request a final offer from Owner. Owner shall provide Contractor with its written DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 36 of 54 October 28, 2024 response within 30 Days of Contractor’s request. Owner may also provide Contractor with a final offer at any time. If Contractor rejects Owner’s final offer, or the parties are otherwise unable to reach agreement, Contractor’s only remedy shall be to file a Claim as provided in Part 8. F. Field Authorizations: The Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with a change in the work through a written Field Authorization (also referred to as a Field Order) when the time required to price and execute a Change Order would impact the Project. The Field Authorization shall describe and include the following: 1. The scope of work 2. An agreed upon maximum not-to-exceed amount 3. Any estimated change to the Contract Time 4. The method of final cost determination in accordance with the requirements of Part 7 of the General Conditions 5. The supporting cost data to be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Part 7 of the General Conditions Upon satisfactory submittal by the Contractor and approval by the Owner of supporting cost data, a Change Order will be executed. The Owner will not make payment to the Contractor for Field Authorization work until that work has been incorporated into an executed Change Order. 7.2 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT SUM A. General Application 1. Contract Sum changes only by Change Order: The Contract Sum shall only be changed by a Change Order. Contractor shall include any request for a change in the Contract Sum in its Change Order Proposal. 2. Owner fault or negligence as basis for change in Contract Sum: If the cost of Contractor’s performance is changed due to the fault or negligence of Owner, or anyone for whose acts Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum in accordance with the following procedure. No change in the Contract Sum shall be allowed to the extent: Contractor’s changed cost of performance is due to the fault or negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible; the change is concurrently caused by Contractor and Owner; or the change is caused by an act of Force Majeure as defined in Section 3.5. a. Notice and record keeping for equitable adjustment: A request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum shall be based on written notice delivered to Owner within 7 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request. For purposes of this part, “occurrence” means when Contractor knew, or in its diligent DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 37 of 54 October 28, 2024 prosecution of the Work should have known, of the event giving rise to the request. If Contractor believes it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner and begin to keep and maintain complete, accurate, and specific daily records. Contractor shall give Owner access to any such records and, if requested shall promptly furnish copies of such records to Owner. b. Content of notice for equitable adjustment; Failure to comply: Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum for any occurrence of events or costs that occurred more than 7 Days before Contractor’s written notice to Owner. The written notice shall set forth, at a minimum, a description of: the event giving rise to the request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum; the nature of the impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier, if any; and to the extent possible the amount of the adjustment in Contract Sum requested. Failure to properly give such written notice shall, to the extent Owner’s interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor’s right to an equitable adjustment. c. Contractor to provide supplemental information: Within 30 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request, unless Owner agrees in writing to allow an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor shall supplement the written notice provided in accordance with subparagraph a. above with additional supporting data. Such additional data shall include, at a minimum: the amount of compensation requested, itemized in accordance with the procedure set forth herein; specific facts, circumstances, and analysis that confirms not only that Contractor suffered the damages claimed, but that the damages claimed were actually a result of the act, event, or condition complained of and that the Contract Documents provide entitlement to an equitable adjustment to Contractor for such act, event, or condition; and documentation sufficiently detailed to permit an informed analysis of the request by Owner. When the request for compensation relates to a delay, or other change in Contract Time, Contractor shall demonstrate the impact on the critical path, in accordance with Section 7.3C. Failure to provide such additional information and documentation within the time allowed or within the format required shall, to the extent Owner’s interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor’s right to an equitable adjustment. d. Contractor to proceed with Work as directed: Pending final resolution of any request made in accordance with this paragraph, unless otherwise agreed in writing, Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Work. e. Contractor to combine requests for same event together: Any requests by Contractor for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum and in the Contract Time that arise out of the same event(s) shall be submitted together. 3. Methods for calculating Change Order amount: The value of any Work covered by a Change Order, or of any request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be determined by one of the following methods: a. Fixed Price: On the basis of a fixed price as determined in paragraph 7.2B. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 38 of 54 October 28, 2024 b. Unit Prices: By application of unit prices to the quantities of the items involved as determined in paragraph 7.2C. c. Time and Materials: On the basis of time and material as determined in paragraph 7.2D. 4. Fixed price method is default; Owner may direct otherwise: When Owner has requested Contractor to submit a Change Order Proposal, Owner may direct Contractor as to which method in subparagraph 3 above to use when submitting its proposal. Otherwise, Contractor shall determine the value of the Work, or of a request for an equitable adjustment, on the basis of the fixed price method. B. Change Order Pricing – Fixed Price Procedures: When the fixed price method is used to determine the value of any Work covered by a Change Order, or of a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum, the following procedures shall apply: 1. Breakdown and itemization of details on COP: Contractor’s Change Order Proposal, or request for adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of the costs, including labor, material, subcontractor costs, and overhead and profit. The costs shall be itemized in the manner set forth below and shall be submitted on breakdown sheets in a form approved by Owner. 2. Use of industry standards in calculating costs: All costs shall be calculated based upon appropriate industry standard methods of calculating labor, material quantities, and equipment costs such as R.S. Means or other standards acceptable to the Owner and Contractor. 3. Costs contingent on Owner’s actions: If any of Contractor’s pricing assumptions are contingent upon anticipated actions of Owner, Contractor shall clearly state them in the proposal or request for an equitable adjustment. 4. Markups on additive and deductive Work: The cost of any additive or deductive changes in the Work shall be calculated as set forth below, except that overhead and profit shall not be included on deductive changes in the Work. Where a change in the Work involves additive and deductive work by the same Contractor or Subcontractor, small tools, overhead, profit, bond and insurance markups will apply to the net difference. 5. Breakdown not required if change less than $1,000: If the total cost of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment does not exceed $1,000, Contractor shall not be required to submit a breakdown if the description of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment is sufficiently definitive for Owner to determine fair value. 6. Breakdown required if change between $1,000 and $2,500: If the total cost of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment is between $1,000 and $2,500, Contractor may submit a breakdown in the following level of detail if the description of the change in the Work or if the request for equitable adjustment is sufficiently definitive to permit the Owner to determine fair value: DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 39 of 54 October 28, 2024 a. lump sum labor; b. lump sum material; c. lump sum equipment usage; d. overhead and profit as set forth below; and e. insurance and bond costs as set forth below. 7. Components of increased cost: Any request for adjustment of Contract Sum based upon the fixed price method shall include only the following items: a. Craft labor costs: These are the labor costs determined by multiplying the estimated or actual additional number of craft hours needed to perform the change in the Work by the hourly labor costs. Craft hours should cover direct labor, as well as indirect labor due to trade inefficiencies. The hourly costs shall be based on the following: (1) Basic wages and benefits: Hourly rates and benefits as stated on the Department of Labor and Industries approved “statement of intent to pay prevailing wages” or a higher amount if approved by the Owner. Direct supervision shall be a reasonable percentage not to exceed 15% of the cost of direct labor. No supervision markup shall be allowed for a working supervisor’s hours. (2) Worker’s insurance: Direct contributions to the City of Renton for industrial insurance; medical aid; and supplemental pension, by the class and rates established by the Department of Labor and Industries. (3) Federal insurance: Direct contributions required by the Federal Insurance Compensation Act; Federal Unemployment Tax Act; and the State Unemployment Compensation Act. (4) Travel allowance: Travel allowance and/or subsistence, if applicable, not exceeding those allowances established by regional labor union agreements, which are itemized and identified separately. (5) Safety: Cost incurred due to the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act, which shall be a reasonable percentage not to exceed 2% of the sum of the amounts calculated in (1), (2), and (3) above. b. Material costs: This is an itemization of the quantity and cost of materials needed to perform the change in the Work. Material costs shall be developed first from actual known costs, second from supplier quotations or if these are not available, from standard industry pricing guides. Material costs shall consider all available discounts. Freight costs, express charges, or special delivery charges shall be itemized. c. Equipment costs: This is an itemization of the type of equipment and the estimated or actual length of time the construction equipment appropriate for the Work is or will be used on the change in the Work. Costs will be allowed for construction equipment only if used solely for the changed Work, or for additional DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 40 of 54 October 28, 2024 rental costs actually incurred by the Contractor. Equipment charges shall be computed on the basis of actual invoice costs or if owned, from the current edition of one of the following sources: (1) The Equipment Watch Fleet Manager Estimator Package (digital). The maximum rate for standby equipment shall not exceed that shown in the Associated General Contractors Washington State Department of Transportation (AGC WSDOT) Equipment Rental Agreement, current edition on the Contract execution date. (2) The National Electrical Contractors Association for equipment used on electrical work. (3) The Mechanical Contractors Association of America for equipment used on mechanical work. The Equipment Watch Rental Rate Blue Book shall be used as a basis for establishing rental rates of equipment not listed in the above sources. The maximum rate for standby equipment shall not exceed that shown in the AGC WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement, current edition on the Contract execution date. d. Allowance for small tools, expendables & consumable supplies: Small tools consist of tools which cost $250 or less and are normally furnished by the performing contractor. The maximum rate for small tools shall not exceed the following: (1) 3% for Contractor: For Contractor, 3% of direct labor costs. (2) 5% for Subcontractors: For Subcontractors, 5% of direct labor costs. Expendables and consumables supplies directly associated with the change in Work must be itemized. e. Subcontractor costs: This is defined as payments Contractor makes to Subcontractors for changed Work performed by Subcontractors of any tier. The Subcontractors’ cost of Work shall be calculated and itemized in the same manner as prescribed herein for Contractor. f. Allowance for overhead: This is defined as costs of any kind attributable to direct and indirect delay, acceleration, or impact, added to the total cost to Owner of any change in the Contract Sum. If the Contractor is compensated under Section 7.3D, the amount of such compensation shall be reduced by the amount Contractor is otherwise entitled to under this subsection (f). This allowance shall compensate Contractor for all non-craft labor, temporary construction facilities, field engineering, schedule updating, as-built drawings, home office cost, B&O taxes, office engineering, estimating costs, additional overhead because of extended time, and any other cost incidental to the change in the Work. It shall be strictly limited in all cases to a reasonable amount, mutually acceptable, or if DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 41 of 54 October 28, 2024 none can be agreed upon to an amount not to exceed the rates below: (1) Projects less than $3 million: For projects where the Contract Award Amount is under $3 million, the following shall apply: (a) Contractor markup on Contractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work actually performed by Contractor’s own forces, 16% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (b) Subcontractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor (including lower tier subcontractors), for any Work actually performed by its own forces, 16% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (c) Contractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For Contractor, for any work performed by its Subcontractor(s) 6% of the first $50,000 of the amount due each Subcontractor, and 4% of the remaining amount if any. (d) Subcontractor markup for lower tier Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s) of any lower tier, 4% of the first $50,000 of the amount due the sub- Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any. (e) Basis of cost applicable for markup: The cost to which overhead is to be applied shall be developed in accordance with Section 7.2B 7a. – e. (2) Projects more than $3 million: For projects where the Contract Award Amount is equal to or exceeds $3 million, the following shall apply: (a) Contractor markup on Contractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work actually performed by Contractor’s own forces, 12% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (b) Subcontractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor (including lower tier subcontractors), for any Work actually performed by its own forces, 12% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any. (c) Contractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s), 4% of the first $50,000 of the amount due each Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any. (d) Subcontractor markup for lower tier Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s) of any lower tier, 4% of the first $50,000 of the amount due the sub- Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any. (e) Basis of cost applicable for markup: The cost to which overhead is to be applied shall be developed in accordance with Section 7.2B 7a. – e. g. Allowance for profit: Allowance for profit is an amount to be added to the cost of any change in contract sum, but not to the cost of change in Contract Time for DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 42 of 54 October 28, 2024 which contractor has been compensated pursuant to the conditions set forth in Section 7.3. It shall be limited to a reasonable amount, mutually acceptable, or if none can be agreed upon, to an amount not to exceed the rates below: (1) Contractor / Subcontractor markup for self-performed Work: For Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier for work performed by their forces, 6% of the cost developed in accordance with Section 7.2B 7a. – e. (2) Contractor / Subcontractor markup for Work performed at lower tier: For Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier for work performed by a subcontractor of a lower tier, 4% of the subcontract cost developed in accordance with Section 7.2B 7a. – h. h. Insurance and bond premiums: Cost of change in insurance or bond premium: This is defined as: (1) Contractor’s liability insurance: The cost of any changes in Contractor’s liability insurance arising directly from execution of the Change Order; and (2) Payment and Performance Bond: The cost of the additional premium for Contractor’s bond arising directly from the changed Work. The cost of any change in insurance or bond premium shall be added after overhead and allowance for profit are calculated in accordance with subparagraph f. and g above. C. Change Order Pricing – Unit Prices 1. Content of Owner authorization: Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform Work on a unit-price basis, Owner’s authorization shall clearly state: a. Scope: Scope of work to be performed; b. Reimbursement basis: Type of reimbursement including pre-agreed rates for material quantities; and c. Reimbursement limit: Cost limit of reimbursement. 2. Contractor responsibilities: Contractor shall: a. Cooperate with Owner and Architect and assist in monitoring the Work being performed. As requested by Owner or Architect, Contractor shall identify workers assigned to the Change Order Work and areas in which they are working; b. Leave access as appropriate for quantity measurement; and c. Not exceed any cost limit(s) without Owner’s prior written approval. 3. Cost breakdown consistent with Fixed Price requirements: Contractor shall submit costs in accordance with paragraph 7.2B and satisfy the following requirements: DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 43 of 54 October 28, 2024 a. Unit prices must include overhead, profit, bond and insurance premiums: Unit prices shall include reimbursement for all direct and indirect costs of the Work, including overhead, profit, bond, and insurance costs; and b. Owner verification of quantities: Quantities must be supported by field measurement statements signed by Owner or Architect. D. Change Order Pricing – Time-and-Material Prices 1. Content of Owner authorization: Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform Work on a time-and-material basis, Owner’s authorization shall clearly state: a. Scope: Scope of Work to be performed; b. Reimbursement basis: Type of reimbursement including pre-agreed rates, if any, for material quantities or labor; and c. Reimbursement limit: Cost limit of reimbursement. 2. Contractor responsibilities: Contractor shall: a. Identify workers assigned: Cooperate with Owner and assist in monitoring the Work being performed. As requested by Owner or Architect, identify workers assigned to the Change Order Work and areas in which they are working; b. Provide daily timesheets: Identify on daily time sheets all labor performed in accordance with this authorization. Submit copies of daily time sheets within 2 working days for Owner and Architect review. c. Allow Owner or Architect to measure quantities: Leave access as appropriate for quantity measurement; d. Perform Work efficiently: Perform all Work in accordance with this section as efficiently as possible; and e. Not exceed Owner’s cost limit: Not exceed any cost limit(s) without Owner’s or Architect’s prior written approval. 3. Cost breakdown consistent with Fixed Price requirements: Contractor shall submit costs in accordance with paragraph 7.2B and additional verification supported by: a. Timesheets: Labor detailed on daily time sheets; and b. Invoices: Invoices for material. 7.3 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT TIME A. COP requests for Contract Time: The Contract Time shall only be changed by a Change Order. Contractor shall include any request for a change in the Contract Time in its Change Order Proposal. B. Time extension permitted if not Contractor’s fault: If the time of Contractor’s performance is changed due to an act of Force Majeure, or due to the fault or negligence of Owner or DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 44 of 54 October 28, 2024 anyone for whose acts Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time in accordance with the following procedure. No adjustment in the Contract Time shall be allowed to the extent Contractor’s changed time of performance is due to the fault or negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible. 1. Notice and record keeping for Contract Time request: A request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered within 7 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request. If Contractor believes it is entitled to adjustment of Contract Time, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner and begin to keep and maintain complete, accurate, and specific daily records. Contractor shall give Owner access to any such record and if requested, shall promptly furnish copies of such record to Owner. 2. Timing and content of Contractor’s Notice: Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time for any events that occurred more than 7 Days before Contractor’s written notice to Owner. The written notice shall set forth, at a minimum, a description of: the event giving rise to the request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time; the nature of the impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier, if any; and to the extent possible the amount of the adjustment in Contract Time requested. Failure to properly give such written notice shall, to the extent Owner’s interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor’s right to an equitable adjustment. 3. Contractor to provide supplemental information: Within 30 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request, unless Owner agrees in writing to allow an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor shall supplement the written notice provided in accordance with subparagraph 7.3B.2 with additional supporting data. Such additional data shall include, at a minimum: the amount of delay claimed, itemized in accordance with the procedure set forth herein; specific facts, circumstances, and analysis that confirms not only that Contractor suffered the delay claimed, but that the delay claimed was actually a result of the act, event, or condition complained of, and that the Contract Documents provide entitlement to an equitable adjustment in Contract Time for such act, event, or condition; and supporting documentation sufficiently detailed to permit an informed analysis of the request by Owner and Architect. Failure to provide such additional information and documentation within the time allowed or within the format required shall, to the extent Owner’s interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor’s right to an equitable adjustment. 4. Contractor to proceed with Work as directed: Pending final resolution of any request in accordance with this paragraph, unless otherwise agreed in writing, Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Work. C. Contractor to demonstrate impact on critical path of schedule: Any change in the Contract Time covered by a Change Order or based on a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time, shall be limited to the change in the critical path of Contractor’s schedule attributable to the change of Work or event(s) giving rise to the request for equitable DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 45 of 54 October 28, 2024 adjustment. Any Change Order Proposal or request for an adjustment in the Contract Time shall demonstrate the impact on the critical path of the schedule. Contractor shall be responsible for showing clearly on the Progress Schedule that the change or event: had a specific impact on the critical path, and except in case of concurrent delay, was the sole cause of such impact; and could not have been avoided by resequencing of the Work or other reasonable alternatives. D. Cost of change in Contract Time: Contractor may request compensation for the cost of a change in Contract Time in accordance with this paragraph, 7.3D, subject to the following conditions: 1. Must be solely fault of Owner or A/E: The change in Contract Time shall solely be caused by the fault or negligence of Owner or A/E; 2. Procedures: Contractor shall follow the procedure set forth in paragraph 7.3B; 3. Demonstrate impact on critical path: Contractor shall establish the extent of the change in Contract Time in accordance with paragraph 7.3C; and 4. Limitations on daily costs: The daily cost of any change in Contract Time shall be limited to the items below, less the amount of any change in the Contract Sum the Contractor may otherwise be entitled to pursuant to Section 7.2B 7f for any change in the Work that contributed to this change in Contract Time: a. Non-productive supervision or labor: cost of nonproductive field supervision or labor extended because of delay; b. Weekly meetings and indirect activities: cost of weekly meetings or similar indirect activities extended because of the delay; c. Temporary facilities or equipment r ental: cost of temporary facilities or equipment rental extended because of the delay; d. Insurance premiums: cost of insurance extended because of the delay; e. Overhead: general and administrative overhead in an amount to be agreed upon, but not to exceed 3% of the Contract Award Amount divided by the originally specified Contract Time for each Day of the delay. PART 8 – CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION 8.1 CLAIMS PROCEDURE A. Claim is Contractor’s remedy: If the parties fail to reach agreement on the terms of any Change Order for Owner-directed Work as provided in Section 7. 1, or on the resolution of any request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum as provided in Section 7. 2 or the Contract Time as provided in Section 7. 3, Contractor’s only remedy shall be to file a Claim with Owner as provided in this section. B. Claim filing deadline for Contractor: Contractor shall file its Claim within 120 Days from Owner’s final offer made in accordance with paragraph 7. 1E, or by the date of Final Acceptance, whichever occurs first. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 46 of 54 October 28, 2024 C. Claim must cover all costs and be documented : The Claim shall be deemed to cover all changes in cost and time (including direct, indirect, impact, and consequential) to which Contractor may be entitled. It shall be fully substantiated and documented. At a minimum, the Claim shall contain the following information: 1. Factual statement of Claim: A detailed factual statement of the Claim for additional compensation and time, if any, providing all necessary dates, locations, and items of Work affected by the Claim; 2. Dates: The date on which facts arose which gave rise to the Claim; 3. Owner and A/E employee’s knowledgeable about Claim: The name of each employee of Owner or A/E knowledgeable about the Claim; 4. Support from Contract Documents: The specific provisions of the Contract Documents which support the Claim; 5. Identification of other supporting information: The identification of any documents and the substance of any oral communications that support the Claim; 6. Copies of supporting documentation: Copies of any identified documents, other than the Contract Documents, that support the Claim; 7. Details on Claim for Contract Time: If an adjustment in the Contract Time is sought: the specific days and dates for which it is sought; the specific reasons Contractor believes an extension in the Contract Time should be granted; and Contractor’s analysis of its Progress Schedule to demonstrate the reason for the extension in Contract Time; 8. Details on Claim for adjustment of Contract Sum: If an adjustment in the Contract Sum is sought, the exact amount sought and a breakdown of that amount into the categories set forth in, and in the detail as required by Section 7.2; and 9. Statement certifying Claim: A statement certifying, under penalty of perjury, that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting cost and pricing data are true and accurate to the best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief, that the Claim is fully supported by the accompanying data, and that the amount requested accurately reflects the adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time for which Contractor believes Owner is liable. D. Owner’s response to Claim filed: After Contractor has submitted a fully documented Claim that complies with all applicable provisions of Parts 7 and 8, Owner shall respond, in writing, to Contractor as follows: 1. Response time for Claim less than $50,000: If the Claim amount is less than $50,000, with a decision within 60 Days from the date the Claim is received; or 2. Response time for Claim of $50,000 or more: If the Claim amount is $50,000 or more, with a decision within 60 Days from the date the Claim is received, or with notice to Contractor of the date by which it will render its decision. Owner will then respond with a written decision in such additional time. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 47 of 54 October 28, 2024 E. Owner’s review of Claim and finality of decision: To assist in the review of Contractor’s Claim, Owner or Architect may visit the Project site, or request additional information, in order to fully evaluate the issues raised by the Claim. Contractor shall proceed with performance of the Work pending final resolution of any Claim. Owner’s written decision as set forth above shall be final and conclusive as to all matters set forth in the Claim, unless Contractor follows the procedure set forth in Section 8.2. F. Waiver of Contractor rights for failure to comply with this Section : Any Claim of the Contractor against the Owner for damages, additional compensation, or additional time, shall be conclusively deemed to have been waived by the Contractor unless made in accordance with the requirements of this Section. 8.2 ARBITRATION A. Timing of Contractor’s demand for arbitration: If Contractor disagrees with Owner’s decision rendered in accordance with paragraph 8.1D, Contractor shall provide Owner with a written demand for arbitration. No demand for arbitration of any such Claim shall be made later than 30 Days after the date of Owner’s decision on such Claim; failure to demand arbitration within said 30 Day period shall result in Owner’s decision being final and binding upon Contractor and its Subcontractors. B. Filing of Notice for arbitration: Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed with the American Arbitration Association (AAA), with a copy provided to Owner. The parties shall negotiate or mediate under the Voluntary Construction Mediation Rules of the AAA, or mutually acceptable service, before seeking arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of AAA as follows: 1. Claims less than $30,000: Disputes involving $30,000 or less shall be conducted in accordance with the Northwest Region Expedited Commercial Arbitration Rules; or 2. Claims greater than $30,000: Disputes over $30,000 shall be conducted in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the AAA, unless the parties agree to use the expedited rules. C. Arbitration is forum for resolving Claims: All Claims arising out of the Work shall be resolved by arbitration. The judgment upon the arbitration award may be entered, or review of the award may occur, in the superior court having jurisdiction thereof. No independent legal action relating to or arising from the Work shall be maintained. D. Settlement outside of arbitration to be documented in Change Order: If the parties resolve the Claim prior to arbitration judgment, the terms of the resolution shall be incorporated in a Change Order. The Change Order shall constitute full payment and final settlement of the Claim, including all claims for time and for direct, indirect, or consequential costs, including costs of delays, inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity. 8.3 CLAIMS AUDITS DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 48 of 54 October 28, 2024 A. Owner may audit Claims: All Claims filed against Owner shall be subject to audit at any time following the filing of the Claim. Failure of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, to maintain and retain sufficient records to allow Owner to verify all or a portion of the Claim or to permit Owner access to the books and records of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, shall constitute a waiver of the Claim and shall bar any recovery. B. Contractor to make documents available: In support of Owner audit of any Claim, Contractor shall, upon request, promptly make available to Owner the following documents: 1. Daily time sheets and supervisor’s daily reports; 2. Collective bargaining agreements; 3. Insurance, welfare, and benefits records; 4. Payroll registers; 5. Earnings records; 6. Payroll tax forms; 7. Material invoices, requisitions, and delivery confirmations; 8. Material cost distribution worksheet; 9. Equipment records (list of company equipment, rates, etc.); 10. Vendors’, rental agencies’, Subcontractors’, and agents’ invoices; 11. Contracts between Contractor and each of its Subcontractors, and all lower-tier Subcontractor contracts and supplier contracts; 12. Subcontractors’ and agents’ payment certificates; 13. Cancelled checks (payroll and vendors); 14. Job cost report, including monthly totals; 15. Job payroll ledger; 16. Planned resource loading schedules and summaries; 17. General ledger; 18. Cash disbursements journal; 19. Financial statements for all years reflecting the operations on the Work. In addition, the Owner may require, if it deems it appropriate, additional financial statements for 3 years preceding execution of the Work; 20. Depreciation records on all company equipment whether these records are maintained by the company involved, its accountant, or others; 21. If a source other than depreciation records is used to develop costs for Contractor’s internal purposes in establishing the actual cost of owning and operating equipment, all such other source documents; 22. All non-privileged documents which relate to each and every Claim together with all documents which support the amount of any adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract Time sought by each Claim; 23. Work sheets or software used to prepare the Claim establishing the cost components for items of the Claim including but not limited to labor, benefits and insurance, materials, equipment, Subcontractors, all documents which establish the time periods, individuals involved, the hours for the individuals, and the rates for the individuals; and 24. Work sheets, software, and all other documents used by Contractor to prepare its bid. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 49 of 54 October 28, 2024 C. Contractor to provide facilities for audit and shall cooperate: The audit may be performed by employees of Owner or a representative of Owner. Contractor, and its Subcontractors, shall provide adequate facilities acceptable to Owner, for the audit during normal business hours. Contractor, and all Subcontractors, shall make a good faith effort to cooperate with Owner’s auditors. PART 9 – TERMINATION OF THE WORK 9.1 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE A. 7 Day Notice to Terminate for Cause: Owner may, upon 7 Days written notice to Contractor and to its surety, terminate (without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the Work, or any part of it, for cause upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events: 1. Contractor fails to prosecute Work: Contractor fails to prosecute the Work or any portion thereof with sufficient diligence to ensure Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time; 2. Contractor bankrupt: Contractor is adjudged bankrupt, makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency; 3. Contractor fails to correct Work: Contractor fails in a material way to replace or correct Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents; 4. Contractor fails to supply workers or materials: Contractor repeatedly fails to supply skilled workers or proper materials or equipment; 5. Contractor failure to pay Subcontractors or labor: Contractor repeatedly fails to make prompt payment due to Subcontractors or for labor; 6. Contractor violates laws: Contractor materially disregards or fails to comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction; or 7. Contractor in material breach of Contract: Contractor is otherwise in material breach of any provision of the Contract Documents. B. Owner’s actions upon termination: Upon termination, Owner may at its option: 1. Take possession of Project site: Take possession of the Project site and take possession of or use all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by Contractor to maintain the orderly progress of, and to finish, the Work; 2. Accept assignment of Subcontracts: Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.20; and 3. Finish the Work: Finish the Work by whatever other reasonable method it deems expedient. C. Surety’s role: Owner’s rights and duties upon termination are subject to the prior rights and duties of the surety, if any, obligated under any bond provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. Contractor’s required actions: When Owner terminates the Work in accordance with this DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 50 of 54 October 28, 2024 section, Contractor shall take the actions set forth in paragraph 9.2B and shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is accepted. E. Contractor to pay for unfinished Work: If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the cost of finishing the Work, including compensation for A/E’s services and expenses made necessary thereby and any other extra costs or damages incurred by Owner in completing the Work, or as a result of Contractor’s actions, such excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. These obligations for payment shall survive termination. F. Contractor and Surety still responsible for Work performed : Termination of the Work in accordance with this section shall not relieve Contractor or its surety of any responsibilities for Work performed. G. Conversion of “Termination for Cause” to “Termination for Convenience”: If Owner terminates Contractor for cause and it is later determined that none of the circumstances set forth in paragraph 9.1A exist, then such termination shall be deemed a termination for convenience pursuant to Section 9.2. 9.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE A. Owner Notice of Termination for Convenience: Owner may, upon written notice, terminate (without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the Work, or any part of it, for the convenience of Owner. B. Contractor response to termination Notice: Unless Owner directs otherwise, after receipt of a written notice of termination for either cause or convenience, Contractor shall promptly: 1. Cease Work: Stop performing Work on the date and as specified in the notice of termination; 2. No further orders or Subcontracts: Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, equipment, services or facilities, except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the Work as is not terminated; 3. Cancel orders and Subcontracts: Cancel all orders and subcontracts, upon terms acceptable to Owner, to the extent that they relate to the performance of Work terminated; 4. Assign orders and Subcontracts to Owner: Assign to Owner all of the right, title, and interest of Contractor in all orders and subcontracts; 5. Take action to protect the Work: Take such action as may be necessary or as directed by Owner to preserve and protect the Work, Project site, and any other property related to this Project in the possession of Contractor in which Owner has an interest; and 6. Continue performance not terminated: Continue performance only to the extent not terminated C. Terms of adjustment in Contract Sum if Contract terminated: If Owner terminates the Work DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 51 of 54 October 28, 2024 or any portion thereof for convenience, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable adjustment for its reasonable direct costs incurred prior to the effective date of the termination, plus reasonable allowance for overhead and profit on Work performed prior to termination, plus the reasonable administrative costs of the termination, but shall not be entitled to any other costs or damages, whatsoever, provided however, the total sum payable upon termination shall not exceed the Contract Sum reduced by prior payments. Contractor shall be required to make its request in accordance with the provisions of Part 7. D. Owner to determine whether to adjust Contract Time: If Owner terminates the Work or any portion thereof for convenience, the Contract Time shall be adjusted as determined by Owner. PART 10 – MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 10.1 GOVERNING LAW Applicable law and venue: The Contract Documents and the rights of the parties herein shall be governed by the laws of the State of Washington and the City of Renton. Venue shall be in King County. 10.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS Bound to successors; Assignment of Contract: Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party shall assign the Work without written consent of the other, except that Contractor may assign the Work for security purposes, to a bank or lending institution authorized to do business in the City of Renton. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations set forth in the Contract Documents. 10.3 MEANING OF WORDS Meaning of words used in Specifications: Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical, or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. Reference to standard specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to the code of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall be to the latest standard specification, manual, or code in effect on the date for submission of bids, except as may be otherwise specifically stated. Wherever in these Drawings and Specifications an article, device, or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular manner, such reference shall apply to as many such articles as are shown on the drawings or required to complete the installation. 10.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 52 of 54 October 28, 2024 No waiver of rights: No action or failure to act by Owner or A/E shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract Documents, nor shall action or failure to act constitute approval or an acquiescence in a breach therein, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 10.5 CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION Contractor must be registered or licensed: Pursuant to RCW 39.06, Contractor shall be registered or licensed as required by the laws of the City of Renton, including but not limited to RCW 18.27. 10.6 TIME COMPUTATIONS Computing time: When computing any period of time, the day of the event from which the period of time begins shall not be counted. The last day is counted unless it falls on a weekend or legal holiday, in which event the period runs until the end of the next day that is not a weekend or holiday. When the period of time allowed is less than 7 days, intermediate Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays are excluded from the computation. 10.7 RECORDS RETENTION / PUBLIC RECORDS REQUESTS A. Six-year records retention period: The wage, payroll, and cost records of Contractor, and its Subcontractors, and all records subject to audit in accordance with Section 8.3, shall be retained for a period of not less than 6 years after the date of Final Acceptance. B. Record Keeping and Reporting: Contractor shall maintain accounts and records, which properly reflect all direct and indirect costs expended and Services provided in the performance of this Agreement. The Contractor agrees to provide access to and copies of any records related to this Agreement as required by the City to audit expenditures and charges and/or to comply with the Washington State Public Records Act (Chapter 42.56 RCW). C. Public Records Compliance: To the full extent the City determines necessary to comply with the Washington State Public Records Act, Contractor shall make a due diligent search of all records in its possession, including, but not limited to, e-mail, correspondence, notes, saved telephone messages, recordings, photos, or drawings and provide them to the City for production. In the event Contractor believes said records need to be protected from disclosure, it shall, at Contractor’s own expense, seek judicial protection. Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the City for all costs, including attorneys’ fees, attendant to any claim or litigation related to a Public Records Act request for which Contractor has responsive records and for which Contractor ha s withheld records or information contained therein, or not provided them to the City in a timely manner. Contractor shall produce for distribution any and all records responsive to the Public Records Act request in a timely manner, unless those records are protected by court order. DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 53 of 54 October 28, 2024 10.8 THIRD-PARTY AGREEMENTS No third-party relationships created: The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind between: A/E and Contractor; Owner and any Subcontractor; or any persons other than Owner and Contractor. 10.9 ANTITRUST ASSIGNMENT Contractor assigns overcharge amounts to Owner: Owner and Contractor recognize that in actual economic practice, overcharges resulting from antitrust violations are in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore, Contractor hereby assigns to Owner any and all claims for such overcharges as to goods, materials, and equipment purchased in connection with the Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, except as to overcharges which result from antitrust violations commencing after the Contract Sum is established and which are not passed on to Owner under a Change Order. Contractor shall put a similar clause in its Subcontracts, and require a similar clause in its sub- Subcontracts, such that all claims for such overcharges on the Work are passed to Owner by Contractor. 10.10 HEADINGS AND CAPTIONS Headings for convenience only: All headings and captions used in these General Conditions are only for convenience of reference and shall not be used in any way in connection with the meaning, effect, interpretation, construction, or enforcement of the General Conditions, and do not define the limit or describe the scope or intent of any provision of these General Conditions. 10.11 DIVERSE BUSINESS PARTICIPATION The City of Renton encourages participation in all of its contracts by Diverse Businesses as found in RCW Chapters 39, 43, and WAC 326. The voluntary Diverse Business goal of 26%, which is an aggregate of: 10% Minority Business Enterprises (MBE), 6% Women Business Enterprises (WBE), 5% Veteran-owned Business, and 5% Washington Small Businesses self- identified in the Washington Electronic Business Solution (WEBS) http://www.des.wa.gov/services/ContractingPurchasing/Business/Pages/WEBSRegistration.aspx. Contractors are encouraged to meet or exceed the project goals in the advertisement by any level of participation, regardless of category. 10.12 APPRENTICESHIP PARTICIPATION In accordance with RCW 39.04.320, the City of Renton requires 15% apprenticeship participation for projects estimated to cost one million dollars or more. Apprentice participation, under this contract, may be counted towards the required percentage (%) only if the apprentices are from an apprenticeship program registered and approved by the Washington State Apprenticeship and Training Council (RCW 49.04 and WAC 296-05). A. Bidders may contact the Department of Labor and Industries, Specialty Compliance Services Division, Apprenticeship Section, P.O. Box 44530, Olympia, WA 98504-4530 by DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 00 72 00 – General Conditions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 72 00 - 54 of 54 October 28, 2024 phone at (360) 902-5320, and e-mail at Apprentice@Lni.wa.gov, to obtain information on available apprenticeship programs. B. For each project that has apprentice requirements, the contractor shall submit a “Statement of Apprentice and Journeyman Participation” in a format approved by the City with every request for progress payment. The Contractor shall submit consolidated and cumulative data collected by the Contractor and collected from all subcontractors by the Contractor. The data to be collected and submitted includes the following: 1. Contractor name and address 2. Contract number 3. Henry Moses Aquatic Center Upgrades END OF SECTION DIVISION 00 –CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Project No. 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 00 80 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 SECTION 00 80 00 - Forms 1.1 Submit With Bid 1. Bid Proposal Form 2. Form A – Proposal Bid Bond 1.2 Submit Within 1 hour of Bid Submission: Required only if Bid is $1,000,000 or more 1. Form B – List of Subcontractors, (Submission of HVAC, Plumbing and Electrical Subcontractors) 1.4 Submit Within 2 Business Days of Notice by Owner of Apparent Low Bid: 1. Form C – Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation 2. Form D– Qualifications of Key Personnel 1.5 Submit With Executed Agreement – Agreement Between Owner and Contractor 1. Form E – 100% Contract and Performance Bond Form 2. Required Insurance Certificates END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repair Proposal Bid Bond – FORM A FORM A Proposal Bid Bond KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, [Contractor] of [address] as Principal, and [Surety] a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of , and authorized to do business in the State of Washington, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Renton in the sum of five (5) percent of the total amount of the Bid of said Principal for the Work hereinafter described, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and assigns, and successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The condition of this bond is such, that whereas the Principal herein is herewith submitting his/her or its sealed Bid for the following construction, to wit: said Bid and proposal, by reference thereto, being made a part hereof. NOW, THEREFORE, if the said proposal Bid by said Principal be accepted, and the Contract be awarded to said Principal, and if said Principal shall duly make and enter into and execute said Contract and shall furnish performance bond as required by the City of Renton within a period of ten (10) days from and after said award, exclusive of the day of such award, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain and be in full force and effect. IN THE EVENT the Principal, following award, fails to execute an Agreement with the City of Renton in accordance with the terms of the Bidding Documents and furnish a performance bond with Surety or Sureties approved by the City of Renton within ten (10) days from and after said award, then Principal shall forfeit the Bid Bond/Bid Proposal Deposit or Surety shall immediately pay and forfeit to the City of Renton the amount of the Proposal Bid Bond, as set forth in RCW 35A.40.200 and RCW 35.23.352. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have caused these presents to be signed and sealed this day of , . [Principal] [Surety] [Signature of authorized official] [Signature of authorized official] By: [Title] [Attorney-in-Fact] [Address] [Phone Number] BID BOND PAGE 1 OF 1 This page intentionally left blank Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs List of Subcontractors, FORM B Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs List of Subcontractors – FORM B Page 1 of 2 October 28, 2024 CITY OF RENTON EMAIL TO: dboodell@rentonwa.gov If bid amount exceeds $1,000,000, this list must be submitted within one (1) hour of the time and date specified for Bid Submission. Bidder’s Name: Project: Henry Moses Aquatic Center Upgrades 1055 S. Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 CAG Number SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING If the bid amount exceeds $1,000,000 or more including Washington State Sales Tax, bidder must list the Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC), Plumbing, and Electrical subcontractors as required per RCW 39.30.060. Subcontractor Name Work Category 1. Mechanical 2. Plumbing 3. Electrical [SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS] LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Submission of HVAC, Plumbing, and Electrical Subcontractors Legal Name of Person or Entity Submitting Bid: NOTE: If Bidder is a corporation, write State of Incorporation; if a partnership, give full names and addresses of all parties below. Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs List of Subcontractors, FORM B Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs List of Subcontractors – FORM B Page 2 of 2 October 28, 2024 End of Form Authorized Signature: Title: Printed Name: Address: City: State: Zip Code: Date: Telephone: Fax: Washington Contractor's License No.: Federal Tax ID #: E‐mail address: Washington State UBI No.: Expiration Date: HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation - FORM C (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) – Email to: DBOODELL@rentonwa.gov 1 | P a g e Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation – FORM C +Contractor Name: Date Incorporated: Mailing Address: State Incorporated: Business Phone: Owner/President’s Name: Contact Name and Title: Other or Former Organization Name(s) Contact Phone: Contact Email: Reason for Name Change(s): PERFORMANCE EXPERIENCE • Has company been disqualified (debarred) from performing public work by State of Washington or federal government? • Yes No • Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or suits pending against company or its officers? Yes No If Yes, please describe: Judgments • Has company ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? Yes No If Yes, please describe: • Has company been obligated for liquidated damages within the past 5 years? Yes No If Yes, please describe: FINANCIAL INFORMATION 1. Average total annual value of construction work performed during the past 5 years: 2. Provide at least three trade references: • Name/Contact • Name/Contact • Name/Contact 3. Provide surety company and agent name: Surety PROJECT EXPERIENCE – Projects of Similar Scope Requiring Prevailing or Davis Bacon Wages within Past 5 Years (3 Required) PROJECT #1 Description Of Project: Original Contract Amount Final Contract Amount: Henry Moses Aquatic Center Upgrades: Location/Address: Percent of Work Performed by Own Forces: Substantial Completion Date Firm was General Contractor: Yes No If not GC, describe role: Owner Name: Architect Name: Project Required Prevailing or Davis Bacon Wages? Yes No HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation - FORM C (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) – Email to: DBOODELL@rentonwa.gov 2 | P a g e Contractor Qualifications/Evaluation – FORM C Phone: Phone: Email: Email: PROJECT #2 Description Of Project: Original Contract Amount Final Contract Amount: Henry Moses Aquatic Center Upgrades: Location/Address: Percent of Work Performed by Own Forces: Substantial Completion Date Firm was General Contractor: Yes No If not GC, describe role: Owner Name: Architect Name: Project Required Prevailing or Davis Bacon Wages? Yes No Phone: Phone: Email: Email: PROJECT #3 Description Of Project: Original Contract Amount Final Contract Amount: Henry Moses Aquatic Center Upgrades: Location/Address: Percent of Work Performed by Own Forces: Substantial Completion Date Firm was General Contractor: Yes No If not GC, describe role Owner Name: Architect Name: Project Required Prevailing or Davis Bacon Wages? Yes No Phone: Phone: Email: Email: Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs Qualifications of Project Key Personnel – FORM D (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) Email to: dboodell@rentonwa.gov Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs Qualifications of Project Key Personnel – FORM D Page 1 of 2 PROJECT MANAGER Name: Current Position with Company: Years’ Experience Total With Current Firm Firm Name and Location (City and State): Training/Education/Specialization: Years of Experience in the Proposed Role: RELEVANT PROJECT 1 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 2 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 3 of 3 (Minimum) Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm Name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs Qualifications of Project Key Personnel – FORM D (Must submit within 2 Business Days following Bid Submittal) Email to: dboodell@rentonwa.gov Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs Qualifications of Project Key Personnel – FORM D Page 2 of 2 SUPERINTENDENT Name: Current Position with Company: Years’ Experience Total With Current Firm Firm Name and Location (City and State): Training/Education/Specialization: Years of Experience in the Proposed Role: RELEVANT PROJECT 1 of 3 Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 2 of 3 Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: RELEVANT PROJECT 3 of 3 Project Title: Year Completed Project Owner: Brief Description (Brief scope, size, cost, etc.) and specific role: Check if project performed with current firm. If performed with different firm list the firm Name Reference Name & Contact Information: Project Owner: Architect: Name: Name: Phone: Phone: E-mail E-mail: End of Form Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs Contract Bond – FORM E 12/05/2022 Page 1 of 2 Contract Bond to the CITY of Renton 01/03/2023 F clb Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs CONTRACT BOND TO THE CITY OF RENTON Bond No. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, (CONTRACTOR/PRINCIPAL) of [address] as PRINCIPAL , and (SURETY) a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of as a SURETY corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become SURETY upon bonds of contractors with municipal corporations, as SURETY , are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the City of Renton (CITY/OWNER) in the sum of US Dollars ($ ) Total Contract Amount, for the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our heirs, successors, assigns, executors, administrators and personal representatives, as the case may be. This obligation is entered into pursuant to the laws of the State of Washington and the ordinances of the City of Renton. Dated at , Washington, this day of , 20 . NOW, THEREFORE THE CONDITIONS OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION ARE AS FOLLOWS: WHEREAS, under and pursuant to Contract No. CAG‐Number providing for construction of the HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER UPGRADES and SITE ; the PRINCIPAL has accepted, or is about to accept, the Contract, and undertake to perform the Work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth. • The SURETY indemnifies, defends, and protects and holds the CITY/OWNER, its officers, agents, and assigns harmless from and against all claims, liabilities, causes of action, damages, and costs for such payments for labor, equipment, and materials by satisfying all claims and demands incurred under the Contract, and reimbursing and paying CITY/OWNER all expenses that CITY/OWNER may incur in making good any default by PRINCIPAL; and, against any claim of direct or indirect loss resulting from the failure of the PRINCIPAL, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, (or the subcontractors or lower tier subcontractors of the PRINCIPAL) to pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors material persons, and all persons who shall supply such contractor or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of such work; and, against any claim of direct or indirect loss resulting from the failure of the PRINCIPAL, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns (or any of the employees, subcontractors, or lower tier subcontractors of the PRINCIPAL) to faithfully perform the Contract. • The indemnities to CITY/OWNER shall also inure to the benefit of the Consulting Engineers and other design professionals retained by OWNER in connection with the Project. • No change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to be performed under the Contract shall in any way affect SURETY 's obligation on the Contract Bond. SURETY , for value received, hereby waives notice of any change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract or the Work to be performed thereunder and agrees that modifications and changes to the terms and conditions of the Contract that increase the total amount to be paid the PRINCIPAL shall automatically increase the obligation of the SURETY on this Contract Bond and notice to SURETY is not required for such increased obligation. Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs Contract Bond – FORM E 12/05/2022 Page 2 of 2 Contract Bond to the CITY of Renton 01/03/2023 F clb Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs • This Contract Bond shall be governed and construed by the laws of the State of Washington, and venue shall be in King County, Washington. FURTHERMORE, this Contract Bond shall be satisfied and released only upon the conditions that PRINCIPAL or SURETY: • Faithfully performs all provisions of the Contract and changes authorized by CITY/OWNER in the manner and within the time specified as may be extended under the Contract; • Pay, in accordance with Chapters 39.08, 39.12 and 60.28 Revised Code of Washington (RCW), the sums due all workers, laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors, material suppliers, and all other persons or agents who supply labor, equipment, or materials for carrying on of such work under the Contract; • Pay all taxes, increases and penalties, if any, incurred on or related to the Contract under Titles 50 and 51 Revised Code of Washington (RCW) and any and all taxes imposed on the Principle under Title 82 RCW or any other law; • Receives a written discharge/release of bond from CITY, signed by the Mayor or by a duly authorized representative of CITY. This Contract Bond shall be executed in two (2) original counterparts, and shall be signed by the parties’ duly authorized officers. This Contract Bond will only be accepted if is accompanied by a fully executed and original power of attorney for the office executing on behalf of the SURETY. [PRINCIPAL] [SURETY] [Signature of Authorized Official] [Signature of Authorized Official] [Printed Name] [Printed Name] [Title] [Title] [Date] [Date] Name and address of local office of Agent and/or SURETY Company: Telephone: PRINCIPAL SURETY DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 10 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of contract. 3. Permits, fees and bonds. 4. Work sequence 5. Owner's occupancy requirements. 6. Contractor use of site and premises. 7. Work restrictions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 01 50 00 “Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section. 1.03 PROJECT A. Henry Moses Aquatic Center Upgrades: Renton City Hall – HR Tenant Improvements 1. Owner's Name: City of Renton 2. Architect’s Name: Firm Name 3. The Project consists of the following: Brief Scope of Work with date of Contract Documents 1.04 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: Single General Construction Contract based on a single lump-sum price as described in Division 00 11 13 – Advertisement for Bids. 1.05 PERMITS, FEES AND BONDS A. The Owner will obtain and pay for the Building Permit prior to a Notice to Proceed. B. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all Plumbing, Electrical, Mechanical and any other permits as required by the City of Renton and other regulatory agencies. 1.06 WORK SEQUENCE DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 10 00 - 2 October 28, 2024 A. The work will be a single project with Notice to Proceed (NTP) and Substantial Completion dates. 1. Anticipated Notice to Proceed: January 6, 2024. 2. Substantial Completion Date: NTP + 120 Days. B. The Contractor shall schedule and supervise the work to accomplish completion within the contract time. 1.07 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Renton City Hall is occupied 24/7 and 365 days per year. Cooperate with Owner to minimize disruption and to facilitate Owner's ongoing operations within City Hall. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent facilities. Schedule delivery and removal of materials and equipment to minimize disruption to Owner’s ongoing operations. Do not close any other area outside of the construction limits without written permission from Owner. 1.08 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1. Work by Others. 2. Work by Owner. C. Provide access to and from site as required by law. 1. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Work Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 10 00 - 3 October 28, 2024 D. SPECIFICATION SECTIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL CONTRACTS 1. Unless otherwise noted, all provisions of the sections listed below apply to all contracts. Specific items of work listed under individual contract descriptions constitute exceptions. 2. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. 3. Section 01 32 16 - Construction Schedule. 4. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. 5. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. 6. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. 7. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. F. WORK RESTRICTIONS 1. Hours of Operation: Per City of Renton Municipal Code 4-4-030 C.: Commercial, multi- family, new single family and other nonresidential construction activities shall be restricted to the hours between seven o’clock (7:00) a.m. and eight o’clock (8:00) p.m., Monday through Friday. No noise shall be generated Monday’s after 3:00 PM. Haul hours shall be restricted to the hours between eight-thirty (8:30) a.m. and three-thirty (3:30) p.m., Monday through Friday, and work on Saturdays shall be restricted to the hours between nine o’clock (9:00) and seven o’clock (7:00), unless otherwise approved in advance by the Owner, in conjunction with the Parks and Recreation Division. 2. Existing Services and Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt building services or utilities occupied by Owner unless permitted under the following conditions according to requirements indicated. a. Provide Owner not less than 72 hours’ notice in advance of proposed service and /or utility interruptions. b. Do not proceed without Owner's written permission. 3. Contractor will coordinate construction activities, including all deliveries and equipment movement with Public Works/Facilities staff before commencing activities in the construction area. Contractor will notify Owner of any planned construction activities outside of the defined limits of construction. 4. Other Restriction per Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 11 30 – Hazardous Materials Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 11 30 - 1 October 28, 2024 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for hazardous materials. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.03 NOT USED 1.04 CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION A. Contractor to provide the Owner with a complete list of all hazardous chemicals and other materials intended to be used during execution of the project, including storage locations. 1.05 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL A. The Contractor shall bring to the attention of the Owner any material suspected of being hazardous which is encountered during execution of the Work. The Owner will arrange for tests to determine if the material is hazardous. If the material is found to be hazardous the Owner will initiate the construction modification procedure for its abatement by the Contractor. B. Compliance with Regulations: All work shall comply with the applicable laws, regulations and requirements. The disposal of any hazardous materials encountered shall also comply with the requirements of applicable federal, state and municipal safety and health requirements. Where there is a conflict between applicable regulations, the most stringent shall apply. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 12 00 – Delegated Design Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Upgrades 01 12 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable) PART 1 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 2 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 14 00 – Work Restrictions Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Upgrades 01 14 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 PART 1 - GENERAL 7.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 7.02 USE OF PREMISES A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, keep roadways, building entryways, pathways and sidewalks clear and available to Owner, the general public and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. 2. Schedule deliveries to minimize disruption of ongoing Owner activities minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. B. Work Hours: 1. Weekdays (Monday through Friday): 5 a.m. to 5 p.m. 2. Weekday Evenings (Monday through Friday) after 5 p.m. – With Advance Owner Approval 3. Weekends: a. Saturday: 5 a.m. to 5 p.m. - With Advance Owner Approval b. Sunday and Holidays (City of Renton official recognized): No work permitted. 7.03 NOISE CONTROL A. Schedule loud noise generating activities (roto-hammers, core-drilling, impact tools, etc.) prior to 8 a.m.(or after 5 p.m. with advance Owner approval) B. No noise shall be generated which is audible outside of the work area after 3:00 p.m. on Mondays PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 20 00 – Payment Procedures Contract No. 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 20 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 PART 1 GENERAL 7.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time. C. Modification procedures. D. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. 7.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. See General Conditions all requirements pertaining to retainage. 7.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Format: On 8-1/2" X 11" paper. B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. C. Submit printed schedule on form acceptable to the Owner and Architect. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. D. Submit for Owner and Architect approval, electronic format of Schedule of Values, a minimum of 15 days before first Application for Payment submittal. Approved Schedule of Values will be used by the Owner and Architect as the basis for review and approval of progress payments. E. Format: Schedule of Values shall breakdown the total Contract Sum to each category of work utilizing the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. 1. Site mobilization shall not exceed 5% of Contract Sum. 2. Construction closeout shall not be less than 3% of Contract Sum. 3. For each line item exceeding 5% of Contract Sum, show breakdown by material and labor/installation. 4. Cross reference Schedule of Values amounts to the Construction Progress Schedule scheduled tasks with specified in Section 01 32 16 – Construction Schedule. 5. Round figures to nearest dollar amount. 6. Make sum of total scheduled costs equal to Contract Sum. 7. Major cost items, which are not directly a cost of actual work-in-place may be either shown as items in schedule of values or included in General Conditions, mobilization and/or demobilization at Contractor's option. F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders – listing Change Order Proposals (COP), with each Application for Payment. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 20 00 – Payment Procedures Contract No. 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 20 00 - 2 October 28, 2024 7.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement, if not stipulated, at monthly intervals. B. Prior to first Application for Payment, submit approved Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages forms for Contractor and all subcontractors. Without exception, processing of an Application for Payment will not begin until approved copies are on file with Owner for each classification of laborers, workers, or mechanics employed by Contractor or subcontractors included in that Application. 1. Submit a list of all subcontractors and suppliers. 2. Submit instructions to Owner for the disposition of retainage funds. a. In accordance with chapter 60.28 of the Revised Code of Washington (RCW), Owner shall reserve a contract retainage not to exceed Five percent of the moneys earned by Contractor as trust fund for the protection and payment of: 1) The claims of any person and Owner arising in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2) The state with respect to taxes imposed pursuant to Title 82 RCW which may be due from such Contractor. b. The funds held in retainage shall be held until forty-five (45) days following Final Acceptance subject to the provisions of chapters 39.12 and 60.28 RCW. c. Contractor's written instructions should be addressed to the Owner with a copy to the Architect. d. At the option of Contractor, the moneys reserved by Owner shall be either: 1) Retained in a fund by Owner. 2) Bonded for all or any portion of the contract retainage in a form acceptable to Owner; or 3) Deposited in an interest-bearing account in a bank, mutual savings bank, or savings and loan association. 4) Placed in escrow with a bank or trust company by Owner. (a) Escrow Agent: If the retained funds are to be placed in escrow, Contractor will select the escrow agent, subject to approval by Owner. The selected agent must be a bank or trust company in the State of Washington. (b) Pursuant to electing the escrow option, an escrow agreement shall be executed by Contractor, Owner, and bank. Three copies of the agreement should be completed and executed by Contractor and returned to Owner for joint execution, who in turn will forward all copies to the bank for receipt and acceptance. The bank will retain one copy and return one copy each to Contractor and Owner. A completed and signed escrow agreement must be on file with Owner for payment before Contractor's first application is processed. (c) Escrow Payments: As each progress estimate is presented for payment, DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 20 00 – Payment Procedures Contract No. 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 20 00 - 3 October 28, 2024 Contractor shall make a vouchered request for the retained funds that are to be placed in escrow. Upon receiving a retainage invoice, Owner will issue a check payable to Contractor and the bank jointly. Such checks will be mailed to the bank and Contractor will receive copies of check transmittal letters. (d) Escrow Investments: The bank shall invest the retained funds in bonds and other securities selected by Contractor from the following list approved by Owner: (1) Bills, certificates, notes or bonds of the United States. (2) Other obligations of the United States or its agencies. (3) Obligations of any corporation wholly owned by the government of the United States. (4) Indebtedness of the Federal National Mortgage Association. (5) Time deposits in commercial banks, mutual savings banks, and savings and loan associations in the State of Washington. (e) Deposits in savings accounts in commercial banks, mutual savings banks, and savings and loan associations in the State of Washington. (f) The investments selected must mature on or prior to the date set for completion of the contract, including extensions thereof or forty-five (45) days following the Final Acceptance of the improvement or work. Interest on such investments shall be paid to Contractor as it accrues. (g) Escrow Costs and Fees: All escrow costs and fees shall be paid by Contractor, in accordance with the Escrow Agreement. (h) Release of Escrow Investments to Contractor: Upon Final Acceptance and the expiration of forty-five (45) days following the date of Acceptance, and contingent upon Contractor's compliance with provisions of the public works statutes, Owner will issue written instructions to the bank to release to Contractor the investment held in escrow. If there should be either unpaid taxes or other unsatisfied claims against the retained percentage, the provisions of the Escrow Agreement will govern. C. Submit draft Application for Payment to Owner and Architect for approval 10 days prior to submittal of actual Application for Payment. D. Present required information in digital form. E. Form: As approved by the Owner and Architect (Use AIA G701/702 or similar) F. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. G. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed. H. List each authorized Change Order with each Change Order Proposal listed as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. I. Submit one signed digital image of each Application for Payment. J. Include the following with the application: 1. Construction progress schedule revised and current as specified in Section 01 32 16. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 20 00 – Payment Procedures Contract No. 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 20 00 - 4 October 28, 2024 2. Conditional release of liens from Contractor, major Subcontractors and vendors. 3. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products if any per General Conditions. 4. Statements of Intents to Pay Prevailing Wages as documented by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries for each contractor or subcontractor included on the Pay Application. 5. List with Contractor, sub-contractors, and all sub-sub-contractors invoice amounts, UBI number, and Affidavit of Intent’s number. 6. Copies of Certified Payroll from Contractor and all sub-contractors. K. When Owner or Architect require substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 7.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Owner or Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on Owner's standard form. B. For other required changes, Owner or Architect may issue a Field Authorization (FA) signed by the Owner, A/E and Contractor instructing Contractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes, will identify an initial estimate of the probable cost of any changes, and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change. C. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Owner or Architect will issue a request for Change Order Proposal (COP) that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 5 days. D. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Owner and Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation. E. Computation of Change in Contract Sum: Will be as specified in the Agreement and the General Conditions. 1. For change requested by Owner for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be based on Contractor's price quotation. 2. For change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Owner. 3. For change ordered by Owner without a quotation from Contractor, the amount will be determined by Owner based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 20 00 – Payment Procedures Contract No. 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 20 00 - 5 October 28, 2024 F. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. Provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. f. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. 2. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. G. Execution of Change Orders: Owner will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. H. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item listing each COP and adjust the Contract Price. I. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub- schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. J. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 7.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. Closeout procedures specified in Section 01 70 00. 2. Contractor's Certification of Payment of Debts Claims. 3. Contractor's Certificate of Release of Liens. 4. Owner's and Architect’s approval of Closeout submittals specified in Section 01 78 00. 5. Completion of punchlist with Owner’s and Architect’s approval. 6. Completion of all Change Orders. 7. Submittal of Affidavit of wages paid for Contractor and subcontractors. 8. L&I release. 9. Sign-off of all required permits. 10. Posting of Certificate of Occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs Section 01 21 00 – Prevailing Wage Rates Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 21 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This project, located in King County Washington, is subject to the payment of prevailing wages to all workers. It is the contractor’s responsibility to determine and use the applicable rates for the appropriate area of the state, as published by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. These rates are available on the web at https://lni.wa.gov/licensing‐ permits/public‐works‐projects/prevailing‐wage‐rates/. 1. Contractor must include these provisions in all subcontracts for work performed under this Contract. B. Based in the bid submittal deadline for this project, the applicable effective date for prevailing wages for this project is date bids opened. Upon written request, the Owner will mail a hard copy of the applicable prevailing wages for this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 05 December 2022 October 28, 2024 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs - Permit | Bid PROJECT No. CAG 24-218 01 25 00 - 1/4 Substitution Procedures SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES Procedural requirements for proposed substitutions. RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 00 21 13 ‐ Instructions to Bidders: Restrictions on timing of substitution requests. DEFINITIONS Substitutions: Changes from Contract Documents requirements proposed by Contractor to materials, products, assemblies, and equipment. Substitutions for Cause: Proposed due to changed Project circumstances beyond Contractor's control. Unavailability. Regulatory changes. Reduction in contract time.. Reduction in contract sum. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CSI/CSC Form 1.5C ‐ Substitution Request (During the Bidding/Negotiating Stage) Current Edition. B. CSI/CSC Form 13.1A ‐ Substitution Request (After the Bidding/Negotiating Phase) Current Edition. PART 2 PRODUCTS ‐ NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A Substitution Request for products, assemblies, materials, and equipment constitutes a representation that the submitter: Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product, equipment, assembly, or system. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. Agrees to provide same or equivalent maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable. 05 December 2022 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs - Permit | Bid October 28, 2024 Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 2/4 Project No. CAG 24-218 Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the work to be complete, with no additional cost to Owner. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. Agrees to reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re‐ approval by authorities. A Substitution Request for specified installer constitutes a representation that the submitter: Has acted in good faith to obtain services of specified installer, but was unable to come to commercial, or other terms. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer. Note explicitly any non‐compliant characteristics. Content: Include information necessary for tracking the status of each Substitution Request, and information necessary to provide an actionable response. Forms indicated in the Project Manual are adequate for this purpose, and must be used. Limit each request to a single proposed substitution item. Submit an electronic document, combining the request form with supporting data into single document. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING PROCUREMENT Submittal Time Restrictions: Instructions to Bidders specifies time restrictions and the documents required for submitting substitution requests during the bidding period. Submittal Form (before award of contract): Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 1.5C ‐ Substitution Request. See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission are unacceptable. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING CONSTRUCTION Submittal Form (after award of contract): Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 13.1A ‐ Substitution Request (After Bidding/Negotiating). See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission are unacceptable. Submit request for Substitution for Cause within 14 days of discovery of need for substitution, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Architect, in order to stay on 05 December 2022 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs - Permit | Bid Set October 28,2024 Project No. CAG 24-218 01 25 00 - 3/4 Substitution Procedures approved project schedule. Substitutions will not be considered under one or more of the following circumstances: When they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without having received prior approval. Without a separate written request. RESOLUTION Architect may request additional information and documentation prior to rendering a decision. Provide this data in an expeditious manner. Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. Architect's decision following review of proposed substitution will be noted on the submitted form. ACCEPTANCE Accepted substitutions change the work of the Project. They will be documented and incorporated into work of the project by Change Order, Construction Change Directive, Architectural Supplementary Instructions, or similar instruments provided for in the Conditions of the Contract. CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES See Section 01 78 00 ‐ Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals. Include completed Substitution Request Forms as part of the Project record. Include both approved and rejected Requests. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 30 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Administration and supervisory personnel. B. Communication procedures. C. Project meetings. D. Preconstruction meeting. E. Site mobilization meeting. F. Progress meetings. G. Coordination procedures. H. Submittal Types. I. Submittals for review and information. J. Number of copies of submittals. K. Submittal procedures. L. Daily Progress reports. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary of Work: Work sequence and Owner occupancy. C. Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of schedules. D. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. E. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. F. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Personnel list: For principal staff assignments. Include areas of responsibility, addresses, and phone numbers for 24-hour-contact. Include back-up personnel. B. Coordination drawings. C. Superintendent Daily Reports: Submit at progress meeting intervals, as approved by Owner and Architect. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 30 00 - 2 October 28, 2024 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. Provide designated Project Manager, Superintendent and other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 3.02 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES A. General 1. Address all Project correspondence through Architect. Do not contact Architect’s or Owner’s consultants directly, unless directed otherwise. Contractor's subcontractors will not directly contact the Owner, Architect, or Architect’s sub consultants. 2. Architect will issue all instructions, whether verbal or written. No other instructions will be recognized. Architect to coordinate all decisions and communications with the Owner. Architect will confirm verbal instructions in writing to Contractor. a. Exception: Minor clarifications may be confirmed in site reports or meeting minutes. 3. Format: Number correspondence sequentially beginning with Serial Letter No. 1. Include project title and number on all correspondence. B. Requests for Information 1. When field conditions or Contract Documents require clarification or verification by the Architect or Architect’s sub consultants, submit a written Request for Information (RFI) to the Architect. 2. Format: Number RFI's sequentially using a consistent form approved by Owner and Architect, containing the following information: a. Henry Moses Aquatic Center Upgrades and number. b. RFI number (three digits, beginning with 001). c. Date of request. d. Date of required response. e. Subject title. f. Initiator of request. g. Contract Document reference (drawing and/or specification). h. Location on site. i. Description of issue. j. Contractor's proposed solution, if known. k. Cost impacts, if known. l. Space adequate for Architect's review acknowledgement and reply. 3. Provide only one question per RFI. 4. Route RFI's in same manner as Project correspondence. 5. Allow 10 working days for Architect to issue response. 6. Owner and Architect reserve the right to deny any RFI whose resolution is already contained within the Contract Documents. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 30 00 - 3 October 28, 2024 3.03 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Preconstruction Meeting 1. Owner will schedule a meeting to take place before or on the date for Notice to Proceed. 2. Attendance Required: a. Owner. b. Architect and selected consultants. c. Contractor, including Project Manager, Superintendent, - and major site related subcontractors. d. 3. Agenda: a. Distribution of Contract Documents. b. Designation of project personnel. c. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, and substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, Record drawings and Contract closeout. d. Scheduling, early occupancy. e. Working hours. f. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. g. Construction related air quality control procedures. h. Safety. i. Security. j. Site access, traffic control, parking availability. 4. Contractor will record minutes and provide copies to Architect and Owner for their distribution to all parties affected by decisions or actions resulting from the meeting. B. Progress Meetings 1. Attend progress meetings at approved intervals or as required by the Owner and Architect. Coordinate meeting schedule with preparation of applications for payment. 2. Owner will prepare agenda and preside at meetings. 3. Attendance Required: a. Owner. b. Architect and required sub consultants. c. Contractor, including Project Manager, Superintendent. d. Others as appropriate, such as but not limited to; Major Subcontractors, Suppliers, Manufacturers Representatives, and Consultants. 4. Agenda: a. Safety Report. b. Review minutes of previous meetings for any discrepancies and correct or approve. c. Review of Work progress since previous meeting. d. Look Ahead Schedule: Provide three (3) week look ahead simplified bar chart schedule coordinated and interfaced with project CPM schedule. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 30 00 - 4 October 28, 2024 e. Coordination issues, field observations, problems, and decisions. f. Identification of problems that impede, will impede, or present the potential for impeding planned progress. Identify corrective measures to regain projected schedules. g. Review Non-conforming work and status of correction. h. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. i. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. j. Review Requests for Information status. k. Review issuance of Supplemental Instructions. l. Review Contract Modifications status, including any effect on coordination and progress schedule. m. Maintenance of quality and work standards. n. Other business relating to Work. 5. Contractor will record minutes and provide copies to Architect and Owner for their distribution to all parties affected by decisions or actions resulting from the meeting. a. Required performance results. b. Protection of construction and personnel. 3.04 COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordinate construction operations to ensure orderly and efficient installation of each part of the Work, with due consideration of those features of the Work dependent on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. Ensure full accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. Make adequate accommodations for items scheduled for installation by others. B. When necessary to assure coordination, provide memoranda for distribution to each party involved, describing special coordination procedures. Include such items as required notices, reports, and meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner, Architect and separate contractors if coordination of their work is required. C. Coordination Meetings: Contractor will conduct coordination meetings at appropriate intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress and pre-installation meetings. 1. Required Attendees: a. Architect, and Architect’s consultants, as required b. Contractor c. Superintendent d. Subcontractors e. Suppliers f. Other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities. 2. Agenda: a. Scheduling. b. Interface requirements. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 30 00 - 5 October 28, 2024 c. Off-site fabrication. d. Access requirements. e. Site utilization. f. Temporary facilities and controls. g. Quality standards. 3.05 SUBMITTAL TYPES A. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard published data. Product data includes, as applicable, manufacturer's catalog cuts, written recommendations, specifications, and installation instructions; factory installed wiring diagrams; printed performance curves; operational range diagrams; compliance with recognized standards; testing agency labels, and other standard information. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. B. Shop Drawings: Project-specific information as depicted through fabrication and installation drawings, dimensions (field and factory), roughing -in and setting diagrams, design calculations, coordination requirements, and other project-specific information. C. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's accurately printed or actual samples showing full range of available features, options, colors, textures, and patterns. D. Samples for Verification: Project-specific samples of actual products, illustrating functional and aesthetic characteristics and including all integral parts and attachment devices. Provide actual finishes in selected colors, textures, and patterns. E. Schedules: A form of shop drawing, typically presented in tabular form and summarizing key features of the Work. Not to be confused with construction progress schedule specified in Section 01 32 16. F. Qualification Data: Written information demonstrating the capabilities and experience of a firm or person. G. Certificates: Written statements certifying compliance with requirements. Submit product, installer, manufacturer, and material certificates on manufacturer's letterhead. Submit welding certificates on AWS or WABO forms or as required by authorities having jurisdiction. H. Test Reports: Reports written by a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results of materials or products for compliance with requirements. I. Inspection Reports: Reports written by a qualified inspection agency, indicating and interpreting inspection results of materials, products, or assemblies for compliance with requirements. J. Research/Evaluation Reports: Written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code(s) in effect for Project. K. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. L. Project Record Documents, Operation & Maintenance Data, and Warranties and Bonds: DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 30 00 - 6 October 28, 2024 Combination of submittal types, submitted at project closeout. See Section 01 78 00. N. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit directly to Owner and Architect O. Others as indicated. 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR ARCHITECT’S REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. 5. Schedules. 6. Qualification Data. 7. Division 1 submittals (plans, construction progress schedules, lists, reports, closeout submittals, etc.) specified in individual Division 1 sections. B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Permits. 6. Other types as indicated. B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Submittals may be submitted electronically in a format or system acceptable to the Architect . Access to the document shall not require special programming, software, or other proprietary systems. Shop Drawings may be submitted electronically but will also require submission of one full-size printed copy. At the completion of the project, the contractor shall provide a complied digital record on a storage device acceptable to the Architect and Owner. Additionally, they shall provide and DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 30 00 - 7 October 28, 2024 one physical copy of all project submittals, organized by specification sections and contained in 3-ring binders with tabs, titles, and edge identification. B. Superintendents Daily Report 1. For each Project calendar day beginning with the date of Notice to Proceed, prepare a report concerning events at the Project site as follows: a. List of subcontractors on site. b. Number of personnel on site, and general responsibilities. c. Equipment on site. d. Material deliveries. e. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. f. Accidents. g. Meetings and significant decisions. h. Unusual events, as described under Special Reports below. i. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. j. Emergency procedures. k. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. l. Supplemental Instructions received and implemented. m. Change Orders received and implemented. n. Field Authorizations received, and documentation of activities covered under same. o. Services connected and disconnected. p. Equipment or system tests and startups. Electronically transmit the daily reports to the Owner and Architect at Progress Meetings. 2. Special Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not directly related to the Work, prepare and submit a special report directly to the Owner and Architect within one day of the occurrence. List chain of events, persons participating, and response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar information. Advise Owner and Architect in advance when these events are known or predictable. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank 05 December 2022 SECTION 01 30 01 ELECTRONIC DATA REQUEST AND AGREEMENT DATE: REQUESTOR'S NAME: REQUESTOR'S ADDRESS: REQUESTOR'S PHONE: E‐MAIL: TO: Architect Firm Attention: Name Address Phone: Number Email: Email RE: HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER UPGRADES: Name PROJECT NUMBER: Number Provision of Electronic Data Dear : Requestor hereby requests the following electronic data for subject project: PROVIDE DESCRIPTION OF REQUESTED INFORMATION HERE: Requestor understands that the information contained therein may change during the course of the project. Requestor will use the information only as follows: PROVIDE DESCRIPTION OF USE HERE: Requestor acknowledges the following: ARCHITECT FIRM. is not responsible for any modifications to this data, whether intentional or unintentional, without ARCHITECT FIRM’s participation. All copyrights assigned to this data or portions of it shall remain the property of the original copyright holders. Although ARCHITECT FIRM. will make every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of information provided, ARCHITECT FIRM will not be responsible for inaccuracy or incompleteness. Because of the differences among the many available software and hardware systems and the different ways in which various systems represent drawing elements, it is not possible to ensure complete, accurate information. Signature Printed Name END OF SECTION Project No. CAG 24-218 Electronic Data Request and Agreement 01 30 01 - 1/2 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs - Permit | Bid September 16,2024 This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 32 16 – Construction Schedule Project No. CAG 24-218 01 32 16 - 1 October 28, 2024 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: For work sequence, Owner occupancy, and Owner-furnished items. C. Section 01 20 00 - Payment Procedures: For schedule of values. D. Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements: For superintendent's daily progress reports. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Comply with AGC (CPSM) - Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual; Associated General Contractors of America; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Construction Progress Schedule: Indicate complete construction sequence, from Notice to Proceed through Final Completion. 1. Submit within 7 days of Notice to Proceed. 2. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. 3. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTENT A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. 1. Break down work so that no activity is longer than 21 days, unless allowed by Owner. 2. List submittals, materials and installation as separate line items. 3. List all permit submittals showing submittal and anticipated issuance dates. 4. List all Owner supplied material delivery dates on schedule. 5. List all Work by Owner completion dates on schedule. B. Identify each activity by specification section number. C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 32 16 – Construction Schedule Project No. CAG 24-218 01 32 16 - 2 October 28, 2024 D. Indicate procurement activities for long-lead and major items, including submittal, approval, and fabrication activities. See Section 01 30 00 for submittal review durations. E. Coordinate content with schedule of values specified in Section 01 20 00. F. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used. G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification, and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using the current approved schedule to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 3.02 BAR CHARTS A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B. Identify the first workday of each week. 3.03 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Owner and Architect at each submittal. B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule. C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 5 days. 3.04 UPDATING SCHEDULE A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity. C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work. D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes. E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes. G. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on the schedule. Report corrective action taken or proposed and its effect. 3.05 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to General Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers, Architect and to the Owner. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. END OF SECTION DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Administrative and procedural requirements for Quality assurance and Quality control. B. Mock-ups. C. Control of installation. D. Tolerances. E. Testing and inspection agencies and services. F. Control of installation. G. Tolerances. H. Manufacturers' field services. I. Defect Assessment. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 01 42 00 - Definitions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements. A. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. B. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Quality Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and to ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work used to evaluate that actual product incorporated into the Work comply with requirements. Services do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, for submittal procedures. B. Project Quality Plan (PQP): Submit within 14 days of the Notice to Proceed a written plan detailing the organization and procedures proposed to achieve quality assurance and quality control so that materials, products, workmanship, on-site and off-site fabrication, construction, and operations are in compliance with the Contract Documents and within generally accepted quality standards for similar work. Demonstrate a thorough knowledge of DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 2 October 28, 2024 Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs Contract requirements. The PQP is intended to function as a "living document," anticipating requirements and documenting results. At minimum, the PQP will include the following: 1. Qualification Data: For Contractor-provided testing agencies, to demonstrate their capabilities and experience, include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent agency inspection report performed by a recognized authority. 2. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: For all required tests and inspections. Prepare in tabular form and include the following: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Description of test or inspection. c. Identification of applicable standards. d. Identification of test and inspection methods. e. Number/frequency of tests and inspections required. f. Time schedule (or time span) for tests and inspections. g. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. h. Requirements for obtaining samples. i. Unique characteristics of each quality control service. 3. Test and Inspection Log: For use in Part 3 of this Section. C. Superintendent Daily Reports: Submit at bi-monthly intervals. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Delegated Design: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor, provide products and systems complying with indicated performance and design criteria, or where not indicated, with performance and design criteria of authorities having jurisdiction. In addition to shop drawings, product data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include the list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional legally qualified to practice in the State of Washington and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. B. Basic Quality Assurance Qualifications: Wherever the Specifications refer to installers, manufacturers, fabricators, specialists, or factory-authorized service representatives, provide entities with the following qualifications: DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 3 October 28, 2024 Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 1. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in -service performance. 3. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 4. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities be performed by recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. a. Requirements for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. 5. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. 1.07 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent Testing Agency to perform construction materials testing and inspections services as indicated under the Structural General Notes in the drawings. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Preconstruction Testing: Where approval of materials, products, or equipment depends on existing test results or preconstruction testing not specifically assigned to the Owner's Testing Agency, Contractor shall provide evidence of test results or, if necessary, shall arrange and pay for testing agency services. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL-recognized, NVLAP-accredited, or independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548, and with additional qualifications specified in individual sections and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Owner and Architect will consider requests for Substitutions up to 10 days prior to bid opening date. Approved Substitutions will be listed on Addenda. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 4 October 28, 2024 Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs B. Substitutions may be considered after bid opening only when a Product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder/Contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed substitution Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified Product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified Product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. All substitution requests shall be accompanied with the Substitution Request Form, completely filled out. Substitution Request Forms are found in the Specifications in Section 01 40 10. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step-in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 5 October 28, 2024 Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 MOCK-UPS A. Before installing portions of the Work where mock-ups are required, construct mock-ups in location and size indicated for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. The purpose of mock-up is to demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. B. Provide supervisory personnel who will oversee mock-up construction. Provide workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. C. Assemble and erect Mock-ups with specified materials, components, attachments, anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. D. Obtain Architect’s 's approval of mock-ups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 1Architect will issue written comments within seven (7) working days of initial review and each subsequent follow up review of each mock-up. 2. Make corrections as necessary until Architect’s approval is issued. E. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. F. Mock-ups will be removed at completion of construction unless specified to remain. Where allowed to remain, protect from all damage. G. Where possible salvage and recycle the demolished mock-up materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Tolerances will not be cumulative. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.04 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare and maintain a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date of test or inspection. 2. Description of Work tested or inspected. 3. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. 4. Test or inspection results. 5. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect and Owner. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 6 October 28, 2024 Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs B. Maintain log at Project site. Post additions and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Owner's and Architect’s reference during normal working hours and prior to each Application for Payment. 3.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Owner and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Owner, Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non- conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Owner. 6. Attend preconstruction meetings. 7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Cooperate with laboratory personnel and provide access to the Work. 2. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 3. Schedule tests and inspections with Testing Agency. Notify Owner, Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 4. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 5. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 7 October 28, 2024 Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Owner. E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Sum. 3.06 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.07 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to contract document requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Owner, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Owner and Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. C. Maintain a Log of Non-conforming work, tracking items from instance of identification to resolution. 3.08 SUPERINDENDENT DAILY REPORTS A. Write daily reports for each calendar day, beginning with date of Notice to Proceed, on form(s) approved by Owner and Architect. Daily Reports will be factual records containing numerical data of the Work and quality assurance and control activities. Identify deficiencies in daily reports and in Non-Conforming Work Log as they occur and as they are resolved. Do not address production issues unless they impact quality assurance or quality control. B. Superintendent shall sign and date all reports. Verification shall include a statement that all materials and products incorporated into the Work are in compliance with the terms of the Contract except as noted. C. Submit copies of daily reports at each Progress Meeting. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 50 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telecommunications services. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: barriers, enclosures, fencing, etc. E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Waste removal facilities and services. H. Field offices. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. 1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including but not limited to, Owner, Architect, consultants, occupants of the project, testing agencies and authorities having jurisdiction. B. All costs associated with preparing utilities for use is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. C. Usage costs for temporary site utilities will be provided the Contractor. 1.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to project site at time of project mobilization. 1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. NA 1.06 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction and staging/storage areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Protect stored materials, site, and structures from damage. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 50 00 - 2 October 28, 2024 1.07 FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. No orange roll-up type fencing is allowed. B. Provide 6 foot (1.8 m) high fence around each construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.08 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide, operate, and maintain a complete plan for fabricating, handling, conveying, installing and erecting all Work required under the Contract. Maintain materials and equipment in safe and efficient operating condition. Contractor shall be responsible for damages due to defective materials and equipment and uses made thereof. B. Furnish, install, and maintain for the duration of construction all required barricades, canopies, warning signs, steps, bridges, platforms and other temporary construction necessary for proper completion of the work. Maintain in compliance with all pertinent safety and other regulations. 1.09 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.10 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Comply with regulations relating to use of park sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles. B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering pedestrian walkways, parking areas, park roads, and city streets. D. Comply with City traffic and parking regulations. E. Traffic Control Plan: Contractor will prepare, obtain and maintain a Traffic Control Plan approval and permit from the City of Renton for all work associated with Union Avenue and work for the park project. F. Delivery and Storage: Conduct operations in such a manner as to avoid unnecessary interference to existing pedestrian and vehicle traffic. Do not park vehicles in traffic lanes. Provide flag persons, and traffic control signs and devices as required. Notify Owner in advance of any unusually long or large deliveries. Storage of materials adjacent to the Project site outside of the construction fence is not permitted unless authorized by the Owner. 1.11 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. Owner will indicate location of any facilities required outside of work area. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site on a regular basis as needed. C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 50 00 - 3 October 28, 2024 non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.12 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Not Required 1.13 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL-rated, with extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposure. 1.14 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. D. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specify condition. 1.15 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to: 1. Building code requirements 2. Health and safety regulations 3. Utility company regulations 4. Police, Fire department and rescue squad rules 5. Environmental protection regulations B. Standards: 1. General: Comply with the following: a. NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations". b. ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition". 2. Recommendations: Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services" prepared jointly by AGC and ASC for industry recommendations. 3. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electrical service. Install service in compliance with NEC (NFPA 70). C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.16 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions of Use: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 50 00 - 4 October 28, 2024 efficient manner. 2. Take necessary fire prevention measures. 3. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with Owner's operations. 4. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. 1.17 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Facilities Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility connections, staging areas and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule for Owner's approval indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility provision. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 58 00 – Temporary Project Signage Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 58 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 NOT USED This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 70 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances. C. Pre-installation meetings. D. Cutting and patching. E. Surveying for laying out the work. F. Cleaning and protection. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures. C. Section 01 74 00 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional procedures for trash/waste removal, recycling, salvage, and reuse. D. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals: O & M, Record Drawings and other documents due at completion. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Land Surveyor (if used) B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit digital record survey for the project record in AutoCAD format. Note final location of building, site improvements, benchmarks, and utilities. C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 70 00 - 2 October 28, 2024 6. Include in request: a. Identification of Project. b. Location and description of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and products to be used. e. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor. f. Written permission of affected separate Contractor. g. Date and time work will be executed. D. Project Record Documents: Per Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in State of Washington and acceptable to Owner. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in Washington. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property. B. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. C. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations. 1.07 COORDINATION A. See Section 01 10 00 Summary of Work for occupancy-related requirements. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. C. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substructure surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 70 00 - 3 October 28, 2024 B. Verify that existing substructure is capable of structural support or attachment of the work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or mis-fabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Demolition: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during demolition. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of demolition means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a pre-installation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Owner four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Owner of any discrepancies discovered. C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. D. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings. E. Promptly report to Owner the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 70 00 - 4 October 28, 2024 F. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Owner. G. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. H. Establish a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. I. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. J. Periodically verify layouts by same means. K. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Saw cut existing work smooth to avoid damage to existing work to remain. 3. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 4. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 5. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 6. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 7. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 8. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 9. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. C. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill: 1. To complete the work. 2. To uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work. 3. To remove and replace defective or non-conforming work. 4. To remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 70 00 - 5 October 28, 2024 5. To provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical, and other services. 6. To execute patching to complement adjacent work. 7. To fit materials and products to integrate with other work. D. Execute work by methods, saw cutting, that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Cutting: 1. Cut work by methods that will not damage work to be retained and work adjoining. Review proposed procedure(s) with original installer where possible and comply with its recommendations. 2. Where cutting is required, cut work with sawing, drilling, coring and grinding tools. Pneumatic hammering and chopping tools not allowed without prior approval. J. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. Patch with seams which are durable and invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances of the work. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and, where necessary, extend finish restoration onto retained work adjoining in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching. 3. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work. 4. Match color, texture, and appearance. 5. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. 3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 70 00 - 6 October 28, 2024 3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect cast concrete to remain exposed in the finished building, finished floors, stairs, roofing and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.09 CLOSE-OUT COORDINATION A. See Section 01 10 00 for occupancy-related requirements. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow Coordination Drawings routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. 3.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Substantial Completion is defined in the General Conditions DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 70 00 - 7 October 28, 2024 B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request, provide detailed work plan to complete each item and anticipated dates of completion. 1. Submit Contractor's Punch List. For each item, include the dollar value of Work remaining, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Submit substantial completion checklist. 3. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit initial Operation and Maintenance Manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 7. Participate in commissioning in accordance with individual specification section requirements. 8. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 11. Complete final cleaning requirements. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Owner and Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. During inspection, Owner /Architect will verify submitted Contractor's Punch List and will add or deduct items as necessary to form the Owner’s/Architect’s Substantial Completion Punch List. The Owner’s/Architect’s Substantial Completion Punch List will subsequently be provided to the Contractor for resolution. Owner/Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on the Contractor's Punch List or the Owner’s/ Architect’s Substantial Completion Punch List that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: If, following Owner’s/Architect’s inspection, Certificate of Substantial Completion is not granted, request re-inspection when the Work identified as incomplete is completed or corrected. Unless waived by Owner, a deductive Change Order for A/E costs will be executed for all Substantial Completion re-inspections. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. D. Checklist: In order to certify, Substantial Completion, all elements on the Substantial Completion Checklist (attached to this section) MUST be complete. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 70 00 - 8 October 28, 2024 3.11 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 2. Submit copy of Engineer's Substantial Completion Punch List, with signed and dated certification by the QAM stating that every item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, final Operation and Maintenance Manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, accessory keys, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Except where impractical, provide parts and materials in original unopened packaging. Permanently label all accessory keys. 6. Complete any deferred testing as defined in technical specifications. 7. Submit pest-control final inspection report and certification. 8. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 9. Submit Application for Final Payment and required support documentation and certifications according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements and notify Owner of their findings. Owner will certify Application for Final Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Unless waived by Owner, a deductive Change Order for A/E costs will be executed for Final Completion re-inspections greater than one in number. C. Checklist: In order to certify, Final Completion, all elements on the Final Completion Checklist (attached to this section) MUST be complete. 3.12 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (CONTRACTOR'S PUNCH LIST) A. General: The QAM shall prepare a single list of items to be completed and corrected. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use layout provided in electronic format by Engineer. Submit three copies of list. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 70 00 - 9 October 28, 2024 3.13 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. E. Clean site: sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. F. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. END OF SECTION This page intentionally left blank DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 74 00 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 74 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible. B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. D. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration: 1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers. 2. Corrugated cardboard. 3. Wood pallets. 4. Treated wood. 5. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping, reinforcing bars, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze. 6. Glass. 7. Plastic sheeting. E. Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implement these requirements. F. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying. G. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, State, and King County requirements, Ordinance 18166 codified in King County Code Chapter 10.30, Construction and Demolition Waste, and City of Renton requirements pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. C. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 74 00 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 74 00 - 2 October 28, 2024 D. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, adhesives, glues, or the like. B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, repair and demolition operations. C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitability, corrosively, toxicity or reactivity. D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitability, corrosively, toxicity, or reactivity. E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water. M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information: 1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project construction cycle, including types and quantities. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 74 00 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 74 00 - 3 October 28, 2024 2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s) where trash/waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s). 3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse, salvage, or recycling. 4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction, recycling, salvage, reuse, and disposal. 5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by designated facilities; include separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and packaging. 6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled, i.e. whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler. C. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report. 1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit Report will delay payment. 2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner. 3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills. c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 4. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), date removed from the project site, and receiving party. c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration. 5. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters). c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity. 6. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to disposal method. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 74 00 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 74 00 - 4 October 28, 2024 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 30 00 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. B. See Section 01 50 00 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. C. See Section 01 70 00 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. 3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Engineer. C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings. 1. Pre-construction meeting. 2. Regular job-site meetings. E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. 1. Provide containers as required. Location of containers to be left on site shall be designated by Owner. Assume remote parking lot if exterior containers are required. 2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations. G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site. END OF SECTION DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals 01 78 00 - 1 October 28, 2024 Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. B. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. C. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. Substantial Completion and Final Completions Checklists. D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Owner with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit PDF preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents at least 10 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Owner/Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Owner/Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. Provide original hardcopy in binder and digital copy as PDF, provide tabs for all future items. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 78 00 - 2 October 28, 2024 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one full-size set of full-size hard copy black and white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Identification: In red ink and block letters, label each Record Drawing, including cover sheets, "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location on title block. Show all addenda changes on the applicable drawing sheet or specification section. 2. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to pre pare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 3. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Changes made by Change Order. d. Changes made by Supplemental Instruction. e. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. f. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. g. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 4. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 5. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other reproducible colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 6. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 7. Note alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, Supplemental Instruction numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Engineer determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 78 00 - 3 October 28, 2024 2. Consult Owner for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. Include title blocks matching original drawings and assign appropriate sheet numbers. C. Binding: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets and create organized, tabbed PDFs at full scale. Include identification on cover sheets and tabs. 3.02 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. General: Annotate by striking out products/manufacturers not included in the work to provide a record of selections made. 1. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. B. Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications. Include addenda and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Create a PDF copy with each section tabbed. 3.03 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Where the actual product or installation varies substantially from that indicated in previously submitted and approved Product Data, submit Record Product Data marked to indicate actual condition. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 4. Where Record Product Data is required as part of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. 3.04 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Provide full size PDFs in an organized and tabbed file for miscellaneous records and identify each. 3.05 O&M MANUALS, GENERAL A. Provide PDF files that are organized by section and file and fully tabbed and labeled. Provide files in original size, oriented and rotated in the document to read from top to bottom or screen. Scan or save files at a resolution suitable to clearly read all information at original size. Do not use overly large file sizes. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 78 00 - 4 October 28, 2024 furnished by multiple sources, assemble and coordinate information into a comprehensive whole. Eliminate all redundant, inapplicable, or unnecessary information so that submitted documentation reflects only actual installation. The QAM is responsible for final assembly of manuals. B. Identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." C. Directory: Provide a separate directory PDF file summarizing the contents of all O&M Manuals. Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each O&M Manual. 2. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to O&M Manuals that contain information about each system, and separate references to Specification Sections in which each system or subsystem is addressed. 3. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. E. Title Page: Tab and label the title page. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Engineer. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other O&M Manuals. F. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HENRY MOSES AQUATIC CENTER MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Project No. CAG 24-218 Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance and Repairs 01 78 00 - 5 October 28, 2024 G. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Files: Documents shall be submitted as electronic PDFs. a. If two or more files are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other files if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each file," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. Use layout supplied by Owner in electronic format approved by Owner. 2. Drawings: Scan at original size at resolution suitable to read all documentation on the drawing sheet. Do not use higher than necessary resolution resulting in overly large files. 3.06 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE COMPONENT OF O&M MANUALS A. Content: Organize digital PDF manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cr oss-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 3.07 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE COMPONENT OF O&M MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 3.08 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. Warranties shall be submitted in hard copy and electronic copy forms per the below instructions for format. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 279 mm) three D side ring binders with durable plastic no-print-transfer-type covers. F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal. G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item. H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. END OF SECTION HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS TEMPORARY EROSION SEDIMENT CONTROL OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 6 01 57 13 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work includes, but is not limited to: TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL (TESC) MEASURES, WHICH ARE SHOWN ON the Contract Documents, proposed by the Contractor and reviewed and required by public Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) during the life of the Contract. This Work is intended to prevent, control and provide abatement for water pollution and erosion resulting from the Project site construction and to minimize damage to the Work, adjacent property, and to other bodies of water in accordance with NPDES, AHJ and other applicable standards. Preparation of and submission to AHJ for their review the Contractor’s Construction Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). The SWPPP shall include overall TESC management and coordination of construction access and specific TESC installation and maintenance. Submittal of wet weather permit, dewatering permits and other permits related to Contractor operations shall also be included. Protection of public and private drainage systems. Protection of existing natural and constructed drainage systems at all times. B. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to modify the TESC plan(s) as necessary to meet the Contractor’s anticipated construction sequencing and means and methods for the Work. Modifications to the TESC Plans and specifications need to be adequately described in the Contractor’s SWPPP and submitted to AHJ for review. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference the following standards: AHJ Public Authority Having Jurisdiction AHJ is an abbreviation for public Authorities Having Jurisdiction. For this project the AHJ includes permitting agencies including but not limited to the City of Renton. BMPs Best Management Practices per COR SWDM & Ecology SWM COR SWDM City of Renton Surface Water Design Manual, 2022 (www.rentonwa.gov/city_hall/public_works/utility_systems/surfac e_water_utility_engineering/surface_water_design_standards) Ecology SWM State of Washington Department of Ecology Stormwater Management Manual for Western Washington, 2019. (www.ecy.wa.gov/programs/wq/stormwater/manual.html) NPDES NPDES Stormwater Discharge Permit for Construction http://www.ecy.wa.gov/programs/wq/stormwater/construction/ind ex.html WAC 173-201A Washington Administrative Code Chapter 173-201A, Water Quality Standards for Surface Waters of the State of Washington HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS TEMPORARY EROSION SEDIMENT CONTROL OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 6 01 57 13 WAC 173-200 Washington Administrative Code Chapter 173-200, Water Quality Standards for Groundwaters of the State of Washington WSDOT Washington Department of Transportation 2023 Standard Specifications and Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following documents in accordance with Division 01 of the Specifications. Prepare, provide and submit to AHJ a Construction Stormwater Pollution and Prevention Plan (SWPPP) signed by the Contractor describing TESC controls, locations, phasing, implementation schedule, contingency measures, inspection procedures, maintenance, monitoring, recordkeeping forms, and similar information, sequencing approach to TESC removal and similar information to fully describe the TESC plan. The Contractor shall revise and resubmit SWPPP to address comments from AHJ. The SWPPP shall be in accordance with COR SWDSM/WSDOT Section 8-01 and include written narrative and plan sheets. Provide product data on TESC materials and BMPs to be utilized. At end of each working day, complete reports for water quality monitoring and TESC inspection. B. Permits Obtain the permits, pay fees and schedule inspections by AHJ as needed for work in this Section. Submit copy of approved permits obtained. C. Certified Erosion and Sediment Control Lead (CESCL)/Erosion and Sediment Control Lead (ESC Lead) a. The Certified Erosion and Sediment Control Lead (CESCL)/Erosion and Sediment Control Lead (ESC Lead) shall be responsible for implementing and maintaining effective TESC to prevent violations of the NPDES permit and AHJ permits. The designated lead shall meet the requirements of COR SWDSM/WSDOT Section 8-01.3(1)B and the following: The designated CESCL/ESC Lead shall have current certification and a minimum of two years in the State of Washington Department of Ecology’s training and certification program for Certified Erosion and Sediment Control Lead (https://ecology.wa.gov/Regulations-Permits/Permits- certifications/Certified-erosion-sediment-control). Submit copy of certification verifying current certification. Identified by the designee’s certification in the SWPPP/TESC Plan submittal. Experienced with a minimum of three projects of similar nature listed on the resume identifying project name and location, year constructed, owner, contact name and phone number. D. CESCL/ESC Lead Back-up The CESCL/ESC Lead Back-up shall be responsible for implementing and maintaining effective TESC to prevent violations of the NPDES/AHJ Permits. The backup shall have: HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS TEMPORARY EROSION SEDIMENT CONTROL OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 6 01 57 13 a. Current certification and a minimum of two years in the State of Washington Department of Ecology’s training and certification program for Certified Erosion and Sediment Control Lead (https://ecology.wa.gov/Regulations- Permits/Permits-certifications/Certified-erosion-sediment-control). Submit copy of certification verifying current certification. b. Identified by the designee’s certification in the SWPPP/TESC Plan submittal. c. Experienced with a minimum of one project of similar nature listed on the resume identifying project name and location, owner, contact name and phone number. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Washed Gravel shall be Mineral Aggregate Type 4. B. Inlet/Catch Basin Protection shall be in accordance with WSDOT Section 8-01.3(9)D for Below Inlet Grate such as Ultra DrainGuard®, StreamGuard® Sediment Catch Basin Insert, #3003, or an approved equivalent product. Insert shall be appropriately sized for the structure in which it is installed. C. Filter Fabric Fence/Silt Fence: conform to detail as noted on Plans. Geotextile shall conform to WSDOT Sections 8-01.3(9) and 9-33.1 for temporary silt fence. D. Additional Erosion Control Measures: Provide in accordance with AHJ, the NPDES permit and/or Ecology, whichever is more stringent. E. Wheel Wash: conform to NW Equipment Sales and Leasing Inc. Self-Contained Portable “The Soaker” wheel wash or approved equivalent product or provide approach identified and detailed in the SWPPP for AHJ review. F. Clearing limits fencing: orange plastic safety construction fencing and per WSDOT Section 9-14.6(8) and WSDOT Standard Plan I-10.10-01. G. Stabilized Construction Entrance: conform to details on Drawings or an approach identified and detailed in the SWPPP for AHJ review. Filter Fabric conform to Mirafi® 140N or approved equivalent product. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall designate a CESCL/ESC Lead and CESCL/ESC Lead back-up to be responsible for implementing and maintaining effective TESC to prevent violations of the NPDES permit, AHJ permit(s) and other permits. The designated lead shall: Be certified as indicated in Part 1. Attend the AHJ Preconstruction Meeting(s). Inspect the TESC measures daily and after storm events and keep a daily TESC site inspection log of the TESC measures on site. The log shall be made available at all times to AHJ Inspector, Owner’s Representative, and/or Owner. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS TEMPORARY EROSION SEDIMENT CONTROL OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 6 01 57 13 B. Arrange for a AHJ inspection of the TESC facilities after initial installation and prior to starting any demolition, clearing, stripping, grading and/or utility operations. Obtain approval of the first installation of TESC facilities from the AHJ Inspector. The Owner’s SDCI Geotechnical Special Inspector shall participate in the inspection. C. Install clearing limits fence for Owner’s Representative and SDCI Geotechnical Special Inspector’s/AHJ Inspector’s review and approval. Do not begin clearing until approval has been obtained. D. Perform TESC measures in accordance with the requirements of this Section, WSDOT Section 8-01, the AHJ permits and requirements by other AHJ. 3.2 INSTALLATION, COORDINATION AND MAINTENANCE A. Coordinate, install and maintain the TESC measures in accordance with the SWPPP/TESC Plan, Manufacturer's specifications and recommendations, AHJ, and Ecology whichever is more stringent. Coordinate and upgrade, revise or add additional TESC measures as needed to achieve compliance with the Project NPDES permit, related City permits and prevent sediment transport to surface waters, drainage systems, and adjacent properties. a. The TESC measures shown on the Contract Documents are shown for AHJ permitting purposes only. The contractor is solely responsible for all means and methods and sequencing of TESC measures. b. Install and sequence TESC measures as appropriate for the Contractor’s actual construction activities and phasing. c. Install, maintain and upgrade TESC measures to conform with AHJ and Owner requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. Coordinate and maintain TESC measures so that they function properly. a. Inspect daily and record inspection results. b. Promptly clean, repair, secure, replace or take other steps as necessary keep TESC measures properly functioning. Clean accumulated sediment away from filter fabric fences, inlet protection or other sediment traps. c. Monitor water quality to verify compliance with the NPDES permit and related AHJ permits. Report violations of the permits immediately to the Owner’s Representative. Immediately implement contingencies described within the Contractor prepared AHJ reviewed SWPPP and install additional measures to correct violations and achieve compliance with the permits. Pay fines resulting from violations of the NPDES permit and other permits at no additional cost to the Owner. Cover exposed stockpiles if exposed for more than 24 hours or when rain and/or severe wind are forecasted. a. Install plastic covering per WSDOT Section 8-01.3(5). b. Cover stockpiles with plastic. Anchor the plastic to maintain cover in place and adjust as required to maintain full cover after wind or other event. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS TEMPORARY EROSION SEDIMENT CONTROL OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 6 01 57 13 B. Construct stabilized construction entrance(s) and wheel wash(s) at point of construction ingress and egress at AHJ approved location(s) identified in the SWPPP. Wheel washes shall be adequately sized and identified per the SWPPP to clean mud and debris from wheels, tires, suspension, frame and body of all vehicles exiting the Project as necessary to prevent tracking of mud and debris onto public roadways and newly paved areas. Number and location described on Plans is minimum unless otherwise determined by the AHJ and shown in the SWPPP. Contractor responsible for controlling ingress and egress points appropriate for approved access shown in the SWPPP. C. Use phased demolition, clearing, grubbing and stripping to minimize disturbance of soil and erosion potential. D. Clean catch basins, inlets and area drains in and adjacent to identified work area(s) prior to proceeding with Work in that area. Mud and sediment build-up shall be removed and the cleaning operation shall not flush sediment-laden water and sediment into natural or constructed systems, including but not limited to infiltration facilities, porous pavement, catch basins, inlets and area drains. Provide catch basin protection for existing catch basins, inlets and area drains in and adjacent to work area. Provide catch basin protection for catch basins, inlets and area drains following installation, until site paving and landscaping are completed and the site is stabilized and established. E. Keep existing and new drainage systems properly functioning at all times, in accordance with the SWPPP and TESC Plan and drawings, including but not limited to: Clean catch basins, inlets and conveyance systems prior to beginning Work. Do not allow sediment-laden stormwater to enter onsite catch basins and inlets prior to treatment. Do not allow more than six inches of sediment to accumulate within catch basins, temporary ditches, gutters or other on-site structures. Do not allow sediment to discharge or filter into permanent storm drainage facilities such as infiltration facilities, porous pavement, natural drainage systems and within the tree, vegetation and soil protection zones. Inlet and catch basin protection devices shall be cleaned or removed and replaced when sediment has filled one-third of the available storage (unless a different standard is specified by the product manufacturer). Do not allow sediment build-up within offsite catch basins, inlets, gutters and other drainage features. Install and regularly clean catch basin inserts in all area drains, inlets and catch basins in accordance with SDCI/AHJ requirements. Install silt fence and wattles as noted on Plans, SWPPP and as dictated by Contractor’s means and methods. Maintain and remove accumulated sediment build-up behind silt fence and wattles or other TESC controls. F. Do not allow sediment or other debris to accumulate offsite on adjoining public or private property. Clean up such accumulations immediately at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 SPILL PREVENTION CONTROL AND COUNTERMEASURES PLAN A. General: Locate storage areas for toxic or hazardous materials in such a manner that spilled materials will not enter the storm drainage system. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS TEMPORARY EROSION SEDIMENT CONTROL OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 6 01 57 13 Provide secondary containment around those areas designated for toxics or hazardous materials to prevent spills from entering storm drainage systems. Locate vehicle parking areas so that spilled fuel or oil will not enter the storm drainage system. Locate decontamination and toxic and hazardous waste storage areas in such a manner that spilled materials will not enter the storm drainage system. B. Protect storm drain inlets, swales, drain curb cuts and other entry points to storm drain system with materials or devices such that spills do not enter the storm drainage system. C. Spill Clean-Up: Notify Owner’s Representative immediately if toxic or hazardous materials are spilled. Notify the Washington State Department of Ecology and AHJ Inspector/SDCI Geotechnical Special Inspector/ SDCI Site Development Inspector immediately following a spill of a toxic or hazardous material. Clean up spills promptly and completely, and in accordance with AHJ requirements. Report as required to AHJ. 3.4 WET SEASON GRADING A. See SDCI/AHJ requirements and the notes on the drawings for special requirements associated with grading operations between October 31 and April 1. Contractor shall be responsible for documentation and process necessary to obtain a permit with specific requirements due to Contractor’s mean, methods and operations. 3.5 TESC REMOVAL AND CLEANUP A. Upon completion of improvements and when areas upstream are stabilized from erosion and approval is obtained from the owner and AHJ Inspector/SDCI Geotechnical Special Inspector and SDCI Site Development Inspector, remove TESC measures. Identify in writing if removal operations deviate from the SWPPP and/or TESC Plan submitted. END OF SECTION HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 9 02 41 19 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Demolition and removal of site pavements, wall, trench drain, splash pad, utility vault, landscape boulders, and landscaping. Locating, disconnecting, capping or sealing, retiring, abandoning in-place or removing utilities. Locating, disconnecting, capping or sealing, retiring, abandoning in-place or removing service utilities. Removal and disposal of debris, unsuitables, and concrete rubble. Removal and disposal of vegetation, trees and other unwanted materials. Removal of debris and/or rubbish. Documenting demolition of existing utilities. Removal and salvage of sculpture. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate with related Work specified in other parts of the Project Manual. B. Coordinate with the General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions in the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose/recycle off-site in accordance with Section 01 74 19 – Demolition and Construction Waste Management unless indicated to be removed and salvaged. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment elsewhere. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Reference the following standards: AHJ Public Authority Having Jurisdiction AHJ is an abbreviation for public Authorities Having Jurisdiction. For this project the AHJ includes permitting agencies including but not limited to City of Renton. WISHA Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act. Revised Code of Washington (RCW) Chapter 49.17 WAC Washington Administrative Code (WAC) 296-155 Standards for Construction Work AHJ BC Building Code as adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 9 02 41 19 PSCAA Puget Sound Clean Air Agency (Regulations I, II and III available by writing, calling, or visiting the agency). L & I Washington State Labor & Industries Regulations. 1.5 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes the property of the Contractor. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information in conformance with submittal procedures noted in Division 01. Copies of operating permits for disposal and recycle sites. Demolition Plan for the Owner’s information: a. Schedule of demolition activities indicating the following: b. Detailed sequence of demolition and removal Work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. c. Narrative describing demolition and removal procedures for each activity. d. Proposed legal dump sites, legal recycling sites, and legal landfills for demolition and land clearing debris. e. Traffic control and haul routes. f. Conditions Survey of structures or features potentially affected by demolition and construction activities. g. Measures to protect adjacent structures and other features to remain from damage. h. Contingency measures if damage occurs from construction activity. Photographs sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction, structures, trees and vegetation to be retained, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Label photos to describe location, direction, date of photo and significant features. Coordinate with Section 01 32 33 – Photographic Documentation. Landfill and/or recycling records indicating receipt and acceptance of wastes by a landfill and/or recycling facility licensed to accept those wastes. Copies of trip tickets for all material transported to approved landfills and/or recyclers. The Contractor may secure its own demolition debris, asphalt, concrete and creosote materials disposal or recycle site(s) provided it has acquired all permits and approvals necessary from governing agencies and the Owner’s Representative in writing. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing PSCAA and Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) notification regulations before starting demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of AHJ. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 9 02 41 19 C. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. D. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site In addition to the meeting requirements in Section 01 31 19 – Project Meetings address the following: Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be demolished. Review and finalize protection requirements. Review procedures for noise control and dust control. Review procedures for protection of adjacent buildings. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of elements to be removed, demolished, retired or abandoned. Conditions existing at time of inspection for proposal purposes will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. B. If any materials suspected of containing asbestos are encountered see General Conditions and notify the Owner’ immediately. C. Buildings immediately adjacent to demolition area will be occupied. Conduct demolition so use of and access to occupied buildings will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 7 days written notice to Owner's Representative of activities that will affect operations of adjacent occupied buildings. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings. a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. b. Long-term, onsite storage, or the sale of removed items or materials will not be permitted. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Verify existing utility locations and elevations per Section 31 10 00 – Site Preparation. Contact the Underground Location Center to locate and mark utilities not less than 4 working days and not more than 10 working days before beginning demolition or Earthwork. Immediately notify Owner of potential conflicts to allow for mitigation without down time. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 9 02 41 19 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with all applicable Federal, State and Local codes and safety regulations. If there are any conflicts among referenced standards, the more stringent requirement shall govern. B. Notify affected utility companies before starting Work and comply with any and all of their requirements. Coordinate demolition Work with utility companies. Obtain all required permits and pay fees from the appropriate AHJ prior to closing or obstructing roadways, bus stops, sidewalks, hydrants and fire lanes. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify acquisition of required permits and permission from AHJs. B. Inventory and record the existing conditions to remain within and adjacent to the area of Work including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by work operations. Comply with Section 01 32 33 – Photographic Documentation. Submit before the Work begins. C. Schedule and attend pre-demolition conferences with the Owner and other AHJs impacted by the work. Notify Owner of the meeting times and locations a minimum of five business days prior to the meeting. D. Prior to beginning demolition, meet with Owner and review demolition plan and schedule. Coordinate removal of landscape materials and sculpture with Owner’s Representative. E. Verify Construction Stormwater and Erosion Control (CSEC) measures have been installed correctly, refer to Section 01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. F. Verify that demolition of pavements, curb, gutter, structures, vegetation/trees and utilities may safely and appropriately begin. G. Verify that clearing, grubbing, stripping and demolition may safely and appropriately begin. H. Prior to beginning demolition verify a Survey of Existing Conditions, as described elsewhere in this section, has been performed and submitted for information. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers, high visibility flagging, construction fencing and security procedures at gates to prevent unauthorized personnel from entering Project Site, and to prevent damage to existing structures, areas, utilities, vegetation and other facilities or features. B. Maintain, modify, add and upgrade construction stormwater erosion and sediment control measures (reference Section 01 57 13 – Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control). C. Existing Utilities: See Section 31 10 00 – Site Preparation for locating, identifying, disconnecting, and sealing or capping utilities. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 9 02 41 19 If removal, relocation, retirement or abandonment of utilities will affect adjacent occupied buildings, then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures. 3.4 ACCESS A. Maintain vehicular, bicycle and pedestrian traffic and safety routes. B. Minimize interference with public use of roads, streets, alleys, parking, sidewalks, and adjacent facilities. In accordance with City of Renton requirements, provide alternate routes and temporary structures around closed or obstructed traffic ways including for pedestrian, bicycle, ADA access and vehicular access. Do not close or obstruct streets, fire lanes, sidewalks, alleys, bicycle lanes, parking or passageways without permission from Owner, City and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 3.5 PROTECTION A. The Contractor is responsible for review of all surveys, utility provider records, Owner records, and City of Renton records relative to the existing underground utilities. The Contractor is responsible for avoiding damage to these facilities and shall restore all damaged utilities at Contractor’s own expense. B. Ensure safe passage of persons and traffic around areas of demolition. Provide flaggers and alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways as required. Provide and maintain temporary fences, barricades, guardrails, security devices, flashing lights, covered passageways and similar items as required to provide adequate protection against injury or damage to persons or property. Provide barriers that physically prevent passage of pedestrians and vehicles into unsafe areas and excavations. C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated. Comply with requirements in Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls. Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around demolition areas and to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures. Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior features that are to remain and that are exposed to demolition operations. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust, noise, and dirt migration to occupied portions of adjacent buildings. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 9 02 41 19 Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place. D. Protect existing bench marks, monuments, control markers and other reference points. If disturbed, missing or destroyed, replace as directed at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Protect existing utilities, structures, fences, catch basins, utility services, sidewalks, paving, curbs, vegetation, trees and other items designated to remain from injury or damage due to Work of this Section. Restore existing facilities or features impacted during performance of the Work, by means and methods or damaged by construction activity to their original condition as acceptable to the Owner including, but not limited to landscaping, pavement, walks, channelization, structures, utilities, fences, trees and planters, at no additional cost to the Owner. a. Coordinate with Survey of Existing Conditions requirements as described elsewhere in this section. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and AHJs. a. Cooperate with Owner’s Representative, utility companies, and the City of Renton for maintaining and protecting utilities that are to remain. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and AHJs. a. Provide at least ten business days’ notice to occupants of affected buildings if shutdown of service is required during changeover. Provide (including design and permitting if required) interior and exterior shoring, bracing or support to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of adjacent facilities to remain. Comply with WISHA, WAC 296-155, and local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Slope and/or shore the sides of excavations and trenches to comply with WISHA, WAC 296-155, and local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe manner until backfilling is complete. Conduct operations to prevent injury to persons, adjacent buildings, structures, areas, facilities, improvements and landscaping. Maintain hauling routes clean and free of debris resulting from Work of this Project. Protect Environmentally Critical Areas (ECA) (steep slopes), and ECA buffers from disturbance unless noted otherwise. Objectionable noises: limit use of air hammers and other noisy equipment. Conform with Local governing requirements regarding noise control. Maintain vehicular and pedestrian safety routes: a. Ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, alleys, sidewalks, bus zones and routes, and adjacent facilities. b. Do not close or obstruct streets, fire lanes, sidewalks, bus stops, alleys or passageways without permission from AHJ. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 7 of 9 02 41 19 c. If required by governing authorities, provide alternate routes and bus stops around closed or obstructed traffic ways. 3.6 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. 3.7 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Use water mist, temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. Do not create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding and pollution, when using water. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas or along route during offsite disposal. Hose off and clean trucks and wheels before leaving site as specified in 01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. 3.8 DEMOLITION A. General Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 1 hour after flame cutting operations. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and AHJ. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by AHJ. C. Below-Grade Demolition: Completely remove below-grade construction including concrete slabs and buried debris unless noted otherwise. On the project record documents provide as-built information of the locations of below grade demolition. D. Remove and dispose of pavement, slabs on grade, stairs, walls, structures, landscaping, rockeries, piping, and other obstructions with appurtenances where noted in the Contract Documents, where new improvements are to be constructed, and in areas to be cleared unless noted otherwise. All hardscape removals shall be accomplished by making a neat vertical saw cut at the limits of removal. All concrete walk, pavement, curb and gutter removals shall be sawcut at the next adjacent joint beyond the limits of demolition. E. Remove and dispose of any rubbish or debris encountered as required to perform demolition and install proposed improvements. Coordinate with Section 01 74 19 – Demolition and Construction Waste Management. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 8 of 9 02 41 19 F. Adjacent facilities designated to remain that are damaged by the Contractor’s operations shall be promptly repaired at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Sprinkle excavated material and access roads as necessary to limit dust to the lowest practicable level. Do not use water to such an extent as to cause flooding, contaminated runoff, pollution or icing. H. Open pits and holes caused by demolition Work shall be kept free of standing water. I. Remove and properly dispose of offsite debris, unsuitables, and concrete rubble. 3.9 BACKFILLING AND GRADING A. Backfill and compact with fill material as specified in Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork, areas excavated, open pits, trenches and holes caused as a result of demolition and removal of existing buried debris and foundations. Grade as required to meet adjacent grades and contours, unless noted otherwise, to provide surface flow to drainage structures, and to prevent ponding in building demolition areas. B. Prior to placement of backfill materials, ensure that areas to be filled are free of standing water, frost, frozen material, debris, trash and organic matter. C. Restore existing surfacing, unless indicated otherwise. D. Backfill demolished utility excavations per 31 00 00 - Earthwork. 3.10 TREE REMOVAL A. Remove trees as indicated in the Contract Documents. Removal operations shall be performed in a manner to protect property, adjacent features and structures to remain. All trees larger than two-inch caliper designated for removal shall be flagged for approval of Owner's Representative prior to demolition or removal. Notify Owner’s Representative at least 7 days in advance of scheduled tree removal. Completely remove all miscellaneous growth including but not limited to large roots and sucker shoots. 3.11 DISPOSAL A. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Onsite storage or sale of removed items is prohibited. C. The refuse resulting from demolition, stripping, clearing, grubbing and site preparation shall be disposed of by the Contractor in a manner consistent with all government regulations. Coordinate with Section 01 74 19 – Demolition and Construction Waste Management. In no case shall refuse material be left on the Project Site, shoved onto abutting private properties, or be buried in embankments or trenches on the Project Site. Debris shall not be deposited in any stream or body of water, in any public right-of-way, or upon any private property, except by written consent of the private property owner. Burning of materials in HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 9 of 9 02 41 19 these areas falls under the jurisdiction of the City of Renton regulations, and is forbidden under all circumstances. D. Completely remove demolished materials, debris, rubbish, trash, organic materials and other refuse items from site, and dispose of in a legal manner. Maintain hauling routes (including offsite) clean and free of debris resulting from the performance of Contract requirements. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spil lage on adjacent surfaces and areas, or along route during offsite disposal. 3.12 RECYCLING AND REUSE ONSITE OF DEMOLISHED HARDSCAPES A. Material recycled and reused onsite shall conform to the requirements for intended use per the Contract Documents. 3.13 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean adjacent structures, surfaces and improvements of dust, dirt and debris caused by Work of this Section and remove and dispose of debris in a legal manner. B. Remove temporary Work and leave Project Site in clean and orderly condition. C. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of Work of this Section and other Sections noted in Project Manual. D. Promptly repair damages caused by Work as acceptable to the Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. Repair damage caused to existing utilities and other improvements to remain. Repair damage caused to trees designated to remain per Owner’s Representative, using ISA-certified Arborist. Pay for damaged trees that cannot be restored to full health and growth, as determined by the Owner’s Representative per Section 01 56 39 – Tree, Plant and Soil Protection. Use only materials in repairs that are of similar size, kind and quality as original materials, as acceptable to the Owner. Use only skilled labor, trained and experienced in the particular building trade, when performing repairs. When required to perform repair Work, use licensed personnel. END OF SECTION HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 7 02 41 19 SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary of Work" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner- occupancy requirements. 2. Section 01 70 00 "Execution and Closeout Requirements" for cutting and patching procedures. 3. Section 01 74 00 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal" material disposal requriements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for store. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 7 02 41 19 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 7 02 41 19 C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 7 02 41 19 EXECUTION 2.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. C. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations. 2.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 7 02 41 19 2.4 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 2.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire- suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 1hr hours after flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 7 02 41 19 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 01 74 00 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 2.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OCTOBER 2024 Page 7 of 7 02 41 19 D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. 2.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them according to Section 01 74 00 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 00 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 2.8 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 02 41 19 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 7 03 30 00 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes excluding those elements identified in Section 32 13 13 –Cement Concrete Paving 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate with related Work specified in other parts of the Project Manual. B. Coordinate with the General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions in the Contract. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference the following standards: AHJ Public Authority Having Jurisdiction AHJ is an abbreviation for public Authorities Having Jurisdiction. For this project the AHJ includes permitting agencies including but not limited to the City of Renton. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. D. Material certificates. E. Material test reports. F. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. G. Test Results H. Concrete Formwork and Installation qualifications. I. Concrete Sandblast Sample: 3 foot x 3 foot area 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 7 03 30 00 B. Concrete formwork and installation contractor shall be a company specializing in the Work of this Section with a minimum 5 years documented experience in concrete installation of a similar nature. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M. E. Finish: Match existing finish of adjacent pool deck pavement. 1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. B. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. C. Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with weather protection. D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: ACI 301 (ACI 301M) ACI 117 (ACI 117M) 2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 60 percent. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 7 03 30 00 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, graded. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M. D. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. E. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.5 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M). HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 7 03 30 00 B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of Portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Normal-Weight Concrete: Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50 Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 (ACI 117M). C. Do not chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. Tool edges per details. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 7 03 30 00 A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 3.4 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Owner. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed. B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 7 03 30 00 D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than 7 days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. B. Inspections: Verification of use of required design mixture. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from slabs. Steel reinforcement placement. Steel reinforcement welding. C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements: Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below or 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE OCTOBER 2024 Page 7 of 7 03 30 00 Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory- cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Owner but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Owner. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Owner. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 7 05 40 00 SECTION – 054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Design-built exterior, non-load-bearing wall framing. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing, at contractor’s option for cold- formed framing substitution. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic -coating thickness. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 7 05 40 00 C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.2 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60 B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: 33. 2. Coating: G60. 2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: delegated design. 2. Flange Width: delegated design. 3. Section Properties: delegated design. B. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 7 05 40 00 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: delegated design. 2. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for one-story structures. C. Drift Clips and Deflection Tacks: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure. Provide deflection tacks where indicated on structural drawings. 2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Stud kickers and knee braces. 8. Joist hangers and end closures. 9. Hole reinforcing plates. 10. Backer plates. 2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 Grade 55, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts headless, hooked bolts headless bolts, with encased end threaded, and carbon -steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C mechanically deposition according to ASTM B 695, Class 50. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency. D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC- ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 7 05 40 00 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with flui d consistency and 30- minute working time. C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims. D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of- square tolerance of 1/8 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 7 05 40 00 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch . D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been complete d and permanent connections to framing are secured. G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built -up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 7 05 40 00 I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings. J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect drift clips to cold-formed metal framing and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging per structural drawings. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges. a. Install solid blocking at centers indicated. 2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall- framing system. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING OCTOBER 2024 Page 7 of 7 05 40 00 B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05 40 00 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS METAL FABRICATIONS OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 6 05 50 00 SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Stainless steel sheet for use in fabrication of countertops B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 123623 “Countertops” for stainless steel countertop installation 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for miscellaneous metal items. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineers. B. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS METAL FABRICATIONS OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 6 05 50 00 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one -half of pre- consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316L. 1. Stainless Steel at counter tops: 14 ga. E. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316L. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot -dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS METAL FABRICATIONS OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 6 05 50 00 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: For metals receiving high performance coatings, provide primers that comply with Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." B. Universal Shop Primer: For metals receiving coatings other than High Performance Coatings or that are galvanized or stainless steel that is to remain uncoated, provide fast -curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS METAL FABRICATIONS OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 6 05 50 00 G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150- mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 m m) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with primer specified in Section 099600 "High- Performance Coatings" where indicated to receive high performance coatings. Provide universal primer elsewhere. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim. C. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with primer specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." where indicated to receive high performance coatings. Provide universal primer elsewhere. D. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim where indicated. 2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS METAL FABRICATIONS OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 6 05 50 00 A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. 1. Stainless steel sheets at workbenches, countertops and walls to be adhesive applied, E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 3.3 A. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS METAL FABRICATIONS OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 6 05 50 00 B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION 055000 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS ROUGH CARPENTRY OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 5 06 10 00 SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing and wall panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS ROUGH CARPENTRY OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 5 06 10 00 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground and Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire - test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame- spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS ROUGH CARPENTRY OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 5 06 10 00 significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Plywood backing panels where indicated 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any of the following species: the following species: 1. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 2. Northern species; NLGA. C. Concealed Boards: 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 2. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. 1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS ROUGH CARPENTRY OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 5 06 10 00 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 as appropriate for the substrate. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 . 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. D. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls. E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS ROUGH CARPENTRY OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 5 06 10 00 G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. H. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. 3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. J. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer require d. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA - registered label. END OF SECTION 061000 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 7 07 62 00 SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications and flashings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials. B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 3. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 4. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 5. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 6. Include details of special conditions. 7. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 8. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches . C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 7 07 62 00 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in - service performance. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure: 1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 7 07 62 00 D. Recycled Content of Steel-Sheet Flashing and Trim: Postconsumer recycled content plus one - half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666], Type 316, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat surface. C. Coated Steel Sheet, Painted: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item] unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item]. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. C. Solder: 1. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 7 07 62 00 E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8 - inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 7 07 62 00 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder], protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as requi red to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 7. All horizontal flashing surfaces shall slope to drain, out to the exterior away from walls and openings, and back to the roof at parapets. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure- treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 7 07 62 00 D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F , set join t members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F . 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre -tin edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. 3. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 4. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. H. Rivets: Rivet joints in where necessary for strength. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants. D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM OCTOBER 2024 Page 7 of 7 07 62 00 completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 076200 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS JOINT SEALANTS OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 8 07 92 00 SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Polysulfide joint sealants. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. 1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. C. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS JOINT SEALANTS OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 8 07 92 00 B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint - sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F . 2. When joint substrates are wet or when they have frost, dew or dirt 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warr anty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS JOINT SEALANTS OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 8 07 92 00 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dow Corning 795 or equal products from another manufacturer, including, but not limited to the following: a. GE, Momentive SCS 2000 Silpruf b. Tremco Incorporated, Spectrem 2 2. Products for Porous Substrates: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dow Corning 790 or equal products from another manufacturer, including, but not limited to the following: a. GE, Momentive SCS 2700 Silpruf LM b. Tremco Incorporated, Spectrem 1 3. Products for Air Barriers air seals at exterior windows and doors: If Dow Corning 795 (or equal) does not adhere properly at air barriers at windows, use Dow Corning 758 (or equal). B. Multicomponent, non-sag Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Polyurethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 50, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Dynatrol II b. Tremco Dymeric 240 2.3 POLYSULFIDE JOINT SEALANTS A. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:: a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. b. DAP Products Inc. c. ITW Polymers Sealants North America (formerly Pacific Polymers, Inc.) HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS JOINT SEALANTS OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 8 07 92 00 d. Pecora Corporation e. W. R. Meadows, Inc B. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. b. Pecora Corporation C. Immersible, Multicomponent Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T and Use I. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:: a. Pecora Corporation 2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed -cell material with a surface skin, Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin, or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS JOINT SEALANTS OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 8 07 92 00 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint - sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Aluminum d. Phenolic cladding / siding. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS JOINT SEALANTS OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 8 07 92 00 B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensur e contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces -JS-#1. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS JOINT SEALANTS OCTOBER 2024 Page 7 of 8 07 92 00 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, non-sag, traffic grade, neutral curing. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-#2. 1. Joint Locations: a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between metal panels. c. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows, and louvers. 2. Silicone Joint Sealant: single component, nonsag, neutral curing. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces JS-#3. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, pourable, traffic grade, neutral curing except at pool, locker rooms, pool mechanical and associated spaces. 3. Polysulfide Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, nonsag, traffic grade at locker room, pool mechanical and associated spaces 4. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-#4. 1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. 2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, nonsag, neutral curing. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-#5. 1. Joint Sealant Location: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. 2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS JOINT SEALANTS OCTOBER 2024 Page 8 of 8 07 92 00 F. Joint-Sealant Application: joints at primary air seal if air/weather barrier cannot be achieved with Dow Corning 795, vertical and horizontal surfaces, JS-#6 1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of exterior doors and windows. 2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Dow Corning 758 (or equal). 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SECTION 079200 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 6 08 11 13 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 2. Section 099123 “Interior Painting” for primer and paint system information for hollow metal doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM- HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 4. Details of accessories. 5. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 6. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 6 08 11 13 B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4- inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY. 2. DKS Steel Door & Frame Systems, Inc. 3. Gensteel Doors, Inc. 4. Security Metal Products; a brand of ASSA ABLOY. 5. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 2.3 INTERIOR DOORS A. Construct interior doors to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy-Duty Doors: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door Schedule. 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches . c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch . d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. 3. Exposed Finish: Primer, compatible with specified paints in Section 099123 “Interior Painting.” HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 6 08 11 13 2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS A. Construct exterior doors to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Maximum-Duty Doors: SDI A250.8, Level 4. At locations indicated in the Door Schedule. 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch , with minimum A40 coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. f. Core: Polyisocyanurate. 1) Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 3. Exposed Finish: Primer, compatible with specified paints in Section 099123 “Interior Painting.” 2.5 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches , as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame -spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 6 08 11 13 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. 2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at manufacturer's discretion. 3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. 4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 6. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency. C. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive reinstalled existing hardware from original doors. E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 2. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 6 08 11 13 B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 2. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 3. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at jambs at floor. B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch . b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch . c. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch . d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch . 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 6 08 11 13 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 081113 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SLIDING ALUMINUM-CLAD GLASS WINDOWS OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 5 08 32 13 SECTION 08 32 13 - SLIDING ALUMINUM-CLAD GLASS WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes interior sliding aluminum-framed glass window and pass thru window 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions. B. Shop Drawings: For sliding aluminum-framed glass windows. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Detail attachments to other work, and between units, if any. 3. Include hardware and required clearances. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes, operable panels, and operating hardware to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sliding aluminum-framed glass window that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection. c. Excessive water leakage or air infiltration. d. Faulty operation of movable panels and hardware. e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. f. Failure of insulating glass and laminated glass. 2. Warranty Period: HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SLIDING ALUMINUM-CLAD GLASS WINDOWS OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 5 08 32 13 a. Sliding Door: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Insulating-Glass Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Laminated Glass: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. d. Aluminum Finish: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. La Cantina 2. EFCO 3. CS Laurence 4. Kawneer B. Source Limitations: Obtain sliding aluminum-framed glass doors from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PASS-THROUGH WINDOWS A. Manufactured Units: Basis of design Ultimate Multi-Slide Door, as manufactured by Marvin, Ripley, Tennessee. B. Material: CRL Ultrex and aluminum base with Vertical Grain Douglas Fir to the interior. 1. Kiln dried to moisture content no greater than twelve (12) percent at time of fabrication 2. Water repellent, preservative treated in accordance with WDMA I.S.4 C. Frame exterior aluminum clad with 1/16” (1.3mm) thick extruded aluminum D. Frame thickness: 1 31/32” (37mm) E. Standard flush sill is designed to be installed into any floor foundation; is interlocking to ensure parallelism for multiple sills. Requires a pan to be installed on site and must equal the height of the interior sill liner. 1. Sill is glass-filled polyurethane with aluminum covers and sill liners and available in Bronze and Beige. Nominal height 3/4” (19mm) and nominal width 3 1/64” (76mm) per sill track. F. Performance sill (LC-PG-40) same as the standard except with a taller interior sill liner. Requires pan to be installed on-site and must equal the height of the interior sill liner. 1. Nominal height 1 13/16” (46mm) nominal width per sill track: 3 1/64” (76mm) 2. Design feature and components include drainage system, interlocking, standard Flush Sill. G. High Performance sill (LC-PG-50) uses Flush sill with an alternate exterior liner and sloped system. Designed to be installed into a recessed opening. 1. A preservative treated, finger jointed pine sloped wedge will be provided for each section of sill track and will run the full width of the opening. Requires a pan to be installed on top of the sloped wedge and must equal the height of the interior sill liner. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SLIDING ALUMINUM-CLAD GLASS WINDOWS OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 5 08 32 13 H. Glazing: Select quality complying with ASTM C 1036. Shall comply with 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. I. Glazing Method: Tempered insulating glass (altitude adjusted) J. Dual-pane thickness: 15/16”; Tri-pane thickness: 1 1/4". K. Glass Type: Clear, Laminated, Low E2 L. Glazing Seal: Silicone bedding, exterior M. Glazing Profile: Square Interior Sticking N. Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard flush hardware set. O. Size: Per drawings. P. Lock: Multi-point lock: Two locking points that engage/disengage with keeper and provides security of the unit in the locked position. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with door members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened. B. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Provide anchors, clips, and accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron for sliding aluminum-framed glass doors, complying with ASTM B 456 or ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. 1. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Provide anchors of same design used in windborne-debris resistance testing. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate sliding aluminum-framed glass doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring doors. B. Fabricate sliding aluminum-framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling panel framing. C. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. D. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze sliding aluminum-framed glass doors in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SLIDING ALUMINUM-CLAD GLASS WINDOWS OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 5 08 32 13 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of threshold substrate, and operational clearances. C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight sliding aluminum-framed glass door installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing doors, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Coordinate with installation of countertops and casework. C. Install sliding aluminum-framed glass doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, without warp or rack of frames and panels, and without impeding thermal movement; anchored securely in place to structural support; and in proper relation to wall flashing, vapor retarders, air barriers, water/weather barriers, and other adjacent construction. D. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, to provide weathertight construction. E. Install sliding aluminum-framed glass doors and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within doors to the exterior. F. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SLIDING ALUMINUM-CLAD GLASS WINDOWS OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 5 08 32 13 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. B. Adjust operating panels and screens to provide a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation, without binding, and a weathertight closure. Adjust hardware for proper alignment, smooth operation, and proper latching without unnecessary force or excessive clearance. C. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing sliding aluminum-framed glass doors. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove nonpermanent labels, excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. E. Protect sliding aluminum-framed glass door surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances contact sliding aluminum - framed glass door surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Refinish or replace sliding aluminum-framed glass doors with damaged finishes. G. Replace damaged components. END OF SECTION 08 32 13 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS FIBERGLASS WINDOWS OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 4 08 54 13 SECTION 08 54 13 - FIBERGLASS WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglass fixed frame windows. B. Mulled-joint covers 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealants and caulking. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA 502 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Doors. 2. AAMA 623 - Voluntary Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Organic Coat- ings on Fiber Reinforced Thermoset Profiles. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 1036 - Flat Glass. 2. ASTM C 1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 3. ASTM E 283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Difference Across the Specimen. 4. ASTM E 547 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential. 5. ASTM E 1105 – Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Ex- terior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Differ - ence. C. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA): 1. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Windows shall meet Rating FW-CW-PG specifications in accordance with ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/A440-08. B. Window Air Leakage, ASTM E 283: Window air leakage when tested at 1.57 psf (25 mph) shall be 0.25 cfm/ft2 of frame or less. C. Window Water Penetration, ASTM E 547: No water penetration through window when tested un- der static pressure of 7.5 psf (54 mph) after 4 cycles of 5 minutes each, with water being applied at a rate of 5 gallons per hour per square foot. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, indicating dimensions, construction, component connections and locations, anchorage methods and locations, hardware locations, and installation details. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS FIBERGLASS WINDOWS OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 4 08 54 13 C. Samples: Submit full-size or partial full-size sample of window illustrating glazing system, quality of construction, and color of finish. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockup: 1. Provide sample installation for field testing window performance requirements and to de- termine acceptability of window installation methods. 2. Approved mockup shall represent minimum quality required for the Work. 3. Approved mockup shall remain in place within the Work. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site undamaged in manufacturer's or sales branch's original, uno- pened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying manufacturer and product name. Include installation instructions. B. Storage: 1. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Store materials off ground and under cover. 3. Protect materials from weather, direct sunlight, and construction activities. C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNTIS A. Description: Essential® Single Hung (and related stationary or picture units) as manufactured by Marvin Windows and Doors, Roanoke, Virginia. B. Or equal approved by Architect A.2 FIBERGLASS SINGLE-HUNG WINDOWS A. Frame Description 1. Interior: Pultruded reinforced fiberglass (Ultrex®), 0.070 inch (2mm) thick. 2. Frame width: 3 3/32 inch (79mm) 3. Jamb depth: 2 inch (51mm) 4. Frame Expander accessory is an insert kit shipped as ready-to-install. a. Insert kit includes four fabricated frame expander components, including head- jamb, sill and both jamb components. b. Included in both 1” and 3” frame expander options. 1.3 GLAZING 1. Select quality complying with ASTM C 1036. Insulating glass SIGMA/IGCC when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2190. STC/OITC ratings are tested to the stated performance level in accordance with ASTM E 90-09. 2. Glazing Method: 11/16” (17mm) insulating glass 3. Glass Type: Clear, Low E2 4. Glazing Seal: Silicone bedding at exterior, interior has glazing boot 5. Perimeter Spacer: Black perimeter spacer 6. Glazing Option: STC HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS FIBERGLASS WINDOWS OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 4 08 54 13 2.4 FINISH A. A. Exterior: Ultrex with a cross-head extruded acrylic organic coating system. Meets AAMA 624-10 requirements. B. Interior: Ultrex with a cross-head extruded acrylic organic coating system. C. Color: Ebony exterior with Ebony interior. (Split finishes not available on Dark Interior options) 2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Flashing/Sealant Tape: Pella SmartFlash. 1. Aluminum-foil-backed butyl window and door flashing tape. 2. Maximum Total Thickness: 0.013 inch. 3. UV resistant. 4. Verify sealant compatibility with sealant manufacturer. B. Interior Insulating-Foam Sealant: Low-expansion, low-pressure polyurethane insulating window and door foam sealant. C. Exterior Perimeter Sealant: “Pella Window and Door Installation Sealant” or equivalent high quali- ty, multi-purpose sealant as specified in the joints sealant section. C. Block Frame Installation Accessories: Vinyl installation fin with head drip flashing at new con- struction openings. 2.6 MULLION COVERS A. Mullion Covers: Standard and custom sized break metal mullion covers by fiberglass fixed frame manufacturer. B. Material: 0.050" Aluminum C. Finish: To Match Fiberglass Window Frames D. Location: Per Drawings PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive windows. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect in- stallation or subsequent use. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install windows to be weather-tight. C. Maintain alignment with adjacent work. D. Secure assembly to framed openings, plumb and square, without distortion. E. Integrate window system installation with exterior water-resistant barrier using flashing/sealant tape. Apply and integrate flashing/sealant tape with water-resistant barrier using watershed prin- ciples in accordance with window manufacturer's instructions. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS FIBERGLASS WINDOWS OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 4 08 54 13 F. Place interior seal around window perimeter to maintain continuity of building thermal and air bar- rier using insulating foam sealant. G. Seal window to exterior wall cladding with sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of assembly. H. All paints and coatings, including accessories, applied on site must comply with the VOC limits, emissions testing, and Submittal requirements for IEQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials as specified in Section 01 35 15 - LEED Certification Procedures. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Testing: Field water testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM E1105 Test Pro- cedure B. The test pressure shall be based on the maximum positive components and cladding design pressure. Utilizing the AAMA 502 field test reduction, the water test pressure is 10% of the maximum positive design pressure. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean window frames and glass in accordance with Division 1 requirements. A. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish or glass. B. Remove labels and visible markings. D. Dispose of all waste material in compliance with project’s Waste Management Plan in accordance with Section 01 74 00 - Construction Waste Management. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed windows to ensure that, except for normal weathering, windows will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 08 54 13 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS GYPSUM BOARD OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 5 09 29 00 SECTION – 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Trim accessories, joint treatment and auxiliary materials including acoustic insulation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 054000 "Cold Formed Metal Framing" for non-structural framing that supports gypsum board panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS GYPSUM BOARD OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 5 09 29 00 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Gypsum 2. CertainTeed Corporation 3. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. 4. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level 1. 1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. Expansion (control) joint. 3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T5. 4. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS GYPSUM BOARD OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 5 09 29 00 B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. All screws to be non-corrosive type for use in wet environments. Use stainless steel drill screws or other approved screws at gypsum board products installed between grids D and J and 13 and 28 on the first floor, and between grids D and G and 15 and 25 on the second floor. For fastening gypsum backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. c. Hilti, Inc; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant. d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR e. Specified Technologies, Inc; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. f. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. E. Vapor Retarder Membrane: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS GYPSUM BOARD OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 5 09 29 00 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance- rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face - layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.3 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS GYPSUM BOARD OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 5 09 29 00 B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for acoustical tile and back -of-house areas such as mechanical rooms, pool mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and elevator machine rooms. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION – 09 29 00 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 4 09 65 13 SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 4 inches long. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 300 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 4 09 65 13 B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE – RUBBER BASE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc. 2. Flexco. 3. Roppe Corporation, USA. B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous). 1. Style and Location: a. Style B, Cove C. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Preformed. G. Inside Corners: Preformed. H. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer’s standards. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 4 09 65 13 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. C. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Provide continuous silicone sealant at the base of gypsum drywall panels and cabinets, prior to installation of resilient base. C. Apply resilient base to walls, casework, and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Do not apply to columns. D. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. E. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. F. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. G. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. H. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 4 09 65 13 D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS INTERIOR PAINTING OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 6 09 91 23 SECTION – 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Gypsum board. 2. Hollow metal. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors" for shop priming structural steel. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS INTERIOR PAINTING OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 6 09 91 23 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F . 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Behr Process Corporation 2. Benjamin Moore & Co 3. Coronado Paint; Benjamin Moore Company 4. Kelly-Moore Paint Company Inc. 5. PPG Architectural Coatings. 6. Pratt & Lambert. 7. Rodda Paint Co. 8. Rust-Oleum Corporation; a subsidiary of RPM International, Inc 9. Sherwin-Williams Company (The) B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS INTERIOR PAINTING OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 6 09 91 23 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Colors: Match Architect's samples. 1. Up to thirty percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS INTERIOR PAINTING OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 6 09 91 23 E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Metal conduit. e. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 2. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS INTERIOR PAINTING OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 6 09 91 23 C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates – low gloss 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 5.1S: a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based MPI #107. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. B. Steel Substrates – semi gloss 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 5.1S: a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based MPI #107. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates – low gloss 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 5.3N: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates – semi-gloss 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 5.3N: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. E. Gypsum Board Substrates - low gloss 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. F. Gypsum Board Substrates - semi-gloss 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS INTERIOR PAINTING OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 6 09 91 23 b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. END OF SECTION – 09 91 23 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS PANEL SIGNAGE OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 5 10 14 23 SECTION 101423 - PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Panel signs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment. 2. Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign at least half size C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS PANEL SIGNAGE OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 5 10 14 23 1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows: 1. Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches square, including corner. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: For exterior signs, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1 for signs. 2.2 SIGNS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Panel Signs: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allen Markings. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS PANEL SIGNAGE OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 5 10 14 23 b. APCO Graphics, Inc. c. Mohawk Sign Systems. d. Seton Identification Products 2. Laminated-Sheet Sign: Photopolymer face sheet with raised graphics laminated over subsurface graphics to manufacturer's standard backing sheet to produce composite sheet. a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign. b. Subsurface Graphics: Reverse halftone or dot-screen image. Image to be verified c. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth. a. Edge Condition: As indicated. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: As indicated. 4. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall with two-face tape. 5. Surface Finish a. Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard baked-on clear coating. 6. Text and Typeface: a. Accessible raised characters and Braille and as indicated on drawings. Finish raised characters to contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match background color. b. Typeface to be verified. c. Text as indicated on drawings. 7. Flatness Tolerance: Sign panel shall remain flat or uniformly curved under installed conditions as indicated and within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner. 2.3 SIGN MATERIALS A. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with adhesive on both sides. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS PANEL SIGNAGE OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 5 10 14 23 3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. 6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. B. Subsurface-Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to produce precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges. C. Signs Mounted to Glass: provide blank panel at room-side, color to be verified, mount with two- face tape. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated. D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work. B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Verify that anchor inserts are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS PANEL SIGNAGE OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 5 10 14 23 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. B. Mounting Methods: 1. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedur es. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 101423 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MANUFACTURED PLASTIC- LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 7 12 32 16 SECTION 123216 - MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes 1. Plastic-laminate-faced cabinets. 2. Cabinet Hardware B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry for wood blocking for anchoring casework. 2. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base applied to plastic- laminate-faced casework. 3. Section 123623 "Countertops." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" apply to the work of this Section. B. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard. C. Hardwood Plywood: A panel product composed of layers or plies of veneer, or of veneers in combination with lumber core, hardboard core, MDF core, or particleboard core, joined with adhesive and faced both front and back with hardwood veneers. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. B. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying requirements. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that casework can be supported and installed as indicated. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MANUFACTURED PLASTIC- LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 7 12 32 16 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: 8-by-10-inch Samples for each type of finish. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show fabrication details, including types and locations of hardware. Show installation details, including field joints and filler panels. Indicate manufacturer's catalog numbers for casework. D. Keying Schedule: Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC - accredited certification body. B. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project and who is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver casework only after painting, utility roughing-in, and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate casework have been completed in installation areas. If casework must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas w here environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. B. Keep finished surfaces covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering during handling and installation. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Maintain temperature and relative humidity during the remainder of the construction period in range recommended for Project location by the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." B. Established Dimensions: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MANUFACTURED PLASTIC- LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 7 12 32 16 C. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support casework by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of casework that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond. b. Warping of components. c. Failure of operating hardware. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic-laminate-faced cabinets from single manufacturer. 2.2 CASEWORK, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of casework indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Grade: Custom. B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, configurations, and finish materials of manufactured plastic-laminate-faced cabinets by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' casework of similar sizes and door and drawer configurations, of same finish materials, and complying with the Specifications may be considered. See Section 016000 "Product Requirements." C. Product Designations: Drawings indicate configurations of manufactured plastic -laminate-faced cabinets by referencing designations of Casework Design Series numbering system in Appendix A of the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 2.3 CASEWORK A. Design: 1. Flush overlay. B. Grain Direction for Wood Grain Plastic Laminate: If applicable, confirm with architect. C. Exposed Materials: HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MANUFACTURED PLASTIC- LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 7 12 32 16 1. Plastic Laminate: Grade HGS. a. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. D. Semi-exposed Materials: 1. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Provide thermoset decorative panels for semi-exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide plastic laminate of same grade as exposed surfaces for interior faces of doors and drawer fronts and other locations where opposite side of component is exposed. 2. Hardboard: Use only for cabinet backs where exterior side of back is not exposed. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide specified edgebanding on all semiexposed edges. E. Concealed Materials: 1. MDF. 2.4 WOOD-VENEER-FACED PLYWOOD PANELS A. Wood Species: As selected from manufacturer’s standard line. B. Face Veneer Cut: Quarter sliced. C. Veneer Matching: 1. Provide veneers for each elevation from a single flitch, slip matched. D. Grain Direction: Confirm with architect. E. Exposed Materials: 1. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, selected for compatible color and grain. Provide backs of same species as faces. 2. Hardwood Trim, where detailed. As selected from manufacturer’s standard line. F. Finishing: Apply two-coat, baked, clear finish consisting of a thermosetting catalyzed sealer and a thermosetting catalyzed conversion varnish. Sand and wipe clean between applications of sealer and topcoat. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate casework, including countertops as indicated on the , with adhesives and composite wood products containing no urea formaldehyde. B. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for softwood. C. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. D. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130; made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MANUFACTURED PLASTIC- LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 7 12 32 16 E. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1 Tempered. F. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Abet Laminati Inc. b. Arborite. c. Formica Corporation. d. Lamin-Art, Inc. e. Nevamar; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand. f. Pionite, a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand. g. Wilsonart. G. Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm thick at doors and drawer fronts, 1 mm thick elsewhere. H. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. I. Edgebanding for Thermoset Decorative Panels: PVC or polyester edgebanding matching thermoset decorative panels. 2.6 COLORS AND FINISHES A. Thermoset Decorative Panel Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from casework manufacturer's full range. B. Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. C. PVC Edgebanding Color: As selected from casework manufacturer's full range. 2.7 CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hardware, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard satin-finish, commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware. B. Butt Hinges: Stainless-steel, semiconcealed, five-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded tips. Provide two hinges for doors less than 48 inches high, and provide three hinges for doors more than 48 inches high. C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, Type B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing. Provide two hinges for doors less than 48 inches high, and provide three hinges for doors more than 48 inches high. D. Pulls: Solid stainless-steel wire pulls, fastened from back with two screws. For sliding doors, provide recessed stainless-steel flush pulls. Provide two pulls for drawers more than 24 inches wide. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MANUFACTURED PLASTIC- LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 7 12 32 16 E. Door Catches: Zinc-plated, nylon-roller spring catch or dual, self-aligning, permanent magnet catch. Provide two catches on doors more than 48 inches high. F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05091. 1. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100, for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide. 2. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-200, for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide. 3. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1, for drawers not more than 3 inches high and 24 inches wide. G. Drawer and Hinged Door Locks: Cylindrical (cam) type, five -pin tumbler, brass with chrome- plated finish, and complying with BHMA A156.11, Grade 1. 1. Provide a minimum of two keys per lock and six master keys. 2. Provide locks where indicated and at ALL lower / base cabinets doors. H. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112. I. Adjustable shelf standards and brackets for wall-mounted and workstation shelving: KV Series 80 steel standards and Series 180 brackets with ANO finish EXECUTION 2.8 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of framing and reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2.9 CASEWORK INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Install casework level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical. C. Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust subtops within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch . Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform. D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent cabinets and to masonry, framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in walls and partitions to comply with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MANUFACTURED PLASTIC- LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 7 of 7 12 32 16 E. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises unless otherwise indicated. Adjust and align hardware so moving parts operate freely and contact points meet accurately. Allow for final adjustment after installation. F. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. 2.10 CLEANING A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation. B. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect. END OF SECTION 123216 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COUNTERTOPS OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 5 12 36 23 SECTION 123623 - COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Plastic-laminate countertops 2. Stainless steel countertops 3. Countertop brackets 4. Accessories B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 “Metal Fabrications” for stainless steel counter tops installed as part of this section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including, panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, and adhesive for bonding plastic laminate. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in plastic -laminate countertops. 2. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with one sample applied to core materials and specified edge material applied to one edge. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2. High-pressure decorative laminate. 3. Adhesives. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COUNTERTOPS OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 5 12 36 23 B. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in - service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire - retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements. B. Grade: Custom. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COUNTERTOPS OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 5 12 36 23 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Abet Laminati Inc. b. Formica Corporation. c. Lamin-Art, Inc. d. Nevamar; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand. e. Pionite; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand. f. Wilsonart. D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2. As selected from manufacturer’s standard line 3. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. E. Edge Treatment: 3-mm PVC edging. F. Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue. G. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch . 1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional layers of core material laminated to top. H. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 2.3 COUNTERTOP BRACKETS A. Floating countertop wall bracket by ironsupports.com. Color to be white. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, color as selected from manufacturer's full range., molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COUNTERTOPS OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 5 12 36 23 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide " SG series" by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Unless otherwise shown, provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measur ements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. 1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. C. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COUNTERTOPS OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 5 12 36 23 in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches . Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy - clamping pressure at joints. D. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches . E. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 3. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean countertops on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 123623.13 City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13 11 00 - 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 13 11 00 SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The scope of the work included under this Section of the Specifications shall include swimming pool(s) as illustrated on the Drawings and specified herein. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Specifications shall form a part and be included under this Section of the Specifications. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall provide all supervision, labor, material, equipment, machinery, plant and any and all other items necessary to complete the work. ALL OF THE WORK IN SECTIONS 13 11 00 - 13 11 08 IS TO BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF ONE EXPERIENCED SWIMMING POOL SUBCONTRACTOR PRIMARILY ENGAGED IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF COMMERCIAL PUBLIC-USE SWIMMING POOLS. A SWIMMING POOL SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL BE CONSIDERED PRIMARILY ENGAGED AS REQUIRED HEREIN IF THE SUBCONTRACTOR DERIVED 50% OF ITS ANNUAL REVENUE FROM PUBLIC-USE SWIMMING POOL CONSTRUCTION FOR EACH OF THE LAST FIVE YEARS. THE SUBCONTRACTOR MUST HAVE ALSO, IN THE LAST FIVE YEARS CONSTRUCTED AT LEAST FIVE (5) COMMERCIALLY DESIGNED MUNICIPAL AND PUBLIC-USE SWIMMING POOLS, EACH OF WHICH SHALL HAVE INCORPORATED A MINIMUM SIZE OF 6,000 SQUARE FEET OF WATER SURFACE AREA WITH A CONCRETE AND CERAMIC TILE PERIMETER OVERFLOW GUTTER AND SELF-MODULATING BALANCE TANK. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall furnish and install the swimming pool structures, finishes, cantilever forming, swimming pool mechanical and electrical systems, and all accessories necessary for a complete, functional swimming pool system, as herein described. Work shall include start-up, instruction of Owner’s personnel, as-built drawings and warranties as required. 1.02 CODES, RULES, PERMITS, FEES A. The swimming pools shall be constructed in strict accordance with the applicable provisions set forth by authorities having jurisdiction over swimming pool construction and operation in the State of Washington. B. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits, and pay all government sales taxes, fees, and other costs in connection with their work; file all necessary plans, prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain all required certificates of inspection for their work and deliver same to the Designated Representative before request for acceptance and final payment for the work. C. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall include in the work any labor, materials, services, apparatus, or drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not shown on Drawings and/or specified. D. The Contractor shall submit all required documents and materials to all Governmental Departments having jurisdiction for any deferred approval items or substituted materials or products to obtain final approval to installation. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish and perform supervision, coordination, all layout, formwork, excavation, hand trim, disposing off-site of all unused material or debris to complete the swimming pool excavation to the dimensions shown on the plans. B. Furnish and install complete swimming pool structures, including reinforcing steel and cast -in- place or pneumatically placed concrete walls and floors. C. Furnish and install swimming pool finishes, including ceramic tile and marble plaster or other waterproof finishes. D. Furnish and install complete swimming pool mechanical system(s), including, but not limited to, circulation systems, filtration systems, pool water heating systems, water chemistry control City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13 11 00 - 2 systems, domestic water fill line systems, booster pump and special effects systems, and all pumps, piping, valves, and connections between system(s) and swimming pool(s). E. Furnish and install complete swimming pool electrical system(s) from P.O.C. in Mechanical Room, including, but not limited to, underwater lighting systems, water level control systems, timing systems, scoreboards, special effects systems, control circuitry, motor starters, time clocks, bonding, and all conduits, conductors, contactors, and swit ches between the system(s) and swimming pool(s). F. Furnish and install all swimming pool cantilever forming, deck equipment and required anchors and inserts for the specified equipment as required by code, shown on the Drawings and specified herein. G. After the initial filling of the swimming pool system(s), should any repairs, continuing work, or other Subcontractor responsibility require drainage or partial drainage of the swimming pool systems, the Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall be responsible for any subsequent refilling and shall complete the project with the swimming pool system(s) full of water, water in chemical balance, complete in every way, and in full operation. 1.04 ASSIGNED RESPONSIBILITIES AND RELATED WORK A. It is the intent of this section of the Specifications to clarify Work responsibilities of the trades directly and indirectly involved in construction of the pool systems. All labor, equipment, materials, and supplies furnished by the Swimming Pool Subcontractor and other Subcontractors per the contractual agreement with the General Contractor and Owner and shall be as directed by the Owner through their Designated Representative. B. THE SWIMMING POOL SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL NOT SUBCONTRACT ANY PORTION OF THE SWIMMING POOL CONSTRUCTION OR SWIMMING POOL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION TO ANYONE OTHER THAN A SUBCONTRACTOR THAT SATISFIES THE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 13 11 00 C. References to “swimming pool systems” shall include the swimming pools, equipment, and accessories. D. The Owner will provide one complete water filling of the swimming pool(s) but will not assume any responsibility for the swimming pool system(s) until they have been proved fully operational, complete in every way and accepted by the Designated Representative. 1.05 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR A. The Contractor shall grade the swimming pool site(s), establish benchmarks, cut and fill as necessary to provide as level an area as possible at swimming pool deck elevation before swimming pool layout. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for horizontal dimensions and grade elevations accurately from established lines and benchmarks (as indicated on the Drawings) and be responsible for those grades. C. The Contractor shall provide adequate temporary light, electric power, heat and ventilation per Federal and State OSHA requirements to construct the swimming pool system(s). D. The Contractor shall not permit any heavy equipment activity over any area or within five (5) feet of any area under which swimming pool piping is buried. There shall be no exceptions to this requirement. E. The Contractor shall keep the swimming pool excavation(s) and swimming pool structure(s) free of construction residue and waste materials of their workmen or Subcontractors, removing said material from the swimming pools as required. F. The Contractor shall protect the swimming pool(s) from damage caused by their construction equipment and /or workmen and Subcontractors. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13 11 00 - 3 G. The Contractor shall provide a representative at time of swimming pool start-up to coordinate all trades related to swimming pool system(s). 1.06 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACTOR A. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall be licensed in the State of Washington and provide written notifications to Swimming Pool Subcontractor and contractor when necessary to excavate and backfill within the swimming pool construction site. B. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall not utilize any swimming pool piping trench for installation of any sanitary sewer, storm sewer, domestic water, hot water, chilled water or natural gas line. C. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all sanitary sewer piping, including vent stacks (if necessary), for backwash pits, floor drains and floor sinks as required by code, shown on Drawings, and herein specified. D. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all storm sewer piping and site drainage systems as required by code, shown on the Drawings, and herein specified. E. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall provide a minimum 75 psi water supply for swimming pool construction work within fifty (50) feet of the swimming pool construction site(s). F. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall furnish and install reduced pressure backflow protected domestic water lines to P.O.C. within swimming pool Mechanical Room as required by code, shown on the Drawings, and herein specified. G. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall furnish and install natural gas piping, pressure regulation and valving to P.O.C. within swimming pool Mechanical Room as required by code, shown on the drawings, and herein specified. H. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all ductwork, louvers, and all HVAC equipment within swimming pool Mechanical Room as required by code, shown on the Drawings, and herein specified. I. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall provide a representative at time of swimming pool start -up to coordinate work related to swimming pool system(s). 1.07 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be licensed in the State of Washington and shall furnish and install electrical service to swimming pool Mechanical Room sized to accommodate all necessary swimming pool equipment as shown on the Drawings and herein specified. B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish any temporary power needed by the Swimming Pool Subcontractor within fifty (50) feet of the swimming pool construction site(s). C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all conduits, conductors, starters/disconnects, panels, circuits, switches and equipment as required for lighting, ventilation and HVAC equipment within swimming pool Mechanical Room as required by code, shown on the Drawings, and herein specified. D. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all conduits, conductors, panels, circuits, switches and equipment for area lighting as required by code, shown on the Drawings, and herein specified. E. All equipment, material and installation shall be as required under Division 16 of the Specifications and shall conform to NEC Article 680 (latest revision), State and Local Codes, and as may be required by all authorities having jurisdiction over swimming pool construction within the State of Washington. F. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide a representative at time of swimming pool start -up to coordinate work related to swimming pool system(s). 1.08 INTENT City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13 11 00 - 4 A. It is the intention of these specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation. Wherever the work “provide” is used, it shall mean “furnish and install complete and ready for use.” B. Minor details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for proper installation and operation, shall be included in the work, the same as if herein specified or shown. 1.09 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Provide a Schedule of Values for all work specified in each of the technical specifications listed in the table below, regardless of whether the work is performed by the swimming pool contractor or others. Values listed shall be fully burdened, with contractor general conditions, overhead, profit and bonds included. Payments for swimming pool work completed shall not be approved until Schedule of Values has been submitted to and approved by Architect. SWIMMING POOL SCHEDULE OF VALUES No. Section # Description Value 1. 13 11 02 Swimming Pool Concrete 2. 13 11 03 Swimming Pool Shotcrete 3. 13 11 04 Swimming Pool Ceramic Tile 4. 13 11 05 Swimming Pool Plaster 5. 13 11 06 Swimming Pool Equipment 6. 13 11 07 Swimming Pool Mechanical 7. 13 11 08 Swimming Pool Electrical Total 1.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Subcontractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing submittals with performance construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for schedules performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow fifteen (15) days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contract when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow twenty-one (21) days for initial review of each submittal. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13 11 00 - 5 3. Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted directly to Architect's consultants, provide duplicate copy of transmittal to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Subcontractor. 4. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 5. Allow fifteen (15) days for processing each submittal. 6. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. E. Identification: Place a title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on title block. 2. Provide a space on title block to record Subcontractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on title block for processing and recording action taken: (See Attached Sample) a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Subcontractor. d. Name of Subcontractor. e. Name of Supplier. f. Name of Manufacturer. g. Unique identifier, including revision number. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Other necessary identification. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13 11 00 - 6 SUBMITTAL FOR: SUBMITTAL TO: SUBCONTRACTOR: Item Number: Section Number: Section Description: Subcontractor: Supplier: Manufacturer: Product Code: Quantity: Subcontractor Certification: Contractor's Submittal Stamp: It is hereby certified that the equipment or material designated in this submittal is proposed to be incorporated in the above named project and is in compliance with the contract drawings and / or specifications and is submitted for approval. Certified by: Date: Job Superintendent: Revisions: Architect's Review Stamp and Comments City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13 11 00 - 7 F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract documents on submittal. G. On all catalogue or cut sheets identify which model or type is being submitted. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Product data and shop drawings shall be packaged within a three-ring binder and colored samples shall be packaged on a heavy cardboard. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. 1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Subcontractor's letterhead, record relevant information, request for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals and deviations from requirements of the Contract documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal. 2. Include Subcontractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requires of the Contract Documents. 3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of Subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Remarks. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, Subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. 1.11 SUBSTITUTIONS A. To obtain approval to use unspecified products, bidders shall submit requests for substitution at least ten (10) days prior to bid date. Requests shall only be considered if they clearly describe the product for which approval is asked, including all data necessary to demonstrate acceptability. All unspecified products and equipment will be considered on an “or equal” basis at the discretion of the Designated Representative. Requests for substitution received after the specified deadline will not be considered. Where a conflict exists between the requirements of the General Conditions / Special Conditions / Division 1 concerning substitutions and the requirements of this Article, this Article (Section 13 11 00, Article 1.10) shall govern. B. Where the Swimming Pool Subcontractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the Drawings which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring, or any other part of the architectural, mechanical, or electrical layout, all such redesign and all new drawings (stamped by Washington Licensed Engineer) and detailing required shall be prepared by the Swimming Pool Subcontractor, at their own expense, submitted for review and approval by the Designated Representative prior to bid. C. Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of piping, supports and anchors, wiring, conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the Drawings, the Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall furnish and install any such piping, structural City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13 11 00 - 8 supports, controllers, motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduit, and any other additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.12 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS A. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from benchmarks established by the Contractor. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. The mechanical Drawings do not give exact details as to elevations of piping, exact locations, etc. and do not show all offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. Verify all measurements at site and check the correctness of same as related to the work. 1.13 DRAWINGS A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of the systems and work included in the Subcontractor. Drawings are not to be scaled. The architectural drawings and details shall be examined for exact dimensions. Where they are not definitely shown, this information shall be obtained from the Designated Representative. 1.14 SWIMMING POOL SUBSUBCONTRACTOR A. The swimming pool construction work as herein described and specified in Division 13 of the Project Manual shall be the complete responsibility of a qualified and specifically licensed (C -53 license classification within the State of Washington) Swimming Pool Subcontractor with extensive experience in commercial public use swimming pool installations. B. The Contractor shall require the Swimming Pool Subcontractor to furnish to the Contractor performance and payment bonds in the amount of 100% of the Swimming Pool Subcontractor’s bid written by a surety Company properly registered in the State of Washington and listed by the U.S. Treasury. The expense of the bond(s) is to be borne by the Subcontractor. The Contractor shall clearly specify the amount and requirements of the bond(s) in the Contractor’s written or published request for subbids. The Contractor’s written or published request for subbids shall also specify that the bond(s) expense is to be borne by the Subcontractor. C. Subcontractor certifies that it meets the qualifications and experience requirements established in Swimming Pool General Requirements, Section 13 11 00, as follows: 1. Subcontractor has derived 50% of its annual revenue from public-use swimming pool construction for each of the last five (5) years. 2. Subcontractor has, in the last five (5) years, constructed at least five (5) commercially designed municipal and public-use swimming pools, each of which have incorporated a minimum size of 6,000 square feet of water surface area with a concrete and ceramic tile perimeter overflow gutter and self-modulating balance tank. 3. The following list of projects meet the requirements of section (b) above and the contact as reference by the Contractor, the Awarding Authority of their agent or designee. a. Owner: Scope of Project: Contact Person: Phone Number: Architect for Project: b. Owner: Scope of Project: Contact Person: Phone Number: City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13 11 00 - 9 Architect for Project: c. Owner: Scope of Project: Contact Person: Phone Number: Architect for Project: d. Owner: Scope of Project: Contact Person: Phone Number: Architect for Project: e. Owner: Scope of Project: Contact Person: Phone Number: Architect for Project: D. Swimming Pool Deck Subcontractor other than the swimming pool Subcontractor certifies that it meets the qualifications and experience requirements established in Swimming Pool General Requirements, Section 13 11 00, as follows: 1. Subcontract has, in the last five (5) years, constructed at least five (5) commercially designed cantilevered pool decks over perimeter gutters, each of which have incorporated a minimum size of 6,000 square feet of water surface area of the swimming pool. 2. The following list of projects meet the requirements of section (b) above and the contact as reference by the Contractor, the Awarding Authority of their agent or designee. SWIMMING POOL DECK SUBCONTRACTOR a. Owner: Scope of Project: Contact Person: Phone Number: Architect for Project: b. Owner: Scope of Project: Contact Person: Phone Number: Architect for Project: City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13 11 00 - 10 c. Owner: Scope of Project: Contact Person: Phone Number: Architect for Project: d. Owner: Scope of Project: Contact Person: Phone Number: Architect for Project: e. Owner: Scope of Project: Contact Person: Phone Number: Architect for Project: 1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall determine from actual samples of pool water supplied by the Owner, the proper water management program necessary for maximum operating efficiency and comfort. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall provide the services of experienced personnel familiar with this type of pool system operation, in conformance with Section 13 11 05 of the Specifications. 1.16 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall provide six (6) bound sets for delivery to the Designated Representative of instructions for operating and maintaining all systems and equipment included in this Contract. Manufacturer’s advertising literature or catalog pictures will not be acceptable for operating and maintenance instructions. B. Bound in ring binders shall be all parts lists, periodic maintenance instructions and troubleshooting guidelines for all pool equipment, including but not limited to filters, pumps, controllers, water chemistry control equipment, etc. 1.17 SECURE FROM THE OWNER A. A complete Owner-furnished filling of the swimming pools. B. The Owner’s assistance, as specified herein, from the time of start-up until final written acceptance of the swimming pool system(s). C. Chemicals as required for swimming pool operation after Swimming Pool Subcontractor completes initial water chemistry balance and water treatment during the maintenance period described in Section 13 11 05 of the Specifications. 1.18 WARRANTY A. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall warrant all swimming pool structures, finishes and systems against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after the date of acceptance by the Owner. Any repair or replacement required due to defective material or workmanship will be promptly corrected by the Swimming Pool Subcontractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13 11 00 - 11 NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 13 11 02 - 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 13 11 02 SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE A. Forming for cast-in-place concrete and shotcrete associated with swimming pools. B. Reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete and shotcrete associated with swimming pools. C. Cast-in-place concrete for swimming pool structures. Do not use waterproofing admixture of any kind. D. Provide labor, materials and equipment as required to install sealant for all pool deck expansion joints, or any other caulki ng, as indicated on the aquatic Drawings and herein specified. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workers: 1. The entity performing the work of this Section shall have been successfully engaged in the respective trade for at least five (5) years immediately prior to commencement of the Work. 2. For actual construction operations, use only trained and experienced workers with a minimum of three (3) years’ experience with the materials and methods specified. 3. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of this Section, with a minimum of five (5) years’ experience with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section. B. Standards: 1. In addition to complying with the International Building Code (latest edition) 1908, comply with all pertinent recommendations contained in “Guide to Formwork for Concrete" Publication ACI 347R-14 of the American Concrete Institute. 2. In addition to complying with the International Building Code (latest edition), comply with all pertinent recommendations contained in “Guide to Presenting Reinforcing Steel Design Details,” Publication ACI 315R-18 of the American Concrete Institute. 3. In addition to complying with all local codes and regulations, comply with all pertinent recommendations contained in American Society for Testing and materials (ASTM); ASTM C 920 “Standard Specification for Elastometric Joint Sealants.” C. Tolerances: Construct all swimming pool concrete straight, true, plumb and square within a tolerance horizontally of one in 200 and vertically of one in 2000. 1.03 SUBMITTAL AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Provide submittals in conformance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00. Requests for substitution shall conform to requirements of Article 1.10.A of Section 13 11 00. B. Samples and Certificates, Concrete Reinforcement: 1. Provide all data and access required for testing as described in Section 01 45 00 of the Specifications. 2. All material shall bear mill tags with heat number identification. Mill analysis and report shall be made available upon request. 3. Material not so labeled and identifiable may be required by the Owner to be tested by the testing laboratory selected by the Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner, in which case random samples will be taken for one series of tests from each 2-1/2 tons or fraction thereof of each size and kind of reinforcing steel. 4. Design mix from batch plant demonstrating previous use history and associated strengths at 28 days. 5. The Contractor shall submit a mix design stamped and signed by a licensed engineer for approval by the Owner’s Representative prior to any placement of concrete. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 13 11 02 - 2 C. Submit proof of qualifications as specified in Article 1.02.A of this Section. D. Submit reinforcing shop drawings for pool walls, gutters, floors, dike walls and balance tank, etc. as shown on the construction drawing. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the Project Site in the manufacturer's original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible. B. Storage: Store materials under cover in a manner to prevent damage and contamination, and store only the specified materials at the Project Site. C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the swimming pool concrete before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed Work specified in other Sections. D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE FORMWORK A. Form Materials: 1. Form Lumber: All form lumber in contact with exposed concrete shall be new except as allowed for reuse of forms in Part 3 of this Section, and all form lumber shall be one of the following, a combination thereof, or an equal approved in advance by the Owner’s Representative. a. "Plyform," Class I or II, bearing the label of the Douglas Fir Plywood Association; "Inner -Seal" Form as manufactured by Louisiana-Pacific, or approved equal. b. Douglas Fir-Larch, number two grade, seasoned, surfaced four sides. 2. Form Release Agent: Colorless, non-staining, free from oils; chemically reactive agent that shall not impair bonding of paint or other coatings intended for use. B. Ties and Spreaders: 1. Type: All form ties shall be a type which do not leave an open hole through the concrete and which permits neat and solid patching at every hole. 2. Design: When forms are removed, all metal reinforcement shall be not less than two (2) inches from the finished concrete surface. 3. Wire Ties and Wood Spreaders: Do not use wire ties or wood spreaders. C. Alternate Forming Systems: Alternate forming systems may be used subject to the advance approval of the Owner’s Representative. 2.02 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT A. Bars: Bars for reinforcement shall conform to “Specifications for Deformed Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement,” ASTM A-615, Grade 60. B. Wire Fabric: Wire fabric shall conform to. “Specification for Carbon -Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete”, ASTM A1064. C. Tie Wire: Tie wire for reinforcement shall conform to “Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete”, ASTM A1064 black annealed 16-gauge tie wire. 2.03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Concrete: 1. All concrete, unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Owner’s Representative, shall be transit-mixed in accordance with ASTM C94. Concrete for water retaining structures that do not receive a waterproofing finish such as ceramic tile or swimming pool plaster shall receive a topical waterproofing finish. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 13 11 02 - 3 2. The control of concrete production shall be under the supervision of a recognized testing agency, selected by the Owner in accordance with Section 01 25 00 of the Specifications. 3. Quality: All concrete shall have the following minimum compressive strengths at twenty-eight (28) days and shall be proportioned within the following limits a. 4,000 psi minimum compressive strength for cast-in-place swimming pool structures. b. 1” maximum size aggregate. c. 6.0 minimum sacks of cement per cubic yard. * d. Maximum water to cement ratio of 0.40-0.45 maximum. e. 4” maximum slump. * For estimate only: to be determined by mix design. 4. Cement: All cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C-150, Type II or V and shall be the product of one manufacturer. 5. Aggregates: a. Shall conform to “Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates,” ASTM C33, except as modified herein. b. Coarse Aggregate: Clean sound washed gravel or crushed rock. Crushing may constitute not more than 30% of the total coarse aggregate volume. Not more than 5% flat, thin, elongated, or laminated material nor more than 1% deleterious material shall be present. 1" aggregate graded from 1/4” to 1”, fineness modulus 6.90 to 7.40. 1-1/2” graded from ½” to 1-1/2”, fineness modulus 7.80 to 8.20. c. Fine Aggregate: Washed natural sand of hard, strong particles and shall contain not more than 1% of deleterious material, fineness modulus 2.65 to 3.05. d. Aggregate must be certified, non-expansive from a “known” good source. 6. Water: ASTM C1602 Clean, fresh, free from acid, alkali, organic matter or other impurities liable to be detrimental to the concrete (potable). 7. Admixtures: Admixtures shall be used upon approval of the Owner's Representative. a. Air-entraining admixture: Conform to ASTM C260. b. Water-reducing admixture: Conform to ASTM C494. B. Construction Joints: Use keyform for slab pour joints. Either preformed galvanized or PVC construction joint forms of a standard manufacturer may be used. Install per manufacturer's recommendations and tool edges of slabs. C. Waterstops: PVC bulb-type for use between concrete pours / lifts, conforming with ASTM D 570, D 624, and D 638. Provide in configuration(s) as recommended by manufacturer for specific application. Greenstreak, W.R. Meadows, or approved equal. D. Curing Materials: 1. Liquid Membrane (covered slab): Chlorinated rubber membrane forming, curing-sealing compound conforming to ASTM C309. 2. Liquid Membrane (exposed slab): Clear methyl and butyl methacrylate non-staining, membrane forming, curing-sealing compound conforming to ASTM C309. E. Cement Grout and Drypack: 1. Cement Grout: Mix 1 part by volume of Portland Cement, 1/2 part by volume of water and fine aggregate enough to make mixture flow under its' own weight. 2. Drypack: Mix 1 part by volume of Portland Cement, 1/2 part by volume of water and fine aggregate enough to make a stiff mix that will mold into a ball. Mix no more than can be used in 30 minutes. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 13 11 02 - 4 2.04 JOINT SEALANT MATERIALS A. Caulking: Multipart, non-sag gun grade polyurethane-based sealant meeting the requirements of ASTM C920-02, Type S or M, Mamemco International, Pecora, Sika Corp., Sonneborn Building Products, Tremco or approved equal. Self -leveling caulking materials are not allowed. B. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. C. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. D. Sealant Backer Rod: Provide compressible polyethylene or polyurethane backer rod as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. E. Bond Breaker Tape: Provide polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer, to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. F. Sand: Cover the surface of the caulking with #30 silica sand. 2.05 OTHER MATERIALS A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of the work of this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the advance review by the Owner’s Representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: 1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed Work of other trades and verify that all such Work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that all Work may be constructed in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations, the referenced standards, the original design, and in accordance with site specific Geotechnical Report. B. Discrepancies: 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner’s Representative. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3. Failure to notify the Owner’s Representative and give written notice of discrepancies shall constitute acceptance by the Contractor of existing conditions as fit and proper to receive work. 3.02 CONCRETE FORMWORK A. Construction of Forms: 1. General: Construct all required forms to be substantial, sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of concrete paste, and able to withstand excessive deflection when filled with wet concrete. 2. Layout: a. Form for all required cast-in-place concrete to the shapes, sizes, lines and dimensions indicated on the Drawings. b. Exercise particular care in the layout of forms to avoid necessity for cutting concrete after placement. c. Make proper provisions for all openings, offsets, recesses, anchorages, blocking and other features of the Work as shown or required. d. Perform all forming required for Work of other trades and do all cutting and repairing of forms required to permit such installation. e. Carefully examine the Drawings and Specifications and consult with other trades as required City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 13 11 02 - 5 relative to providing for pipe and conduit penetrations, reglets, chases and other items in the forms. 3. Imbedded Items: Set all required steel frames, angles, bolts, inserts and other such items required to be anchored in the concrete prior to concrete being placed. 4. Bracings: a. Properly brace and tie the forms together so as to maintain position and shape and to ensure safety to workmen. b. Construct all bracing, supporting members and centering of ample size and strength to safely carry, without excessive deflection, all dead and live loads to which they may be subjected. c. Properly space the forms apart and securely tie them together, using metal spreader ties that give positive tying and accurate spreading. 5. Wetting: Keep forms sufficiently wetted to prevent joints from opening up before concrete is placed. B. Plywood Forms: 1. Design: Nail the plywood panels directly to studs and apply in a manner to minimize the number of joints. 2. Joints: Make all panel joints tight butt joints with all edges true and square. C. Footing Forms: 1. Wood Forms: All footing forms shall be wood unless otherwise specifically approved by the Owner’s Representative, or as specified in paragraph 3.02(C)(2). 2. Earth Forms: a. Side walls for footings may be of earth provided the soil will stand without caving and the sides of the bank are made with a neat cut to the minimum dimensions indicated on the Drawings. b. For excavation and backfill of earth forms, conform with applicable provisions of Section 13 11 01. D. Reuse of Forms: 1. Reuse of forms shall be subject to advance approval of the Owner’s Representative. 2. Except as specifically approved in advance by the Owner’s Representative, reuse of forms shall in no way delay or change the schedule for placement of concrete from the schedule obtainable if all forms were new. 3. Except as specifically approved in advance by the Owner’s Representative, reuse of forms shall in no way impart less structural stability to the forms nor less acceptable appearance to finished concrete. E. Removal of Forms: 1. General: a. In general, side forms of footings may be removed seven (7) days after placement of concrete, but time may be extended if deemed necessary by the Owner’s Representative. b. Forms for footings, foundations, grade beams, slabs, walls, and other formed concrete may be removed fourteen (14) days after placement of concrete. 2. Removal: a. Use all means necessary to protect workers, passersby, the installed Work of other trades and the complete safety of the structure. b. Cut nails and tie wires or form ties off flush, and leave all surfaces smooth and clean. c. Remove metal spreader ties on exposed concrete by removing or snapping off inside the wall surface and pointing up and rubbing the resulting pockets to match the surrounding areas. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 13 11 02 - 6 d. Flush all holes resulting from the use of spreader ties and sleeve nuts using water, and then solidly pack throughout the wall thickness with cement grout applied under pressure by means of a grouting gun; grout shall be one part Portland Cement to 2 -1/2 parts sand; apply grout immediately after removing forms. 3.03 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT A. Bending: 1. General: a. Fabricate all reinforcement in strict accordance with the Drawings. b. Do not use bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings. c. Do not bend or straighten steel in a manner that will injure the material. (When opposite end is already encased in concrete.) 2. Design: a. Bend all bars cold. b. Make bends for stirrups and ties around a pin having a diameter of not less than two (2) times the minimum thickness of the bar. c. Make bends for other bars, including hooks, around a pin having a diameter of not less than six (6) times the minimum thickness of the bar. B. Placing: 1. General: Before the start of concrete placement, accurately place all concrete reinforcement, positively securing and supporting by concrete blocks, metal chairs or spacers, or by metal hangers. 2. Clearance: a. Preserve clear space between bars of not less than one and one-half (1-1/2) times the nominal diameter of the round bars. b. In no case let the clear space be less than one and one-half (1-1/2) inches nor less than one and one-third (1-1/3) times the maximum size of the aggregate. c. Provide the following minimum concrete covering of reinforcement: 1) Concrete deposited against earth: three (3) inches minimum. 2) Concrete below grade deposited against forms: two (2) inches minimum. 3) Concrete elsewhere: As indicated on Drawings or otherwise approved by the Owner’s Representative. 3. Splicing: a. Horizontal Bars: 1) Place bars in horizontal members with minimum lap at splices sufficient to develop the strength of the bars. 2) Bars may be wired together at laps except at points of support of the member, at which points preserve clear space described above. 3) Whenever possible, stagger the splices of adjacent bars. 4) Splice forty (40) bar diameters minimum. 5) Provide non-contact lap slices for shotcrete. b. Wire Fabric: Make all splices in wire fabric at least one and one-half (1-1/2) meshes wide. c. Other Splices: Make only those other splices that are indicated on the Drawings or specifically approved by the Owner’s Representative. 4. Dowels: Place all required steel dowels and securely anchor them into position before concrete is City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 13 11 02 - 7 placed. 5. Obstructions: In the event conduits, piping, inserts, sleeves and other items interfere with placing reinforcement as indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required, immediately consult with the Owner’s Representative and obtain approval of a new procedure prior to placing concrete. C. Cleaning Reinforcement: Steel reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed around it, shall be free from rust scale, loose mill scale, oil, paint and all other coatings which will destroy or reduce the bond between steel and concrete. Bend down all tie wire away from the top of the pool concrete. Maintain a 2” clear from top of concrete to the tie wire. 3.04 SHOTCRETE REINFORCEMENT A. Shotcrete reinforcement shall be in accordance with the requirements of CBC 1908A and ACI 318 -19, along with the provisions of ACI 506R and ACI 506.2. For parallel nonprestressed reinforcement in shotcrete members, the clear spacing between bars shall be at least the greater of 6 bar diameters and 2 -1/2 in. Where two curtains of reinforcement are provided, the clear spacing between bars in the curtain nearer the nozzle shall be at least 12 bar diameters; the clear spacing between bars in the remaining curtain shall be at least the greater of 6 bar diameters a nd 2-1/2 in. Adequate encasement of bars larger than No. 5 shall be demonstrated by a preconstruction test shotcrete mockup panel. 1. Subject to the approval of the building official, it shall be permitted to use a clear spacing that does not meet the clear spacing provisions listed above provided that shotcrete mockup panels are used to demonstrate the proper reinforcement encasement in accordance with the following: 2. The shotcrete mockup panels shall be representative of the most complex reinforcement configurations to be encountered. 3. The licensed design professional shall specify the shotcrete mockup panel quantity, frequency of shooting per nozzleman and member type, and panel thickness to verify reinforcement encasement. B. Non-contact lap splices for reinforcement in shotcrete shall have clear spacing in accordance with the following: 1. For No. 6 and smaller bars, the clear spacing between bars shall be at least greater of 6 bar diameters and 2-1/2” in. 2. For No. 7 and larger bars, the clear spacing shall be established using a shotcrete mockup panel to demonstrate that the reinforcement is properly encased. C. Subject to the approval of the building official, contact lap splices for reinforcement in shotcrete shall be oriented with the plane of the spliced bars perpendicular to the surface of the shotcrete and approved by the licensed design professional based on a shotcrete mockup panel to demonstrate that the reinforcement is properly encased. 3.05 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Conveying and Placing Concrete: 1. Before placing concrete, mixing and conveying equipment shall be well cleaned, and the forms and space to be occupied by concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted. Ground water shall be removed until the completion of the work. 2. No concrete shall be placed in any unit of work until all formwork has been completely constructed, all reinforcement has been secured in place, all items to be built into concrete are in place, and form ties at construction joints tightened. 3. Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to place of final deposit in such a way to prevent the separation or loss of ingredients. It shall be placed as nearly as practicable in its’ final position to avoid rehandling or flowing. Concrete shall not be dropped freely where reinforcing bars will cause segregation, nor shall it be dropped freely more than six (6) feet. Use tremies, spouts and dump boxes in deep sections. Vibrators are not acceptable for facilitating concrete transport. 4. Concrete shall be tamped and spaded to insure proper compaction into all parts of forms and around City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 13 11 02 - 8 reinforcement. A mechanical vibrator shall be used to thoroughly compact the concrete. Vibration must be by direct action in the concrete and not against forms or reinforcement. 5. Mixing and transport time as indicated in ASTM C94 is required. If air temperatures are between 85° and 90° F the delivery time is to be reduced to 75 minutes. When air temperatures are in excess of 90° F the delivery time should be reduced to 60 minutes. 6. Truck mixes without batch certificates will be rejected. B. Construction Joints / Expansion Joints: Construction joints and expansion joints shall be provided at locations and in the manner shown on the Drawings. With exception of existing concrete / new shotcrete joints, use PVC bulb-type waterstops appropriate for design condition between all concrete pours / lifts to avoid cold joints. Waterstops shall be placed in such a way to protect reinforcing steel from rust and oxidation. All expansion joints must be the full depth of the concrete section in which they are located. C. Slab Finishes: Concrete slabs shall be compacted and screeded uniformly to grades shown. Push large aggregates below the surface with a screen tamper, screed and bull float. As soon as the surface becomes workable, it shall be wood floated, then finished as indicated on the Drawings to a uniform smooth, true surface in a neat and workmanlike manner. Carefully coordinate slab finish requirements with other trades (ceramic tile, pool plaster) to ensure concrete finish is appropriate substrate for final finish material. 1. Pool Floor Slab: Heavy Wire Broom Finish. D. Protection and Curing: 1. Concrete shall be protected from injurious action of the elements and defacement of any nature during construc- tion. 2. All forms must be kept wet to prevent drying out of the concrete. 3. All concrete surfaces including footings must be kept wet for at least seven (7) days after concrete is placed. 4. Apply the appropriate curing materials, as specified in 2.03 of this Section, immediately after finishing slabs. Application shall be as specified by the manufacturer. E. Form Removal: 1. Take care in removing forms so that surfaces are not marred or gouged and that corners are true, sharp and unbroken. 2. No steel spreaders, ties or other metal shall project from or be visible on any concrete surfaces. F. Defective Work: 1. Should the strength of any concrete for any portion of the work indicated by tests of molded cylinders and core tests fall below minimum 28 days strength specified or indicated, concrete will be deemed defective work and shall be replaced. 2. Concrete work that is not formed as indicated, is not true to intended alignment, not plumb or level where so intended, not true to intended grades or elevations, not true to specified or selected finish, contains sawdust shavings, wood, or embedded debris, which exhibits cracks or contains fine or coarse sulfide particles, or expansive aggregates detrimental to performance or appearance of the concrete shall be deemed defective. 3. Promptly perform work required to replace and properly clean (by sandblasting if necessary) any defective concrete panels (control joint or expansion joint to control joint or expansion joint), at Contractor's expense, including all expense of additional inspection, tests, or supervision made necessary as a result of defective concrete. 3.06 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Temperatures: Do not install sealants when air temperature is less than 40°F. B. Tooling: Tool exposed joints to a slightly concave surface using slicking materials recommended by the manufacturer. The tooling procedure shall press sealant against the sides of the joint. No materials shall City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 13 11 02 - 9 be left “feathered” out or smeared on the abutting materials. Completed joints shall have a uniform professional appearance. C. Joint Construction: Sealant joint width, thickness and cross-sectional profile to be constructed in strict accordance with the sealant manufacturer’s recommendations. D. Sand: At the appropriate time cover the sealant with sand to provide a sanded finish. 3.07 CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion of the Work of this Section, immediately remove all swimming pool concrete materials, debris and rubbish occasioned by this Work to the approval of the Owner’s Representative. END OF SECTION City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL SHOTCRETE 13 11 03 - 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 13 11 03 SWIMMING POOL SHOTCRETE A. Provide labor, materials and equipment as required to install structural wet mix shotcrete for swimming pool structures as indicated on the Drawings and herein specified. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workers: 1. The entity performing the work of this Section shall have been successfully engaged in the respective trade for at least five (5) years immediately prior to commencement of the Work. 2. For actual construction operations, use only trained and experienced workers with a minimum of three (3) years experience with the materials and methods specified. 3. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of this Section, with a minimum of five (5) years experience with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section. B. Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, provide shotcrete per American Concrete Institute Standard ACI 506R, ACI 506.2, ACI 318-319, and the International Building Code (latest edition). C. Mix Design: The Contractor shall submit a mix design stamped and signed by a licensed engineer for approval by the Owner’s Representative prior to any placement of shotcrete. Mix design shall indicate source of aggregate and brands of cement and admixtures used. All mix designs shall take character of locally available aggregate into consideration and make adjustments as necessary to conform with specified design criteria. D. Testing and Inspection: A test panel shall be shot, cured, cored or sawn, examined and tested (representing the most congested and difficult project scenario) prior to commencement of the project in accordance with ASTM C1140. All project conditions and personnel shall be represented in the test panel. Additionally, one test panel shall be provided for each 50 yards (or portion thereof) of shotcrete placed for each day or each nozzleman, whichever is greater. The size of the strength test panel shall be per the direction of the Special Shotcrete Inspector. At least three (3) cores shall be taken from each test panel. (At least three (3) cores shall be taken from the completed work for each day of shotcrete operation.) Testing shall be performed by the Owner’s designated Testing Lab and comply with Section 1908A.10, International Building Code. Continuous inspection of the shotcrete operation by a deputy inspector provided by the Owner shall be required. Inspection of shotcrete work shall comply with Section 1908A of International Building Code, and coring, sampling, soaking and testing per 1908A.5 and 1908A.10 of International Building Code. Contractor shall provide test panels for all required tests. The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Testing Lab 48 hours notice before the start of shotcrete operations. E. Tolerances: Construct all swimming pool shotcrete straight, true, plumb and square within a tolerance horizontally of one in 200 and a tolerance vertically of one in 2000. 1.03 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Provide submittals in conformance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 and ACI 506.2. Requests for substitution shall conform with requirements of Article 1.10.A of Section 13 11 00. B. Materials List: Within thirty (30) days after issuance of Notice to Proceed, and before shotcrete materials are delivered to the project site, submit to the Owner a complete list of materials proposed to be used in this portion of the Work, showing manufacturer's name and catalog number of all items such as admixtures and curing membranes, and the name and address of the supplier of cement and aggregate City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL SHOTCRETE 13 11 03 - 2 to be used. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL SHOTCRETE 13 11 03 - 3 C. Submit proof of qualifications as specified in Article 1.02.A of this Section. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect shotcrete materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed Work specified in other Sections. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: Cement shall be Type 1 Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C150. Cement type shall be the same for all shotcrete work. B. Aggregate: ASTM C33, washed hard dense durable clean sharp sand from approved pit, free of organic matter and opaline, feldspar, or silicous magnesium substances and containing not more than 3% by weight of deleterious substances. Maximum size aggregate for shotcrete is ¾” per CBC 1908A.3. When tested for organic impurities by ASTM C40 method, fine aggregate color not darker than reference standard color. When tested for soundness by ASTM C88 method, grading No. 2 of ASTM C1436, loss after 5 cycles not over 10% of fine aggregate. C. Water: Potable, clean, fresh, free from acid, alkali, organic matter or other impurities liable to be detrimental to the shotcrete. D. Admixtures: Admixtures shall conform to ASTM C1141 and only be used upon approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXECUTION A. Inspection: 1. Prior to all Work of this Section carefully inspect the installed Work of other trades and verify that all such Work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that items to be imbedded in shotcrete are in place and that shotcrete may be placed to the lines and elevations shown on the Drawings, with all required clearance from reinforcement. B. Discrepancies: 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner's Representative. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3. Failure to notify the Owner's Representative and give written notice of discrepancies shall constitute acceptance by the Contractor of existing conditions as fit and proper to receive the Work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Thoroughly clean all areas where shotcrete is to be placed to insure proper bonding of shotcrete. 2. Where shotcrete is to be placed against smooth surfaces (i.e., cast-in-place concrete), sandblast surfaces to receive shotcrete to provide clean aggregate surface, thereby insuring proper bond between materials. B. Ground Wires: Adequate ground wires, to be used as screeds, shall be installed to establish the thickness and surface planes of the shotcrete work. Ground wires shall be placed so that they are tight and true to line and grade and in such a manner that they can be easily tightened. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL SHOTCRETE 13 11 03 - 4 3.03 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING A. Accurately control proportion of water to Portland cement to produce thorough and uniform hydration of the shotcrete that, when shot, forms a homogeneous mass containing neither sags nor dry sand formation. Proportion by mass per ASTM C94 or by volume per ASTM C685. B. Shotcrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 PSI at 28 days. Shotcrete material shall have a water/cement ratio of 0.40-0.45 per ACI 506R, Chapter 6, Proportioning and Preconstruction Testing; Section 6.3.3, Wet Mix Process. C. Discontinue shotcrete work if the time between the addition of mixing water to cement and aggregate, or cement to aggregates, and placement of shotcrete exceeds ninety (90) minutes when the ambient temperature is below 85 degrees Fahrenheit, or exceeds sixty (60) minutes when the ambient temperature is above 85 degrees Fahrenheit. Batch, mix and deliver wet-mixture shotcrete per ASTM C94 or C685. D. Hot Weather Shotcreting – Unless otherwise specified, do not place shotcrete when shotcrete temperature is above 95°F, unless prequalification testing shows that the required quality of materials can be achieved at high temperatures. The temperature of reinforcement and receiving surfaces shall be below 90°F prior to shotcrete placement. E. Cold Weather Shotcreting – Unless otherwise specified, shooting may proceed when ambient temperature is 40°F and rising. Stop shooting when ambient temperature is 40°F and falling, unless measures are taken to protect the shotcrete. Shotcrete material temperature, when shot, shall not be less than 50°F. Do not place against frozen surfaces. 3.04 SHOTCRETE PLACING, FINISHING, AND CURING A. Operations: Utilize a standard type of air compressor, capable of providing a minimum of 250 cubic feet of air per minute per nozzle. B. Placing: Except when shooting reinforcing, hold the nozzle perpendicular to and 2 -1/2 to 3 feet from surface. At reinforcing bars, hold the nozzle so as to direct shotcrete behind the bars, and shoot each side of each bars separately. A nozzleman’s helper equipped with an air jet shall precede the nozzle and blow out rebound or sand lodged behind bars, on forms, or placed shotcrete. Placing shotcrete horizontal members from the top is not allowed unless approved methods are employed to eliminate all rebound. Material shall emerge from the nozzle in a uniform flow. If flow becomes intermittent for any reason, direct the nozzle away from the surface until the flow is again steady and constant. Do not reuse rebound or loose sand for any purpose. C. Puddled Shotcrete: Use of “puddled shotcrete” in which the air pressure is reduced and the water content is increased to facilitate placing in difficult locations is not allowed. Do not place shotcrete where nozzle stream cannot impinge directly on the involved surface. Where difficult shooting conditions occur, obtain proper results by maintaining correct air pressure and water ratio and reduce supply of material. D. Construction Joints: Form joints with sloping beveled edges. Clean and dampen the hardened joint surfaces before placing additional shotcrete. Square edged construction joints are not allowed. The film of laitance which forms on the surface of the shotcrete shall be removed within approximately two hours after application by brushing with a stiff broom. If this film is not removed within two hours, it shall be removed by thorough wire brushing or sand blasting. Construction joints over eight hours old shall be thoroughly cleaned with air and water prior to receiving shotcrete. E. Finishing: Rod exposed surfaces to true planes and lines on reaching the thickness and plane established by forms and ground wires. Tamp and wood float surfaces level and provide a rough raked finish. Carefully coordinate finish requirements with other trades (ceramic tile, pool plaster) to insure shotcrete finish is appropriate substrate for final finish material. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL SHOTCRETE 13 11 03 - 5 F. Curing: Keep shotcrete continuously damp for not less than seven (7) days after placing. Use sealed curing sheeting or other approved curing method where water curing is not feasible. Do not use curing compound of any kind. 3.05 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Cut out, remove and replace, or repair to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative, shotcrete not meeting minimum strength, not true, plumb or level, not to required elevations, containing cracks detrimental to performance or appearance, containing shavings, debris or with honeycombs or voids. B. Promptly perform Work required to repair, patch, replace, render properly cleaned surfaces (by sandblasting if necessary) or otherwise make good any defective shotcrete at Contractor's expense, including all expense of additional inspection, tests, or supervision made necessary as a result of defective shotcrete. 3.06 CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion of the Work of this Section, immediately remove all swimming pool shotcrete materials, debris and rubbish occasioned by this work to the approval of the Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL CERAMIC TILE 13 11 04 - 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 13 11 04 SWIMMING POOL CERAMIC TILE A. Swimming pool ceramic tile detailed on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Waterline Face Tile. 2. Gutter Cap Tile. 3. Vortex Pool Wall Tile 4. Depth Marker Tile 5. Trim Tile 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workers: 1. The entity performing the work of this Section shall have been successfully engaged in the respective trade for at least five (5) years immediately prior to commencement of the Work. 2. For actual construction operations, use only trained and experienced workers with a minimum of three (3) years experience with the materials and methods specified. 3. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of this Section, with a minimum of five (5) years experience with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section. B. Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations: 1. Manufacture of all tile shall be in accordance with ANSI A-137.1-1976. 2. Install ceramic tile in accordance with the recommendations contained in the 2024 “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation” of the Tile Council of America, Inc. C. Tolerances: Install all swimming pool ceramic tile straight, true, plumb and square within a tolerance horizontally of one in 200 and a tolerance vertically of one in 500. Waterline and gutter bullnose tile shall be level to 1/8” (+/- 1/16”) around entire perimeter of swimming pools. 1.03 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Provide submittals in conformance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00. Requests for substitution shall conform to requirements of Article 1.10.A of Section 13 11 00. B. Samples: Submit samples of each color and pattern in the specified groups. Character samples can be representative for review prior to screening of actual tile. C. Master Grade Certificate: Prior to opening ceramic tile containers, submit a Master Grade Certificate, signed by the manufacturer of the tile used and issued when the shipment is made, stating the grade, kind of tile, identification marks for the tile containers, and the name and location of the Project. D. Specifications: Submit manufacturer's recommended installation specifications for the Work. E. Submit proof of qualifications as specified in Article 1.02.A of this Section. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver all materials to the Project Site in the manufacturer’s original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible. B. Storage: Store all materials under cover in a manner to prevent damage and contamination, and store only the specified materials at the Project site. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL CERAMIC TILE 13 11 04 - 2 C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect swimming pool ceramic tile before, during and after installation and to protect the installed Work specified in other Sections. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL CERAMIC TILE 13 11 04 - 3 D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Waterline Face Tile: 1. Material: All waterline face tile shall be glazed ceramic tile (Group III standard) as manufactured by Dal-Tile or approved equal. 2. Size: 2 x 2 inches. 3. Color: Dal-Tile # #Q-174, ‘SeaBreeze. Contact Kylee Midura kylee.midura@daltile.com (858) 344-0019. B. Gutter Cap Tile: 1. Material: All gutter cap tile shall be glazed ceramic tile (Group III standard) as manufactured by Dal- Tile or approved equal. 2. Size: S8112 trim tile 3. Color: Dal-Tile #D-023, 'Galaxy Blue'. C. Vortex Pool Wall Tile; 1. Material: Group 4 quality, frost proof unglazed ceramic mosaic tile with absorption rate of less than 1% as manufactured by Dal-Tile or approved equal. 2. Size: 1 x 1 inches. 3. Color: Dal-Tile # D-023‘Galaxy Blue’. D. Depth Marker Tile 1. Material: All depth marker tile shall be glazed ceramic tile as manufactured by Dal-Tile or approved equal. 2. Size: 6 x 6 inches. 3. Color: Dal-Tile #D-317, ‘Biscuit’ with Black silk screen numbers. E. Trim Tile (on underwater steps and benches): 1. Material: Group 4 quality, frost proof unglazed ceramic mosaic tile with absorption rate of less than 1% as manufactured by Dal-Tile or approved equal. 2. Size: 1 x 1 inches, with S-812 quarter round. Color: Dal-Tile #D-311, ‘Black’. F. Wave Area Wall Tile and Concrete Column Tile (Additive Alternate): 1. Material: All waterline face tile shall be glazed ceramic tile (Group III standard) as manufactured by Dal-Tile or approved equal. 2. Size: 2 x 2 inches. 3. Color: Dal-Tile # #K-190, ‘Artic White’. Contact Kylee Midura kylee.midura@daltile.com (858) 344- 0019. 2.02 MORTAR A. Laticrete 3701 fortified mortar #LCR-37-1017. B. Site mortar mix shall comply with ASTM C270 standards. 1. Sand for Mortar: Comply with requirements of fine aggregate for concrete. 2. Cement: Type 1 portland cement, conforming to ASTM C150. 3. Hydrated Lime: Conforming to ASTM C206 or 207, Type S. 4. Water: From a potable source. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL CERAMIC TILE 13 11 04 - 4 C. Water: From a potable source. D. Mortar shall meet ASTM C627. 2.03 THIN SET MORTAR A. Laticrete 254 Platinum. Laticrete, Custom or equal. B. Water from a potable source. C. Mortar shall meet ASTM C627. 2.04 GROUT A. All tile grout shall be waterproof grout complying with the recommendations of referenced standards. Grout color shall be grey for dark backgrounds, white for light backgrounds (verify colors with Architect). 2.05 OTHER MATERIALS A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of ceramic tile as indicated on the Drawings, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and subject to the approval of the Owner’s Representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: 1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed Work of other trades and verify that all such Work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that ceramic tile can be installed in accordance with the original design and all referenced standards. B. Discrepancies: 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner’s Representative. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3. Failure to notify the Owner’s Representative and give written notice of discrepancies shall constitute acceptance by the Contractor of existing conditions as fit and proper to receive its Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Method: 1. Install all ceramic tile in strict accordance with installation method P601-90 of the 2024 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation of the Tile Council of America, Inc. 2. Be certain to install all ceramic tile perfectly level, flush, plumb, and to the finish grades and elevations indicated on the Drawings. B. Interface: 1. Carefully establish and follow the required horizontal and vertical elevations to insure proper and adequate space for the work and materials of other trades. 2. Coordinate and cooperate as required with other trades to insure proper and adequate interface of ceramic tile Work with the Work of other trades. 3.03 GROUTING A. Follow grout manufacturer's recommendations as to grouting procedures and precautions. B. Remove all grout haze, observing grout manufacturer's recommendations as to use of acid and chemical cleaners. 3.04 EXTRA STOCK City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL CERAMIC TILE 13 11 04 - 5 A. Provide one (1) unopened box of extra tile for 2.01A, 2.01B, 2.01C, 2.01D and 2.01E for Owners use at a future time. 3.05 CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion of the swimming pool ceramic tile installation, thoroughly clean and polish the exposed surfaces of tile work. Completely clean work area of debris and rubbish occasioned by this Work and dispose of to the approval of the Owner’s Representative. END OF SECTION City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL PLASTER 13 11 05 - 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 13 11 05 SWIMMING POOL PLASTER A. Swimming pool plaster and waterproofing of swimming pool structures as indicated on the Drawings and herein specified. B. Start-up and operation instructions to Owner’s operations and maintenance personnel and properly balance swimming pool water chemistry until the Owner takes occupancy. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workers: 1. The entity performing the work of this Section shall have been successfully engaged in the respective trade for at least five (5) years immediately prior to commencement of the Work. 2. For actual construction operations, use only trained and experienced workers with a minimum of three (3) years experience with the materials and methods specified. 3. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of this Section, with a minimum of five (5) years experience with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section. B. Standards: Swimming pool plaster shall conform with requirements of the International Building Code, latest edition. In addition, meet requirements of applicable portions of most current edition of the “Technical Manual,” National Plasterers Council, Wauconda, Illinois. C. Start-up: 1. Furnish a swimming pool water chemistry consultant, with a minimum of five (5) years experience, possessing either AFO (Aquatic Facility Operator) or CPO (Certified Pool Operator) certification(s), to supervise and properly balance swimming pool water chemistry. 2. Demonstrate to the Owner that all systems are fully operational and that calcium hardness, total alkalinity, chlorine residual and pH levels are within specified limits. 3. Standards: Furnish labor and chemicals as required to condition the water properly to the following specifications: a. Calcium Hardness: 200-400 parts per million (PPM) b. Total Alkalinity: 80-100 PPM c. Chlorine Residual: 1.00 to 2.0 PPM d. pH Factor: 7.2 to 7.6 1.03 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Provide submittals in conformance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00. Requests for substitution shall conform with requirements of Article 1.10.A of Section 13 11 00. B. Submit proof of qualifications as specified in Article 1.02.A and 1.02.C.1 of this Section. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the Project Site in the manufacturer's original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible. B. Storage: Store materials under cover in a manner to prevent damage and contamination, and store only the specified materials at the Project Site. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL PLASTER 13 11 05 - 2 C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the swimming pool plaster before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed Work specified in other Sections. D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. No plastering shall be done under unsuitable conditions of weather or temperature. No plastering shall be done when prevailing temperature is 40 degrees Fahrenheit or less. B. Do not install plaster during rain and, if rain commences after plastering has begun, immediately protect the plaster from rain by all means necessary until the plaster has set. C. Do not install plaster during wind greater than 10 mph and, if wind commences after plastering has begun, immediately protect the plaster from wind by all means necessary until the plaster has set. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CEMENT / AGGREGATE A. Luna Quartz® tiny pebble finish by Wet Edge Technologies. Altima® quartz finish by Wet Edge Technologies. Pebble-Fina® pool finish by Pebble Technologies. Wet Edge Technologies, Pebble Technologies, Commercial Quartz or equal. 2.03 COLOR A. All swimming pool plaster shall be white in color. Wet Edge Technologies shall be Luna Quartz® “Polar White”. Wet Edge Technologies shall be Altima® “White”. Pebble Technology shall be Pebble-Fina® “Classico”. Commercial Quartz ‘Commercial White’. Contractor to obtain written approval on selected pebble color from the local Health Department prior to installation. Submit cut sheet, color sample and written approval for review by Architect and Owner. 2.03 WATER A. Water for swimming pool plaster shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of acid, alkali, and organics. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: 1. Prior to Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed Work of other trades and verify that all such Work is complete to the point where this installation can properly commence. 2. Verify that swimming pool plaster can be installed in accordance with the original design and all referenced standards, including proprietary application techniques and application training/certifications. B. Discrepancies: 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner's Representative. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3. Failure to notify the Owner's Representative and give written notice of discrepancies shall constitute acceptance by the Contractor of existing conditions as fit and proper to receive the Work. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF POOL PLASTER A. Outdoor Pools or Spas: 1. Completion of other work: DO NOT commence plastering of swimming pool(s) or spa(s) until the following conditions have been met: a. The Health Department and/or other governing agencies have approved the pool(s) and/or spas) for plaster. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL PLASTER 13 11 05 - 3 b. All concrete pool deck construction is complete and the pool decks have been thoroughly cleaned. c. All landscaping in areas adjacent to the pool(s) or spa(s) is complete and the landscape irrigation system is operable. d. All painting in the pool area is complete. e. All welding and grinding in locations adjacent to the pool area are complete. f. The backwash sewer connection is complete. g. Pool(s) and/or spa(s) area(s) perimeter fencing installation is complete. h. All trash and debris have been removed from areas adjacent to the pool(s) or spa(s), particularly those areas that are normally upwind from the pool(s) or spa(s). i. All dust raising construction and/or activities in areas adjacent to the pool(s) or spa(s) are complete or mitigated. j. The circulation pump(s) is/are operational. k. The mechanical system has been flushed sufficiently to remove all dirt and debris from the piping system. l. All necessary chemicals (Chorine, pH adjuster, Sodium Bicarbonate and Calcium Chloride or any other required chemicals) are on site and ready for use. m. Obtain written approval from the Owner and the Architect. B. Indoor Pools or Spas: 1. Completion of Other Work: DO NOT commence plastering of swimming pool(s) or spa(s) until the following conditions have been met: a. The Health Department has approved the pool(s) and/or spa(s) for plaster. b. All work above the pool(s) and/or spa(s) is complete. c. All painting in the pool area is complete. d. All welding and grinding in locations adjacent to the pool area are complete. e. The backwash sewer connection is complete. f. All concrete pool deck construction is complete, and the pool decks have been thoroughly cleaned. g. The circulation pump(s) is/are operation. h. The mechanical system has been flushed sufficiently to remove all dirt and debris from the piping system. i. All necessary chemicals (Chlorine, Acid, Sodium Bicarbonate and Calcium Chloride) are on site and ready to use. j. Obtain written approval from the Owner and the Architect. C. Contractor accepts all liability from damage done to the pool plaster if the pool(s) or spa(s) is (are) plaster before the completion of the above listed items or without the written approval of the Owner and the Architect. D. POOL PLASTER AUTHORIZATION FORM: 1. The pool(s) and or spa(s) at Henry Moses Aquatic Center is/are hereby approved for the installation of the pool plaster. Pursuant to the requirements of specification section 13 11 05, paragraph 3.03. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL PLASTER 13 11 05 - 4 Owner Date Architect / Project Manager Date E. Preparation: 1. Do not apply plaster over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable plaster finish. 2. Consult with manufacturer on application to specific surfaces being treated. Follow manufacturer's recommendation for curing of cast-in-place concrete or shotcrete surfaces prior to application of plaster. 3. Protect ceramic tile, decking, deck equipment, gratings, fittings and other items by suitable covering or masking. 4. Mask or remove all hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in place not to receive pool plaster. Following completion of plaster for each space or area remove masking. Re-install all removed items utilizing workers skilled in the trades involved. F. Application: 1. Finish shall be applied to a uniform thickness of 3/8” to ½” over the entire surface. The walls shall be scratch-coated followed by a finish coat. Material applied to the floor after the walls have been applied shall be accelerated to assure uniform setting time throughout the pool surface. 2. Float the plaster to a uniform plane and trowel to a smooth, dense, impervious surface using extreme care to avoid stains. 3. Take special care in finishing around pool fittings, making sure to mask off or plug openings so as not to fill such openings with excess plaster. Be certain to completely enclose pool fittings with plaster to insure a leak-proof seal around pipes, fittings, lights, anchors, etc. 4. Accurately interface with the finish planes of items installed by other trades. 5. Quartz and pebble plaster finish is to be applied by a licensed applicator as approved by the manufacturer, and in accordance with manufacturer’s training. 3.04 CURING A. Preparation: Anticipate the need for required equipment and have all such equipment immediately available for use upon completion of pool plastering. B. Pool Filling: 1. After the plaster has sufficiently dried and before drying has proceeded to a damaging point, cure the plaster by gradually filling the pool with water, preventing all damage to finished plaster surfaces. 2. Flow the water continuously until the pool is filled. 3. When the weather is hot and/or water pressure is low, keep the pool walls damp while the pool is filling. 4. Coordinate with Contractor to ensure that the pool is continuously monitored while filling to prevent overfill. 3.05 EQUIPMENT ACTIVATION A. All water chemistry and filtration mechanical equipment shall be operational upon filling of pool after City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL PLASTER 13 11 05 - 5 plaster. Chemicals and other related support items as supplied by Contractor, shall be in supply at start- up. B. For the first fourteen (14) calendar days after completion of the pool plaster, brush all plastered surfaces at least twice a day and coordinate with General Contractor to ensure that the plaster is carefully maintained after the initial fourteen-day period. In addition, coordinate with the Contractor to ensure that pool filtration equipment is continuously running during the initial fourteen-day period. C. Start-up and provide qualified personnel to operate pool equipment for a period not less than fourteen (14) days after the pool is placed in operation, or until the Owner takes occupancy of the facility or letter of substantial completion. During this time, Contractor shall instruct and supervise the Owner's personnel in the various operating and maintenance techniques involved. Contractor shall be responsible for supply of chemicals during this not less than fourteen (14) day period and at time of turnover to Owner, chemical storage tanks shall be full. (Owner's personnel shall be fully trained and capable of assuming swimming pool maintenance tasks, training may begin before Owner takes occupancy). 3.06 CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion of swimming pool plaster, remove all materials, equipment and debris occasioned by this Work and leave the job site in a clean and presentable condition. Perform all such clean-up to the approval of the Owner’s Representative. 3.07 WARRANTY A. All applicators must provide a minimum of five (5) year warranty for application and workmanship additional to the manufacturer’s warranty for product. END OF SECTION City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL EQUIPMENT 13 11 06 - 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 13 11 06 SWIMMING POOL EQUIPMENT A. Swimming pool equipment items required for this Work as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workers: 1. The entity performing the work of this Section shall have been successfully engaged in the respective trade for at least five (5) years immediately prior to commencement of the Work. 2. For actual construction operations, use only trained and experienced workers with a minimum of three (3) years experience with the materials and methods specified. 3. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of this Section, with a minimum of five (5) years experience with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section. B. All equipment supplied or work performed shall comply with regulations governing public swimming pools and spas as contained within the International Building Code, latest edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Provide submittals in conformance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00. Requests for substitution shall conform with requirements of Article 1.10.A of Section 13 11 00. B. Required submittals include: 1. Swimming Pool Fittings as specified in Article 2.01 of this Section. C. Submit proof of qualifications as specified in Article 1.02.A of this Section. D. The equipment shown on the plans represent the first listed items in the technical specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for all required field coordination and installation of any approved equal product to provide a fully working and warranted system. The Contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings for any products used other than the first listed specified items. Contractor provided shop drawings shall include details and quality equal to the original plans and construction documents. The Contractor shall provide any and all required engineering including but not limited to structural and anchorage requirements for any proposed equipment other than the first listed specified equipment. The Contractor is responsible to provide a factory certified representative(s) to start -up and provide on- site training for all swimming pool mechanical equipment provided. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect swimming pool equipment items before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work specified in other Sections. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner’s Representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FITTINGS A. Surface Skimmer: StaRite 2” #08650-1403 with solvent weld fittings, Pentair or approved equal. One (1) required. Or Waterway #540-6200. B. Swimming Pool Underwater Lights: ‘PureWhite LED’ #LPL-F5W-120-100 (100’ cord) with polished stainless steel face rings, 87-watt lamps and LWC (J & J Electronics); provide stainless steel light niches, #78210600 with 1” rear hubs, 'Pentair' or approved equal. One (1) required. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL EQUIPMENT 13 11 06 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL EQUIPMENT 13 11 06 - 3 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: 1. Prior to installing the items of this Section, carefully inspect the installed Work of other trades and verify that all such Work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that the swimming pool equipment items may be installed in strict accordance with original design, pertinent codes and regulations, and the manufacturers' recommendations. B. Discrepancies: 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner’s Representative. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies are fully resolved. 3. Failure to notify the Owner’s Representative and give written notice of discrepancies shall constitute acceptance by the Installer of existing conditions as fit and proper to receive its Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Supply and install items of swimming pool equipment in strict accordance with applicable codes and regulations, the original design, and the manufacturer's published recommendations, anchoring firmly and securely for long life under hard use. B. Coordinate with other trades to insure all imbedded items are set plumb and flush. Railing ends must have anchor sockets and escutcheon plates. Be certain that deck equipment and railings are properly bonded prior to imbedding. C. All equipment shall be braced and/or anchored to resist a horizontal force acting in any direction using the criteria shown on the Drawings. 3.03 INSTRUCTION A. The Contractor shall provide a factory certified representative(s) to start-up and certify proper installation, operation and full warranty status of all swimming pool mechanical equipment. The Contractor shall provide not less than two 8-hour days of on-site training for facility staff in the operation and maintenance of the swimming pool mechanical equipment and systems. The two 8-hour days shall be separated by a minimum of seven calendar days and be completed within the 14-day start-up period. 3.04 EQUIPMENT ACTIVATION A. All water chemistry and filtration mechanical equipment shall be operational upon filling of pool after plaster. Chemicals and other related support items as supplied by Contractor, shall be in supply at start- up. B. For the first fourteen (14) calendar days after completion of the pool plaster, brush all plastered surfaces at least twice a day and coordinate with General Contractor to ensure that the plaster is carefully maintained after the initial fourteen-day period. In addition, coordinate with the Contractor to ensure that pool filtration equipment is continuously running during the initial fourteen-day period. C. Start-up and provide qualified personnel to operate pool equipment for a period not less than fourteen (14) days after the pool is placed in operation, or until the Owner takes occupancy of the facility or letter of substantial completion. During this time, Contractor shall instruct and supervise the Owner's personnel in the various operating and maintenance techniques involved. Contractor shall be responsible for supply of chemicals during this not less than fourteen (14) day period and at time of turnover to Owner, chemical storage tanks shall be full. (Owner's personnel shall be fully trained and capable of assuming swimming pool maintenance tasks, training may begin before Owner takes occupancy). 3.05 CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion of swimming pool equipment, remove all debris, materials and equipment occasioned by this Work to the approval of the Owner’s Representative. END OF SECTION City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL MECHANICAL 13 11 07 - 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 13 11 07 SWIMMING POOL MECHANICAL A. Swimming pool mechanical piping as indicated on the Drawings for circulation and filtration systems, pool water heating systems, chemical control systems, booster pump systems and appurtenances. B. Domestic water system from points of connection within swimming pool mechanical equipment room to make-up water system. C. Filter backwash piping to point of connection with backwash retention pit as required. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workers: 1. The entity performing the work of this Section shall have been successfully engaged in the respective trade for at least five (5) years immediately prior to commencement of the Work. 2. For actual construction operations, use only trained and experienced workers with a minimum of three (3) years experience with the materials and methods specified. 3. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of this Section, with a minimum of five (5) years experience with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section. B. Standards: 1. All equipment supplied or work performed shall comply with International Building Code, latest edition. 2. Work shall be performed in accordance with the applicable editions of all National, State and local codes, laws, regulations and ordinances, including the following: a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). b. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). c. American Waterworks Association (AWWA). d. American Welding Society (AWS). 3. Do not construe anything in the Drawings or Specifications to permit Work not conforming to these requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Provide submittals in conformance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00. Requests for substitutions shall conform with requirements of Article 1.10.A of Section 13 11 00. B. Required submittals include: 1. Pipe and Fittings as specified in Article 2.02 of this Section. 2. Valves as specified in Article 2.03 of this Section. 3. Pressure / Vacuum Gauges as specified in Article 2.04 of this Section. 4. Pipe Hangers and Supports as specified in Article 2.05 of this Section. 5. Sleeves and Waterstops as specified in Article 2.06 of this Section. C. Submit proof of qualifications as specified in Article 1.02.A of this Section. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver all materials to the Project Site in the manufacturer’s original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL MECHANICAL 13 11 07 - 2 B. Storage: Store all materials under cover in a manner to prevent damage and contamination, and store only the specified materials at the Project site. C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect swimming pool mechanical items before, during and after installation and to protect the installed Work specified in other Sections. D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Cooperate with entities performing Work specified in other Sections to so that no conflict of new construction or occupied space may occur. Should any installation Work be done without such craft coordination, that Work so installed shall be removed and re-installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT QUALITY A. Materials and equipment shall be new, of the best quality for the purpose intended, and shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name and nameplate data or stamp and rating. As far as practicable, materials and equipment shall be of one manufacturer. 2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Schedule 40: Type 1, normal impact, NSF approved for solvent welding applications, ASTM Specification D-1785, color shall be white. Dura, Lasco, or approved equal. B. PVC Schedule 80: Type 1, normal impact, NSF approved for solvent welding applications, ASTM Specification D- 1785, color shall be gray. Dura, Lasco, or approved equal. C. CPVC Schedule 80 Influent/Effluent Heater Piping: Type 1, normal impact, NSF approved for solvent welding applications, ASTM Specification D-1785, color shall be gray. Dura, or Lasco. D. PVC DR25: Conforming to ATSM D-1784, use with epoxy coated bell and spigot-type fittings or epoxy coated mechanical joint by flange adapters with epoxy coated cast iron fittings as specified in Article 2.02 (F), below. Johns-Manville "Big Blue", Diamond Plastics, or approved equal. E. Copper Tubing: ASTM Specification B-88, hard drawn, with ANSI Standard B16.22 wrot copper fittings. F. Steel: ASTM Specification A-120, Schedule 40 black or galvanized pipe with ASTM A-47 150 lb. banded malleable iron threaded fittings. G. Cast Iron: ASTM Specification B16.1, cast iron flanged fittings, provide epoxy coating as required for use with chlorinated water. 2.03 VALVES A. Ball Valves: 1. For pool system: True-Union design, PTFE seat material with FPM or FKM Double O-ring stem seals, locking handle, NSF certified. PVC schedule 80 body for below grade installation. PVC Schedule 80 body for above grade installation. Furnish ball valves on all pip diameters 2 ½” or less with a rating of at least 200psi at 73° F, Asahi, Ipex or Nibco. 2. For copper pipe system: 3-piece full-port bronze body valve with Teflon seat, ‘Apollo’, ‘Nibco’ or approved equal. B. Butterfly Valves: 1. Epoxy coated cast or ductile iron body, 316 stainless steel disc and stem, viton seat material, furnish hand wheel/gear operators on all valves 8" and larger. DeZurick, Keystone, Ipex or equal. 2. PVC body, PVC disc and EPDM construction suitable for chlorinated water applications. Stem shall be of 316 stainless steel and non-wetted. Valves shall be self-gasketed design with a convex sealing arrangement. Valves 1-1/2” – 10” shall be rated to 150 psi and 12” valves shall be rated to 100 psi at 70°F. Asahi Pool-Pro, no known equal. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL MECHANICAL 13 11 07 - 3 C. Check Valves: Wafer-type, epoxy coated cast or ductile iron body, 316 stainless steel plates and shaft, viton seat material. Centerline, Metraflex, or approved equal. D. Surge Chamber Float Valve: EPD #2-0020-019 Float Control Valve, " line size, as manufactured by Environmental Products Division of Doughboy Recreational, Rancho Cucamonga, CA, no known equal. E. Surge Chamber Isolation Valve: Butterfly valve, tapped lug style, bronze body, stainless steel stem, bronze disc, phenolic back-up ring, EPT seat material. Provide stainless steel shaft extension, shaft housing and tool operator located 2’-0” above floor level with deck access grate as required. DeZurick, Keystone, Asahi, Spears, Ipex or approved equal. F. RP Backflow Preventer: Febco #835-B for 2" and smaller; #825 for 2-1/2" and larger. Febco, Watts, or approved equal. G. Make-up Water Control: Cla-Val make-up water control valve with ductile iron body/cover, bronze trim, globe pattern, Buna-N rubber seals. Pilot system materials to consist of bronze/brass with stainless steel wetted parts and Buna-N rubber seals. System to include: 100-01 Hytrol valve, CF1-C1KX float control, X46A flow clean strainers, and copper tubing with brass fittings. Float linkage and float rod shall be PVC and brass. Base plate shall be 316 stainless steel. The plastic float shall be provided with 8’ PVC rod and stops and a brass counterweight. Provide model #124-01AKX available KSI (714) 754-044. 2.04 PRESSURE / VACUUM GAUGES A. Furnish and install pressure and vacuum gauges on the discharge and suction sides of all pumps. 2” or 2 1/2" diameter dial, bottom connection, chrome ring, shut-off cock and snubber. Ranges shall be selected to indicate between mid-point and two-thirds of maximum range under design conditions. Marsh, Trerice, or approved equal. 2.05 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: 1. The requirements of this Section relates to various requirements of the Agreement, General and Supplementary Conditions, Specifications, Drawings, and modifying documents which are part of the Construction Contract. Responsibility for coordination of all such applicable requirements will be that of the Contractor. B. Description: 1. This section provides guidelines and limitations for the support of all mechanical, electrical, plumbing or architectural items from the building structure, and for the seismic bracing of such items. 2. Design and install all support and bracing systems as required for the swimming pool systems. Provide for attachment to portions of the building structure capable of bearing the loads imposed. Design these systems to not overstress the building structure. C. Quality Assurance: 1. Design and install all support systems to comply with the requirements of the International Building Code, latest edition. 2. Seismic bracing is to be designed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Washington. 3. For the seismic bracing of mechanical, electrical and plumbing system, refer to “Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems” by Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc., (SMACNA) for guidelines. D. Submittals: 1. Submit shop drawings for all substructures and attachment methods. 2. Submit proposed alternative methods of attachment for review and approval by the Architects, prior to deviating from the requirements given below. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL MECHANICAL 13 11 07 - 4 3. For all pipe hangers and support systems, submit structural calculations and details which include all resultant forces applied to the building structure and are prepared and signed by the Contractor’s licensed Washington professional engineer. Calculations will be reviewed for compliance with design criteria, not for arithmetic. E. Materials: 1. Use Kin-Line, Grinnel, or approved equal. 2. Support all pipelines individually with hangers, each branch having at least one hanger. Lateral brace as noted and required. 3. Support piping near floor with steel stanchions welded to end plates secured to pipe and floor. 4. Support vertical piping at each floor level. Install coupling in piping at each support. Coupling shall rest on and transmit load to support. Isolate copper from steel supports with vinyl electrician's tape around pipe and coupling. 5. Use Stoneman "Trisolator," Unistrut, or approved equal, isolators at each hanger and other support points on bare copper tubing system. 6. For PVC pipe, space hangers four (4) feet apart for pipe sizes 1" and under, five (5) feet apart for pipe sizes 1-1/4" to 2", and six (6) feet apart for pipe sizes over 2". Space hangers for horizontal pipes at a maximum of six (6) feet for copper 2" and smaller and for steel 1-1/4" and smaller; ten (10) feet for copper 2-1/2" and larger and for steel 1-1/2" and larger. 7. Size hanger rods, screws, bolts, nuts, etc., according to manufacturer's sizing charts. 8. Trapeze hangers may be used for parallel lines. 9. Use galvanized or cadmium plated hangers, attachments, rods, nuts, bolts, and other accessories in pool mechanical room, high humidity areas, or where exposed to weather. Hot dip galvanize all items which are not factory furnished. Plating for hinged movements must be done at the factory. 10. Lateral Bracing: To prevent swaying of the piping systems, provide angle iron bracing and anchor into wall or overhead framing. Piping shall be braced or anchored in such a way as to resist a horizontal force of 50% of its operating weight in any direction. 11. Do not use wire or other makeshift devices for hangers. 12. Furnish all substructures and fasteners required to comply with the limitations given below. Use material as specified in the various sections and as appropriate to their use. 13. Install stainless steel or FRP Unistrut, pipe clamps/hangers, supports/bracing with stainless steel hardware in the chemical storage rooms, surge/balance tanks, or any other corrosive environment. F. Guidelines & Limitations: 1. Each Contractor will coordinate the load requirements from all subcontractors so that no combination of loads overstresses the building structure or exceed the limitations given below. 2. Concrete Structure: a. Support all loads hung from concrete structure with cast-in-place inserts, unless drilled-in anchors are specifically approved in writing prior to placing the concrete. b. Concrete anchors must not penetrate into reinforcing bars. Where the anchors boring indicates the presence of reinforcing bar, patch hole with an epoxy type grout and relocate anchor 12 diameters away. c. Individual expansion anchors cannot support any loads greater than 300 pounds or manufacturer’s specified load capacity without approval. 3. Steel Structure: a. Hang no more than 20 pounds per metal deck rib in any span. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL MECHANICAL 13 11 07 - 5 b. At beams, hang all beam loads greater than 40 pounds concentric to beam, not off the flanges. c. Attached no loads to the beams or girders greater than the following without specific approval from the Architect. i. Roof beams and girders: 300-pound point load or 600-pound total load for a single span. G. Seismic Bracing: 1. Design and install seismic bracing to not ground out vibration and sound isolation systems. 2. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment 60” or more in height are to be seismically braced whether such bracing is shown or not. 2.06 SLEEVES AND WATERSTOPS A. Provide sleeves where work of this Section passes through fire rated partitions, floors and ceilings, concrete slabs or exterior of structure. Caulk clearance space using sealant appropriate for application in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and Title 24 of Washington Code of Regulations. 3m, Dow Corning, or approved equal. In lieu of sleeves and caulking, "Link Seal" products may be used. B. Provide prefabricated waterstops as indicated on the Drawings at all pipe penetrations through structures containing stored water (i.e., swimming pools, balance/surge tanks, etc.) to insure leak-proof seals. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: 1. Prior to Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed Work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that items of this Section may be installed in accordance with the original design and referenced standards. B. Discrepancies: 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner’s Representative. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3. Failure to notify the Owner’s Representative and give written notice of discrepancies shall constitute acceptance by the Contractor of existing conditions as fit and proper to receive his work. 3.02 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS A. Abbreviations and symbols on the Drawings are those most commonly used. Obtain clarification from the Owner’s Representative on any questionable items before bid. 3.03 GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS A. Size any section of pipe for which size is not indicated or any intermediate section erroneously shown undersized the same size as the largest pipe connecting to it. Sizes listed are nominal. B. Cut pipe accurately to job measurements and install without springing or forcing, true to line and grade, generally square with building and/or structures and adequately supported to prevent undue stress on pipe, fittings and accessories. C. Make changes of direction with manufactured fittings. Street ells, bushings, reducing flanges, close nipples or bending of pipe is not allowed. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL MECHANICAL 13 11 07 - 6 D. Use great care to install piping in accordance with best practice. Plastic pipe shall be “snaked” in trenches to allow for thermal expansion. E. All above grade, below grade and buried or imbedded PVC shall be installed using solvent weld fittings. Also, each and every fitting and pipe end shall be prepared with solvent primer. Fittings shall be joined individu- ally and with enough time between assembly of adjacent joints to allow them to seal solidly. After joining, an even ring of primer must be visible around the entire fitting. If any fittings are installed without visible primer, the fitting shall be removed and discarded and piping recut, rechamfered and joint made up again using a new fitting. All procedures, methods and techniques used to make up solvent weld joints shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F. Arrange pipe and hangers to allow for expansion, contraction and structural settlement. No pipe shall contact structure except penetrations as shown on the Drawings. G. Provide dielectric connections between copper and dissimilar metals. In copper systems, threaded piping including connections to equipment shall be brass pipe and fittings. Install dielectric connections in vertical sections of piping only. H. Run pipe full size through shut-off valves, balancing valves, etc. Change pipe size within three (3) pipe diameters of final connection to control valves, fixtures and other equipment. I. Provide unions or flanges at connections to equipment, on service side of valves and elsewhere as required to facilitate ease of maintenance. J. Locate equipment shut-off valves as close to equipment as possible maintaining easy valve access. K. Make all connections between domestic water systems and equipment or face piping with approved backflow prevention devices as required. L. All PVC pipe exposed to direct sunlight shall be painted with two coats of Exterior Acrylic Semi-Gloss Paint, Sherwin Williams or equal. Color to be selected by the Architect. Prior to painting the PVC pipes, the exterior of all PVC pipes shall be wiped with Methyl Ethyl Ketone, or an approved equal, to remove the glaze from the pipes. M. The main drain pipe must run either level or uphill from the main drain sump, through the surge pit (if applicable) and then to the circulation pump. 3.04 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation: 1. Excavate and backfill trenches as required for the Work of this Section. Conform to requirements of Section 13 11 01. 2. The Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description and of whatever materials encoun- tered, to the depths indicated on the Drawings or as necessary. The Contractor shall dispose of the excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill as directed, and shall perform such grading as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into the trenches. The Contractor shall provide adequate equipment for the removal of storm or subsurface waters, which may accumulate in the excavated areas. B. Trenching: 1. Excavate trenches to lines and grades as indicated on the Drawings and with banks as nearly vertical as practicable. 2. Bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing on undisturbed soil for the entire length of each section of pipe. 3. The width of the trench at and below the top of the pipe shall be such that the clear space between the barrel of the pipe and the trench wall shall not exceed 8” on either side of the pipe. The width of trench above the top of pipe may be wider if necessary. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL MECHANICAL 13 11 07 - 7 4. Over-depth excavations shall be filled with tamped sand to required grades. 5. Excavations of five (5) feet or more in depth shall be shored or supported in conformance with rules, and regulations of State and Federal Governments. Shoring shall be constructed, maintained and removed in a manner to prevent caving of the excavation walls or other load on the pipe. C. Backfilling: 1. Material for backfilling of pipes shall be approved granular material less than two (2) inches in diameter obtained from the excavation. No material of a perishable, spongy or otherwise unsuitable nature shall be used as backfill. 2. Backfilling of pipe trenches shall commence immediately after installation and testing to preclude damage to the installed pipe. Backfill around pipe shall be carefully placed so as not to displace or damage the pipe and shall be carried up symmetrically on each side of the pipe to one foot above the top of the pipe. The material shall be carefully compacted or consolidated before additional backfill is placed. 3. Backfill above an elevation of one foot above the top of pipe in conformance with requirements of Section 13 11 01. Material for balance of backfill shall be approved granular material less than six (6) inches in diameter taken from the excavation. 4. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all pipes shall have a minimum of eighteen (18) inches of cover. 3.05 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Position equipment to result in good appearance and easy access to all components for maintenance and repairs. B. Install piping, flues, breeching and ducts so that they do not interfere with equipment access. C. Install level, secure and out of moisture. Provide shims, anchors, support straps, angles, grouted bases, or other items as required to accomplish proper installation. D. All screws, nuts, bolts and washers shall be galvanized, cadmium plated or stainless steel. After fabrication, hot dip galvanize unfinished ferrous items for outdoor, below grade or other use subject to moisture. E. Extend 1/2” Schedule 40 black steel pipe lubrication tubes from all hard-to-reach locations to front of equipment or to access points. Terminate with proper type of lubrication fitting. 3.06 VALVES AND STRAINERS A. If no shut-off is indicated, provide ball valves at inlet connections and balance valves at outlet connections to fixtures and equipment. Provide proper valve trim for service intended. B. Use no solder end valves unless noted otherwise; provide adapters in copper tubing systems. C. Locate valves with stems above horizontal plane of pipe. In general, locate valves within six (6) feet of floor, out from under equipment, in accessible locations with adequate clearance around hand wheels or levers for easy operation. D. Provide all valves, cocks and strainers, full pipe size unless indicated otherwise. E. Provide hand wheel operators on all valves 6” and larger, under 6” lever operators may be used. F. Provide tool operated valve with stainless steel shaft extension and 'on deck' tool operation for surge chamber butterfly isolation valve. 3.07 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING A. Identify each valve by a numbered brass tag with hole and brass chain mounted on valve stem or handle. Tag to be a minimum of 1” in diameter and numbers at least 1/4” high stamped into tag. Valves and plumbing lines shall be labeled clearly with the source or destination descriptions. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL MECHANICAL 13 11 07 - 8 B. Install an identification chart in a plastic or glass framed enclosure, which schematically illustrates the proper operation of all piping systems and indicates number and location of all valves and control devices within the system. C. The direction of flow for the recirculation equipment shall be labeled clearly with directional symbols such as arrows on all piping in the equipment area. Where the recirculation equipment for more than one pool is located on site, the equipment shall be marked as to which pool the system serves. 3.08 TESTS A. Perform tests in presence of Owner’s Representative with no pressure loss or noticeable leaks. B. Do not include valves and equipment in tests. Include connection to previously tested sections if systems are tested in sections. C. Perform tests as follows: System Test Pressure Test Duration Medium Skimmer Lines and 20psig Water* 4 hours Lawson Main Drain sump lines Pool Piping 50 psig Water* 4 hours Pool Main Drains 30 psig Water* 4 hours Domestic Water 150 psig Water* 4 hours *Never test PVC pipe or fittings with air or other gases, always use water. 3.09 PIPE MATERIAL APPLICATION A. PVC Schedule 40: Below grade swimming pool piping and domestic water piping up to 12” line size; use standard solvent weld fittings. B. PVC Schedule 80: Above grade swimming pool piping up to 12” line size; use solvent weld Schedule 80 or epoxy coated cast iron fittings. C. Type L Hard Copper: Above grade domestic water piping. D. CPVC Schedule 80; Pool Heater Piping. E. Schedule 40 Steel: Natural gas piping. 3.10 CUTTING AND DRILLING A. Cutting or drilling necessary for installation of Work of this Section shall be done only with approval of Owner’s Representative. 3.11 CLOSING-IN OF UNINSPECTED WORK A. Do not cover or enclose Work before testing and inspection. Re-open Work prematurely closed and restore all Work damaged. 3.12 QUIETNESS A. Quietness is a requirement. Eliminate noise, other than that caused by specified equipment operating at optimum conditions, as directed by Owner’s Representative. 3.13 FLUSHING OF LINES A. Flush or blow out pipes free from foreign substances before installing valves, stops or making final connections. Clean piping systems of dirt and dust prior to initial start-up. B. Just prior to plastering the pool, under the observations of the IOR, the pool mechanical system shall be flushed using the pool circulation pump. Circulate water through the mechanical system until the effluent water from the pool return heads runs clean. 3.14 CLEAN-UP City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL MECHANICAL 13 11 07 - 9 A. After all Work has been tested and approved, the Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall thoroughly clean all parts of the equipment installations, including all pool pipe and fittings in the pool mechanical room. Exposed parts shall be cleaned of cement, plaster and other materials and all grease and oil spots removed with solvent. B. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall remove debris from the Project site. Cartons, boxes, packing crates and excess materials not used, occasioned by this work shall be disposed of to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. C. If the above requirements of clean up are not performed to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative, the Owner reserves the right to order the work done, the cost of which shall be borne by the Swimming Pool Subcontractor. END OF SECTION City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL ELECTRICAL 13 11 08 - 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED SECTION 13 11 08 SWIMMING POOL ELECTRICAL A. Provide labor, materials and equipment as required to install the swimming pool electrical system including but not limited to: 1. A complete and operable system of service equipment, switchboards, panelboards, conduits, switches, time clocks and wiring for power and lighting, motor control centers. 2. Junction and/or pull boxes, conduits, disconnects, starters, contactors, wiring and connection of all motors and mechanical equipment, including connection and wiring of line voltage controls associated with the mechanical systems. 3. Swimming pool underwater lighting systems. 4. Swimming pool timing system outlets and scoreboard. 5. Complete grounding system as required and shown on the Drawings. 6. Complete equipotential bonding system as required and shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the National Electrical Code Article 680. 7. Adjusting and preliminary operation of the completed electrical system as described in Article 3.06, A of this Section. 8. Cleaning of all completed Work and installation adjustment of all trim and decorative items. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workers: 1. The entity performing the work of this Section shall have been successfully engaged in the respective trade for at least five (5) years immediately prior to commencement of the Work. 2. For actual construction operations, use only trained and experienced workers with a minimum of three (3) years experience with the materials and methods specified. 3. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of this Section, with a minimum of five (5) years experience with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section. B. Ordinances and Codes: Materials and construction shall conform with all applicable code requirements, including: 1. National Electrical Code, latest edition; Electrical Safety Orders of the State of Washington; Department of Industrial Relations; regulations of the State Fire Marshal; rules and regulations of the Board of Underwriters of the Pacific, UL 50, 50E and NEMA 250 rating. 2. International Building Code, latest edition. C. Verification of Conditions: 1. The locations shown on the Drawings are diagrammatic only and the exact finish location of equipment and materials cannot be indicated. Therefore, locations of all Work and equipment shall be verified to avoid interferences, preserve head room and keep openings and passageways clear. Changes shall be made in locations of equipment and materials which may be necessary to accomplish these purposes. D. Preliminary Operations and Testing: 1. Motor driven equipment shall be tested for correct rotation and completion of all connections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Provide submittals in conformance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00. Requests for substitutions City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL ELECTRICAL 13 11 08 - 2 shall conform with requirements of Article 1.10.A of Section 13 11 00. B. Required submittals include: 1. Conduit and Fittings as specified in Article 2.02 of this Section. 2. Panelboards as specified in Article 2.08 of this Section. 3. Circuit Breakers as specified in Article 2.09 of this Section. 4. Motor Starters as specified in Article 2.12 and 2.13 of this Section. 5. Fuses as specified in Article 2.15 of this Section. 6. Time Clocks as specified in Article 2.16 of this Section. 7. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters as specified in Article 2.17 of this Section. 8. NEMA Type 4x corrosion resistant UL 50, 50E & NEMA 250 rating for enclosures, cabinets and boxes as specified in Article 2.11 & 2.18 of this Section. C. Submit proof of qualifications as specified in Article 1.02.A of this Section. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver all materials to the Project Site in the manufacturer’s original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible. B. Storage: Store all materials under cover in a manner to prevent damage and contamination, and store only the specified materials at the Project site. C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect swimming pool electrical materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed Work specified in other Sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Materials shall be new, in unbroken packages and bear the U.L. label of approval. B. Equipment of one type shall be by same manufacturer. One type of equipment for classifications such as: 1. Switchboards, panels, buss duct, disconnect switches and allied items. 2. Conduit. 3. Wire. 4. Conduit fittings. 5. Fixtures of the same general type. 6. Wiring devices. 2.02 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit within or under buildings or where exposed outdoors shall be rigid metal threaded, hot dipped galvanized, or U.L. approved plastic except where noted otherwise on the Drawings. Metallic conduit shall be of the same metal between outlets or terminals. B. Use flexible metallic conduit only for short connections of motors and where specifically called for on Drawings. Maximum length shall be 40". Use only liquid tight flexible metal conduit. Install an unbroken #12 AWG insulated copper grounding conductor in each liquid tight flexible conduit with permanent connection at motor junction box and service panel ground. C. Protect, before installation, metallic conduit runs in all slabs laid on grade or in contact with the earth or exposed in damp locations, with two (2) heavy coats of asphaltum rust-resisting compound. D. Encase conduits 2-1/2" or larger run underground, outside, or under buildings, in concrete envelopes a minimum of 3" thick, except as indicated otherwise on Drawings or stubouts. Conduits 2 and smaller laid 18" below finish surface in soil. E. Low voltage runs underground outside buildings, 1-1/4" or smaller, may be G.I. or sherardized steel City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL ELECTRICAL 13 11 08 - 3 conduit, with machine applied wrapping equal to double wrap or Scotch-Wrap #50 tape, half lapped and quadrupled at joints in lieu of concrete encasement. F. Service conduits through foundations or concrete members shall run through metal sleeves with adequate clearances for full movement of the conduit. Do not run conduits through footings. G. Secure conduits run exposed on surfaces with one hole heavy-duty straps or fasten with matching fittings to inserts or trapezes, parallel to building walls and ceilings. H. Cap all conduit or duct stub-outs with standard factory caps; except cap threaded steel conduit with B.I. water pipe caps in outdoor locations. I. Use conduit fittings as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds Company, Appleton Electric Co., or approved equal. J. Employ U.L. liquid tight fittings for use with liquid tight flexible metal conduit. K. Use unions as manufactured by Appleton, O-Z/Gedney, or approved equal. The use of running threads will not be permitted. L. Exposed conduit and fittings in chemical rooms shall be nonmetallic rigid polyvinyl chloride, corrosion resistant rated suitable for installation in corrosive environments and in accordance with the latest NEC requirements. 2.03 EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING/GROUNDING A. Bond together and ground to a common ground at a single point all metallic conduit, piping systems, pool reinforcing steel, metal parts of ladders, lifeguard stands, handrails and their supports and the like. The solid copper bonding conductor shall not be smaller than #8 copper. Provide equipotential bonding per Article 680 of the National Electrical Code. In instances where no deck reinforcement is present, Contractor shall provide a minimum of three feet of equipotential bonding material in conformance with Code. All bonding items shall be inspected prior to concrete pour. 2.04 WIRING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections without strain on conductors, allowing the conductors to take a natural position after connections or taps are made. Include all strand of wire in making the connection. B. Make connections for wiring by one of the following means: 1. Make all taps or connections to conductors with compression type connectors except those smaller than #8 B&S gauge may have soldered connections. Solderless connections for #10 AWG or smaller may be used and shall be "Scotchlok", Buchanan, or approved equal. For #8 AWG or larger, they shall be T&B "LockTite", Burndy "Versitaps", or approved equal. 2. All cable or conductor terminal lugs shall be Burndy "Quicklug", Ilsco, or approved equal. Two piece stamped lugs and solder lugs will not be approved. 3. Paint taped splices in damp or outdoor locations with two (2) coats of insulating paint. 4. Tag all branch circuit wires with circuit number at the panelboard and at each point of use with linen or plastic tags. 2.05 CONDUCTORS A. Copper RHW or THW. Do not make splices between boxes. 2.06 COLOR CODING A. Neutrals (identified conductors shall be white). B. Phase conductors shall be red for phase B; blue for phase C. C. Green shall be used for mechanical equipment and receptacle grounds only. 2.07 MOTOR WIRING A. Make final connections to motors with the required AWG (Minimum #12), Flamenol machine tool wire, 19 strand. Control wiring for equipment shall be Flamenol machine tool wire, 19 strand of required AWG. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL ELECTRICAL 13 11 08 - 4 Provide corrosion resistant junction boxes at each item of equipment to change from standard building wiring to machine tool wire. B. Phase motors as proper in direction of rotation. 2.08 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards shall be flush or surface mounting as indicated with circuit breakers as shown on panel schedule, hinged lockable doors, index card holders and proper bussing. B. Where indicated on the drawings, panelboards shall be furnished with subfeed breakers and/or lugs, split bussing, contractors , time switches, relays, etc., as required. C. All panelboards shall be keyed alike. D. All panelboard enclosures shall be corrosion resistant rated NEMA 4X in accordance with latest NEC requirements. E. Furnish corrosion resistant panelboard enclosures and terminal cabinets with Yale 46515 flush locks and LL806 keys except where indicated otherwise herein. Fasten the trim to panel boards and terminal cabinet by means of concealed, bolted or screwed fasteners accessible only when the door is open. F. Panelboards 208/120 volt, three phase, 4 wire, S/N or 120/240 volt, single phase, 3 wire, S/N. Panelboard types as manufactured by: Westinghouse Type B10B General Electric Type NLAB Square D Type NQOB G. Panelboards for 480/277 volt, three panes, 4 wire, S/N. Panelboard types as manufactured by: Westinghouse Type Pow-R-Line 2 General Electric Type AE Square D Type NEHB Sylvania Type NH1B I.T.E. Type Approved Equal H. Panelboard for bussing sizes thru 400 amp shall be 20" wide surface mounted type. Recess mounted type shall have a 20" wide (maximum) recess metal enclosure with trim plate cover extending 1" on all sides of enclosure. Depth shall be 5-3/4" nominal. Height of panel as required for devices. I. Provide 6" additional gutter space in all panels where double lugs are required, or where cable size exceeds bus size. Minimum bottom gutter space shall be 6" high. 12" additional gutter space may be required for aluminum feeders where used. J. Panelboards shown on the drawings with relays, time clocks or other control devices shall have a separate metal barriered compartment mounted above panel with separate hinged locking door to match panelboard. Provide mounting sub-base in cabinet for control devices and wiring terminal strips. K. Panelboard shall have a circuit index card holder removable type, with clear plastic cover. Index card shall have numbers imprinted to match circuit breaker numbers. 2.09 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Breakers shall have a minimum short circuit interrupting rating of 10,000A symmetrical for panelboard voltage thru 240 volt and 14000A for panelboards thru 600 volts or as specified on the drawings. In no case shall the interrupting rating be less than the bus withstand rating unless noted otherwise on the drawings. B. Circuit breakers as manufactured by the following companies only are acceptable: 1. General Electric Company City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL ELECTRICAL 13 11 08 - 5 2. Square D Company 3. Westinghouse Company 4. I.T.E. Company C. Circuit breakers shall be arranged in the panels so that the breakers of the proper trip settings and numbers correspond to the numbering in the panel schedules on the drawings. Circuit numbers of breakers shall be black-on-white micarta tabs or other previously approved method. Circuit number tabs which can readily be changed from front of panel will not be accepted. Circuit number tabs shall not be attached to or be a part of the breaker. D. Where two or three pole breakers occur in the panels, they shall be common trip units. Single pole breakers with tie-bar between handles will not be accepted. E. All circuit breakers shall be padlockable in the "off" position. Locking facilities shall be riveted or mechanically attached to the circuit breaker (submit sample for approval). Other means of attachment shall not be accepted without prior written approval of Architect. F. Where branch circuit breakers supply the power to motors and signal systems, the breakers shall be furnished with lockout clips, mounted in the "on" position. The breakers shall be able to trip automatically with lockout clips in place. G. Panelboard circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type. 2.10 BUSSING A. Bussing shall be rectangular cross section copper, or full length silver or tin-plated aluminum. B. Bussing shall be braces to withstand symmetrical short circuit ratings as follows or as noted on drawings. In no case shall bus short circuit bracing be less than specified circuit breakers. C. Each panelboard shall be equipped with a ground bus secured to the interior of the enclosure. The bus shall have a separate lug for each ground conductor. No more than one conductor shall be installed per lug. 2.11 POOL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES, TERMINAL CABINETS & MISC CABINETS A. All pool mechanical equipment enclosures, terminal cabinets and miscellaneous cabinets in the pool mechanical room or chemical storage rooms shall be corrosion resistant rated in accordance with the latest NEC requirements. Enclosures and all cabinets shall be flush mounted (except where noted a surface) of the size indicated on the drawings, and complete with hinged lockable doors and the number of 2-way screw terminals required for termination of all conductors. Terminal cabinet locks to operated form same key used for panelboards. The trim to terminal cabinets shall be fastened by means of concealed bolted or screwed fasteners accessible behind door to terminal cabinets. Terminal cabinets shall have 5/8" plywood backing. B. Provide engraved nameplate on each enclosure and cabinet indicating its designation and system (i.e., Swimming Pool - Panel ‘SP’). 2.12 MOTOR CONTROL INDIVIDUAL STARTERS A. Manual Motor Starters: 1. Provide flush or surface mounting manual motor starters with number of poles and size of thermal overload heaters as required for the motor being controlled (equipped with overload heaters, one for each motor lead). Back boxes shall be supplied with all flush mounting starters whether they are toggle type requiring only a 4" square outlet box or the larger type requiring a special box and cover designed to accept the particular unit. All box types shall be corrosion resistant rated in accordance with the latest NEC requirements. 2. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, all manual starters for single phase motors, smaller than 1 h.p., shall be the compact toggle type. Manual starters for all single phase motors, 1 to 5 h.p., and all three phase motors up to 5 h.p. shall be the heavy duty type. 3. Where manual motor starter is shown with pilot light, the pilot light shall be installed in a separate outlet box adjacent to the starter outlet, and engraved nameplate in indicate function of pilot light. City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL ELECTRICAL 13 11 08 - 6 4. The following motor starters as manufactured by: Manufacturer Single Phase 1HP and Below Others Arrow Hart Type RL Type LL General Electric CR 101 Class CR 1062 I.T.E. Class C10, C11 or C12 Class C20 Square D Company Class 2510, Type A Class 2510, Type B & C Westinghouse Type MS Type A100 Allen Bradley Approved Equal Approved Equal. B. Individual Magnetic Motor Starters: 1. Magnetic motor starters shall be A.C. line voltage, across-the-line units in a corrosion resistant rated enclosure in accordance with the latest NEC requirements. 2. All starters located outside of a building whether or not indicated shall be W.P. (weatherproof), and all starters noted W.P. shall be furnished in a corrosion resistant rated stainless steel enclosure in accordance with the latest NEC requirements. 3. Starter shall be horsepower rated for the motor controlled, and shall be equipped with properly sized overload elements. Every pole shall be with overload element. 4. Verify the exact motor current and voltage characteristics with the Contractor supplying the motor before installation of a starter. 5. Each starter shall be equipped with "Hand-Off-Auto" switch or stop-start pushbutton as required. 6. Coils shall be designed to operate on voltage indicated on control diagrams and have built-in-under the voltage release for coil circuit to drop motor starter off the line when the line voltage drops below normal operating voltage. 7. The coil control circuit shall be independently fused, sized to protect coil. 8. Starters to be equipped with running pilot light indication with a "Push-to-Test" feature. 9. Magnetic starters shall have a minimum of two auxiliary contacts. Additional auxiliary contacts shall be provided as required to comply with the requirements of the wiring diagrams on the electrical and mechanical drawings and the description of the function in the Mechanical Section of the Specifications. 10. Starters shall comply with NEMA standards, size and horsepower ratings as indicated on drawings. 11. The following types of magnetic motor starters as manufactured by: Manufacture Type General Electric Class CR 106 I.T.E. Class A20 Square D Company Class 8536 Westinghouse Type A200 (Size 4 Max.) or Class II-200 (Sizes 5-8) 2.13 INDIVIDUAL COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL ELECTRICAL 13 11 08 - 7 A. Combination starter shall incorporate fused disconnect switch and individual magnetic motor starter. Combination starters shall be mounted in a corrosion resistant rated enclosure in accordance with the latest NEC requirements. B. Starters shall comply with NEMA standards, size and horsepower ratings as indicated on drawings General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or I.T.E. B. The disconnect handle used on combination starters shall control the disconnect device with the door opened or closed. The disconnect handle shall be clearly marked as to whether the disconnect device is "ON" or "OFF", and shall include a two-color handle grip, the black side visible in the "OFF" position indicating a safe condition, and the red side visible in the "ON" p osition indicating an unsafe or danger condition. C. All starters used in combination starters shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest published NEMA standards, sizes , and horsepower ratings. These starters shall be furnished with three melting alloy type thermal overload relays. D. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The starter shall be inoperative if a thermal unit is removed. 2.14 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER, INTERLOCKS AND CONTROL DEVICES A. Refer to mechanical and plumbing drawings and specifications and provide all control devices including timeswitches, relays and interconnection of starters as required. B. Mount all relays and timeswitches in a separate compartment in motor control center unless otherwise indicated. C. Whether shown on mechanical and plumbing drawings or control center schedules or not, where motors are controlled by external devices (i.e., thermostats, relays, float or pressure switches, etc.) or interlocked with other motors, each motor s tarter to be equipped with a "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in starter cover. Other starters equipped with a "Start' Stop" pushbutton station in starter cover. The Contractor shall be responsible to submit a complete and detailed set of shop drawings, electrical schematic design along with electrical component cut sheets from the MCC panel or the interlock control device manufacturer. RSD Total Control: Allan Pearson 949-380-7878, South Coast Controls: Anthony Ellis 714-998-5656, H2O Integration Controls, Mike Macri, 253-244-1576 or approved equal. 2.15 FUSES A. Fuses shall be dual element, current limiting type, U.L. Class RK5 unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Provide one spare set of fuses of each size and type in each motor control center. 2.16 TIME CLOCKS A. Time clocks shall be provided for all underwater lighting systems and swimming pool circulation pumps not controlled by filter microprocessors. B. Contacts shall have a minimum rating of 40 amperes at 277V. C. Timing motor shall be heavy duty synchronous, self starting, high torque type, and shall be rated at 120, 208, 240, 277 volt 60 Hz. D. Motor shall operate normally at temperature range of -60 degrees Fahrenheit to +120 degrees Fahrenheit. E. Dial shall be 3" diameter, clearly calibrated with day/night zones and 24 hour rotation, with gear to provide one revolution yearly which automatically varies the on/off settings each day according to seasonal changes. Day and month of the year shall show clearly through calendar window on the dial. F. Time clocks shall be equipped with 7-spoke omitting wheel marked with days of the week. G. Time clocks shall be housed in a corrosion resistant rated enclosure in accordance with the latest NEC requirements. H. Acceptable manufacturers are Intermatic, Tork, Paragon, or approved equal. 2.17 GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERS City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL ELECTRICAL 13 11 08 - 8 A. Minimum rating shall be 20 amperes, 125V, 5 milliampere trip setting, Class A per UL943. B. Manufacturer to be Crouse-Hinds, Leviton, or approved equal. 2.18 BOXES A. Boxes shall be of the size required by ordinances or larger, must be corrosion resistant in accordance with the latest NEC requirements where concealed or exposed on ceilings or walls. B. Outlets to be surface where wiring is exposed and flush in areas where conduit is concealed. B. Provide surface outlets with proper corrosion resistant surface covers. Box and cover shall be deep enough to provide at least 1/4" clearance between back of device and back of box. Where box contains more than one device, use a corrosion resistant rated gang box with proper cover in accordance with the latest NEC requirements. Surface outlet boxes shall be of the threaded hub type wherever below 8'0". C. If necessary for cable installation, additional pull boxes or junction boxes may be installed in accessible locations. Exposed pull boxes and junction boxes shall be corrosion resistant rated in accordance with the latest NEC requirements. E. Where exposed to weather pull boxes larger than outlet boxes are required, galvanized code gauge sheet steel boxes may be used with covers attached by brass machine screws may be used. Boxes exposed to the weather shall be approved for the purpose, and conduit entrances shall be on the bottom made by means of an interchangeable hub with gasket and adapter nut. Pull boxes not shown on Drawings may be added only after approval of size and location is obtained. F. For outlets exposed to weather or where noted, cast outlet boxes shall be Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or approved equal. Boxes shall have proper number and size hubs. Device plates, covers, adapters and boxes shall be as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or approved equal. G. Exposed junction boxes, outlet boxes and pull boxes for pool chemical rooms shall be non -metallic suitable for a corrosive environment and in accordance with the latest NEC requirements. 2.19 IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS A. Plainly mark all motor and electrical appliance control equipment indicating the equipment controlled with engraved metal tags. B. Provide laminated plastic nameplates on panelboards on the outside of the door at the top indicating panel designation and feeder source. C. Provide laminated plastic nameplates on distribution switchboards and motor control centers at the top center indicating panel designation and feeder source. D. Identify each distribution switchboard and motor control center circuit breaker with a laminated plastic nameplate indicating its' use. E. Type panelboard directories on the forms provided with the equipment, indicating the use of each branch circuit breaker. F. Fasten all laminated plastic nameplates to surfaces with two (2) or more screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify conditions at the Project site before submitting bid. Be responsible for providing all necessary wiring for the new electrical systems. Wherever wiring is being disrupted due to remodeling or changes, reconnect existing and provide new wiring circuits to accomplish a fully operable system at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 COORDINATION A. The Drawings are essentially diagrammatic and indicate the desired location, size, routes, connection points, etc., and are to be followed as closely as possible. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the Work so as to provide the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome difficulties, limitations or interference wherever encoun - tered. Be responsible for the correct placement City of Renton – Henry Moses Aquatic Center Maintenance & Repairs – Bid Set 30 October 2024 Job Number 2210142.00 SWIMMING POOL ELECTRICAL 13 11 08 - 9 of this Work, the proper location and connection in relation to Work of other trades, for determining the exact location of all conduits, outlets and equipment, and for installing the conduits in such a manner as to conform to the structure, avoid obstruction, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear. Particular attention is directed to the close coordination required on exposed Work. Locations shown on Architectural or Mechanical Drawings if different than those shown on Electrical Drawings should be communicated to the Owner’s Representative in writing for clarification. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Trenching and Backfill: Conform with requirements of Section 13 11 01. Provide minimum cover as required by Code. B. Conduit Installation: 1. Conduit and metallic raceway systems shall be mechanically and electrically continuous from sources of current to all outlets in a manner to provide a continuous grounding path. Close ends of conduit during construction to prevent entrance of dirt or moisture. 2. Securely fasten conduit to the building construction within three feet of each outlet and within every ten feet thereafter. Secure it to boxes, cabinets, pull boxes, terminals with two locknuts and ends equipped with bushings or a terminal fitting. Cut square with ends carefully reamed. 3. Make bends or elbows so that the conduit will not be injured or flattened. 4. Use insulated metallic bushings in all places where bushings are required. 5. Run exposed conduits level or plumb and parallel to the construction members of the building. No cutting across or diagonal runs will be permitted. Neatly surmount structural obstructions encountered on conduit runs by the use of fittings or pull boxes. 6. Identify feeder conduits by stamped metal tags secured to exposed section of conduit in main or sub-panels. 7. Make up all threaded conduit joints gas and watertight with conductive sealer except conduit above ground in dry indoor locations. 8. Rigidly support all boxes independently of the conduit system. C. Connections to Equipment: 1. Fully connect, in an approved manner, all electrical outlets, apparatus, motors, equipment, fixtures, wiring devices and appliances whether they are installed under the Electrical Contract or not, which require electrical connections, to the corresponding electrical system outlet. 2. Where the Work of this Section requires connections to be made to equipment that is furnished and set -in-place under other Sections, obtain such roughing -in dimensions from the manufacturer or supplier of each item as required and assume full responsibility for the installation of the connections thereto. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEAN-UP A. Preliminary Operation: Should the Owner’s Representative deem it necessary to operate the electrical installation or any part thereof prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, consent to such preliminary operation and supervise conduction of same. Subcontractor shall pay all costs occasioned by such operation. Preliminary operation shall not be construed as an acceptance of any Work installed under this Contract. B. Clean-up: Upon completion of the Work of this Section, immediately remove all swimming pool electrical materials, debris and rubbish occasioned by this Work to the approval of the Owner’s Representative. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 14 22 05 00 SECTION 22 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Common work results for Division 22 (plumbing). 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements that apply to the entirety of Division 22 - Plumbing, both interior and exterior to the building, as indicated on the plans and specified herein. B. All specification sections with Division 22 - Plumbing are complementary. All specification sections within Division 22 shall be considered to reference each other. C. Provide all plumbing work as indicated in the drawings and specified herein. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Institute Of Steel Construction (AISC) 1. AISC 325 - Steel Construction Manual B. American Society Of Heating, Refrigerating And Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 1. ASHRAE - HVAC Applications Handbook, I-P Edition C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems 2. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping 3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM D 1557m - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3) E. International Code Council (ICC) 1. IMC - International Mechanical Code 2. IBC - International Building Code 3. IFC - International Fire Code F. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO) 1. UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code G. Manufacturers Standardization Society Of The Valve And Fittings Industry (MSS) 1. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation 2. MSS SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70 - International Electrical Code J. Revised Code of Washington (RCW) 1. 18-106 - Plumbers K. Sheet Metal And Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) 1. SMACNA 1650 - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, 2nd Edition HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 14 22 05 00 L. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1. Fire Resistance Directory 2. Building Materials Directory M. Washington Administrative Code (WAC) 1. 51-11C - Washington State Energy Code - Commercial Edition 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product data for all components and equipment provided under this Division. 1. Product sheets with more than one item or option shown shall have the product(s) and options to be used on the project clearly identified. 2. Any equipment or materials installed or furnished without prior approval of the Owner's Representative shall be rejected and such materials will be required to be removed and replaced with approved materials at the expense of the Contractor. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop drawings shall be submitted for review and approval prior to beginning work. 2. Shop drawings shall indicate routing of piping and location of all equipment to be provided, and shall reflect coordination with other disciplines and existing conditions. 3. Shop drawings shall be provided for the following systems: a. Plumbing 4. Provide coordination shop drawings showing all project scope(s) including architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, and specialty contractors. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions and recommendations. E. Field Quality Control Submittals: Indicate test reports, inspection reports, and commissioning reports. F. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual routing of installed piping, including elevation (or depth for buried piping). 2. Record actual equipment and components installed, as well as locations. 3. RFI's, change orders, and the like shall be noted on the Record Documents where these affect the layout or other aspect of project shown on the documents. References to these shall include the RFI/change order number as well as written description(s), sketch(es), etc., indicating the change or clarification. 4. Record actual location of installed valves and control components. a. Include riser diagram(s) and schedule of valve tags and locations. 5. Final record documents: a. Transfer plan notes and revisions to CAD, indicate the area of change with a bubble around that area. Provide CAD file to Architect for approval. Employ AutoCAD (by AutoDesk) DWG format, version no older than one year prior to date of bid. G. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data: 1. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions of equipment and controls, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings. 2. Include manufacturer's warranty information, including any extended warranties, or certifications of warranties required for specific products, systems, or installations. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 14 22 05 00 3. Include certification of inspection(s) from the Authority Having Jurisdiction for the applicable work scope(s). 4. Include certification of training. 5. Include certification of Contractor's one-year warranty of materials and workmanship, including effective date(s) of warranty period. 6. Include SDS sheets for all chemicals, adhesives, etc., utilized in the construction process as well as those utilized by or in the constructed system(s). H. Seismic support calculations and any related required certification(s). I. Warranty Information: 1. Certificate of installing contractor's one-year warranty. a. Warranty certificate shall specifically list project information, owner information, start and end dates of warranty period, and specific description of coverage (materials, labor, other costs, etc.). 2. Certificate of product manufacturer's warranty. a. Warranty certificate shall specifically list project information, owner information, start and end dates of warranty period, and specific description of coverage (materials, labor, other costs, etc.). 3. Certificate of extended warranty. a. Warranty certificate shall specifically list project information, owner information, start and end dates of warranty period, and specific description of coverage (materials, labor, other costs, etc.). b. Provide extend warranty for: 1) Water heaters 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: A company specializing in manufacturing products specified in Division 22 with a minimum of three years documented experience. B. Contractor: The contractor shall be a Washington State licensed plumber. C. Backflow Testing: All testing of backflow prevention equipment shall be done by a Washington State Certified Backflow Assembly Tester (BAT) certified to work in buildings. D. Electrical Work: 1. Contractor: Electrical work required under this Division shall be performed by a Washington State Licensed Electrician. 2. Electrical work required under this Division shall require an electrical permit. a. Electrical permit shall be procured by the Division 22 contractor or their electrical subcontractor. 3. Electrical Equipment a. Any piece of equipment used in this project and hereinafter specified which, by its nature, requires electrical connection(s), such as fans, pumps, hot water tanks, boosters, air handling equipment, etc., shall be provided with an approved label from either Underwriters Laboratories (UL), the American Gas Association (AGA) or the Canadian Standards Association (CSA). b. Approval of agency must be for the total package (approval of individual components not acceptable) and all labels must be located outside of equipment and shall be visible to inspector. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 14 22 05 00 c. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to meet the Agency Approval requirements of this section. Any allowance for agency costs to provide appropriate label for a piece of equipment must be included in this Bid and Contract. Failure by the Contractor or supplier to obtain labels associated with agency approval prior to bid shall be sufficient cause for the Contractor to obtain all such labels and approvals at no additional cost to Owner. E. Performance Certification: All equipment performance (water flow, heating capacity, etc.) shall be certified by a recognized national agency such as the Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI), Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) and the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Division 1 for product storage and handling requirements. B. Lift only with lugs provided. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure and finish. C. Protect products from weather and moisture. Provide coverings of plastic or canvas. Cover openings into pipe and duct. Isolate components from contact with the soil. Provide a means of heating for those components that may become damaged by high or low temperatures. D. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors and other electrical equipment from enclosures not designed for outdoor use and store separately. 1.7 DEFINITIONS A. The term "approved equal" means final approval by the Architect of a material or piece of equipment substituted for that which is shown in the Specifications or Plans. B. The term "provide" means the furnishing and installing of equipment (including connections and appurtenances) complete and ready for use. C. The term "Mechanical Contractor (MC)" and "Electrical Contractor (EC)" as used in these Specifications or on the Contract Drawings, refer to those subcontractors working under the direction of the General Contractor (GC). 1.8 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS A. Intent of Drawings 1. The drawings are intended to depict the general scope of arrangement. The drawings are diagrammatic and do not show the exact details and locations, nor all offsets in piping. Provide additional fittings, offsets and extensions in piping systems and related items to provide full systems functionality and to assure access for equipment maintenance and as detailed elsewhere in the contract. Relocate or shift piping where conflict exists with other plumbing or mechanical systems, structural elements, architectural elements, or electrical systems, or other project work scope(s). Report conflicts before proceeding with work. Provide reasonable planning and layout in advance of installation in order to avoid conflicts and delays. The Contractor will be directed to adjust systems due to conflicts that could have been reasonably foreseen at the Contractor’s own expense. 2. Examine the Architectural, Electrical, and other project drawings before work is started. Consult with each of the other Contractors regarding locations and spaces required for the work and lay out work to avoid interference. Failure to provide reasonable coordination shall result in the Contractor, at his own expense, moving his work to provide the necessary space for the other Contractors. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 14 22 05 00 B. Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits and construction fees. Furnish Final Certificate to Owner showing compliance with code requirements. C. Scheduling: Comply with requirements of Division 1. D. As-Specified Equipment: These specifications and drawings; generally list only one make and model number for each item of equipment or material required for the project. This is not intended to be restrictive but is intended to indicate the standard of quality, design and features required. In addition the listed product is the basis of the design regarding physical size, capacity, electrical power requirements and performance. The product so identified is designated "as specified." E. Prior Approvals: 1. Specifications have been written around equipment and materials selected for this project based on quality, size, capacity, and performance required to meet building design criteria. All equipment and materials used in this project that have been specified around a specific product or products shall have prior approval for product substitutions. 2. Request for Approval must be submitted in accordance with Division 1 requirements. 3. Supplier and/or Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that substituted material or equipment is of same size, quality, capacity, weight and electrical characteristics as that specified or shown on the drawings. Any changes and cost increases required during construction due to substituted equipment; shall be paid by the Contractor/Supplier. Prior approval to bid does not mean final approval of material or equipment. Final approval will be given after final submitted data has been presented, complete with full information regarding weights, capacities, size, electrical requirements and quality. F. Contractor’s Cost Breakdown: Submit a cost breakdown (schedule of values) of the major portions of the work. Provide this submittal along with the equipment submittals. Organize the costs generally by specification section. For example, if one Section (such as copper piping) applies to both plumbing and hydronics, apportion the appropriate amount to each area of work. 1.9 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Division 1 for execution and closeout requirements. B. Refer to Division 1 for closeout submittal procedures. C. Refer to Division 1 for general demonstration and training requirements. 1.10 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION A. Refer to Division 1 for Request for Information (RFI) requirements and procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. See technical specifications for detailed product specifications. 2.2 DAMAGED OR REJECTED MATERIALS A. Damaged or rejected materials shall be removed from the site immediately upon discovery. 2.3 FIRE INTEGRITY A. All mechanical system penetrations of fire rated assemblies shall be protected in accordance with the building code in force in the Authority Having Jurisdiction for this project. This includes piping, supports, conduit, and any other system and appurtenance provided by HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 14 22 05 00 Division 22. In addition, all through-penetration sealing methodologies shall be listed in the Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) Fire Resistance Directory, issue current at time of bid. 2.4 MOTORS A. Motors shall comply with the current edition of the Washington State Energy Code. Service factor for poly-phase motors shall be 1.15. Service factor for single phase motors shall be 1.35. B. In addition to the requirements in Paragraph “A” above, motors for variable frequency drives shall be of premium efficiency and are suitable for VFD operation (“Inverter Ready”) in accordance with NEMA MG-1, Part 31.4.4.2. Additionally, motors shall be acceptable to the manufacturer of the drive for inverter use. “Inverter Duty” motors are not necessarily required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CODE COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable codes and requirements including but not limited to: 1. Washington State Department of Health requirements. 2. International Building Code, including local amendments. 3. International Fuel Gas Code, including local amendments. 4. International Mechanical Code, including local amendments. 5. International Fire Code, including local amendments. 6. Uniform Plumbing Code, including local amendments. 7. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70), including local amendments. 8. Washington State Energy Code. 9. Requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). a. Authority Having Jurisdiction: City of Renton. 3.2 LAYING OUT WORK A. Locate all general reference points as established by the General Contractor and take such action as is necessary to prevent their destruction; lay out work and be responsible for all lines, elevations, grading for utilities and other work required under the Contract. Exercise proper precaution to verify figures shown on drawings before laying out work and be responsible for any error resulting from failure to exercise such precaution. Coordinate the utility installation with the final site grading and elevations. Locate existing utility lines that will be affected by the building location before any footing work begins. Report conflicts with the Plans before proceeding with the work. Failure to follow reasonable precautions with regards to this instruction will require Contractor to alter the work at the Contractor’s expense. 3.3 ELECTRICAL WORK A. All electrical work performed under this Section of the Specifications shall conform to all applicable portions of the Electrical Section of the Specifications, and shall conform to the NEC (NFPA 70) and all applicable codes. B. All electrical work performed under this Section of the Specifications shall require a permit. Contractor shall obtain & pay for all required permits & fees. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING OCTOBER 2024 Page 7 of 14 22 05 00 C. All electrical work performed under this Section of the Specifications shall be performed by a electrician licensed in the jurisdiction where the work is performed. 3.4 WORKMANSHIP A. Furnish and install all equipment in a neat and finished appearance. If any portion of the work has not been installed in a workmanlike manner, or has been left in a rough, unfinished manner, the Contractor shall remove the equipment, reinstall and patch and paint surrounding surfaces without any increase in cost. 3.5 EXCAVATION - GENERAL A. Provide all necessary excavation and shoring required for the proper installation plumbing systems. B. Slope sides of excavation to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. C. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. D. Sewer trenches shall be excavated to the grade with the bottom rounded to the outside of sewer pipes. E. Bell holes shall be hand excavated to ensure the pipes resting for their entire length upon the bottom of the trench. F. In case of sewer lines in rock excavation, the excavation shall be made at least 4 inches deeper than required and backfilled with sand to outside invert grades to provide cushion. G. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. H. Secure approval to excavate for all trenches near or under footings and for backfilling of such trenches. I. No underground lines shall be covered until the installation has been approved by both Owner's technical representatives and the Local AHJ. 3.6 EXCAVATION DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. B. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. C. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey rainwater and water removed from excavations to collection or run off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. 3.7 EXCESS EXCAVATION MATERIAL A. Legally dispose of dirt and debris from excavation at an off-site location. 3.8 PIPE BEDDING A. Provide sand or pipe zone bedding mix for pipe bedding. 1. Native soil shall not be used as pipe bedding material. 2. Remove all rocks or other objects from bedding material that may damage piping. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING OCTOBER 2024 Page 8 of 14 22 05 00 B. Pipe bedding material shall be provided all around the piping, to the following minimum amounts: 1. Below bottom of pipe: 4 inches 2. Above top of pipe: 4 inches 3. From each side of pipe: 4 inches 4. Pipe bedding shall be compacted to ensure even support for all buried piping systems. 3.9 BACKFILL A. All backfill shall be thoroughly mechanically compacted. B. Excess excavation shall be backfilled with gravel or sand and mechanically compacted to give full support to the pipe. C. No cinders shall be used for backfilling where steel, iron or copper pipe is used. D. All soil foundation areas which will in any manner support any load bearing building components shall be compacted, by the use of mechanical tampers, to at least 95% of the maximum density of the soil foundations as determined by the compaction control test in accordance with the "Method of Test for Moisture Density Relations of Soils, ASTM D1557." The moisture control at the time of compaction shall be uniform throughout the area and shall not vary more than 5% above or below the optimum moisture content as determined by the above described "Compaction Control Test." Place fill in 8 inch loose layers, each layer compacted. 3.10 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Lay pipe in straight lines with uniform slope, leaving no pockets. Care shall be taken to keep all foreign materials out of the pipes during installation. Where ground water is present, provide suction pumps to keep trenches free of water, and cap end of piping exposed to ground water when work is interrupted. B. All underground piping used for the distribution of domestic water or waste drainage systems, which are located outside the building perimeter, shall be buried a minimum of 24 inches from finish grade to top of pipe. C. All piping and ductwork run above the floor shall not be located over electrical panels or switchboards except where located above the structural ceiling. This shall include, but not be limited to, sanitary waste and vent, storm drain and rainleaders, domestic water, and condensate drain piping. 1. Where routing above electrical distribution equipment cannot be avoided, stainless steel drip pans shall be provided. Drain piping from drip pans shall be routed to nearest indirect drain location (such as standpipes, floor/funnel drains, floor sinks, air gap fittings, etc.). D. Isolation valves shall be provided on inlets and outlets of all major pieces of equipment to facilitate serving and removal of such equipment without the necessity of draining the associated system. E. Provide detectable metallic underground tape for all buried piping. Install between 6”-12” above piping. Color scheme and text shall be appropriate to the associated system, and can be the manufacturer’s standard color and description. 3.11 OPENINGS IN PIPES A. Keep closed during the work. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING OCTOBER 2024 Page 9 of 14 22 05 00 3.12 PIPE SLEEVES AND SEALANTS A. General: Provide pipe sleeves or sealants for piping passing through foundations, walls, floors, partitions, and roof to allow piping to pass freely through. B. Building Walls Above Grade 1. Non-Masonry Construction a. Fire Rated Assembly: Provide a metallic tube pipe-sleeve, and maintain the fire rating around the exterior of the sleeve. Fire-stop in the annular space between the sleeve and pipe. For non-metallic pipe, provide an intumescent fire stop system installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. b. Non-Fire Rated Assembly: No sleeve is required. If the interior wall contains insulation, insure that the pipe is sealed to the wall on either side. Also insure that the pipe cannot move with respect to the wall so that the sealing system will not become damaged. 2. Masonry Construction a. Fire Rated Assembly: Core-drill and seal with a fire-stop material. For non-metallic pipe, provide an intumescent fire-stop system installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. A galvanized Schedule 40 pipe sleeve is acceptable in lieu of a core drill opening. b. Non-Fire Rated Assembly: Core drill and seal with an expanding foam. A galvanized Schedule 40 pipe sleeve is acceptable in lieu of a core drill opening. 3.13 WALL AND FLOOR PLATES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. Where pipes pass through finished walls, floors or ceilings, provide chromium plates, with suitable set screws or other approved holding devices. Where extended sleeves are necessary, the plates shall be of sufficient depth to cover the sleeves. 3.14 INSERTS A. Inserts in concrete for the suspension of piping and equipment; shall be provided by this Contractor unless otherwise noted on the Plans. Provide as necessary for support of systems installed. B. Inserts in "poured in place" concrete shall be Grinnell, Kinsdorf, Elcen, or approved equal. 3.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: 1. Provide all saw cutting, core drilling, and other work (including patching) necessary for installation of plumbing systems. 2. Prior to cutting, saw cutting, or core drilling any concrete, Contractor shall locate any reinforcing steel (rebar) and the like located in the concrete where the cutting is to be performed. Obtain specific approval prior to cutting any concrete reinforcement. Approval must be obtained for each specific instance of cutting reinforcement. 3. Unless directed otherwise by Structural Documents, maintain the following minimum clearances from any concrete reinforcement: a. Reinforcing steel: 2” B. New Work: Furnish dimensions and locations of openings to other Contractors doing the work. Provide ample time to avoid delays and unnecessary labor. The expense for cutting and patching made necessary to admit work, repair defective material or workmanship, or by neglect to anticipate proper requirements shall be borne by this Contractor. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING OCTOBER 2024 Page 10 of 14 22 05 00 C. Existing Structure: 1. All necessary cutting and patching of existing structures necessary for the installation of mechanical work shall be as part of this Contract. Unless cutting and patching locations are specifically shown on the drawings, obtain approval prior to proceeding. 2. All surfaces must be patched upon completion of work. Final finish of all patched surfaces (walls, ceilings, floors etc.) shall be done patched to match the adjacent surface. 3. Contractor shall locate all steel in existing structure using x-ray or similar scanning equipment prior to cutting into existing structure. 3.16 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION ACCESS A. Provide suitable access to all mechanical equipment requiring servicing, maintenance, replacement, or repair. 1. In concealed spaces where access has not been provided by means of doors, hatchways, walkways or other means, provide wall or ceiling access doors of a type suitable to the service intended, sized to provide easy access to all equipment. Location of such doors shall be coordinated with the work of the other trades to avoid conflicts. 2. Access door locations shall be approved by the Architect prior to installation. B. Access Panels 1. Provide access panels for all concealed equipment, valves, and the like that requires adjustment or service access, as well as for all wall cleanouts. Panel locations shall be carefully selected on the job so as not to be located behind cabinets, lights, etc. a. Coordinate with the work of other Contractors before installing panels. b. Panels shall be prime coated and painted to match surrounding surface. c. In finished areas, including ceilings, all access panels shall have the same type of finished surface as that of the surrounding area. d. Panels shall be size appropriate for the service intended. e. Provide UL labeled fire rated access doors for one or two-hour rated walls and ceilings. f. Install before surrounding surfaces have been painted. g. Access panel doors shall have cylinder lock latch, all keyed alike. h. Provide access doors in ceiling or wall adjacent to all fire damper locations. i. Verify with Architect the location and finish of all access panels. j. Panels shall be J.R. Smith or equal. 3.17 ZONE ISOLATION A. At a minimum, provide isolation valves at plumbing connections to all spaces with plumbing in the building including the following: 1. Each restroom. 2. Each utility space. B. Plumbing systems to be provided with isolation valves: 1. Domestic CW systems. 2. Domestic HW systems. 3. Tempered water systems. 4. Domestic HW recirculation systems. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING OCTOBER 2024 Page 11 of 14 22 05 00 3.18 SEISMIC SUPPORT A. Piping: Support piping per the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems. Use Seismic Hazard Level-A unless otherwise indicated. 3.19 FIRE INTEGRITY A. Maintain the fire rating of all assemblies (wall, ceiling, floor, etc.) penetrated by mechanical systems. Provide approved firestopping materials as previously specified, and install in accordance with the conditions of the material UL listing. 3.20 PRESSURE TESTS AND IN-SERVICE TEST A. All work under this Contract shall be thoroughly and systematically tested, both during construction and after completion. Pipe testing shall be either as specified in the appropriate specification section, or as specified in the applicable plumbing or mechanical code. Tests shall be maintained until approved. B. Notifications shall be sent to the following parties 48 hours in advance of all tests: 1. Architect. 2. Owner. 3. Authority Having Jurisdiction over the specific work to be inspected. a. Notifications to AHJ shall be provided in accordance with requirements of each specific AHJ, including amount of advance notice allowed. C. No systems, whether prescribed for testing or not, shall be covered or concealed below ground, in walls, in ceiling spaces, or generally from ease of viewing without first notifying all of the above-listed parties for inspection. Failure to provide such notification of concealed systems shall be cause to require this Contractor to uncover and re-cover such systems at no additional cost. D. A log of all tests shall be kept. The log shall note date, time of day test started, system or portion of system tested, length of test and test results. E. The Contractor shall test the completed installation as in regular service. The systems provided under this Contract shall be operated in normal service for a period of at least a week prior to requesting substantial completion inspection, and any resulting defects repaired. F. The Contractor shall guarantee the entire system and all parts thereof for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance, and shall repair or replace any part which may show signs of failure in that time if such failure is due to imperfections in material or to improper workmanship. 3.21 STARTUP, BALANCING AND COMMISSIONING A. Equipment Startup 1. Refer to Section 23 08 10 for startup requirements. B. Testing and Balancing 1. Refer to Section 23 05 93 for testing and balancing requirements. C. Commissioning 1. Provide system adjustment to demonstrate compliance with design documents. Provide documentation to meet basic commissioning requirements of Washington State Energy Code section C408. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING OCTOBER 2024 Page 12 of 14 22 05 00 3.22 CLEANING UP A. Comply with requirements of Division 1. B. Pipes shall be maintained as clean as possible during construction, and shall be blown clean before the building field painting operations are started. Piping shall shall be thoroughly cleaned before systems are operational. Strainers shall be cleaned prior to turning the system(s) over to the owner. C. All equipment and material installed by this Contractor shall be properly protected from damage during the course of construction. D. Enamelware or china fixtures around which plaster is installed or paint is applied shall be covered with heavy wrapping paper thoroughly secured. E. Fixtures and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned before final inspection. Remove all labels from plumbing fixtures. F. In utility rooms and other spaces where piping such as domestic water, condensate drains, stormwater, rainleader, sanitary sewer, or vent have been installed at floor level and interfere with foot traffic, the Mechanical Contractor shall provide covers to protect these pipes. Wood or other such material is acceptable. Where duct plenums or duct runs interfere with normal traffic pattern of maintenance personnel, the Mechanical Contractor shall provide a wooden bridge over the ducts to prevent damage. Provide handrails for bridge(s) where required by code. 3.23 SPECIAL PROTECTION A. Exercise maximum precaution to provide positive protection for the building and equipment from damage of any kind, and in particular, prevent water and dust seepage into new equipment. B. Any damage to the building, systems, or property, caused by the Contractor shall result in the Contractor repairing or replacing the damaged item(s) at no additional cost to the Owner. This provision shall include any preventable damage caused by lack of due diligence in planning and investigation, and shall not be applied to field conditions which could not reasonably be ascertained prior to the activity causing damage. C. In attic or other spaces where piping has been installed at floor level and interferes with foot traffic, the Contractor shall provide permanent covers to protect these items. Wood or other such material is acceptable. Provide handrails where required by code. 3.24 CAULKING A. Caulk all openings and flash around all piping, equipment, and ducts passing through roof, floor, and walls. B. All caulking shall be waterproof, low-VOC, and zero mold growth type. C. Refer to paragraph "Fire Integrity" for all rated wall, ceiling, floor, and other penetrations. 3.25 FINAL INSPECTION A. This Contractor shall thoroughly review and inspect the project to determine when final inspection is required, and shall provide notification. It shall be understood that the work shall be essentially complete, and the open items list provided at that time. The warranty period will not start until the punchlist and back-check are complete. Additional inspections required HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING OCTOBER 2024 Page 13 of 14 22 05 00 because of lack of diligence by the Contractor will be conducted on a schedule convenient to the inspectors. 3.26 INSTRUCTION PERIODS A. Refer to Division 1 for additional demonstration and training requirements. B. Scope: Following installation of mechanical work, have representatives of installation tradesmen conduct demonstrations and instruction periods to point out locations of servicing points and required points of maintenance to Owner’s staff. C. General Description Of Instruction Period: Each period shall include preliminary discussion and presentation of information from maintenance manuals with appropriate references to drawings; followed by tours of building areas explaining maintenance requirements, access methods, servicing and maintenance procedures, and equipment cleaning procedures, temperature control settings and available adjustments. D. Scheduling Of Instruction Period: Notice of Contractor's readiness to conduct such instruction and demonstration shall be given at least two weeks prior to the instruction period, and agreement finalized as to the date at which the instruction period is to be performed. Notify two weeks prior to date when ready to conduct instruction and demonstrations; receive approvals of proposed date prior to making final arrangements. 3.27 ON SITE OBSERVATIONS AND SAFETY MEASURES A. The Contractor is solely responsible to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The duty of any other individual or organization to conduct construction observations of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on, or near the construction site. The contractor shall be responsible for providing all safety measures and shall consult with the State and/or Federal Safety Agency or Inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to compliance with State and/or Federal regulations. Furthermore, the Contractor distinctly assumes all risk or damages or injury to any persons or property wherever located resulting from any action or operation under this Contract or in connection with the work. 3.28 CONTINUITY OF BUILDING AND UTILITY AND SHUTDOWNS A. General: Continuity of utilities services in the building shall be maintained at all times as required to provide heat, water, lighting, and power to all portions of the building. Utility systems shutdowns required for extensions, alterations or connections of new services; shall be accomplished in accordance with the following requirements. B. Shutdowns: 1. While building is in operation, utilities shutdowns shall be scheduled for weekends, holidays, or at night, if the shutdown affects the use of the building or surrounding buildings. 2. Shutdowns longer than 2 hours shall be coordinated with and approved by the Owner at least 1 week in advance. 3. Shutdowns less than 2 hours shall be coordinated with and approved by the Owner at least 48 hours in advance. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING OCTOBER 2024 Page 14 of 14 22 05 00 C. Costs: The Contractor shall include in their bid proposal all costs associated with utilities shutdowns. No extra payment will be made for overtime work, schedule changes or failure to complete utilities connections within authorized shutdown periods. D. Liability: Failure to coordinate with the serving utility or to sufficiently pursue the work in time to return utilities to service shall not constitute a basis for avoiding any contractual penalties. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 3 22 05 19 SECTION 22 05 19 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Indicating thermometers B. Pressure gauges C. Thermowells 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 1. ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments 2. ASME B40.200 - Thermometers, Direct Reading and Remote Reading B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI/IEC 60529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International) 1. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers 2. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers D. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA M6 - Water Meters -- Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Required Submittals: 1. Product data. 2. Test and Inspection Reports: a. Completed manufacturer's startup checklist and report. b. Commissioning report. 3. Project record documents. 4. Operation and maintenance data. 5. Warranty information: a. Manufacturer's warranty. b. Manufacturer's extended warranty. 6. Training certificates. C. Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range and location for manufactured components. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Manufacturers: A company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with a minimum of three years documented experience. C. Installers: The installer shall have a minimum of five continuous years’ experience installing systems specified in this section and at least ten projects of similar size and scope. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Division 1 for product storage and handling requirements. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 3 22 05 19 1.6 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Division 1 for closeout submittal procedures. B. Refer to Division 1 for demonstration and training requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INDICATING THERMOMETERS A. Mercury type thermometers are not acceptable. B. Dial type: ANSI B40.200, Provide thermowell sized for each thermometer. Thermometer shall be 5” dial size with stainless steel case & stem. Case shall be hermetically sealed. Accuracy shall be +/- 1% or better. Coil shall be bimetallic type (silicone dampened on ranges up to 300°F, above 300°F not dampened). Window shall be double-strength glass. Thermometer shall be adjustable for viewing angle. C. Standard type: ANSI B40.200, Provide thermowell sized for each thermometer. Thermometer shall have a nominal scale length of 5”. Construction shall be stainless-steel case with molded glass cover, stainless-steel stem and bulb. Stem shall be straight, length as required to fit well. 2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Gauges, Pressure and Compound 1. Stainless steel liquid filled gauges. 4” diameter. IP65 protection as rated under ANSI/IEC 60529 standards. 2. Provide normal working range of 50 % full scale. 3. Ambient Temperature Range: -40 degrees F to 140 degrees F. 4. 316 stainless steel element. 5. Laminated safety glass window. 6. White aluminum dial with black lettering. 7. Pressure Connection: 1/2”. 8. Case, Bezel Ring And Movement: 304 stainless steel. 9. Provide piston snubber and isolation cock valve. Snubber shall be brass body with minimum pressure of 5000 PSI. Snubber shall include a piston that moves within a chamber. The action of the piston in the chamber provides damping for the gauge and protects the gauge from debris in the working fluid. 2.3 THERMOWELLS A. Pressure/temperature thermowells (“Pete’s Plug” or equal) shall be installed on inlet and discharge of all pumps and coils unless other different instrumentation that performs the same function is shown on the drawings. Provide a gauge kit that includes a pressure gauge and thermometer compatible with the thermowells. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install positive displacement meters with isolating valves on inlet and outlet to AWWA M6. Provide full line size valved bypass with globe valve for liquid service meters. C. Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump. Pipe to gage. Not required for fractional horsepower pumps. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 3 22 05 19 D. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide gage cock to isolate each gage. Provide siphon on gages in steam systems. Extend nipples and siphons to allow clearance from insulation. E. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inch (60 mm) for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from insulation. F. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges. G. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or sensor sockets. Refer to Section 23 09 23 - Direct Digital Controls for HVAC. Where thermometers are provided on local panels, duct or pipe mounted thermometers are provided on local panels, duct or pipe mounted thermometers are not required. H. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments. I. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale. J. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical. K. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero. L. Locate test plugs adjacent thermometers and thermometer sockets 3.2 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 4 22 05 23 SECTION 22 05 23 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ball valves. B. Butterfly valves. C. Check valves. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch; 2013 (Reaffirmed 2018). B. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard; 2020. C. ASME B16.10 - Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves; 2022, with Errata (2023). D. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2021. E. ASME B16.34 - Valves — Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End; 2020. F. ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings; 2017. G. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2022. H. MSS SP-67 - Butterfly Valves; 2022. I. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves; 2019. J. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends; 2010, with Errata . K. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2023, with Errata. L. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2022. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on valves including manufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: 1. Obtain valves for each valve type from single manufacturer. 2. Company must specialize in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Minimize exposure of operable surfaces by setting plug and ball valves to open position. 2. Protect valve parts exposed to piped medium against rust and corrosion. 3. Protect valve piping connections such as grooves, weld ends, threads, and flange faces. 4. Secure check valves in either the closed position or open position. 5. Adjust butterfly valves to closed or partially closed position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection and protect flanges and specialties from dirt. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 4 22 05 23 2. Store valves in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. a. Store valves indoors in dry environment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPLICATIONS A. Listed pipe sizes shown using nominal pipe sizes (NPS) and nominal diameter (DN). B. Provide the following valves for the applications if not indicated on drawings: 1. Shutoff: Ball or butterfly. 2. Throttling: Provide ball or butterfly. 3. Swing Check (Pump Outlet): a. 2 inch and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc. C. Substitutions of valves with higher CWP classes or WSP ratings for same valve types are permitted when specified CWP ratings or WSP classes are not available. D. Domestic, Hot and Cold Water Valves: 1. 2 inch and Smaller: a. Bronze and Brass: Provide with solder-joint, threaded, or press-fit ends. 2. 2-1/2 inch and Larger: a. Iron, 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Provide with threaded, flanged, or grooved ends. b. Iron Single-Flange Butterfly: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze disc. c. Iron Grooved-End Butterfly: 175 CWP. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: No less than rating indicated; as required for system pressures and temperatures. B. Valve Sizes: Match upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. C. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Hand Lever: Quarter-turn valves 6 inch and smaller. D. Insulated Piping Valves: With 2 inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Ball Valves: Extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. 2. Butterfly Valves: Extended neck. 3. Memory Stops: Fully adjustable after insulation is installed. E. Valve-End Connections: 1. Threaded End Valves: ASME B1.20.1. 2. Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 1/2 inch through 24 inch: ASME B16.5. 3. Solder Joint Connections: ASME B16.18. 4. Grooved End Connections: AWWA C606. F. General ASME Compliance: 1. Ferrous Valve Dimensions and Design Criteria: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34. 2. Solder-joint Connections: ASME B16.18. G. Potable Water Use: 1. Certified: Approved for use in compliance with NSF 61 and NSF 372. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 4 22 05 23 2. Lead-Free Certified: Wetted surface material includes less than 0.25 percent lead content. H. Source Limitations: Obtain each valve type from a single manufacturer. 2.3 BRONZE, BALL VALVES A. General: 1. Fabricate from dezincification resistant material. 2. Copper alloys containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. B. Two Piece, Full Port with Bronze Trim: 1. Comply with MSS SP-110. 2. WSP Rating: 150 psi. 3. WOG Rating: 600 psi. 4. Body: Forged bronze or dezincified-brass alloy. 5. Ends Connections: Pipe thread or solder. 6. Seats: PTFE. 7. Stem: Bronze, blowout proof. 8. Ball: Chrome plated brass. C. Three Piece, Full Port with Stainless Steel Trim: 1. Comply with MSS SP-110. 2. WSP Rating: 150 psi. 3. CWP Rating: 600 psi. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. End Connections: Pipe thread or press. 6. Seats: PTFE. 7. Stem: Stainless steel. 8. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. 2.4 BRONZE, SWING CHECK VALVES A. General: 1. Fabricate from dezincification resistant material. 2. Copper alloys containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. B. Class 150: 1. Pressure and Temperature Rating: MSS SP-80, Type 3. 2. Design: Y-pattern, horizontal or vertical flow. 3. WSP Rating: 150 psi. 4. WOG Rating: 300 psi. 5. Body: Bronze, ASTM B62. 6. End Connections: Threaded or soldered. 7. Disc: Bronze. 2.5 CIRCUIT SETTER VALVES A. Valve shall provide multi-turn, 360° adjustment with micrometer type indicators located on the valve handwheel. Valves shall have a minimum of five full 360° handwheel turns. 90° ‘circuit-setter’ style ball valves are not acceptable. Valve handle shall have hidden memory feature, which will provide a means for locking the valve position after the system is balanced. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 4 22 05 23 B. Valves shall be furnished with precision machined venturi built into the valve body to provide highly accurate flow measurement and flow balancing. The venturi shall have two, ¼" threaded brass metering ports with check valves and gasketted caps located on the inlet side of the valve. Valves shall be furnished with flow smoothing fins downstream of the valve seat and integral to the forged valve body to make the flow more laminar. The valve body, stem and plug shall be brass. The handwheel shall be high-strength resin. C. Valves shall be Armstrong CBV series or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Discard all packing materials and verify that valve interior, including threads and flanges are completely clean without signs of damage or degradation that could result in leakage. B. Verify valve parts to be fully operational in all positions from closed to fully open. C. Confirm gasket material to be suitable for the service, to be of correct size, and without defects that could compromise effectiveness. D. Should valve is determined to be defective, replace with new valve. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide unions or flanges with valves to facilitate equipment removal and maintenance while maintaining system operation and full accessibility for servicing. B. Provide separate valve support as required and locate valve with stem at or above center of piping, maintaining unimpeded stem movement. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 6 22 05 29 SECTION 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prefabricated trapeze-framed systems. B. Strut systems for pipe or equipment support. C. Beam clamps. D. Pipe hangers. E. Pipe supports, guides, shields, and saddles. F. Anchors and fasteners. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2023. C. ASTM A181/A181M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping; 2023. D. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2019. E. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999, with Editorial Revision (2022). F. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2018. G. ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures; 1999 (Reapproved 2022). H. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2023. I. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2023. J. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2023. K. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023d. L. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Gravimetric Determination of Water Vapor Transmission Rate of Materials; 2023. M. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; 2018, with Amendment (2019). N. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition. O. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 6 22 05 29 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and components to be installed. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for installation. 3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations. 4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for metal channel (strut) framing systems and other pipe support components. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable building code. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide required hardware to hang or support piping, equipment, or fixtures with related accessories as necessary to complete installation of plumbing work. B. Provide hardware products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for intended purpose. C. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported with a minimum safety factor of 1.5. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable. D. Materials for Metal Fabricated Supports: Comply with Section 05 50 00. 1. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633 unless stated otherwise. 2. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M unless stated otherwise. E. Corrosion Resistance: Use corrosion-resistant metal-based materials fully compatible with exposed piping materials and suitable for the environment where installed. 1. Outdoor, Damp, or Wet-Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 PREFABRICATED TRAPEZE-FRAMED SYSTEMS A. Prefabricated Trapeze-Framed Metal Strut Systems: 1. Strut Channel or Bracket Material: a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or galvanized steel. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 6 22 05 29 b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel. 2. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gauge, 0.1046 inch. 3. Accessories: Provide bracket covers, cable basket clips, cable tray clips, clamps, conduit clamps, fire-retarding brackets, j-hooks, protectors, and vibration dampeners. 2.3 STRUT SYSTEMS FOR PIPE OR EQUIPMENT SUPPORT A. Strut Channels: 1. ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel bracket with clamps for surface mounting of piping or plumbing equipment support. 2. Channel or Bracket Kits: Include rods, brackets, end-fixed fittings, covers, clips, and other related hardware required to complete sectional trapeze section for piping or other support. B. Hanger Rods: 1. Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated. 2. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required: a. Piping up to 1 inch: 1/4 inch diameter. b. Piping larger than 1 inch: 3/8 inch diameter. 2.4 BEAM CLAMPS A. MSS SP-58 types 19 through 23, 25 or 27 through 30 based on required load. B. Provide clamps with hardened steel cup-point set screws and lock-nuts for anchoring in place. C. Material: ASTM A395/A395M ductile iron, ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel, ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron, ASTM A181/A181M forged steel, or ASTM A283/A283M steel. 2.5 PIPE HANGERS A. Band Hangers, Adjustable: 1. MSS SP-58 type 7 or 9, zinc-plated ASTM A1011/A1011M steel or ASTM A653/A653M carbon steel. 2.6 PIPE CLAMPS A. Riser Clamps: 1. For insulated pipe runs, provide two bolt-type clamps designed for installation under insulation. 2. MSS SP-58 type 1 or 8, carbon steel or steel with epoxy plated, plain, stainless steel, or zinc plated finish. 3. UL (DIR) listed: Pipe sizes 1/2 to 8 inch. B. Extension Split Pipe Clamp: 1. MSS SP-58 type 12, hinged split ring and yoke roller hanger with epoxy copper or plain finish. 2. Material: ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel. 3. Provide hanger rod and nuts of the same type and material for a given pipe run. 4. Provide coated or plated hangers to isolate steel hangers from dissimilar metal tube or pipe. C. Strut Clamps: 1. Cushioned Pipe or Tubing Strut Clamp: Provide strut clamp with thermoplastic elastomer cushion having dielectric strength of 670 V/mil. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 6 22 05 29 2.7 PIPE SUPPORTS, GUIDES, SHIELDS, AND SADDLES A. Dielectric Barriers: Provide between metallic supports and metallic piping and associated items of dissimilar type; acceptable dielectric barriers include rubber or plastic sheets or coatings attached securely to pipe or item. B. Pipe Shields for Insulated Piping: 1. MSS SP-58 type 40, ASTM A1011/A1011M steel or ASTM A653/A653M carbon steel. 2. General Construction and Requirements: a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84 or UL 723. b. Shields Material: UV-resistant polypropylene with glass fill. c. Maximum Insulated Pipe Outer Diameter: 12-5/8 inch. d. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to 178 degrees F. e. Pipe shields to be provided at hanger, support, and guide locations on pipe requiring insulation or additional support. C. Pipe Supports: 1. Material: ASTM A395/A395M ductile iron, ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel, ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron, ASTM A181/A181M forged steel, or ASTM A283/A283M steel. 2. Liquid Temperatures Up to 122 degrees F: a. Overhead Support: MSS SP-58 types 1, 3 through 12 clamps. b. Support From Below: MSS SP-58 types 35 through 38. D. Pipe Supports, Thermal Insulated: 1. General Requirements: a. Insulated pipe supports to be provided at hanger, support, and guide locations on pipe requiring insulation or additional support. b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/smoke developed index of 5/30, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. c. Provide pipe supports for 1/2 to 30 inch iron pipes. d. Insulation inserts to consist of rigid phenolic foam insulation surrounded by 360 degree, PVC jacketing. 2. PVC Jacket: a. Pipe insulation protection shields to be provided with ball bearing hinge and locking seam. b. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 0.0071 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. c. Minimum Thickness: 60 mil, 0.06 inch. 2.8 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS A. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications. B. Concrete: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors. C. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors. D. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts. E. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts. F. Steel: Use beam ceiling clamps, beam clamps, or machine bolts. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 6 22 05 29 G. Beam Ceiling Flanges: ASTM A47/A47M Grade 32510, malleable iron or stainless steel with copper, plain, stainless steel, or zinc finish. H. Powder-actuated fasteners are not permitted. I. Hammer-driven anchors and fasteners are not permitted. J. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) for compliance with applicable building code. K. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal strut channel and spot inserts specifically designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors. 1. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel. 2. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gauge, 0.1046 inch minimum base metal thickness. 3. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal strut channel framing system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES) evaluation report conditions of use where applicable. C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, conduit, or other systems. D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid. E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck. F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer. G. Provide thermal insulated pipe supports complete with hangers and accessories. Install thermal insulated pipe supports during the installation of the piping system. H. Equipment Support and Attachment: 1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required. 2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out. 3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface. 4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support. I. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer-provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 6 22 05 29 J. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. K. Remove temporary supports. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects. B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 2 22 05 53 SECTION 22 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Pipe markers. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2023. B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2017. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Schedules: 1. Submit plumbing component identification schedule listing equipment, piping, and valves. 2. Detail proposed component identification data in terms of of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding to be applied to corresponding product. 3. Valve Data Format: Include id-number, location, function, and model number. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUMBING COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION GUIDELINE A. Nameplates: 1. Heat exchangers, water heaters, and other heat transfer products. 2. Control panels, transducers, and other related control equipment products. 3. Pumps, tanks, filters, water treatment devices, and other plumbing equipment products. B. Tags: 1. Manual operated and automated control valves. C. Pipe Markers: 3/4 inch diameter and higher. 2.2 NAMEPLATES A. Description: Laminated or engraved piece with up to three lines of text. 1. Letter Color: White. 2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch. 2.3 TAGS A. Metal: Brass, 19 gauge 1-1/2 inch in diameter with smooth edges, blank, smooth edges, and corrosion-resistant ball chain. Up to three lines of text. B. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten 12-point letter size list in anodized aluminum frame. 2.4 PIPE MARKERS A. Comply with ASME A13.1. B. Flexible Tape Marker: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 2 22 05 53 C. Identification Scheme, ASME A13.1: 1. Primary: External Pipe Diameter, Uninsulated or Insulated. 2. Secondary: Color scheme per fluid service. a. Water; Potable, Cooling, Boiler Feed, and Other: White text on green background. 3. Tertiary: Other Details. a. Directional flow arrow. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive identification products. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install flexible nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B. Install tags in clear view and align with axis of piping C. Install plastic tape pipe marker around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Apply ASME A13.1 Pipe Marking Rules: 1. Place pipe marker adjacent to changes in direction. 2. Place pipe marker adjacent each valve port and flange end. 3. Place pipe marker at both sides of floor and wall penetrations. 4. Place pipe marker every 25 to 50 feet interval of straight run. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 3 22 07 19 SECTION 22 07 19 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass fiber insulation. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2019, with Editorial Revision (2023). B. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007 (Reapproved 2019). C. ASTM C449 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement; 2007 (Reapproved 2019). D. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2022a. E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023d. F. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Gravimetric Determination of Water Vapor Transmission Rate of Materials; 2023. G. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 3 22 07 19 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. 2.2 GLASS FIBER INSULATION A. Insulation: 1; rigid molded, noncombustible, with wicking material to transport condensed water to the outside of the system for evaporation to the atmosphere. 1. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 2. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm. C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation. E. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. F. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color. G. Insulating Cement: ASTM C449. 2.3 JACKETING AND ACCESSORIES A. PVC Plastic Jacket: 1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. d. Thickness: 10 mil, 0.010 inch. e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA) National Insulation Standards. C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure-sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 3 22 07 19 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure-sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. F. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. G. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, see Section 07 84 00. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 6 22 11 13 SECTION 22 11 13 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Copper pipe and fittings. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2021. B. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2020. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018. D. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction Materials; 2018. E. ASTM F645 - Standard Guide for Selection, Design, and Installation of Thermoplastic Water- Pressure Piping Systems; 2015. F. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2023, with Errata. G. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2022. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturer's catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. C. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual installed locations of piping, valves, and equipment. 2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of undocumented utilities. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide product information and manufacturer's operation and maintenance information for all products used. E. Purging and Disinfecting Reports 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Manufacturers: A company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with a minimum of three years documented experience. C. Installers: The installer shall have a minimum of five continuous years’ experience installing systems specified in this section and at least ten projects of similar size and scope. 1. Installers for PEX piping systems shall be factory trained by the PEX piping and fitting manufacturer. D. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 6 22 11 13 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. B. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located. Pothole and locate existing utilities prior to connection to existing utility. Locations shown on the plans have not been verified, and Contractor shall anticipate the actual location may differ from that shown. Service line serving the picnic area has not been field located. C. Verify that water-service piping may be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. D. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated: 1. Refer to Section 22 05 00 - Common Work Results for Plumbing for notification requirements for service interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Owner's written permission. 3. Coordinate with utility provider for any interruption of existing water service. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate connection to water service with utility provider. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM B88, Type-L. B. Fittings and flanges: 1. Cast Bronze Fittings: ASME B16.15. 2. Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18. 3. Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.22. 4. Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings (DWV): ASME B16.23. 5. Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes: ASME B16.26. 6. Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.29. C. Alternate Fittings and Flanges: 1. Rolled/grooved fittings. a. Couplings: 200 PSI minimum joint working pressure, cast ductile iron housing conforming to ASTM A536. Gaskets for heating water or chilled water service, elastomer in accordance with ASTM D2000. Gaskets for domestic water service, EPDM per ASTM D2000. All grooved couplings shall be designed with angle bolt pads to provide rigid joint. b. Flanges: 200 PSI minimum joint working pressure, cast ductile iron housing, suitable for bolting to ANSI Class-125 cast iron and 150 steel flanged components. Gasket material similar to coupling gasket material. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 6 22 11 13 2. Press fitting, Viega Rigid or Nibco Press System, conforming to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. O-ring for copper press fittings shall be EPDM. D. Solder: ASTM B32, lead free. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION A. General: Install per the Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC). Any UPC installation instructions located in Appendix “I” (“Installation Standards”) for a specific piping material specified in this section applies to the work of this section. B. Preparation: 1. Clean off scale and dirt inside and outside before assembly. Cut pipes and tubes square and ream to remove all burrs. 2. Cut pipe accurately to field measurements so work can be placed without springing or forcing. C. Installation: 1. Install so piping is free to expand, provide for all expansion with offsets or loops where necessary. Branch connections shall have three elbow spring pieces to allow for expansion. 2. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings. All radius; shall be long radius. 3. Arrange piping so as not to interfere with access or removal of other equipment or devices, block access to doors, windows, manholes or other access openings. 4. Arrange piping to facilitate the removal of tube bundles, coils, etc. Provide unions ahead of screwed valves, traps or strainers on each side of each piece of equipment and wherever needed to dismantle piping. 5. All piping shall be properly pitched and graded to drain moisture and/or vent air. 6. Each low point shall have an accessible blind flange or screwed plug or cap. 7. Route pipe to avoid liquid or air pockets throughout the work. Provide at high points of closed systems, collecting chambers and automatic air vents. 8. Make reductions in pipe size using eccentric reducing fittings installed to provide drainage and venting. 9. Nipples shall be of the same material as pipe. Close nipples shall not be used. 10. Install pipe in neat and workmanlike manner, in accordance with best trade practice. Install to conserve headroom and interfere as little as possible with use of space. Run exposed piping parallel to walls unless otherwise shown. Where possible, group runs and rises. 11. Install concealed pipes in walls with clearance around piping to prevent contact with structure. 12. Pipes passing through concrete or masonry construction shall be fitted with sleeves. The inside diameter of pipe sleeves shall be at least 1/2 inch larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or pipe covering. 13. At all connections between ferrous and non-ferrous pipe: a. Small Bore Pipe: Provide dielectric waterway fittings that maintain external electrical continuity while maintaining internal isolation. b. Large Bore Pipe: Provide dielectric flanges. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 6 22 11 13 14. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated. D. Installation, Building Service Connection 1. Install piping, connecting to existing building service line. Ensure that minimum vertical clearances, as required by utility provider, are provided where crossing other utilities. 2. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. 3. Piping Connections: Conforming to utility provider requirements. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Within Building Footprint: 1. Above-grade, exposed areas, domestic water CW, HW, TW, and HWC: Copper 2. Above grade, concealed areas, domestic water CW, HW, TW, and HWC: Copper 3. Below grade, domestic water CW: Copper 3.3 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 22 05 00 - Common Work Results for Plumbing. 3.4 COPPER PIPING INSTALLATION A. Copper Tube 1. Solder joints shall be made in accordance with the methods of ASTM B828. All cut tube ends shall be reamed to the full inside diameter of the tube end. All joint surfaces shall be cleaned. A flux conforming to ASTM B812 shall be applied. The joint shall be soldered with a solder conforming to ASTM B32. The joining of water supply piping shall be made with lead free solders and fluxes. “Lead free” shall mean a chemical composition equal to or less than 0.2 % lead. B. Press Connections: Copper press fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting and the tubing marked at the shoulder of the fitting. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting. The joints shall be pressed using the tool approved by the manufacturer. C. Rolled/Grooved Connections: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. D. Flared Joints: Flared joints for water pipe; shall be made by a tool designed for that operation. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect water distribution piping: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has been inspected and approved by the appropriate authority having jurisdiction. 2. During progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction at least two (2) working days prior to the time inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Plumbing Inspector. a. Ground work Inspection: Arrange for inspection of all plumbing systems located beneath any poured concrete slabs or foundations. b. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system before concealed or closed-in after system roughing-in and prior to setting fixtures. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 6 22 11 13 c. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by plumbing official to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements of plumbing code. 3. Re-inspections: When a Plumbing Inspector finds that piping system will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection by the Plumbing Inspector. 4. Reports: Prepare and submit inspection reports signed by the Plumbing Inspector. B. Testing water distribution system: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of system tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed in new, altered, extended, or replaced water distribution piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved for testing. 3. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 psi above the operating pressure without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test-source and allow it to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 3.6 CLEANING: A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping: 1. Purge new potable water distribution piping systems and parts of existing potable water systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction or, if a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described in either AWWA C651 or AQQA C652 or as described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) and allow it to stand for 24 hours. c. Drain system or part thereof of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate and allow it to stand for 3 hours. d. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in water coming from system following allowed standing time. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authority having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination made by authority shows evidence of contamination. B. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3.7 COMMISSIONING A. Fill water systems. B. Before operating systems, perform these steps: HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 6 22 11 13 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibs. 2. Open shutoff valves to full open position. 3. Remove plugs used during testing of piping systems and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 4. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 5. Do not operate water heaters before filling with water. 6. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 7. Energize pumps and verify proper operation. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 4 22 11 19 SECTION 22 11 19 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Strainers B. Dielectric Connections C. Automatic Air Vents D. Water Hammer Arrestors E. Pressure Reducing Valves F. Thermostatic Mixing Valve Assemblies 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI Z358.1 - American National Standard for Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment B. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE) 1. ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers 2. ASSE 1017 - Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Hot Water Distribution Systems C. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO) 1. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) D. National Safety Foundation (NSF) 1. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Required Submittals: 1. Product data. 2. Test and Inspection Reports: a. Completed manufacturer's startup checklist and report. b. Commissioning report. 3. Project record documents. 4. Operation and maintenance data. 5. Warranty information: a. Manufacturer's warranty. b. Manufacturer's extended warranty. 6. Training certificates. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Division 1 for product storage and handling requirements. 1.5 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Division 1 for closeout submittal procedures. B. Refer to Division 1 for demonstration and training requirements. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 4 22 11 19 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STRAINERS A. Provide on high pressure side of pressure reducing valves, on suction side of pumps, on inlet side of indicating and control instruments and equipment subject to sediment damage and where shown on drawings. Strainer element shall be removable without disconnection of piping. B. Water: Strainers shall be wye-type with easily removable cover and brass strainer basket. C. Body: 1. 1/2 - 2-1/2 NPS: Brass or bronze. 2. 3 NPS and Larger: Cast iron, semi-steel, brass, or bronze. D. Accessories: 1. Provide blowdown valves for strainers. Blowdown valves shall be ball valves with 3/4 inch hose connection and thread-on hose cap. 2.2 DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS A. Union Type B. Flange Type 2.3 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS: A. Float type with isolating valves, brass or semi-steel body, copper float, stainless steel valve and valve seat. Suitable for system operating temperature and pressure, but not less than 80 PSIG. 2.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Stainless steel shell and bellows, nitrogen pressurized compression chamber, Jay R. Smith Hydrotrol or approved equal. 2.5 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Single-seated, for dead end service for 30lb to 125lb range on low-pressure side. Composition diaphragm and stainless steel springs, bronze body with threaded connections for sizes 1/2 - 2 NPS, cast iron or semi-steel body with brass or bronze trimmings and flanged connections for sizes 2-1/2 - 4 NPS. B. Operation: Diaphragm and spring to act directly on valve stem. Delivered pressure shall vary not more than 1lb for each 10lb variation on inlet pressure. C. Setting: Entering water pressure, discharge pressure, capacity, size, and related measurements shall be as shown on the drawings. D. Connections at Valves And Strainers: Install shut off valve on each side of reducing valve and full sized bypass with shut off valve. Install strainer on inlet side of, and same size as pressure reducing valve. Install pressure gauge on low pressure side of line. 2.6 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE ASSEMBLIES A. Master Mixing Valves 1. Tempering valve shall use paraffin-wax based thermal actuator for precise temperature control with lockable temperature setting. 2. Valve shall have corrosion-resistant lead free brass body. 3. Valve shall be listed to ASSE 1017 and CSA B125.3 standards. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 4 22 11 19 4. Provide valve with temperature gauges for the tempered outlet, hot water inlet, and cold water inlet. 5. Provide valve with ball valves for isolation at tempered outlet, hot water inlet, and cold water inlet. 6. Provide valve with check stops at hot water and cold water inlets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 STRAINERS A. Provide blowdown valves with 3/4 inch hose connections at all strainer locations. 3.2 DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS A. Provide dielectric connections at all connections between ferrous and non-ferrous pipe: 1. Small Bore Pipe: Provide dielectric waterway fittings that maintain external electrical continuity while maintaining internal isolation. 2. Large Bore Pipe: Provide dielectric flanges. 3.3 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS A. Locate automatic air vents at high points in piping system. B. Where air vents are located in inaccessible locations, covered locations, or in locations where leakage could potentially damage the building in any way, provide drain piping from the air vent to the nearest approved indirect drain receptor. 1. Drain piping shall not be run to drain locations in public areas. 3.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Provide water hammer arrestors at all of the following location(s): 1. All restroom piping groups. 2. Water header assembly. B. Size and provide in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Instructions. 3.5 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Set discharge pressure of pressure reducing valves as follows: 1. General use: 60-80 psig 3.6 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE ASSEMBLIES A. General 1. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops and shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet. B. Labelling 1. Provide explanatory text on signs. Identify units. Distinguish among units, inform operator of operating requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. C. Setup, Testing and Adjusting 1. Startup of mixing valve assemblies shall be performed by factory-trained technicians. Perform startup of valve system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves. Adjust set point within allowable temperature range. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 4 22 11 19 3. Remove and replace malfunctioning thermostatic mixing valves and retest. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 3 22 13 16 SECTION 22 13 16 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast iron piping. B. Plastic piping. 1. PVC piping. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. General: References used throughout Division 22 are generally accepted industry standards. The edition of the criteria cited shall be that in force at the time of bid. The Contractor shall provide all work in accordance with codes and standards in force in the Authority Having Jurisdiction for the project, to include all local amendments. B. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. C. ASTM A888 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. D. ASTM C1277 - Standard Specification for Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. E. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. F. CISPI 301 – Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. G. CISPI 310 – Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. H. CSA CAN/CSA B602M - Mechanical Couplings for Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Sewer Pipe. I. IAPMO IS 1 – Non-Metallic Building Sewers. J. IAPMO IS 9 – PVC Building Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings. K. IAPMO IS 11 – ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings. L. UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Required submittals: 1. Product data. 2. Project record documents. 3. Warranty information: a. Manufacturer's warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Buried piping shall comply with requirements of utility provider. C. Manufacturers: A company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with a minimum of three years documented experience. D. Installers: The installer shall have a minimum of five continuous years’ experience installing systems specified in this section and at least ten projects of similar size and scope. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 3 22 13 16 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Division 1 for product storage and handling requirements. 1.6 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Division 1 for execution and closeout requirements. B. Refer to Division 1 for closeout submittal procedures. C. Refer to Division 1 for demonstration and training requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CAST IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Soil, Drain, Waste, & Vent Piping: Standard weight bell and spigot cast iron (ASTM A74) or hubless cast iron (ASTM A888/CISPI 301) B. Hubless Fittings: ASTM A888 or CISPI 301 1. Couplings: CISPI 301, ASTM C1277, or ASTM C1540 2. Elastomeric Sealing Sleeve: ASTM C564, CISPI HSN 85, or CSA CAN/CSA B602M, with center stop 2.2 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. All material references are found in the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO) "Uniform Plumbing Code" (UPC), all references are those in force by the Authority Having Jurisdiction at the date of bid. B. Building Drainage, Waste and Vent: 1. Materials for Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (PVC) Plastic drain, waste and vent pipe and fittings shall be as specified in IAPMO Installation Standard (IS) 9, "PVC Building Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings"). a. PVC pipe & fittings shall be schedule 40 PVC, conforming to ASTM D-2665, with glued fittings. Pipe shall be solid wall. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be installed with provision for expansion and shall be extended full-size to and above roof lines as vents, except where otherwise specifically indicated. B. All vent pipe openings on the roof shall terminate not less than 10'-0" horizontally and 1'-0" vertically above any opening to the building or outside air intake opening. C. Where practical, two or more vent pipes shall be connected together and extended as one pipe through roof. Vent pipes in roof spaces shall be run as close as possible to underside of roof, with horizontal piping pitched down to stacks without forming traps in pipes, using fittings as required. D. Vertical vent pipes may be connected into one main riser above vented fixture. Where an end or circuit vent pipe from fixture or line of fixtures is connected to a vent line serving other fixtures, connections shall be located to prevent use of any vent line as a waste. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Within Building Footprint: 1. Below grade, sanitary sewer, general use: Cast iron or PVC HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 3 22 13 16 2. Below grade, vent, general use: Cast iron or PVC 3. Above grade, sanitary sewer, general use: Cast iron or PVC 4. Above grade, vent, general use: Cast iron or PVC 3.3 CAST IRON PIPE INSTALLATION A. Mechanical Joints for Hubless Cast Iron: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and CISPI standards. B. Where cast iron piping is used in above-grade applications in combination with plastic piping below grade, the cast iron piping shall extend a minimum of 18" below grade or to the first fitting below grade, whichever is deeper. 3.4 PLASTIC PIPING INSTALLATION A. PVC Building DWV: Install per the installation standard for Non-Metallic Building Sewers (IAPMO IS 1), and the installation standard for PVC Building Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings (IAPMO IS 9) as published by the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials and found in the Uniform Plumbing Code Manual. 3.5 PIPE SLOPE A. Horizontal drain piping shall be installed with the following minimum pipe slope(s): 1. 3" and smaller: 1/4" per foot (2%). 2. 4" and larger: 1/8" per foot (1%). 3.6 ROOF PENETRATIONS A. Provide manufactured neoprene, santoprene, or similar vent flashing assemblies for all roof penetrations. B. Vent flashing assemblies shall be compatible with the roof construction where the penetration is located. 3.7 CLEANOUTS A. Provide cleanouts at all locations required to permit cleaning of all sewer piping. Cleanouts shall be full-sized of pipe, but not larger than 4". This shall include cleanouts at base of all vertical lines, ends of all horizontal main runs, and elsewhere as shown on Drawings. Cleanout openings shall be closed with brass screw plugs. Where cleanouts occur in floor, furnish and install a brass ferrule, complete with screwed brass cover, flush with floor. 3.8 TESTS A. Sanitary and waste lines shall be tested with water at a pressure of not less than 5 PSI. Duration of test shall be not less than 24-hours, and shall be witnessed by Architect. B. If any piping is found to leak, all defects shall be remedied and test repeated. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 2 22 13 19 SECTION 22 13 19 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Drains B. Cleanouts 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE) 1. ASSE 1051 - Individual and Branch Type Air Admittance Valves for Sanitary Drainage Systems B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM D4101 - Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials C. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials 1. UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code D. National Sanitation Foundation International (NSF) 1. NSF 14 - Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Valves, pipe joints, drains and all other specialty components specified herein. C. Installation instructions. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Division 1 for product storage and handling requirements. 1.5 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Division 1 for execution and closeout requirements. B. Refer to Division 1 for closeout submittal procedures. C. Refer to Division 1 for demonstration and training requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DRAINS A. Drains shall be Josam, Jay R. Smith, Sioux Chief, Wade, Zurn, or approved equal. B. Trench Drains 1. Manufactured trench drain system including polypropylene body, HDPE or polypropylene grating, and vandal-resistant grate fastening system. Grating shall be ADA compliant. Grating shall meet DIN load rating A. Grating shall be heelproof type. 2.2 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts shall be Josam, Jay R. Smith, Sioux Chief, Wade, Zurn, or approved equal. B. Floor: Duco cast iron body with round adjustable scoriated secured nickel bronze top, gasket seal-ABS countersunk closure plug, complete with flashing flange and clamp. C. Wall: Duco cast iron caulk ferrule with cast iron countersunk closure plug. Provide with stainless steel cover and screw. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 2 22 13 19 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install specialties in accordance with Uniform Plumbing Code, Manufacturer's installation instructions, and local jurisdiction requirements. 3.2 DRAINS A. Provide the drainage equipment and all piping for a complete drainage system as shown and detailed on Plans. B. Provide water pipe connections to trap primers and run the primer lines to the drains. Verify location of trap primers with Architect before installing. C. See Section 22 11 19, Domestic Water Piping Specialties, for trap primers. 3.3 CLEANOUTS A. Provide cleanouts as indicated on the plans, and as required by the Uniform Plumbing Code. B. Provide cleanouts at the locations specified below, regardless of whether or not indicated on the drawings: 1. Drains Within Buildings: Not more than 100’ apart. 2. Drains Outside Of Buildings: Not more than 100’ apart. 3. Changes of Direction Inside Buildings: At each fitting of greater than 45 degrees. Where more than one change of direction occurs in a run of piping, only one cleanout shall be required for each 40’ of developed length of the drainage piping. 4. Building Sewer Junction: Provide a cleanout at the junction between the building drain and building exterior sewer. Provide a 2-way cleanout at this junction. C. Install in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS PLUMBING EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 3 22 30 00 SECTION 22 30 00 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Commercial gas-fired water heaters. B. Commercial electric water heaters. C. Diaphragm-type compression tanks. D. In-line circulator pumps. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AHRI Directory of Certified Product Performance - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI); Current Edition. B. ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1: Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; 2023. C. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2023, with Errata. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. E. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER HEATERS A. Commercial Gas-Fired Water Heaters: 1. NSF listed. 2. ASME construction. 3. Rated for maximum hydrostatic working pressure of 160 psi. 4. Water heater(s) shall be protected against overheating caused by the buildup of scale, film and other sediment by a self-cleaning device, positioned inside the tank so that it directs the flow of inlet water to keep precipitated solids in suspension so that they are removed from the water heater on that or successive draws. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS PLUMBING EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 3 22 30 00 5. Glasslined water heater(s) shall also be protected against electrolytic corrosion by multiple factory-installed anode rods. 6. Water heaters shall be equipped with an integrated control system consisting of a 180ºF adjustable thermostat with upper and lower sensing bulbs. 7. Water heaters shall be equipped with intermittent electronic ignition, a manual reset gas shutoff device, a gas pressure regulator, factory-installed, CSA Certified and ASME Rated T&P relief valve and 2-3/4? x 3-3/4? tank inspection port. 8. Water heaters shall be design-certified by UL (Underwriters Laboratories) to current edition of ANSI Z.21.10.3 - CSA 4.3 standards governing storage-type water heaters. 9. Water heaters shall meet the thermal efficiency and standby loss requirements of the U. S. Department of Energy and Current Edition of ASHRAE/ IESNA 90.1. 10. Water heaters shall have a 3-year limited warranty against corrosion as outlined in the written warranty. 2.2 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATERS A. NSF listed. B. ASME constructoin. C. Tanks shall be rated for 160 psi working pressure and equipped with dual extruded high density anodes. All internal surfaces of the heater(s) exposed to water shall be glass-lined with an alkaline borosilicate composition that has been fused to steel by firing at a temperature range of 1400°F to 1600°F. D. Water heater shall have LCD display with built-in diagnostic and troubleshooting information. Internal power circuit fusing shall be provided. Element operation shall be linear sequencing through individual magnetic contactors. Control circuit shall be factory fused and include an immersion thermistor temperature probe with built in ECO control. E. Control cabinet and jacket shall be of baked enamel finish and shall provide full size control and element compartment for complete service and maintenance performance through front hinged compartment door, and enclose tank with foam insulation. F. 1 1/4” inlet and outlet connection shall be provided. G. Meets or exceeds the thermal efficiency and standby loss requirements of the U.S. Department of Energy and current edition of ASHRAE/IES 90.1. H. The heater tank shall have a three year limited warranty and controls and accessories shall have a one year limited warranty as outlined in the written warranty. 2.3 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS A. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC-VIII-1; supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexible EPDM diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles. B. Accessories: Pressure gauge and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 12 psig. 2.4 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS (CP-1) A. Body: Stainless steel B. Impeller: Poly-phenylene sulfide or stainless steel C. Motor: Electronically commutated permanent magnet type, class F insulation D. Controller: Integral VFD HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS PLUMBING EQUIPMENT OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 3 22 30 00 2.5 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS (CP-2) A. Body: Lead-free brass B. Impeller: Noryl/PPO C. Motor: Electronically commutated spherical type with integral overload protection D. Controller: Integrated variable speed switch PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code, and complying with conditions required for applicable certifications. B. Electrical Work: Provide automatic control and protective devices with associated wiring to interconnect related interfaced devices required for specified operation. C. Coordinate system, equipment, and piping work with applicable electrical, gas, vent, drain, and waste support interconnections as included or provided by other trades. D. Pumps: 1. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check valve and balancing valve on discharge. 2. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. 3. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS PLUMBING FIXTURES OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 3 22 40 00 SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush valve water closets. B. Wall hung urinals. C. Lavatories. D. Mop sinks. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A112.19.5 - Flush Valves and Spuds for Water Closets, Urinals, and Tanks; 2022. B. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2023, with Errata. C. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2022. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. C. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept fixtures on-site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable codes for installation of plumbing systems. 2.3 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS A. Flush Valves: 1. Sensor-Operated: a. Type: ASME A112.19.5; chloramine-resistant clog-resistant dual-seat diaphragm valve complete with vacuum breaker, stops and accessories. b. Mechanism: Solenoid-operated piston or electronic motor-actuated operator with battery powered infrared sensor, and mechanical override or override push button. c. Supplied Volume Capacity: 1.60 gal per flush. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS PLUMBING FIXTURES OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 3 22 40 00 2. Exposed Type: Chrome-plated, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop. 2.4 WALL HUNG URINALS A. Flush Valves: 1. Sensor-Operated: a. Type: ASME A112.19.5; chloramine-resistant, clog-resistant dual-seat diaphragm valve with vacuum breaker, stops and accessories. b. Mechanism: Solenoid-operated piston or electronic motor-actuated operator with battery powered infrared sensor, and mechanical override or override push button. c. Supplied Volume Capacity: 1.00 gal per flush. 2.5 LAVATORIES A. Sensor Operated Faucet: 1. Cast brass, chrome plated, deck mounted with sensor located on neck of spout. 2. Spout Style: Standard. 3. Power Supply: a. Wireless: 1) Battery: Replaceable alkaline or lithium type with 200,000 cycles, minimum. 2) Light Cell: Photovoltaic or infra-red cell that transforms both sunlight and artificial light into electrical energy for use and battery charging. 3) Low Battery Warning: Provide red or yellow colored indicator to light periodically at 30 days of remaining capacity and continuously 2 weeks prior to get fully discharged. 4. Water Supply: 3/8 inch compression connections. 5. Aerator: Vandal resistant, 0.5 gpm, laminar flow device. 6. Finish: Polished chrome. 7. Lead Content: Extra low; maximum 0.25 percent by weighed average. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome-plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. C. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. 1. Existing wall carriers shall be re-used. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS PLUMBING FIXTURES OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 3 22 40 00 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations. B. Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel. C. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 14 23 05 00 SECTION 23 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. General requirements for Division 23 (HVAC). 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes all general requirements that apply to the entirety of Division 23 - HVAC, both interior and exterior to the building, as indicated on the plans and specified herein. B. All specification sections with Division 23 - HVAC are complementary. All specification sections within Division 23 shall be considered to reference each other. C. Provide all HVAC work as indicated in the drawings and specified herein. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Institute Of Steel Construction (AISC) 1. AISC 325 - Steel Construction Manual B. American Society Of Heating, Refrigerating And Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 1. ASHRAE - HVAC Applications Handbook, I-P Edition C. International Code Council (ICC) 1. IMC - International Mechanical Code 2. IBC - International Building Code 3. IFC - International Fire Code D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70 - International Electrical Code 2. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems F. Sheet Metal And Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) 1. SMACNA 1650 - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, 2nd Edition 2. SMACNA 1966 - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, 3rd Edition G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1. Fire Resistance Directory 2. Building Materials Directory H. Washington Administrative Code (WAC) 1. 51-11C - Washington State Energy Code - Commercial Edition 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product data for all components and equipment provided under this Division. 1. Product sheets with more than one item or option shown shall have the product(s) and options to be used on the project clearly identified. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 14 23 05 00 2. Any equipment or materials installed or furnished without prior approval of the Owner's Representative shall be rejected and such materials will be required to be removed and replaced with approved materials at the expense of the Contractor. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop drawings shall be submitted for review and approval prior to beginning work. 2. Shop drawings shall indicate routing of piping and location of all equipment to be provided, and shall reflect coordination with other disciplines and existing conditions. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions and recommendations. E. Field Quality Control Submittals: Indicate test reports, inspection reports, and commissioning reports. F. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual routing of installed piping and ductwork, including elevation (or depth for buried items). 2. Record actual equipment and components installed, as well as locations. 3. RFI's, change orders, and the like shall be noted on the Record Documents where these affect the layout or other aspect of project shown on the documents. References to these shall include the RFI/change order number as well as written description(s), sketch(es), etc., indicating the change or clarification. 4. Record actual location of installed valves, sensors, dampers, and other control components. a. Include riser diagram(s) and schedule of valve tags and locations. 5. Record actual location and type of vibration isolation devices. 6. Final record documents: a. Transfer plan notes and revisions to CAD, indicate the area of change with a bubble around that area. Provide CAD file to Architect for approval. Employ AutoCAD (by AutoDesk) DWG format, version no older than one year prior to date of bid. G. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data: 1. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions of equipment and controls, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings. 2. Include manufacturer's warranty information, including any extended warranties, or certifications of warranties required for specific products, systems, or installations. 3. Include certification of inspection(s) from the Authority Having Jurisdiction for the applicable work scope(s). 4. Include certification of training. 5. Include certification of Contractor's one-year warranty of materials and workmanship, including effective date(s) of warranty period. H. Seismic support calculations and any related required certification(s). I. Warranty Information: 1. Certificate of installing contractor's one-year warranty. a. Warranty certificate shall specifically list project information, owner information, start and end dates of warranty period, and specific description of coverage (materials, labor, other costs, etc.). 2. Certificate of product manufacturer's warranty. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 14 23 05 00 a. Warranty certificate shall specifically list project information, owner information, start and end dates of warranty period, and specific description of coverage (materials, labor, other costs, etc.). 3. Certificate of extended warranty. a. Warranty certificate shall specifically list project information, owner information, start and end dates of warranty period, and specific description of coverage (materials, labor, other costs, etc.). b. Provide extended warranty for: 1) Split system HVAC equipment. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: A company specializing in manufacturing products specified in Division 23 with a minimum of three years documented experience. B. Contractor: Mechanical work required under this Division shall be performed by a Washington State Licensed Mechanical Contractor. C. Electrical work required under this Division shall require an Electrical Permit. 1. Electrical permit shall be procured by the Division 23 contractor or their electrical subcontractor. D. Electrical Equipment 1. Any piece of equipment used in this project and hereinafter specified which, by its nature, requires electrical connection(s), such as fans, pumps, hot water tanks, boosters, air handling equipment, etc., shall be provided with an approved label from either Underwriters Laboratories (UL), the American Gas Association (AGA) or the Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 2. Approval of agency must be for the total package (approval of individual components not acceptable) and all labels must be located outside of equipment and shall be visible to inspector. E. Performance Certification: All equipment performance (airflow, heating capacity, cooling capacity, etc.) shall be certified by a recognized national agency such as the Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI), Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) and the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Division 1 for product storage and handling requirements. B. Lift only with lugs provided. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure and finish. C. Protect products from weather and moisture. Provide coverings of plastic or canvas. Cover openings into pipe and duct. Isolate components from contact with the soil. Provide a means of heating for those components that may become damaged by high or low temperatures. D. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors and other electrical equipment from enclosures not designed for outdoor use and store separately. 1.7 DEFINITIONS A. The term "approved equal" means final approval by the Architect of a material or piece of equipment substituted for that which is shown in the Specifications or Plans. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 14 23 05 00 B. The term "provide" means the furnishing and installing of equipment (including connections and appurtenances) complete and ready for use. C. The term "Mechanical Contractor (MC)" and "Electrical Contractor (EC)" as used in these Specifications or on the Contract Drawings, refer to those subcontractors working under the direction of the General Contractor (GC). 1.8 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS A. Intent of Drawings 1. The drawings are intended to depict the general scope of arrangement. The drawings are diagrammatic and do not show the exact details and locations, nor all offsets in ductwork and piping. Provide additional fittings, offsets and extensions in piping, ductwork and related items to provide full systems functionality and to assure access for equipment maintenance and as detailed elsewhere in the contract. Relocate or shift piping and ductwork where conflict exists with other plumbing or mechanical systems, structural elements, architectural elements, or electrical systems, or other project work scope(s). Report conflicts before proceeding with work. Provide reasonable planning and layout in advance of installation in order to avoid conflicts and delays. The Contractor will be directed to adjust systems due to conflicts that could have been reasonably foreseen at the Contractor’s own expense. 2. Examine the Architectural, Civil, Landscape Architectural, Structural, Electrical, and other project drawings before work is started. Consult with each of the other Contractors regarding locations and spaces required for the work and lay out work to avoid interference. Failure to provide reasonable coordination shall result in the Contractor, at his own expense, moving his work to provide the necessary space for the other Contractors. B. Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits and construction fees. Furnish Final Certificate to Owner showing compliance with code requirements. C. Scheduling: Comply with requirements of Division 1. D. As-Specified Equipment: These specifications and drawings generally list only one make and model number for each item of equipment or material required for the project. This is not intended to be restrictive but is intended to indicate the standard of quality, design and features required. In addition the listed product is the basis of the design regarding physical size, capacity, electrical power requirements and performance. The product so identified is designated "as specified." E. Prior Approvals: 1. Specifications have been written around equipment and materials selected for this project based on quality, size, capacity, and performance required to meet building design criteria. All equipment and materials used in this project that have been specified around a specific product or products shall have prior approval for product substitutions. 2. Request for Approval must be submitted in accordance to Division 1 requirements, 3. Supplier and/or Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that substituted material or equipment is of same size, quality, capacity, weight and electrical characteristics as that specified or shown on the drawings. Any changes and cost increases required during construction due to substituted equipment shall be paid by the Contractor/Supplier. Prior approval to bid does not mean final approval of material or equipment. Final approval will be given after final submitted data has been presented, HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 14 23 05 00 complete with full information regarding weights, capacities, size, electrical requirements and quality. F. Contractor’s Cost Breakdown: Submit a cost breakdown (schedule of values) of the major portions of the work. Provide this submittal along with the equipment submittals. Organize the costs generally by specification section. For example, if one Section (such as copper piping) applies to both plumbing and hydronics, apportion the appropriate amount to each area of work. 1.9 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Division 1 for execution and closeout requirements. B. Refer to Division 1 for closeout submittal procedures. C. Refer to Division 1 for general demonstration and training requirements. 1.10 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION A. Refer to Division 1 for Request for Information (RFI) requirements and procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DAMAGED OR REJECTED MATERIALS A. Damaged or rejected materials shall be removed from the site immediately upon discovery. 2.2 FIRE INTEGRITY A. All mechanical system penetrations of fire rated assemblies shall be protected in accordance with the building code in force in the Authority Having Jurisdiction for this project. This includes piping, ductwork, supports, conduit, and any other system and appurtenance provided by Division 23. In addition, all through-penetration sealing methodologies shall be listed in the Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) Fire Resistance Directory, issue current at time of bid. 2.3 MOTORS A. Motors shall comply with the current edition of the Washington State Energy Code. Service factor for poly-phase motors shall be 1.15. Service factor for single phase motors shall be 1.35. B. In addition to the requirements in Paragraph “A” above, motors for variable frequency drives shall be of premium efficiency and are suitable for VFD operation (“Inverter Ready”) in accordance with NEMA MG-1, Part 31.4.4.2. Additionally, motors shall be acceptable to the manufacturer of the drive for inverter use. “Inverter Duty” motors are not necessarily required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CODE COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable codes and requirements including but not limited to: 1. International Building Code, including local amendments. 2. International Fuel Gas Code, including local amendments. 3. International Mechanical Code, including local amendments. 4. International Fire Code, including local amendments. 5. Uniform Plumbing Code, including local amendments. 6. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70), including local amendments. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 14 23 05 00 7. Washington State Energy Code 8. Requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). a. Authority Having Jurisdiction: City of Renton. 3.2 LAYING OUT WORK A. Locate all general reference points and take such action as is necessary to prevent their destruction lay out work and be responsible for all lines, elevations, grading for utilities and other work required under the Contract. Exercise proper precaution to verify figures shown on drawings before laying out work and be responsible for any error resulting from failure to exercise such precaution. Coordinate the utility installation with the final site grading and elevations. Locate existing utility lines that will be affected by the building location before any footing work begins. Report conflicts with the Plans before proceeding with the work. Failure to follow reasonable precautions with regards to this instruction will require Contractor to alter the work at the Contractor’s expense. 3.3 ELECTRICAL WORK A. All electrical work performed under this Section of the Specifications shall conform to all applicable portions of the Electrical Section of the Specifications, and shall conform to the NEC and other all applicable codes. B. All electrical work performed under this Section of the Specifications shall require a permit. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required permits and fees. C. All electrical work performed under this Section of the Specifications shall be performed by a electrician licensed in the jurisdiction where the work is performed. 3.4 WORKMANSHIP A. Furnish and install all equipment in a neat and finished appearance. If any portion of the work has not been installed in a workmanlike manner, or has been left in a rough, unfinished manner, the Contractor shall remove the equipment, reinstall and patch and paint surrounding surfaces without any increase in cost. 3.5 PIPE SLEEVES AND SEALANTS A. General: Provide pipe sleeves or sealants for piping passing through foundations, walls, floors, partitions, and roof to allow piping to pass freely through. B. Building Walls Above Grade 1. Non-Masonry Construction a. Fire Rated Assembly: Provide a metallic tube pipe-sleeve, and maintain the fire rating around the exterior of the sleeve. Fire-stop in the annular space between the sleeve and pipe. For non-metallic pipe, provide an intumescent fire stop system installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. b. Non-Fire Rated Assembly: No sleeve is required. If the interior wall contains insulation, insure that the pipe is sealed to the wall on either side. Also insure that the pipe cannot move with respect to the wall so that the sealing system will not become damaged. 2. Masonry Construction a. Fire Rated Assembly: Core-drill and seal with a fire-stop material. For non-metallic pipe, provide an intumescent fire-stop system installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. A galvanized Schedule 40 pipe sleeve is acceptable in lieu of a core drill opening. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 7 of 14 23 05 00 b. Non-Fire Rated Assembly: Core drill and seal with an expanding foam. A galvanized Schedule 40 pipe sleeve is acceptable in lieu of a core drill opening. 3.6 WALL AND FLOOR PLATES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. Where pipes pass through finished walls, floors or ceilings, provide chromium plates, with suitable set screws or other approved holding devices. Where extended sleeves are necessary, the plates shall be of sufficient depth to cover the sleeves. 3.7 INSERTS A. Inserts in concrete for the suspension of piping and equipment shall be provided by this Contractor unless otherwise noted on the Plans. Inserts in "poured in place" concrete shall be Grinnell, Kinsdorf, Elcen, or approved equal. Provide as necessary for support of systems installed. 3.8 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide an adequate pipe suspension system in accordance with recognized engineering practices, using, where possible, standard, commercially accepted pipe hangers and accessories. Use a safety factor of five unless otherwise approved in writing. B. All pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the latest requirements of the ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.1 (or ASME B31.9), and Manufacturers Standardization Society Documents MSS SP-58 and MSS-SP-69. Seismic restraints shall be in accordance with the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems. Use SMACNA Seismic Hazard Level-A unless otherwise indicated. C. Where thermal movement in the pipe will occur, the pipe hanger assembly must be capable of support in all operating conditions. Accurate weight balance calculations shall be made to determine the supporting force at each hanger location in order to prevent excessive stress in either pipe or equipment connection. D. Concrete Inserts: Where piping is supported from the concrete structure, inserts shall be provided for rod sizes up to 3/4 inch. Where support rod sizes exceed 3/4 inch diameter or where pipe load exceeds the recommended load for the inserts, use two inserts with a trapeze type connecting member below the concrete. E. Riser Clamps (Vertical Piping): Pipe shall be supported at each floor with a riser clamp or at sufficient intervals to carry the weight and its contents. See the specification for hanger spacing in this section. Stacks shall be supported at their base by a concrete pier or by a suitable hanger located on the horizontal run, close to the riser. Riser clamp extensions shall rest on the building structure where possible auxiliary steel supports shall be provided where it is impractical to rest directly on the building structure. F. Hangers shall be subject to tensile loading only. Where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, provide a suitable linkage in hanger rod to permit swing. G. Materials: 1. Threaded rod: electro-plated steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, 304 stainless steel, or 316 stainless steel. 2. Strut and fittings: hot-dip galvanized steel, 304 stainless steel, 316 stainless steel, or fiberglass. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 8 of 14 23 05 00 3. Auxiliary support materials: hot-dip galvanized steel, 304 stainless steel, or 316 stainless steel. 4. All support materials shall be hot dip galvanized if located outdoors, in wet/damp areas, or in corrosive environments. H. Hanger Spacing: Special instructions for pipe support intervals shall be as detailed on the drawings. General pipe support interval instructions shall be as specified below. For any missing pipe systems, support intervals shall be per the Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS) Standard SP-69, “Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application” and the current mechanical code in force in the jurisdiction of the work. Where concentrated loads of valves, fittings, etc., occur, closer spacing will be necessary and shall be based on the weight supported and the recommended loads for the hanger components. 1. Copper tube and pipe with soldered or brazed joints a. 1-1/2 NPS and smaller: 1) Horizontal: 6' 2) Vertical: Each floor, 10' maximum. b. 2 NPS and larger: 1) Horizontal: 10' 2) Vertical: Each floor, 10' maximum. I. Hangers (Horizontal Piping): 1. General: All hangers shall be provided with means of vertical adjustment. Hanger components shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS) Standard SP-58, “Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture”. 2. Pipe hangers and supports that are in direct contact with piping shall be of materials that are compatible with the piping and do not support galvanic action. 3. Pipe hangers and supports that are in direct contact with plastic or other malleable piping shall be constructed of materials that do not damage the surface of the piping. 4. Place shields on the outside of the insulation. Size them to prevent crushing of the high density insert at each hanger location. Do not damage the vapor barrier. 5. Roller Hangers: Provide roller hangers for all applications where thermal movement causes hanger rods to deviate more than 4 inches from vertical or longitudinal movement exceeds 1/2 inch. Provide roller hangers used in conjunction with protection saddles to suit the insulation thickness. 6. Vibration Control: Provide a vibration control hanger for all piping within a mechanical room and at the first three hanger locations from any motor operated equipment. Hanger shall consist of steel frame and spring with neoprene washers. 7. Anchors, Guides, And Sliding Supports: Shall be provided as necessary to prevent excessive stress in either piping or equipment. 8. Auxiliary Steel: Provide all auxiliary steel necessary for the installation of the pipe hangers and supports. Designed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook. All auxiliary steel shall receive one shop coat of primer paint. 9. Submittals: Submittals on pipe supports will not be required if items specified in MSS SP-58, or provided, or standard “strut” based products. Submit specifics on all other support types and methodologies in accordance with Division 1. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 9 of 14 23 05 00 3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: 1. Provide all saw cutting, core drilling, and other work (including patching) necessary for installation of mechanical systems. 2. Prior to cutting, saw cutting, or core drilling any concrete, Contractor shall locate any reinforcing steel (rebar) and the like located in the concrete where the cutting is to be performed. Obtain specific approval from the Architect prior to cutting any concrete reinforcement. Approval must be obtained for each specific instance of cutting reinforcement. 3. Unless directed otherwise by Structural Documents, maintain the following minimum clearances from any concrete reinforcement: a. Reinforcing steel: 2” B. New Work: Provide openings in walls, floors, foundations, etc. for pipe, duct and associated items required for installation under Division 23 are provided.Furnish dimensions and locations of openings to other Contractors doing the work. Provide ample coordination time to avoid delays and unnecessary labor. The expense for cutting and patching made necessary to admit work, repair defective material or workmanship, or by neglect to anticipate proper requirements shall be borne by this Contractor. C. Existing Structure: 1. All necessary cutting and patching of existing structures necessary for the installation of mechanical work shall be as part of this Contract. Unless cutting and patching locations are specifically shown on the drawings, obtain approval prior to proceeding. 2. All surfaces must be patched upon completion of work. Final finish of all patched surfaces (walls, ceilings, floors etc.) shall be done per finish schedules shown on the Architectural Drawings or patched to match the adjacent surface. 3. Contractor shall locate all steel in existing structure using x-ray or similar scanning equipment prior to cutting into existing structure. 3.10 COORDINATION WITH CONTROLS INSTALLATION A. Review the controls section of Division 23 and the drawings. Provide installation of any components specified in that section. 3.11 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION ACCESS A. Provide suitable access to all mechanical equipment requiring servicing, maintenance, replacement, or repair. 1. In concealed spaces where access has not been provided by means of doors, hatchways, walkways or other means, provide wall or ceiling access doors of a type suitable to the service intended, sized to provide easy access to all equipment. Location of such doors shall be coordinated with the work of the other trades to avoid conflicts. 2. Access door locations; shall be approved by the Architect prior to installation. B. Provide suitable access to all mechanical equipment requiring servicing, maintenance, replacement, or repair. 1. In concealed spaces where access has not been provided by means of doors, hatchways, walkways or other means, provide wall or ceiling access doors of a type suitable to the service intended, sized to provide easy access to all equipment. Location of such doors shall be coordinated with the work of the other trades to avoid conflicts. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 10 of 14 23 05 00 2. Access door locations; shall be approved by the Architect prior to installation. C. In addition to building access openings, provide access panels on ducts where required to service fire dampers, damper operators, and other equipment requiring adjustment or maintenance. 1. Duct access openings shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. 2. All access doors to mechanically furnished panels, control boxes and filter compartments shall be provided with fully hinged, easily opened access doors. 3.12 TEMPORARY HEATING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary heating for all spaces affected by work under this contract. B. The Contractor shall coordinate any temporary utility (such as gas, electric, etc.) required to provide temporary heating. 1. The building electrical system may be used. a. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary electrical connection(s) to the electrical system. b. The Owner will pay for electrical energy used as part of their normal utility payment. C. Maintain the following space conditions: 1. General spaces: 60°F a. During concrete work and curing: Refer to concrete specifications for condition requirements. b. During painting work and curing: Refer to painting specifications for condition requirements. D. Air handling units, unit heaters, and other equipment installed as permanent units under this contract may not be used as temporary conditioning units during construction. E. Where specifically allowed in writing by the Owner, equipment installed as permanent units under this contract or existing equipment may be used for temporary space conditioning during construction, subject to the following conditions: 1. The building must be clean of all dust before starting units. 2. Temporary filter media (80 % to 85 % efficient) for all return air, fresh air, exhaust and relief air systems shall be provided. 3. All windows, doors or other openings in the building must be closed off. 4. Upon completion of the job, provide new filters for all units, size and type as specified for normal operation of the equipment in Division 23. 3.13 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. General: Provide vibration isolation per the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Applications Manual, Chapter “Sound and Vibration Control”. Vibration isolation shall be provided for both isolation from the building structure (devices such as spring hangers, rubber in shear isolators, etc.) and isolation from the mechanical system (devices such as pipe and duct flexible connections). This ASHRAE reference details specifically the method, type of device, and device selection required. Refer to Table 47, “Selection Guide for Vibration Isolation”. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 11 of 14 23 05 00 B. Vibration isolation may be combined with the seismic support system, if certified by the isolation equipment manufacturer. 3.14 FIRE INTEGRITY A. Maintain the fire rating of all assemblies (wall, ceiling, floor, etc) penetrated by mechanical systems. Provide approved firestopping materials as previously specified, and install in accordance with the conditions of the material UL listing. 3.15 PRESSURE TESTS AND IN-SERVICE TESTS A. All work under this Contract shall be thoroughly and systematically tested, both during construction and after completion. Testing of systems and/or components shall be either as specified in the appropriate specification section, or as specified in the applicable code. Tests shall be maintained until approved. B. Notifications shall be sent to the following parties 48 hours in advance of all tests: 1. Architect. 2. Owner. 3. Authority Having Jurisdiction over the specific work to be inspected. a. Notifications to AHJ shall be provided in accordance with requirements of each specific AHJ, including amount of advance notice allowed. C. No systems, whether prescribed for testing or not, shall be covered or concealed below ground, in walls, in ceiling spaces, or generally from ease of viewing without first notifying all of the above-listed parties for inspection. Failure to provide such notification of concealed systems shall be cause to require this Contractor to uncover and re-cover such systems at no additional cost. D. A log of all tests shall be kept. The log shall note date, time of day test started, system or portion of system tested, length of test and test results. E. The Contractor shall test the completed installation as in regular service. The systems provided under this Contract shall be operated in normal service for a period of at least a week prior to requesting substantial completion inspection, and any resulting defects repaired. F. The Contractor shall guarantee the entire system and all parts thereof for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance, and shall repair or replace any part which may show signs of failure in that time if such failure is due to imperfections in material or to improper workmanship. 3.16 STARTUP, BALANCING AND COMMISSIONING A. Equipment Startup 1. Refer to Section 23 08 10 for startup requirements. 2. Refer to individual technical sections for specific startup requirements. 3. Equipment startup shall be performed by factory-trained and certified technicians. B. Testing and Balancing 1. Refer to Section 23 05 93 for test and balance requirements. 2. Provide any necessary impeller trimming or other modifications to mechanical equipment required for specified performance. C. Commissioning HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 12 of 14 23 05 00 1. Provide system startup, adjustment, functional testing, and documentation to demonstrate compliance with design documents. Provide documentation to meet basic commissioning requirements of Washington State Energy Code section C408. 3.17 CLEANING UP A. Comply with requirements of General Specifications (Division 1, General Conditions, Etc.). B. Ducts shall be maintained as clean as possible during construction, and shall be blown clean before the building field painting operations are started. Ducts and apparatus casings shall be thoroughly cleaned before fans and filters are operated. After equipment has been used for any purposes, such as adjusting, testing, or temporary ventilation, filters shall be cleaned or renewed and exhaust/return ducts shall be cleaned. Use temporary filters with 80% to 85% filter efficiency during construction. 3.18 SPECIAL PROTECTION A. Exercise maximum precaution to provide positive protection for the building and equipment from damage of any kind, and in particular, prevent water and dust seepage into new equipment. B. Repair all damage to the building, systems, or property, caused by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. This provision shall include any preventable damage caused by lack of due diligence in planning and investigation, and shall not be applied to field conditions which could not reasonably be ascertained prior to the activity causing damage. C. All equipment and material installed shall be properly protected from damage during the course of construction. D. In utility rooms and other spaces where piping such as condensate drains, heating water, chilled water, or refrigeration lines have been installed at floor level and interfere with foot traffic, the Mechanical Contractor shall provide covers to protect these pipes. Wood or other such material is acceptable. Where duct plenums or duct runs interfere with normal traffic pattern of maintenance personnel, the Mechanical Contractor shall provide a wooden bridge over the ducts to prevent damage. Provide handrails for bridge(s) where required by code. E. In attic or other spaces where ductwork has been installed at floor level and interferes with foot traffic, the Contractor shall provide permanent covers to protect these items. Wood or other such material is acceptable. Provide handrails where required by code. 3.19 CAULKING A. Caulk all openings and flash around all ductwork passing through roof, floor, and walls. B. All caulking shall be water resistant, zero-VOC, zero mold growth, and water based type. C. Refer to paragraph "Fire Integrity" for all rated wall, ceiling, roof, floor, and other penetrations. 3.20 FINAL INSPECTION A. This Contractor shall thoroughly review and inspect the project to determine when final inspection is required, and shall provide notification. It shall be understood that the work shall be essentially complete, and the open items list provided at that time. The warranty period will not start until the punchlist and back-check are complete. Additional inspections required because of lack of diligence by the Contractor will be conducted on a schedule convenient to the inspectors. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 13 of 14 23 05 00 3.21 INSTRUCTION PERIODS A. Refer to Division 1 for additional demonstration and training requirements. B. Scope: Following installation of mechanical work, have representatives of installation tradesmen conduct demonstrations and instruction periods to point out locations of servicing points and required points of maintenance to Owner’s staff. C. General Description Of Instruction Period: Each period shall include preliminary discussion and presentation of information from maintenance manuals with appropriate references to drawings followed by tours of building areas explaining maintenance requirements, access methods, servicing and maintenance procedures, and equipment cleaning procedures, temperature control settings and available adjustments. D. Scheduling Of Instruction Period: Notice of Contractor's readiness to conduct such instruction and demonstration shall be given at least two weeks prior to the instruction period, and agreement finalized as to the date at which the instruction period is to be performed. Notify two weeks prior to date when ready to conduct instruction and demonstrations receive approvals of proposed date prior to making final arrangements. E. Comply with training and training reporting requirements enumerated in Chapter 14 of the Washington State Energy Code, WAC 51-11. 3.22 ON SITE OBSERVATIONS AND SAFETY MEASURES A. The Contractor is solely responsible to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The duty of any other individual or organization to conduct construction observations of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on, or near the construction site. The contractor shall be responsible for providing all safety measures and shall consult with the State and/or Federal Safety Agency or Inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to compliance with State and/or Federal regulations. Furthermore, the Contractor distinctly assumes all risk or damages or injury to any persons or property wherever located resulting from any action or operation under this Contract or in connection with the work. 3.23 CONTINUITY OF BUILDING AND UTILITY AND SHUTDOWNS A. General: Continuity of utilities services in the building shall be maintained at all times as required to provide heat, water, lighting, and power to all portions of the building. Utility systems shutdowns required for extensions, alterations or connections of new services shall be accomplished in accordance with the following requirements. B. Shutdowns: 1. While building is in operation, utilities shutdowns shall be scheduled for weekends, holidays, or at night, if the shutdown affects the use of the building or surrounding buildings. 2. Shutdowns longer than 2 hours shall be coordinated with and approved by the Owner at least 1 week in advance. 3. Shutdowns less than 2 hours shall be coordinated with and approved by the Owner at least 48 hours in advance. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 14 of 14 23 05 00 C. Costs: The Contractor shall include in their bid proposal all costs associated with utilities shutdowns. No extra payment will be made for overtime work, schedule changes or failure to complete utilities connections within authorized shutdown periods. D. Coordinate with the serving utility and pursue the work in timely manor to return utilities to service. E. Liability: Failure to coordinate with the serving utility or to sufficiently pursue the work in time to return utilities to service shall not constitute a basis for avoiding any contractual penalties. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 1 23 05 53 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2023. B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2017. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS A. Small-sized Equipment: nameplates. 2.2 NAMEPLATES A. Letter Color: White. B. Letter Height: 1/4 inch. C. Background Color: Black. D. Plastic: Comply with ASTM D709. 2.3 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 3 23 05 93 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of domestic hot water recirculation systems. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AABC (NSTSB) - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, 7th Edition; 2016. B. ASHRAE Std 110 - Methods of Testing Performance of Laboratory Fume Hoods; 2016, with Errata. C. ASHRAE Std 111 - Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building HVAC Systems; 2008, with Errata (2019). D. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standard for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems; 2019. E. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing; 2023. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component. 1. Include at least the following in the plan: a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used. b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each. c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings during the process. d. Final test report forms to be used. e. Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under all conditions. f. Method of verifying and setting minimum outside air flow rate will be verified and set and for what level (total building, zone, etc.). g. Method of checking building static and exhaust fan and/or relief damper capacity. h. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution. C. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report. 2. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 3. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. 4. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111. 5. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of balancing valves and rough setting. OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 3 23 05 93 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following: 1. AABC (NSTSB), AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. 3. SMACNA (TAB). B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project. C. TAB Agency Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section. 2. Having minimum of three years documented experience. 3. Certified by one of the following: a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabc.com/#sle; upon completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty. b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org/#sle. c. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org/#sle. D. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency. E. Pre-Qualified TAB Agencies: 1. Neudorfer Engineers. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 3. Pumps are rotating correctly. 4. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 5. Service and balance valves are open. B. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work. 1. Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or balanced. B. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing. 3.4 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES A. Domestic Water Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 3 23 05 93 3.5 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING A. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including: 1. Running log of events and issues. 2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others. 3. Contract interpretation requests. 4. Lists of completed tests. B. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. F. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner. 3.6 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. B. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. 3.7 SCOPE A. Test, adjust, and balance the following: 1. Domestic hot water recirculation balancing valves. 3.8 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED A. Pumps: 1. Identification/number. 2. Manufacturer. 3. Size/model. 4. Service. 5. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP. 6. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP. 7. Discharge pressure. 8. Suction pressure. 9. Total operating head pressure. B. Recirculation Systems (Circuit Setter Valves): 1. Valve location. 2. Valve size/model. 3. Manufacturer. 4. Service. 5. Actual flow rate. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR STARTUP OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 3 23 08 10 SECTION 23 08 10 - REQUIREMENTS FOR STARTUP PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide startup and checkout procedures for all Plumbing and HVAC equipment in Divisions 22 and 23. B. Provide all commissioning documentation in order to comply with the “Systems Commissioning” requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial (Chapter 51-11C WAC, paragraph C408.2). 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Washington Administrative Code (WAC): 1. WAC 51-11C - Washington State Energy Code, Commercial (WSEC-C) B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) 1. SMACNA 1429 - HVAC Systems Commissioning Manual 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Startup Data 1. Incomplete items list. 2. Preliminary systems documentation 3. Pre-start and startup checklists 4. Functional performance checklists 5. WSEC-C Commissioning checklist upon completion, along with the completed pre-start, startup and functional performance checklists. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Division 1 for product storage and handling requirements. 1.5 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Division 1 for execution and closeout requirements. B. Refer to Division 1 for closeout submittal procedures. C. Refer to Division 1 for demonstration and training requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall prepare a complete list of all items that are not complete prior to notification of readiness for punchlist. This list shall include estimated date of Contractor completion for each item. B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner for Owner’s system operators & maintenance personnel to observe startup procedures. C. The following procedures shall be performed by the Contractor and their equipment supplier. Also, complete the “Commissioning Compliance Checklist” per the WSEC-C, and provide any information stipulated on that checklist. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR STARTUP OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 3 23 08 10 3.2 PREPARATIONS A. Assemble four copies of the preliminary system documentation described below, and submit to the Architect along with the startup and checkout plan. Three copies will be returned to the Contractor. 1. Startup Schedule, to be integrated with the Construction Schedule. 2. List of equipment and systems for formal startup. 3. List of sub-trades, suppliers and other Contractors who will be involved in the startup process. 4. All submittal data and controls sequence descriptions needed to prepare startup and checkout checklists. 3.3 SYSTEM CHECKLISTS A. Prepare Pre-Start and Startup Checklists. These checklists shall be based on lists provided in Appendix B of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) “HVAC Systems Commissioning Manual”. Level-1, “Basic Commissioning”, which is the standard for this Contract. If applicable to the equipment and systems on this project, the SMACNA checklists may be used without modification. If not directly applicable, either modify a similar SMACNA checklist to suit the equipment or system under consideration, or create a new checklist. Any new or modified checklist must have the same level of checkout as the base SMACNA checklist. Pre-start and startup checklists shall include all manufacturer’s recommended startup instructions. The manufacturer’s instructions shall have priority over SMACNA checklist examples. B. Prepare functional performance checklists. These checklists shall be based lists provided in Appendix D of the SMACNA “HVAC Systems Commissioning Manual”. Again, Level-1, “Basic Commissioning”, is the Standard for this Contract. If applicable to the equipment and systems on this project, the SMACNA checklists may be used without modification. If not directly applicable, either modify a similar SMACNA checklist to suit the equipment or system under consideration, or create a new checklist. Any new or modified checklist must have the same level of checkout as the base SMACNA checklist. Functional performance checklists shall include all manufacturer’s recommended instructions for performance checkout. The manufacturer’s instructions shall have priority over SMACNA checklist examples. 3.4 STARTUP AND CHECKOUT PLAN A. The startup and checkout plan is composed of the pre-start checklists, startup checklists and functional performance test checklists. The plan also includes the startup schedule, checkout schedule, list of sub-trades, suppliers and other contractors who will be involved in the startup and checkout process and all submittal data and controls sequence descriptions needed to prepare startup and checkout checklists. B. The startup and checkout plan shall be submitted to the Architect as soon as possible along with the preliminary system information. This will normally occur after the initial Controls Design Submittal (Shop Drawings) has been returned to the Contractor (all equipment has been normally submitted and approved by that time), and no later than 3-months prior to substantial completion. 3.5 STARTUP AND CHECKOUT PROCEDURES A. Perform startup and checkout in accordance with the startup and checkout plan. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR STARTUP OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 3 23 08 10 B. The completed package shall be submitted for approval prior to acceptance of substantial completion. This package shall include: 1. Two copies of the preliminary system information. 2. Completed startup and checkout checklists. C. Provide an operations instruction and demonstration to the Owner’s maintenance personnel in accordance with Chapter 6 of the SMACNA HVAC Systems Commissioning Manual. 3.6 BALANCING A. Balancing occurs after initial startup, and prior to functional testing. Deficiencies are identified and corrected, controls are calibrated, controls programming is initially set up and verified, and other startup and balancing tasks completed. B. Refer to Section 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, for balancing description. 3.7 DOCUMENTATION A. Provide all documentation described in paragraph C408 of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial. B. Provide completed startup and checkout checklists. END OF SECTION HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SMALL-CAPACITY SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 3 23 81 26.13 SECTION 23 81 26.13 - SMALL-CAPACITY SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air-source heat pumps. B. Indoor air handling (fan and coil) units for ductless systems. C. Controls. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AHRI 210/240 - Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment; 2023. B. AHRI 520 - Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units; 2004. C. ASHRAE Std 23 - Methods for Performance Testing Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and Compressor Units; 2022. D. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2024. E. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems; 2024. F. UL 207 - Standard for Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams. C. Design Data: Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing. D. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on refrigerant used, showing compliance with specified requirements. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and connections. H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Filters: One for each unit. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Refer to Division 1 for additional warranty requirements. HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SMALL-CAPACITY SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 3 23 81 26.13 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Split-System Heating and Cooling Units: Self-contained, packaged, matched factory-engineered and assembled, pre-wired indoor and outdoor units; UL listed. 1. Heating and Cooling: Air-source electric heat pump located in outdoor unit with evaporator. 2. Provide refrigerant lines internal to units and between indoor and outdoor units, factory cleaned, dried, pressurized and sealed, with insulated suction line. 2.2 INDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS FOR DUCTLESS SYSTEMS A. Indoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, evaporator coil, and controls; wired for single power connection with control transformer. 1. Location: High-wall. 2. Cabinet: Galvanized steel. a. Finish: White. 3. Fan: Line-flow fan direct driven by a single motor. 4. Filter return air with washable, antioxidant pre-filter and a pleated anti-allergy enzyme filter. B. Evaporator Coils: Copper tube aluminum fin assembly, galvanized or polymer drain pan sloped in all directions to drain, drain connection, refrigerant piping connections, restricted distributor or thermostatic expansion valve. 1. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 and UL 207. 2. Manufacturer: System manufacturer. 2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS A. Outdoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, with compressor and condenser. 1. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 with testing in accordance with ASHRAE Std 23 and UL 207. B. Compressor: Inverter driven, variable speed, with thermal and overcurrent protection. C. Air Cooled Condenser: Aluminum fin and copper tube coil, AHRI 520 with direct drive axial propeller fan resiliently mounted, galvanized fan guard. D. Accessories: Filter drier, high-pressure switch (manual reset), low pressure switch (automatic reset), service valves and gauge ports, thermometer well (in liquid line). 1. Provide thermostatic expansion valves. E. Operating Controls: 1. Control by room thermostat to maintain room temperature setting. 2.4 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT A. Room Thermostat: Wall-mounted, electric solid state microcomputer based room thermostat with remote sensor to maintain temperature setting; low-voltage; with following features: 1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from setpoint. 3. Thermostat Display: HMAC - MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SMALL-CAPACITY SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 3 23 81 26.13 a. Actual room temperature. b. System Mode Indication: Heating, Cooling, Fan Auto, Off, and On, Auto or On, Off. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrates are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that proper power supply is available and in correct location. C. Verify that proper fuel supply is available for connection. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. C. Pipe drain from cooling coils to nearest floor drain. END OF SECTION HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS DIVISION 26 TABLE OF CONTENTTS OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 1 DIVISON 26 TABLE OF CONTENTS 26 01 26 Maintenance Testing for Electrical Systems 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical Systems 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 13 Fuses 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 3 26 01 26 SECTION 26 01 26 - MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0 and 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Perform tests of the electrical system to ensure code compliance and proper system operation according to the intent of the contract documents. Retain the services of approved testing agency(s) to comply with the ground fault protection systems requirements of this section. B. Applicable Codes, Standards & References for Tests: All inspections and tests shall be in accordance with the following applicable codes and standards except as provided otherwise herein. 1. National Electrical Code - NEC 2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association - NEMA 3. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - IEEE 5. National Electrical Testing Association - NETA 6. American National Standards Institute - ANSI 7. State and Local Codes and Ordinances 8. Insulated Cable Engineers Associate - ICEA 9. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies - AEIC 1.3 CIRCUIT TESTS A. The Contractor shall perform routine insulation resistance, continuity and grounding tests for all distribution and utilization equipment prior to their connection and energization. A standard megger-type instrument shall be used to demonstrate that insulation values are acceptable, ground system is continuous, and the neutral system is isolated from the grounding system except at the systems' single ground point. B. System defects, indicated by the circuit tests, shall be corrected. Tests shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. 1.4 GROUNDING TEST HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 3 26 01 26 A. Measure the ohmic value of the Electrical Service Entrance "System Ground" with reference to "Earth Ground" using multiple terminal, fall of potential methods and suitable test instruments. B. Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 10 ohms unless lower values are specified in the contract documents. Notify the Architect/Engineer if this resistance value is not obtained for the initially installed system; and then provide corrective measures required to reduce ground resistance to less than 10 ohms. 1.5 MOTOR AND EQUIPMENT TESTS A. Verify proper rotation of all motors before placing into service. B. Measure and record electrical data for each motor installed under this contract. Data shall include these items: 1. Motor description 2. Controller description 3. Motor nameplate amperes 4. Actual measured motor running amperes 5. Overload heater manufacturer and catalog numbers 6. Overload heater ampere range 7. Voltage (measured) and phase C. Motor controller overload heaters shall be sized to the actual motor nameplate full load current; do not oversize overload heaters. 1.6 PHASE BALANCE TESTS A. Verify the balance of the electrical system's phase currents. Reassign load connections if necessary, to obtain a balance is acceptable to the Engineer. 1.7 ARC FLASH AND PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (NEC 110-16) A. Contractor shall prepare an arc flash and Personnel Protective Equipment study. Contractor shall provide labeling of the electrical equipment within the facility. All labels shall have a permanent marked date of the label installation per National Electrical Code requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND INSTRUMENTATION A. Contractor and/or testing agency shall supply all apparatus and materials required for indicated tests. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 3 26 01 26 B. Contractor shall include all costs associated with testing in bid proposal. 2.2 TEST REPORT(S) A. Furnish electronic PDF copy of test reports, as specified herein, for inclusion into the project operation and maintenance manuals. Each test report shall include the following items: 1. Name, address and telephone number of the testing agency. 2. Name(s) of personnel conducting the tests 3. Type of test 4. Description of test procedure 5. List of items tested 6. List of actual test equipment including make, model(s), serial number(s) and calibration date(s) as applicable. 7. Test results 8. Conclusion and recommendations 9. Appendix, including appropriate test forms PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING PROCEDURE A. Submit a copy of test procedure(s) to the Engineer prior to testing. B. All tests shall be conducted according to applicable industry standards. 3.2 SCHEDULING A. Notify Architect/Engineer and Owner at least five (5) working days prior to performance of any test. END OF SECTION 26 01 26 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 14 26 05 00 SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 0 and 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Bidding documents including Division 1 General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Published Addenda and related work in other Divisions form an integral part of these Specifications and shall be binding on the Division 26 Contractor for all work performed under Division 26, Electrical. B. General requirements for materials and installation methods. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The term "provide" shall mean furnish, install and connect equipment and materials complete in operating condition. B. The term "approved" as used herein shall mean the written approval of the Engineer. C. The term "Contractor" as used herein shall mean the organization responsible for accomplishing all work within the contract documents. The plural term "contractors" as used herein shall include all of the trade organizations that comprise the project workforce. D. The term "drawings" as used herein shall mean all contract drawings for all divisions of work. E. NEC means National Electrical Code. F. The term "code" as used herein shall mean all applicable National, State and local codes. 1.4 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Electrical work consists of furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory operation all equipment, materials, devices and appurtenances, necessary to provide complete systems according to the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. In general, this includes all labor, materials, equipment, tools, etc. to complete the electrical work. B. Electrical requirements are not limited to electrical drawings and specifications. There is HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 14 26 05 00 additional electrical work required to be included in the bid, indicated on the architectural, structural, landscape, civil, kitchen and mechanical drawings. Additional electrical work required in the bid is also located in the specifications. Contractor shall review all architectural, structural, landscape, civil, kitchen and mechanical, drawings and specifications for additional electrical requirements and information. 1.5 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The Electrical drawings are intended to serve as working drawings for general layout. Equipment, receptacles, tele/data, switches, panels, lights, disconnects and raceways are partially diagrammatic and do not necessarily indicate actual routings or all appurtenances required for a complete installation. B. The drawings and specifications are complementary. What is called for in either is binding as if called for in both. In case of conflict within the drawings, specifications or between drawings and specifications the Architect/Engineer will select the method to be taken. C. Take all working dimensions, device heights, door swings and the like from architectural drawings and check them against those shown or scaled on the electrical drawings. In the event of conflict, report discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before proceeding with the work. D. Minor changes in the locations of raceways, devices and the like, from those shown on the plans, shall be made without extra charge if so, directed by the Architect/ Engineer before installation. E. Motor horsepower and apparatus wattages indicated on the plans are estimated requirements of equipment furnished under other Divisions of this contract. Advise the Architect/Engineer in writing of any deviations in actual equipment supplied that affect the electrical installation. 1.6 MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDATIONS A. Make all installations in strict accordance with manufacturers' published recommendations and details. All equipment and materials recommended by them shall be considered as part of this contract. 1.7 WORK RELATED TO OTHER DIVISIONS A. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION POWER AND LIGHTING 1. Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with removal of the temporary construction service meter. 2. Provide, maintain and remove, when no longer required, temporary electrical construction wiring from the construction service meter to and within the building for HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 14 26 05 00 the number of lights and receptacles required. Wiring to construction sheds, outdoor construction machinery, and temporary exterior work areas shall be the responsibility of individual contractors. 3. Provide and maintain construction lighting with portable wiring and temporary energization of the permanent building wiring, complete with lamps. Suitable construction lighting shall be provided in each room where lighting is required for any of the contractors on the job. See NEC ARTICLE 305. Temporary wiring. 4. Contractor is responsible for re-lamping construction lighting after the initial lamping. 5. Provide adequate feeders, circuit breakers and duplex 15-ampere 120-volt receptacles at locations as required. Note: 120 volt construction receptacles shall provide Ground Fault circuit protection in accordance with applicable WISHA safety standards. 6. Portable power cords from the outlets specified herein shall be the responsibility of individual contractors using the cords. 7. Responsibilities outlined in the Paragraph Temporary Construction Power and Lighting are delineated herein to avoid conflicts between the various contractors. Assume all responsibility for safety, Electrical and Safety Code compliance, performance and adequacy of the construction power and lighting installation. The Architect and Engineer assumes no responsibility for the performance or safety and will not inspect nor design this temporary installation as it is not part of the completed structure. B. MECHANICAL CONTROL WIRING 1. See Division 23. C. EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS 1. All electrical equipment furnished for this project shall be coordinated with the drawings to insure correctness of Voltage, Phase and Ampacity. Equipment served by single circuit or feeder shall be provided with appropriate internal wiring including fusing of multiple circuits as required by code. 2. Contractors supplying equipment incompatible with the designed electrical service shall be responsible for arranging and providing necessary changes in their supply wiring to suit the equipment. 3. Verify dimensions of equipment to be furnished by others to insure correct clearances and connections. 4. Control Voltages shall not exceed 120 volts. Provide control transformers for higher line voltages. Control transformers shall be connected from phase to neutral. 1.8 SUPERVISION AND COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with local power, telephone, cable and data utilities to ensure compliance with their specific requirements. Before starting work, contact both power and telephone utilities and make arrangements for their services to this project. B. Contact Electrical Inspection and obtain a permit before starting work. Electrical plans have been submitted for plans review and will be available with payment for electrical permit. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 14 26 05 00 C. Maintain adequate supervision of Division 26 work and have a responsible person in charge at the site any time work is in progress or when necessary for coordination with other trades. D. Schedule work to best serve the interests of the Owner. Lay out work by referring to Civil, Landscape, Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and other Contractors to anticipate their movements. Cooperate with the other contractors on the job and coordinate work to avoid interference with them. E. Determine a satisfactory space allocation arrangement where electrical material is installed in proximity to work of other trades. No extra payments will be allowed to relocate work that interferes with that of other trades. 1.9 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. All work shall conform to current applicable National, State and local Codes; these shall be regarded as the minimum standard of quality for material and workmanship. Contractor shall provide all Labor and Material that may be required for compliance with Code Requirements or Code Interpretations, although not specifically detailed on the Drawings or in the Specifications. Contractor shall become familiar with all the following codes prior to bidding. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code WAC Washinton State Administrative Code NESC National Electrical Safety Code NEMA National Electric Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association UL Underriters Laboratories, Inc. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Associations CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories IFC International Fire Code IBC International Building Code B. Nothing in these Drawings and Specifications shall be construed as permitting work not conforming with governing codes. C. The Contractor shall not be relieved from complying with any requirements of these contract documents which may exceed, but not conflict with, requirements of the governing codes. D. Contractor shall include in bid all costs to have a Department of Labor & Industries approved firm to evaluate the installation safety, and compliance with code as required per WAC 296 - 40-100 for any equipment specified or furnished that is not UL labeled. E. For equipment furnished by others that is not UL labeled the contractor shall not connect the equipment to the electrical system until receiving written approval by the electrical authority HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 14 26 05 00 having jurisdiction. 1.10 PERMITS & FEES A. Obtain and pay all fees for licenses, permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. Arrange for inspection of work and provide inspectors with all necessary assistance. 1.11 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be done by competent craftsmen skilled in the specific work to be done. Equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner following the best practice of the trade. 1.12 ITEMIZED COST BREAKDOWN A. Furnish the Engineer with an itemized contract cost breakdown to allow evaluation of partial payment requests. The cost breakdown shall categorize major items of the contract such as: Job organization and setup, conduit system, primary switchgear, transformers, secondary panel gear, service and feeder wiring, branch circuit wiring, lighting fixtures, wiring devices, trim, fire alarm and special systems. 1.13 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Fully instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the operation and maintenance of all components of the electrical system upon completion of the work and after all tests and final inspection(s) by the Authority(s) Having Jurisdiction. B. All costs for contractor's instruction are to be included in the bid proposal. These costs are in addition to contractors’ costs for commissioning. C. Instructors shall be contractor's superintendents or foremen knowledgeable in each system and equipment suppliers’ representatives for special systems. D. Refer to Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures. 1.14 AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS A. Continuously maintain a set of AS-Built Drawings to indicate all significant deviations from the original design and the actual placement of equipment and underground conduits. (Location of conduit stubouts shall be dimensioned from accepted reference lines). Changes shall be shown with red colored pencil while work is in progress. This "As-Built" set shall be clearly marked: "AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS - Do Not Remove From Office." HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 14 26 05 00 B. Quarterly “As-Built” review refer to 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures. C. "As-Built Record Drawings" and "Corrected to As-Built" prints shall be delivered to the Engineer for transmittal to the Owner. 1.15 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS A. Refer to Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures. 1.16 FINAL INSPECTION A. Refer to Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures. 1.17 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Refer to Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures. 1.18 GUARANTEE A. The Division 26 Contractor shall provide written guarantee to repair or replace (without additional expense) any defective materials or workmanship which become evident within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance or for such longer period as elsewhere specified. All warranty work shall be to the satisfaction of the Owner. B. Any material guaranteed by a specific manufacturer for a period in excess of two (2) years shall be specifically noted on the Owner's written guarantee. C. The Division 26 Contractor will not be expected to perform normal maintenance, such as replacement of incandescent lamps, etc., 60 days beyond date of Beneficial Occupancy by Owner or Final Acceptance, whichever date is earlier. D. Refer to Section 017700 Closeout Procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials shall be new, free from defects, of the quality specified herein and on the drawings. Materials shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation and rated life in the prevailing environmental conditions where they are being installed. They shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories or a recognized testing laboratory for use under these conditions. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 7 of 14 26 05 00 B. Each type of material shall be of the same make and quality throughout the job. The materials furnished shall be the latest standard design products of manufacturers regularly engaged in their production. 2.2 TECHNICAL DATA A. Technical information contained herein relies entirely on tests and ratings provided by manufacturers who are solely responsible for their accuracy. The Engineer, by use of this information in no way implies the results of published manufacturer’s information has been verified. 2.3 AS SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT A. This specification generally lists only one make and model number for each item of equipment or material required for the project. This is not intended to be restrictive but is intended to indicate the standard of quality, design and features required. In addition, the listed product is the basis of the design regarding physical size, electrical power requirements and performance. The product so identified is designated "as specified." 2.4 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. Listing of approved materials is not intended to prevent acceptance of other materials provided the substitute products are submitted for approval and have been approved in accordance with the Substitution of Materials requirements. B. Approval Prior to Installation 1. All substitution requests shall be made on the substitution request form. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for a substitute item suiting the space limitations shown and for any additional installation costs incurred by the substitution. 3. Approval of substitute materials shall not be construed as authorizing any deviation from the contract drawings and specifications except where such deviation is clearly described in writing on the substitution request form and is approved in writing by the Engineer. 4. Requests shall clearly define and describe the proposed substitute product. Such requests shall be accompanied by samples, record of performance, certified test reports and such additional information as the Engineer may require to satisfactorily evaluate the substitute product(s). C. Approval Prior to Bid Opening 1. Bidders or vendors may submit prior approval requests for substitute materials that are similar in appearance, quality and performance to those specified herein or on the drawings. 2. All requests shall be made in writing at least ten (10) days prior to date of bid opening HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 8 of 14 26 05 00 using the substitution request form. Telephone requests and written requests for approval received in the engineer’s office less than ten (10) days prior to bid opening will not be accepted. 3. Approved substitute materials will normally be included in addenda published prior to bid opening. D. Approval After Contract Award: Substitute products will be considered after contract award only under these conditions: 1. Non-Availability of Specified Materials: The Contractor shall have placed orders for specified materials within ten days after notice to proceed and received written confirmation of non-availability from the supplier(s). The reason of non-availability shall be beyond the contractor's control such as: discontinuation of manufacture, strikes and acts of God. 2. Contract Price Adjustments: The Contractor may submit substitution requests for Owner cost savings. All substitute request forms submitted after award of contract shall clearly indicate the proposed contract price change or the request will not be considered. 3. Where Permitted in the Specifications: For items where "approval prior to bidding" is not required in these specifications. It shall be the contractors' responsibility to show that a substitute item is equal or superior in performance and quality to the specified item. E. No Substitute: 1. It is the intent of this specification to require specific materials to be compatible with the existing installation. Certain materials and systems, consequently, are indicated "No Substitute" and shall be provided as specified. 2.5 COMPLETE SYSTEMS A. All systems specified herein and shown on the drawings shall be complete and operational in every detail. Mention of certain materials in bidding documents shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from furnishing such additional materials and performing all labor required to provide a complete and operable system. 2.6 SUBMITTALS A. Purpose of Submittals 1. Submittals processed by the Engineer are not change orders. The Contractor, by the submittal process, demonstrates an understanding of the design concept by indicating equipment and materials intended to be provided and fabrication/installation methods intended to be utilized to meet all requirements of the contract documents. 2. The Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept and the contract documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 9 of 14 26 05 00 Contractor from compliance with the contract documents. B. Submittal items: Submittals shall include, but not be limited to the following items: Raceways Wiring Devices Disconnects Lighting Fixtures Time Switch Nameplates Wires and Cables Fuses Fused Disconnects Arc Flash and PPE Study Short Circuit Study Splicing Kits Labels Pre-cast Concrete Handholes/Covers Items Requested by Engineer C. Submittal Format 1. A transmittal letter with reference identification (i.e., Electrical Submittal No. 1, material lists and catalog data, etc.) shall accompany all submittals. 2. Provide electronic PDF copy of each submittal items. 3. All information contained in the electronic PDF shall be grouped by specification sections. D. Submittal Completeness 1. The Contractor shall make every effort to ensure the completeness of the initial submittal. Availability of certain shop drawings and catalog materials, however, may prevent this. Submittal shall not be delayed past specified time periods to await delivery of the missing items. The Contractor, instead, shall identify missing items on the transmittal letter and provide index listings and divider tabs for later insertion of these materials into the completed submittal brochure. E. Engineer's Selection of Materials for Installation: The Engineer may select specified items that the Contractor shall provide, without change in contract price or time of completeness, under these circumstances: 1. Late and/or Unqualified Partial Submittals: Submittals must be made within the specified time periods; all partial submittals shall indicate manufacturer(s) catalog numbers, pertinent technical information and status of missing items. 2. Failure to follow Re-submittal Procedures: Contractor, within 14 days after the Engineer rejects any items, shall re-submit new materials for approval. 3. Materials have been submitted and rejected twice by the Engineer. F. Contractor's Responsibilities: The Contractor is responsible for all submittal details, accuracy of quantities and dimensions, selection of fabrication processes and techniques of assembly. 1. The Contractor shall furnish equipment/material suppliers with all Drawings and Specifications pertinent to their work. 2. The Contractor shall review, stamp and sign all submittals and shop drawings, prior to submitting shop drawings to the Engineer for review. Contractor shall correct them to ensure compliance with the specifications and drawings. Obtain Engineer's written HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 10 of 14 26 05 00 approval before manufacture is started on any special equipment. 3. Deviation from Shop Drawings in fabrication and/or installation of equipment is not permitted unless proposed changes are clearly noted in writing by the Contractor and approved in writing by the Architect/Engineer at the time of submittal. 4. Maintain at least one complete approved submittal brochure on the jobsite for reference during construction. 2.7 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. General: These items shall be provided with nameplates: 1. All motors, motor starters, pushbutton stations, control panels and time switches. 2. Disconnect switches, switchboards, panelboards, time clocks, low voltage control panels and circuit breakers, contactors, and relays in separate enclosures. 3. Wall switches controlling receptacles, lighting fixtures or equipment where the receptacles are not located within sight of the controlling switch. 4. Special systems shall be properly identified at outlets, junction and pull boxes, terminal cabinets and equipment racks. B. Nameplate Inscription 1. All nameplates shall adequately describe the function or operation of the identified equipment as required. 2. Panelboard and Switchgear nameplates shall include equipment designation, voltage and phase of supply, i.e., Panel A, 208/120V, 3 phase, 4 wire. 3. Nameplate designations shall be consistent for all components of a particular piece of equipment, such as starter, disconnect switch, Push Button control station(s) and the like. 4. Contractor shall submit a complete list of nameplates for approval. C. Nameplate Construction 1. Nameplates shall be laminated phenolic plastic with minimum 3/16" high black engraved characters on white background (alternate background colors shall be provided as noted in the specifications or drawings for special applications). 2. Nameplates shall be securely fastened to the equipment with No. 4 round-head phillips, cadmium plated steel, self-tapping screws. Contact cement adhesive only is not acceptable. 3. Motor nameplates may be non-ferrous die-stamped metal, minimum 0.03 inch thick, in lieu of separate phenolic nameplate. Device plates may be identified by engraving directly on the plate. All engraved or stamped lettering shall be filled with contrasting enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 11 of 14 26 05 00 3.1 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect all work, wire, cable, materials and equipment installed under this division against damage by other trades, weather conditions or any other causes. Equipment found damaged or in other than new condition will be rejected as defective. B. Switchgear, panels, light fixtures and electrical equipment shall be kept covered or enclosed to exclude moisture, dust, dirt, plaster, cement, or paint and shall be free of all such contamination before acceptance. Enclosures and trims shall be in new condition, free of rust, scratches or other finish defects. Properly refinish in a manner acceptable to the Engineer if damaged. C. Keep conduit and raceways closed with suitable plugs or caps during construction to prevent entrance of dirt, moisture, concrete or foreign objects. Raceways shall be clean and dry before installation of wire and at the time of acceptance. D. Make up and insulate wiring promptly after installation of conductors. Wire shall not be pulled-in until raceways are complete, all bushings are installed, and raceway terminations are completed. Wire shall not be pulled into conduit embedded in concrete until after the concrete is placed and forms are removed. 3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Obtain permission from the Architect/Engineer prior to cutting. Locate cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only the minimum amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills or saws except where space limitations prevent the use of such equipment. B. Penetrations of fire rated elements shall be carefully made to maintain that rating after the installation is complete. See Section 01 3100 and Section 07 8400. C. All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of Division 26 work must be repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by skilled labor experienced in that particular building trade. 3.3 EXCAVATIONS A. The contractor shall be fully responsible for the location and protection of all existing utilities. The contractor shall verify all utility locations prior to construction by calling the underground locate line at 1-800-424-5555 a minimum of 48 hours prior to any excavation. The contractor will also be responsible for maintaining all locate marks once the utilities have been located. B. All excavations are to be so conducted that no walls or footings shall be disturbed or injured in any way. C. Remove all surplus earth not needed for backfilling and dispose of same as appropriate at a HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 12 of 14 26 05 00 licensed disposal facility. 3.4 PAINTING A. Painting in general will be covered under another Division of this specification. Items furnished under this Division scratched or marred in shipment or installation are to be refinished by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. Junction boxes for telecom shall be painted blue. Fire alarm junction boxes shall be painted red. 3.5 CLEAN UP A. Contractor shall continually remove debris, cuttings, crates, cartons, etc., created by his work. Such clean up shall be done at sufficient frequency to minimum hazard to the public, other workmen, the building and the Owner's employees. Before acceptance of the installation, Contractor shall carefully clean cabinets, panels, wiring devices, coverplates, etc., to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar, concrete, etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces or apparatus shall be removed and new finish equal to the original applies. 3.6 LABELING A. Clearly and properly label the complete electrical system, as specified herein, to indicate the loads served or the function of each item of equipment connected under this contract. B. Control circuits shall utilize combinations of colors with each conductor identified throughout using wrap around numbers or letters. Identification shall be consistent with the contract drawing requirements and operation and maintenance shop drawings. C. Labels shall be provided on all disconnects, combination motor starter, and junction boxes indicating the specific panel and branch circuit utilized. Do not provide circuiting labels on light switch and receptacle cover plates 3.7 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete electrical connections for all items of equipment, including incidental wiring, materials, devices and labor necessary for a finished working installation. B. Mechanical/Electrical equipment connection coordination shall be as follows: FURNISHED ITEM INSTALLED BY POWER BY CONTROL WIRING BY WIRING BY Mechanical Equipment Motors MC MC EC MC HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 13 of 14 26 05 00 Fused & Unfused Disconnect Switches, Thermal Overload & Heaters EC EC EC -- Motor Starter & Overload Heaters EC EC EC MC Manual Operating & Speed Switches MC EC EC MC Control Relays & Control Transformers MC MC EC** MC Low Voltage Thermostats MC MC EC** MC Temperature Control Panels MC MC EC** MC DDC Panels MC MC EC** MC Motor & Solenoid Valves, Damper Motors, PE & EP Switches MC MC -- MC Fire/Smoke Dampers (Actuators) MC MC EC*** MC/EC* Duct-Mounted Smoke Detectors EC MC -- MC/EC* MC = Division 23 EC = Division 26 * Motor interlock by MC, Fire Alarm System Interconnection by EC. ** EC shall provide conduit and wire from nearest un-switched 120V circuit location. Label on “as built” drawings. *** EC shall provide conduit and wire from nearest 120V panel. Connect to spare circuit breaker and label on “as-built” drawings. 3.8 SUPPORT AND ALIGNMENT A. Each fastening device and support for electrical equipment, fixtures, panels, outlets and cabinets shall be capable of supporting not less than four times the ultimate weight of the objects fastened to or suspended from the building structure. B. Install panels, cabinets and equipment level, plumb, and parallel with structural building lines. Switchgear, panels and all electrical enclosures shall fit neatly without gaps, openings or distortion. Properly and neatly close all unused openings with approved devices. C. Fit surface panels, devices and receptacles with neat, appropriate trims, plates or covers, (without over-hanging edges, protruding corners or raw edges) to leave a finished appearance. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS MAINTENANCE TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 14 of 14 26 05 00 D. All junction boxes, pull boxes or other conduit terminating housings located above a suspended ceiling shall be securely suspended from structure or ceiling grid system to prevent sagging or swaying. 3.9 NOISE CONTROL A. Back-to-back or straight-through installation of wall or partition boxes is not permitted to minimize noise transmission between occupied spaces. B. Contactors, transformers, starters and similar noise producing devices shall not be placed on walls which are common to occupied spaces. Where such devices must be mounted on walls common to occupied spaces, they shall be shock mounted or isolated in such a manner as to effectively prevent the transmission of their inherent noise to the occupied space. C. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers and like equipment which are found to be noticeably noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and shall be replaced. END OF SECTION 26 05 00 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 4 26 05 19 SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 0 and 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all wire, cable and terminations for a complete installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKAGING A. Conductors shall be delivered to the job site in approved original cartons, or on reels as recommended by the manufacturer, and shall bear the Underwriter's Label. Reels shall be provided with suitable protection to prevent fork-lift damage to conductors during shipment or storage prior to use. 2.2 SPECIALIZED CONDUCTORS A. Conductors for specialized systems shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. 2.3 CONDUCTORS - 600 VOLTS A. Stranded copper, insulated for 600 volts. For long runs provide 90 degree rated wire as identified on drawings. B. Insulation types THW, THHN, THWN, XHHW, RHH, RHW, or as required to suit installation conditions. C. Thru wiring in fluorescent fixtures shall be rated for 90 degree C minimum. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 4 26 05 19 2.4 CONNECTORS - 600 Volts A. Branch circuit conductor splices: Pre-insulated "twist-on" type or "crimped-on" type as approved (Scotch-lok, Ideal or equal). B. Cable Splices: Split-bolt or tool applied sleeves with pre-formed insulated cover, heat shrinkable tubing or approved plastic insulating tape. C. Terminator lugs of No. 12 wire and smaller: Spade, insulated type to be tool applied. D. Terminator lugs for No. 10 wire or larger: Two bolt (or approved positive restraint), tool applied compression type (Burndy or equal). 2.5 INSULATING MATERIALS A. Insulating tape or heat shrink tubing shall have the equivalent rating of the applicable conductor insulation (Scotch 3M, RAYCHEM or equal). 2.6 PLASTIC CABLE TIES A. Nylon, or equivalent, locking type (T&B or equal). 2.7 METAL CLAD CABLE A. Metal clad cable is an acceptable wiring method instead of EMT conduit and wire for lighting and receptacle branch circuits. Metal clad cable is not acceptable from the homerun junction box back to the panel for lighting and receptacle circuits. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install all wiring in raceway. 3.2 MINIMUM WIRE SIZE Lighting and Power System ................ No. 12 AWG Fixture Wire .............................. No. 14 AWG Wiring in Fixture Troughs ......... No. 12 AWG Control Circuits for Motors, etc .......... No. 14 AWG HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 4 26 05 19 Fire Alarm Line Voltage Wiring ............ No. 14 AWG Low Voltage Wiring ........... As recommended by Mfgr 3.3 CONDUCTOR TYPES, REFERENCED ON PLAN A. Conductors shall be copper, unless noted otherwise on drawings. 3.4 CONDUCTOR COLORING CODE Conductor color coding shall be as follows: A. 208/120 volt system A Phase - Black B Phase - Red C Phase - Blue Neutral – White Grounding – Green Switched wires – Other colors B. Conductors shall have colored insulation except wires larger than #8 may be black with colored tape identification at all terminations and splices. C. Additional colors may be used where such colors will help in identifying wires and different systems. 3.5 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION A. Raceways shall be complete, clean and free of burrs before pulling conductors. B. U.L. approved pulling compounds may be used with the residue cleaned from the conductors and raceway entrances after the pull is made. C. Contractor shall obtain the manufacturer's published recommendations for the handling, pulling and terminating of the cable. Contractor shall perform work in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and accept all responsibility for work not in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Pulleys or blocks shall be used for alignment of the conductors when pulling. Pulling shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications regarding pulling tensions, bending radius of the cable and compounds. No mechanical pulling means shall be used for wires No. 8 AWG and smaller. Cables shall be pulled by the conductor, not by the insulation or shielding. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 4 26 05 19 3.6 MOISTURE PROTECTION A. Cable ends shall be protected at all times from moisture. Provide approved heat-shrink end caps or equivalent for all unterminated cable ends. 3.7 CONDUCTORS IN PANELS AND SWITCHBOARDS A. Conductors in panels, switchboards and terminal cabinets shall be neatly grouped and formed in a manner to "fan" into terminals with regular spacing. 3.8 CABLE SUPPORTS A. Provide conductor support devices as required by code in vertical cable runs. 3.9 INSULATION REMOVAL A. Insulation shall be removed with approved wire stripping tools. Conductors that are nicked or ringed are unacceptable and shall be cut off and re-stripped. 3.10 INSULATION OF ENERGIZED TERMINATIONS A. Insulate all exposed energized connections and splices with approved tape or heat shrink tubing. Tape, if used, shall be half-lapped in two directions. 3.11 TERMINATIONS - COPPER CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS A. Control and special systems wires shall be terminated with a crimped on lug when terminating at a screw connection. B. All screw and bolt type connectors shall be made up tight and retightened after an eight hour period. Tighten all bolted connections with a ratcheting type torque wrench per manufacturer's standards. C. All tool applied crimped connectors shall be applied per manufacturer's recommendations and physically checked for tightness. END OF SECTION 26 05 19 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 9 26 05 33 SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAY AND BOXES ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 0 and 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide raceways for a complete electrical system. Include all fittings, hangers and appurtenances required for a complete installation. B. Provide outlet and pull boxes required to enclose devices, permit pulling conductors, for wire splices and branching. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide boxes suitable for the location. Boxes shall meet NEMA Standards for various types. 2.2 CONDUITS A. Galvanized Rigid Steel, thick wall (GRS) B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) D. Flexible Metal Conduit with and without polyvinyl chloride jacket E. Non-metallic, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), schedule 40 2.3 FITTINGS A. GRS and IMC couplings and connectors shall have threaded connections. Galvanized HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 9 26 05 33 malleable iron or non-corrosive alloy compatible with galvanized conduit. Running thread or set screw type fittings are not permitted. B. EMT - Couplings and connectors shall be rain tight, steel or malleable iron, utilizing a split corrugated compression ring and tightening nut or stainless steel locking disk. Set screw fittings are permitted in dry locations. Set screw fittings are not permitted in wet locations or in concrete. Zinc, pot metal, die cast fittings and indenter fittings are not acceptable. C. Flexible Metal Conduit 1. Dry Locations: malleable iron or steel, Thomas & Betts "Squeeze" type or equal. 2. Damp or Wet Locations: Thomas & Betts "Super Liquid-Tight" with external ground lug. D. PVC Fittings shall be solvent welded types. E. Sealoff fittings shall be with filler fiber, poured compound and removable cover. F. Expansion Couplings shall be O.Z. type EX with ground jumper. 2.4 INTERIOR WIRING, NEMA 1 A. Flush and concealed outlet boxes shall be galvanized stamped steel with screw ears, knock- out plugs, mounting holes, and fixture stud. B. Surface outlet boxes shall be galvanized stamped steel same as above for use on ceilings and in accessible locations. Contractor shall provide cast iron galvanized for use on walls below 8 feet. C. Boxes exceeding 4-11/16 inches square shall be welded steel construction with screw cover and factory painted. D. Surface Metal Raceway boxes shall be of same manufacture to match raceway. Boxes shall accommodate standard devices and device plates. E. Boxes for casting in concrete or mounting in masonry walls shall be galvanized steel (not aluminum or zinc die castings), specifically designed and listed for that purpose. 2.5 SPECIAL LOCATIONS A. For indoor damp or dusty locations provide NEMA 4 boxes B. For corrosive locations provide NEMA 4X boxes C. For outdoor equipment where a drain is appropriate provide NEMA 3R boxes. D. For outdoor locations requiring dust and water protection provide NEMA 4 or 4X boxes. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 9 26 05 33 2.6 BELOW GRADE A. Where exposed to earth, boxes (handholes or vaults) shall be constructed of precast concrete with size, configuration, hinged and locking cover. Structural loading shall be minimum H25 traffic rating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install raceways concealed in construction of finished spaces. B. Cut conduit ends square, ream smooth and extend maximum distance into all couplings and connectors. C. Provide and install manufactured end caps on all conduit ends during construction to prevent the entrance of water or dirt. Tape, as a cover, is not acceptable. D. Pull a properly sized mandrel through each conduit prior to installation of conductors or pull- lines to remove any materials trapped within the conduit run. E. All PVC elbows shall be factory made. F. Field made elbows are acceptable for steel conduits when made with approved bending tools. Bends that show conduit flattened or deformation are unacceptable and shall be replaced. G. Conduits shall maintain a minimum 12" clearance from any high temperature surface. H. The conduit layout shall be carefully planned by the contractor to ensure neat and workmanlike installation. I. Any work showing inadequate planning may be ordered removed by the Architect/Engineer and shall be replaced in a neat and proper manner at no additional cost to the owner. 3.2 CONDUIT SIZING A. Conduits shall be sized per code for conductors with type THW insulation, although thinner insulation types are permitted in some cases. Conduit size shall not be reduced if large size is specified on the drawing. Minimum conduit size shall be ¾” trade diameter. Conduit ½” trade diameter may be used for dead end receptacles and switch runs. 3.3 GRS AND IMC A. Install GRS or IMC for all conduits in wet locations, concrete, underground, exposed to weather, where subject to physical damage and as noted on drawings. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 9 26 05 33 B. Connections shall be watertight in damp locations. 3.4 EMT A. EMT may be installed for wiring in masonry block, frame construction, furred ceilings, above suspended ceilings and in dry location concrete, exposed dry location unfinished spaces not subject to physical damage. EMT shall not be installed underground, under concrete slabs-on- grade, in concrete slabs-on-grade, exposed to weather, on exterior of buildings or on roofs. B. Contractor shall coordinate assembly and installation of EMT in masonry block construction to avoid construction delays. Avoid surface cut masonry units wherever such masonry units are to remain unplastered or exposed. 3.5 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT A. Provide flexible conduit connection to motors and equipment subject to vibration with at least a 60 degree loop to allow for isolation and flexibility. Use liquid-tight for pumps, equipment which is regularly washed down, and for equipment in damp locations. Provide bonding jumper as required by N.E.C. 3.6 PVC CONDUIT A. PVC conduit may be used underground when permitted by code and where designated as an acceptable substitute for GRS or IMC on the drawings. Field bends, less than 45 degrees, when necessary, shall be formed with factory recommended heater. PVC bends 45 degrees or greater shall be factory made. 3.7 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS A. Burial depth of underground raceways shall be not less than NEC minimums and shall be deeper where so noted herein or required to avoid conflicts. B. Arrange and slope conduits entering buildings to drain away from the point of entry. C. Conduits passing through the exterior walls below grade and/or bridging areas of naturally unstable soil conditions or previously filled areas shall be placed in a manner to avoid crushing from ground settlement. Backfill under conduit shall be thoroughly compacted. Provide approved deflection fittings on conduits. 3.8 CONDUITS IN FOUNDATION AREA A. Conduits in foundation areas shall be installed so as not to undermine the footings. Check structural drawings for any specific instructions. Backfill over conduits under footings and HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 9 26 05 33 concrete slabs shall conform to the requirements of the Architect/Structural Engineer. 3.9 STUBUPS THROUGH CONCRETE SLABS OR FINISH GRADE A. Conduits through concrete slabs shall be steel. Install at such depth that the exposed conduit is vertical and curved section of the elbow is not visible. B. All steel conduit below grade to 6” above grade shall be wrapped with Scotch 50 Anti Corrosion Protective tape or equal. 3.10 INSERTS AND SLEEVES A. Furnish and install all inserts and sleeves necessary for Division 26 installation prior to pouring of concrete slabs and walls. B. In existing concrete slabs and walls utilize drilled-in threaded inserts, installed as recommended by the manufacturer, where additional supports are required. Neatly core drill openings where additional sleeves are required. 3.11 SEALING RACEWAY PENETRATIONS A. Exterior Wall Surface Above Grade For concrete construction above grade, cast raceway or sleeve in wall or core drill wall and hard pack with a mixture of equal parts of sand and cement. Seal around all penetrations, with caulking approved by Architect/Engineer. B. Exterior Surface Below Grade Cast raceway into wall/floor or use manufactured seal assembly cast in place. OZ type "FSK" or equal. Change from PVC to steel conduit (couplings or bushings) where necessary to obtain a watertight seal in poured concrete wall or floors. C. Roof Conduits passing through building roof shall be flashed using a 4 lb. per square foot lead plumbing vent flashing extending not less than 10" from the conduit under the roofing, and not less than 10" above the roof around the conduit. Flashing shall be attached by an approved galvanized or stainless steel clamping band. D. Fire Rated Construction 1. All seals must meet with the approval of the local Fire Marshal. 2. Concrete or Masonry a. Seal around raceway with an approved firestop compound that passes UL test 1479 (ASTM E814) DOW CORNING 3-6548, T & B FLAME SAFE, 3M Fire Barrier HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 9 26 05 33 Caulk, 3M #Fire Barrier Putty, or equal. 3. Plaster or Gypsum Wallboard a. Seal around raceway penetration with plaster and approved fire tape. E. Acoustical Sealing 1. Provide Acoustical Sealing of all wiring and raceway openings in ceilings, walls and floors which are critical barriers for noise transfer. Acoustical sealing shall consist of resilient caulking to seal all openings around wiring and electrical raceways. 3.12 SEALING CONDUITS A. Seal interior of all conduits which enter the building through floor, roof or outside walls and may carry water into the building. Seal on the end inside the building, using duct sealing mastic, non-hardening compound type, specifically designed for such service. Pack around wires in the conduit. B. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, install OZ type "CSB" sealing bushing at interior end of penetrating conduit. Threaded fittings-only are permitted in entering conduits ahead of the sealing bushing. C. Provide for water drainage so no electrical problems will result if seals leak. 3.13 CONDUIT HANGERS A. General 1. Provide for supporting all conduits from the building structure. Space supports per NEC. Contractor shall provide supports adequate for the loads and resistant to earthquake forces. 2. Contractor is responsible to calculate lbs/sq ft of proposed main conduit runs and verify with project structural engineer if acceptable or additional structural bracing is required. Contractor shall alter conduit route or provide additional bracing acceptable to the structural engineer. B. With Suspended Ceiling Areas 1. Contractor may attach 1/2" and 3/4" EMT conduits to ceiling suspension systems provided such systems are structurally suitable. Attachment to suspension systems shall be made with clips specifically manufactured for this purpose. (CADDY or equal) C. Conduits not attached to the ceiling suspension system shall be fastened with approved pipe straps or separate suspension hangers to ceiling metal inserts and/or structural members. D. Hangers for Direct Mounted Conduits 1. Hangers attached directly to building surface shall be two hole sheet steel or one hole HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 7 of 9 26 05 33 malleable iron, all galvanized, pipe clamps. (Thomas & Betts or approved equal). 2. Hangers for ground cable and PVC conduit supporting ground cable shall not encircle the cable or conduit in metal but shall be 2-hole plastic or 1-hole metal clamps. E. Hangers for Single Suspended Conduit 1. Hangers suspended below ceilings shall utilize steel rods and malleable iron pipe rings sized for the application (Grinnell No. 97 or approved equal). Provide concrete hanger inserts as required. F. Trapeze Type Suspended Supports 1. Trapeze type supports shall be used where two or more conduits use the same routing. Such hangers shall utilize steel rods, structural steel channels, and clamps of Kindorf, Unistrut or approved equal, sized for the application. G. Support of Conduit in Steel Stud Walls 1. Attach conduits to studs with approved straps or 18 gauge steel wire secured to steel bars. 3.14 CONTINUITY OF CONDUIT SYSTEM A. Conduits shall be assembled continuous and secured to boxes, panels, etc., with appropriate fittings to maintain electric continuity. 3.15 PULL-LINES A. Provide 150 pound plastic pull-lines in conduit-only systems and spare conduits to facilitate future conductor installation. 3.16 ANCHORING A. All interior boxes shall be firmly anchored directly or with concealed bracing to building studs or joints. Boxes must be so attached that they will not "rock" or "shift" when devices are operated. B. Exterior boxes shall be fastened to approved hot dipped galvanized mounting supports and racking appropriate for size of enclosure. 3.17 FLUSH MOUNTING A. All boxes shall have front edge (box or plaster ring) even with the finished surface of the wall or ceiling. Use of long screws with spacers or shims will not be acceptable. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 8 of 9 26 05 33 3.18 RECEPTACLES AND SWITCHES A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other Sections and trades. Study all drawings that form a part of this contract and confer with the various trades involved to eliminate conflicts between the work of this Section and the work of other trades. Check and verify locations with respect to door swings, installation details, cabinet work, and suspended ceilings indicated on contract drawings. Review and coordinate locations of all plumbing, heating, and ventilating equipment and other equipment indicated on the contract drawings of all trades. B. Centered on Built-In Work: In the case of doors and cabinets, where devices are centered between two such features, rough-in these device locations exact. Relocate any devices which are located off center at no additional cost to the owner. C. Where more than one device is shown or specified to be at the same elevation or one above the other, align them exactly on centerlines horizontally or vertically. Relocate as directed all such devices including light switches, receptacles, voice/data, signal and thermostat devices which are not so installed, at no additional cost to Owner. D. Device Outlet Height: Measure from the finished floor to the centerline, unless otherwise noted on electrical or architectural drawings, or required to serve specific equipment. Switches 42 inches, set vertically Receptacles 18 inches set vertically Other As shown on the plans or as directed by the Architect/Engineer 3.19 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Locate in accordance with approved architectural ceiling layout plans so light fixtures replace full size lay-in ceiling tiles wherever possible. Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts between plans prior to rough-in. Contractor shall relocate light fixtures at no additional charge if field coordination is not done prior to installation. 3.20 ELECTRICAL WORK IN COUNTERBACKS, MILLWORK AND CASEWORK A. Provide templates, where required, to other trades for drilling and cutting to insure accurate location of electrical devices as field verified prior to rough-in with the Architect. 3.21 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT A. Provide device back boxes of size and at locations necessary to serve equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the specifications or by others. A device box is required if equipment has pigtail wires for external connection, does not have space to accommodate circuit wiring or requires wire different from circuit wiring used. Study equipment details to assure proper coordination. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OCTOBER 2024 Page 9 of 9 26 05 33 3.22 BLANK COVERS A. Provide blank cover or plate over all boxes. 3.23 JUNCTION BOXES OR PULL BOXES IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS A. Shall be supported from structure independently from ceiling suspension system. 3.24 DEVICES BOXES CONTAINING EMERGENCY AND NORMAL DEVICES A. Permitted only with steel barrier manufactured especially for that purpose of dividing the box into two completely separate compartments. 3.25 DEVICE BOXES CONTAINING MULTIPLE DEVICES FOR SYSTEMS RATED OVER 150 VOLTS TO GROUND A. Permitted only with steel barrier manufactured specifically for the purpose of dividing the box into separate compartments for each device having exposed live parts. END OF SECTION 26 05 33 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 3 26 27 26 SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 0 and 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all wiring devices and plates for a complete installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell B. Arrow Hart C. Leviton D. Pass & Seymour 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wiring devices shall be specification grade, and the product of a nationally recognized manufacturer regularly engaged in their production. B. All wiring devices specified in this section shall be the product of one manufacturer. Each type shall have identical appearance and characteristics. 2.3 DEVICE COLOR A. Switch handles and receptacles: White B. Red for Emergency Systems. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 3 26 27 26 C. Paint or other surface finish treatments are not acceptable. Verify actual colors with project Architect for special installation conditions. 2.4 SWITCHES A. Switches shall be 20 ampere, 277 volt, quiet type with plastic handle. Single pole, double pole, 3-way, 4-way or locking type as required. Provide matching styles and color in other devices as required for the conditions of installation. B. Momentary Contact line voltage switch: Single pole, double throw, 3 wire, normally open. Rating same as above. 2.5 RECEPTACLES A. Duplex NEMA 5-20R configuration (20 amp, 125V) B. GFCI Receptacles 1. Interior: 20A-125V duplex receptacle with trip indicator light. 2. Exterior: 20A-125V duplex, weather resistant, GFCI receptacle with trip indicator light and single NEMA 3R “In Use” metal cover, mounted horizontally. 2.6 DEVICE PLATES A. Non-metallic with color to match device. Provide pressed steel plates for surface devices in equipment and storage areas. B. Identification Provide engraved device plates with amperage and voltage for all receptacles above 125V, 20 ampere rating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING A. Rigidly fasten each device to the box at proper position with the wall to bring device flush with plate or switch handle the proper distance through the plate. 3.2 ORIENTATION A. Set switches vertical with handle operating vertically, up position "ON" and +42" above finished floor. B. Set interior receptacles vertical with ground slot up; +18" above finished floor. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS WIRING DEVICES OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 3 26 27 26 C. Set interior receptacles above counters, horizontal, centered in backsplash or as directed by Architect. Verify prior to rough-in. D. Set exterior receptacles horizontal at +18" above finished grade. E. Devices and finish plates shall be installed plumb with building lines. 3.3 RECEPTACLE GROUNDING A. Provide bare bonding wire between receptacle grounding terminal and box. Plaster ear screws connecting the receptacle frame to the box will not be acceptable for grounding. 3.4 HANDICAPPED ACCESS A. Comply with requirements of Washington State handicapped access code. 3.5 TRIM OUT A. Provide device plate for each wiring device. Trim plates and devices shall not be installed until final painting is completed. Scratched or splattered plates and devices will not be acceptable. 3.6 RECEPTACLE TESTS A. Receptacles shall be checked to ensure proper line to neutral, line to ground and neutral to ground voltages. END OF SECTION 26 27 26 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS FUSES OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 2 26 28 13 SECTION 26 28 13 - FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary 1.02 Conditions and Divisions 0 and 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. WORK INCLUDED A. Provide fusing and appurtenances for all fusible equipment provided under this contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES A. The low voltage fuse range is considered to extend over the range 600 volts or less. Fuses in this category shall be current limiting types, UL Class R, unless specified otherwise. Provide rejection style fuse clips for all current limiting applications. B. Fuses shall be as follows or equal: APPLICATION AMPERE RANGE UL CLASS GOULD - SHAWMUT BUSS Motor & Branch Circuit 1-100 RK 5 Tri-onic Fusetron Time Delay Feeder 60-100 RK 5 Fast Falt-Trap Fusetron All 125-200 RK 1 Time Delay Amp-Trap 2 Low Peak Motor Circuit 225-600 RK 1 Time Delay Amp-Trap 2 Low Peak 2.02 SPARE FUSES HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS FUSES OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 2 26 28 13 A. Provide 10 % of each rating with a minimum of 3 per rating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in all fusible devices provided under this contract. END OF SECTION 26 28 13 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 3 26 28 16 SECTION 26 28 16- ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 0 and 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all disconnect switches and enclosed circuit breakers required by NEC for equipment furnished under this and other divisions of these specifications and by the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Siemens B. General Electric C. Square D D. Cutler Hammer 2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Switches shall be NEMA type HD (heavy duty), quick make, quick break, dual rated with electrical characteristics as required by the system voltage and the load served. Switches shall be single throw and have blades to open all ungrounded conductors. B. Enclosure shall have interlocking cover to prevent opening door when switch is closed. Interlock shall include a defeating scheme for authorized service work. C. Operator handle shall be lockable in the "off" position. D. Disconnect enclosures shall be suitable for mounting locations. Provide NEMA 1 for dry HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 3 26 28 16 locations, NEMA 3R for damp or exterior locations. Provide other NEMA ratings to suit area requirements. E. All disconnect switches shall be the product of one manufacturer to facilitate future maintenance. 2.3 FUSIBLE DISCONNECTS A. Fusible disconnect switches provided shall be per 2.2 above with the addition of fuse space and clips to accept only Class R fuses. 2.4 TOGGLE SWITCHES A. Motor rated toggle type disconnect switches are acceptable for fractional horsepower equipment. Switches shall be suitable for the intended load and provided with handle guard/lock-off feature (similar to Square D Class 2510). 2.5 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Circuit breaker operator handle shall be lockable in the "off" position. B. Circuit breaker enclosures shall be suitable for mounting locations. Provide NEMA 1 for dry locations, NEMA 3R for damp or exterior locations. Provide other NEMA ratings to suit area requirements. C. All circuit breakers shall be the product of one manufacturer to facilitate future maintenance. 2.6 NAMEPLATES A. Provide nameplates on all disconnects and fused switches. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated phenolic mounted with screws. Adhesive only will not be acceptable. Each nameplate shall include this information: Load served, voltage, phase, panel, circuit number, fuse size and type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DISCONNECT LOCATIONS A. Install disconnects and enclosed circuit breakers in the same relative location as the equipment being served unless that location is difficult to access or is in an unsuitable environment. Discrete disconnect switches of similar size may be grouped in a central HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 3 26 28 16 location. 3.2 SUPPORT A. Secure disconnect switches and enclosed circuit breakers to building structure, equipment unit or approved mounting frame. Support by conduit system only is not acceptable. 3.3 SPLICES A. Wiring space within disconnect switches and enclosed circuit breakers shall not be used for splicing; provide suitable wire gutters or junction boxes for this purpose. END OF SECTION 26 28 16 HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS EARTHWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 9 31 00 00 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes, but is not limited to: Site grading, excavation, trenching, fill and backfill material and placement, and stabilization of areas. Importing required materials. Removing and disposing materials from the site that are either: a. Not approved for use, or; b. Are in excess of that required. Moisture conditioning Stockpiling and protection of materials. Geotechnical information for the project site. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference the following standards: AHJ Public Authority Having Jurisdiction AHJ is an abbreviation for public Authorities Having Jurisdiction. For this project the AHJ includes permitting agencies including but not limited to City of Renton, King County,and Ecology. WSDOT Washington Department of Transportation 2023 Standard Specifications and Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction WISHA Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act. Revised Code of Washington (RCW) Chapter 49.17 WAC 296-155 Washington Administrative Code (WAC) 296-155 Standards for Construction Work RCW 39.04.180 Public Works/Trench Excavations – Safety Systems Required 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following documents in accordance with submittal procedures noted in Division 01: Gradation and moisture-density relation test results for each type of fill and backfill material at least 10 working days prior to their delivery at the site. Test results shall demonstrate that materials meet the criteria defined in Part 2 of this Section. Samples of materials proposed for use as fill or backfill and the source location of each material. Field compaction test results to the Owner’s Representative at the end of each day. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS EARTHWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 9 31 00 00 1.4 NOTIFICATIONS A. Notify the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer Representative five working days in advance of delivering fill and/or backfill materials to the site. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing: Contractor shall provide their own testing service to confirm compliance with Specifications and provide measures for confirming Quality Control at Contractor’s expense. The Contractor is responsible for verifying the quality of the work to check compliance with these specifications. Contractor shall submit reports conducted by their own independent testing service to the Owner’s Representative indicating observations and results of the tests, and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. A copy of Contractor’s tests shall be furnished to the Owner within 1 calendar week of testing. Testing by the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer Representative does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to determine, to Contractor's own satisfaction, when and if Contractor's Work meets the Specification. Test will be made by the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer Representative for the following items: a. Moisture content: ASTM D 2216 b. Gradation: ASTM D422 and ASTM C136 c. Density in-place and moisture content: ASTM 6938 d. Moisture-density relationships: ASTM D1557, every 2,000 cy, or when material changes, whichever occurs first. The minimum amount of testing to be performed and submitted by the Contractor, unless determined otherwise by Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer, shall be as follows: a. Backfilling and Paved Areas: Frequency of Tests shall be one density test in every three hundred cubic yards of fill or backfill, OR One test for each lift of compacted fill over 1,000 square feet of compacted fill or backfill surface, whichever results in the greater number of tests. b. Compaction tests are required to be performed the same day that the compaction effort is performed regardless of the volume or area of material. c. This minimum amount of testing does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to determine, to Contractor’s own satisfaction, when and if Contractor’s Work meets the Specifications. The frequency of tests shown above shall govern the actual quantity of tests. Any re-testing that is required due to failure of initial test to show compliance with these Contract Documents shall be provided and paid for at the Contractor's sole expense. Contractor shall submit reports (three copies) conducted by an independent firm to the Owner’s Representative indicating observations and results of the tests, and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS EARTHWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 9 31 00 00 Coordinate testing requirements and scheduling with the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer Representative, and assist independent testing firm during field testing and sampling at no additional cost to Owner. 1.6 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS A. Contractor shall provide all dimensioning and layout required for construction. B. Furnish, set and mark line and location stakes, including offsets and general construction staking. There shall be onsite at all times when Work requiring control is being performed, necessary equipment, supplies and instruments related thereto. A qualified layout engineer, professional Washington State Licensed Land Surveyor, or technical specialist must be assigned to the Contractor’s crew for this Work. This equipment and personnel must be available, at no additional cost to the Owner, for the purpose of verifying layout and certifying the accuracy of Work on the site. C. Preserve benchmarks and stakes, and replace any that are displaced or missing. D. Review all utility purveyor, Owner and State records relative to the existing underground utilities. Avoid damage to these facilities and restore utilities at no cost to Owner. E. Notify Owner’s Representative immediately if underground utilities not shown on Plans or Record Documents are encountered. F. Verify existing location and elevation at connection points of existing utility structures (including pipes) prior to construction of new system. If discrepancies are found, notify Owner’s Representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Fill: Common Fill used as Structural Fill shall be native on-site material conform to Common Fill designated in this Section, meet the grading requirements in WSDOT Section 9.03.14(1) for Gravel Borrow and shall be approved for use by the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer Representative. B. Drain Rock: Conform to 9-03.0; or ¾-inch to ½-inch washed gravel with less than three- percent passing the U.S. No. 200 sieve; AASHTO 57; or Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer’s approved equivalent product. C. Washed Gravel: Conform to WSDOT Section 9-03.12(4) Gravel Backfill for Drains with AASHTO grading No. 57. D. Crushed Surfacing: Crushed Surfacing Base Course shall conform to WSDOT Section 9-03.9(3). Crushed Surfacing Top Course shall conform to WSDOT Section 9-03.9(3). E. Common Fill shall consist of granular and nongranular soil and/or aggregate that is free of deleterious material and does not contain wood, plastic, organic waste, clay, frozen lumps concrete, asphalt or any other deleterious, extraneous or objectionable material. Material shall have a maximum particle size of two inches. Material shall not contain HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS EARTHWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 9 31 00 00 more than 3 percent organic material by weight. On site soils may be suitable for use as Common Fill depending upon weather conditions and moisture conditioning (either drying or wetting) may be required to achieve proper moisture content of compaction. The Owner does not warrant that any of the on-site material can be used as Common Fill. The material shall be capable of being compacted as specified under the weather conditions prevailing at the time of construction. The material shall be within +/- two percent of the optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D1557 test method (modified proctor) prior to compaction. If common fill material is imported then it shall be meet the requirements for borrow in accordance with WSDOT Section 9-03.14(3) for Common Borrow. F. Pipe Bedding shall conform to: WSDOT Section 9-03.12(3)] for storm drain pipe. G. Pipe Backfill shall conform to: Trench Backfill outside the public right-of-way shall conform to WSDOT Section 9- 03.19. Trench Backfill outside public right-of-way shall conform to WSDOT 9-03.19, Common Fill as approved by the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer representative or Structural Fill. Initial backfill for overexcavated trenches in wet conditions shall conform to Roadway Ballast in accordance with WSDOT Section 9-03.9(1) or Permeable Ballast in accordance with WSDOT Section 9-03.9(2). H. Conductive Warning Tape: Shall be manufacturer’s standard, permanent, brightly colored, continuous printed plastic tape with aluminum backing; intended for burial in pipe backfill; and not less than six inches wide and four mils thick. Tape schedule shall be: Pipe Type Color Wording Domestic Water Blue Caution Domestic Water Irrigation Water Blue Caution Irrigation Water Storm Drain Green Caution Storm Drain Sanitary Sewer Green Caution Sanitary Sewer I. Filter Fabric or Geotextile fabric shall conform to Mirafi 140N or an approved equivalent product. J. Clean Sand: For filler use natural deposit angular grain WSDOT Section 9-03.13. K. Backfill for demolished utilities excavation and demolished structures and buildings shall be Structural Fill. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Protect existing structures, areas, utilities and other facilities from damage during construction in accordance with Section 31 10 00 - Site Preparation, including, but not limited to: Verify the presence and locations of existing underground utilities. Notify the Owner’s Representative immediately if underground utilities not shown on the Contract Documents are encountered. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS EARTHWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 9 31 00 00 Repair structures, areas, utilities and other facilities damaged by construction activities to restore them to the condition existing prior to construction as directed by the Owner’s Representative and at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide (including AHJ permitting, if required, and design) interior and exterior shoring, bracing or support to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of adjacent facilities to remain including but not limited to utility poles, pavement, trees, retaining walls, utility structures, building foundations, etc. Contact facility owner to determine existing loads on the facility and any additional constraints the shoring, bracing or support design must incorporate. Comply with WISHA, WAC 296-155, and local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. B. Furnish, set and mark all alignments, line and location stakes, including offsets and other construction staking. Assign a licensed surveyor to complete this work and certify the accuracy of work. Have necessary equipment, supplies and instruments onsite at all times when work requiring control is being performed. C. Sprinkle water as necessary to control dust during dry weather conditions. Do not use water to extent that could cause flooding, contaminated runoff, excessive moisture content of soil to be reused, or have other adverse effects. D. During the performance of earthwork the Contractor may encounter unanticipated obstructions including but not limited to boulders, glacial erratics, concrete, masonry or other subsurface obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time are authorized for mitigating procedures performed by the Contractor to address unanticipated obstructions in performance of the Work if mitigation can be accomplished with the use of mechanical equipment, such as shovels, loaders, bulldozers, graders, rippers, excavators, etc. Should mitigation require drilling and blasting or drilling and line breaking changes to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be considered by the Owner. 3.2 EXCAVATION A. Excavate to the lines and grades and at the locations shown on the drawings, including trenches for piping. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of 0.10-foot. Properly prepare subgrade by removing unstable, soft, weak, or loose debris, clods, and other deleterious materials from excavations to expose firm soil. Replace with compacted Structural Fill unless otherwise specified by the Owner’s Representative. Slope and/or shore the sides of excavations and trenches to comply with WISHA, WAC 296-155 and local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe manner until backfilling is complete. B. Trench Subgrade Preparation: Grade and smooth bottoms of trenches to provide uniform bearing and support of pipe. Remove rocks and other materials that could cause point loads on the pipes. Form bell holes and depressions sized only as needed to fit the particular type of pipe joint. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS EARTHWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 9 31 00 00 C. Catch basins, area drains, and similar embedded structures: Excavate a minimum 12 inches between excavation walls and sides of structures and, if prefabricated, four inches below the base of structures to allow for leveling. Remove unsuitable material as described in this Section. Backfill overexcavations in the subgrade with compacted Structural Fill. D. Dewater as necessary to keep excavations and construction areas in a dry condition. Promptly remove water to prevent softening or disturbance of subgrade surfaces. E. Where final excavation grades are disturbed by construction activities, overexcavate disturbed material and backfill to grade using compacted Structural Fill at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Remove and properly dispose of excess excavated material and debris offsite at no additional cost to Owner. G. Backfill excavations as promptly as construction work allows and after the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer Representative has viewed the prepared subgrade surfaces. 3.3 FILL AND BACKFILL PLACEMENT A. General: Lightly scarify properly prepared subgrade surfaces that will receive backfill or fill, except for trenches. Moisture-condition the scarified soil to obtain soil moisture near optimum moisture content. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are soft, muddy, frozen, or containing frost, ice or loose debris or soil. Place backfill and fill in controlled layers of the thickness that is compatible with the type of compaction equipment used. The loose thickness of each fill or backfill layer shall not exceed 12 inches. Compact each layer to the minimum relative compaction as listed in this Section. When placing fill on sloped surfaces, notch fill lifts into subgrade and work thoroughly to destroy interfaces that may otherwise develop. B. Pipe Bedding: Place and compact pipe bedding to provide uniform support along the entire pipe barrel, without load concentrations at joint collars or bells. Do not use blocking to adjust the pipe to grade except when the pipe is embedded in concrete. Form bell holes and depressions in the bedding only as needed to provide uniform support along the pipe barrel. Take special care to provide uniform and adequate bedding support at pipe connections and adjacent to manholes or other structures to avoid inducing stresses that could damage the pipe or adjacent manhole or other structure. Recompact, or replace and recompact if necessary, bedding that is disturbed or contaminated by removal of temporary shoring, trench boxes or other construction activity at no additional cost to the Owner. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS EARTHWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 7 of 9 31 00 00 C. Pipe Backfill: Backfill utility pipe trenches as soon as possible after pipe installation. Place and compact pipe backfill in accordance with WSDOT Section 7 for the specific type of pipe and conditions. Protect the pipe from damage or shifting alignment during backfill placement. Do not backfill near catch basins, manholes or similar structures until mortar has thoroughly hardened. Carefully place backfill over the pipe to a depth of two feet above the pipe crown before beginning compaction. Subsequent lifts shall not exceed 12 inches loose thickness. Each lift shall be compacted with mechanical equipment. Do not walk on the pipe until the backfill has reached a uniform depth of one-foot above the crown of the pipe. Pipe damaged during backfill placement shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Place backfill to achieve the minimum cover thicknesses specified for the type of pipe and conditions in accordance with AHJ. Place conductive warning tape continuously along the alignment of the pipe crown at a depth no less than two feet above the pipe and embedded in backfill at least one-foot below finished grade. D. Moisture Conditioning Shall be performed for fill and backfill materials as needed to meet the compaction requirements specified in this Section. Moisture conditioning includes drying and wetting of fill and backfill materials as needed, and it shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. Chemical soil amending such as soil cements, fly ash, lime, etc. shall not be used to moisture condition. Apply water uniformly to soil where subgrade or fill material is moisture conditioned before compaction. Prevent free water from appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. Remove, replace, scarify or air dry soil material too wet to permit compaction to specified density. Removed soil material that is too wet for compaction may be temporarily stockpiled until removed from site, or spread to allow for drying. However, if material cannot be adequately moisture conditioned, the Contractor shall be responsible for removing material from site at no additional cost to Owner. E. Compaction: Compact fill and backfill using compaction equipment that can achieve the specified compaction criteria and that is appropriate to the soil type being compacted. Water settling or jetting is not permitted as a means of compaction. Around foundation and subgrade drains, compact backfill to a non-yielding condition without damaging the filter fabric or pipe. Repair damaged filter fabric or pipe at no additional cost to the Owner. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS EARTHWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 8 of 9 31 00 00 Within five feet of retaining walls or foundations, use hand-operated equipment to avoid overstressing the walls. Repair or replace walls damaged by improper compaction or other construction activities at no cost to the Owner and as directed by the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer Representative. Compact fill and backfill to a dense and unyielding condition and to the following minimum relative compaction based on the percentage of maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557, unless otherwise specified. Locations Relative Compaction Pipe bedding 95% Pipe backfill (non-vehicle areas) 90% Under walks 92% Other non-structural-bearing areas 90% Other structural-bearing areas 95% 3.4 SOIL STOCKPILES A. Maintain separate stockpiles for various soil materials. Label each stockpile with weatherproof sign as to material type. B. Shape and arrange soil stockpiles to promote drainage. C. Use TESC measures to filter sediment from stormwater runoff from stockpiles and implement flow diversion and energy dissipation measures to safely direct water downstream to TESC treatment system. Runoff from stockpiles shall under no circumstances sheet-flow or direct-flow to existing trees to remain, to adjacent offsite properties, and to new and existing facilities to remain. D. Cover temporary stockpiles in accordance with Section 01 57 13 – Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. Material that becomes unsuitable due to lack of protection measures being installed by Contractor shall be hauled and legally disposed of offsite and replaced with suitable material at no additional expense to the Owner. E. Unsuitable material stockpiles shall be removed, hauled and properly disposed of offsite. 3.5 GRADING A. Shape surface of site to match contours, grades, spot elevations, profiles and slopes shown on the Contract Documents to a tolerance of 0.05-foot plus or minus over a 10- foot horizontal distance and to maintain positive drainage. Should indicated figures conflict with actual conditions, notify Owner’s Representative and obtain direction before proceeding with grading of affected area. Remove all concrete, rocks, rubble and debris larger than four inches from finished surfaces. Finish grades flush with adjacent surfaces unless otherwise specified. Adjust finished grades as necessary to provide depth for soil amendments and other components of landscaping. Do not allow grades to exceed maximum slopes in ADA accessible routes and areas. B. Protect finished surfaces. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS EARTHWORK OCTOBER 2024 Page 9 of 9 31 00 00 Where finished surfaces are disturbed (e.g. loosened soil, ruts, holes, etc.) by construction activities, over-excavate disturbed material and backfill to final grade at no additional cost to the Owner. Overexcavate to the depth and extent as directed by the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer’s Representative. Backfill with Structural Fill or other material as directed by the Owner’s Representative, and in lift thickness and to the compaction criteria established by the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer’s Representative. Repair areas showing settlement at no cost to Owner. Repair areas with any obstructions to positive drainage. 3.6 WET WEATHER PROVISIONS A. Schedule earthwork operations to minimize the potential for erosion, siltation, and disturbance of site soils. B. Perform earthwork operations in discrete areas to minimize the exposure of disturbed soils to wet weather. C. Protect exposed subgrade for utility trenches, structures and paving. Compact exposed soil to reduce the infiltration of rainwater. Implement measures to protect suitable exposed road, paving and structure subgrade from wet and/or rainy weather. If exposed subgrade is left unprotected to wet and/or rainy weather and becomes unsuitable as determined by Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer’s Representative, unsuitable material shall be over- excavated and properly hauled and disposed of offsite and replaced with Structural Fill at no additional expense to the Owner. D. Direct surface water away from fill areas, protected trees, structure, trench excavations, buildings, excavations, adjacent properties and public right-of-way. E. Protect and cover soil stockpiles with plastic or other measures to prevent infiltration and erosion. F. Dewater as needed to keep excavations and construction areas free of water. G. Replace or rework soil that has not been protected in accordance with the requirements of these Contract Documents; and remove and replace, as specified in this Section, soil that becomes too wet for compaction, as directed by the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer’s Representative and at no additional cost to the Owner 3.7 DISPOSAL OF EARTH MATERIALS A. Remove all excavated material not acceptable for use as fill onsite. Legally dispose of excess material offsite at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SITE PREPARATION OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 4 31 10 00 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work includes, but is not limited to: Verification of project limits. Location of utilities. Clearing, grubbing, stripping, and removing and disposing of debris. Protection of existing features and structures, related activities, and other preparatory work. Remove and dispose of materials from site. Identify, disconnect, cap and remove utilities as required. Remove vegetation, trees and other unwanted materials. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference the following standards: AHJ Public Authority Having Jurisdiction AHJ is an abbreviation for public Authorities Having Jurisdiction. For this project the AHJ includes permitting agencies including but not limited to City of Renton, King County, Ecology. WAC Washington Administrative Code (WAC) 296-155 Standards for Construction Work. WSDOT Washington Department of Transportation 2021 Standard Specifications and Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following documents in accordance with submittal procedures noted in Division 01: Copies of permits for transport and disposal of debris as required. Copies of Building, demolition, and other permits associated with earthwork and construction. Copies of a recycling program for land clearing debris that identifies types of materials to be recycled, and handling, storage, and shipping procedures. Dated checklist showing utility service stubs and points of connections have been located and elevations verified. In accordance with Division 01, submit Record Drawings indicating locations of demolished utilities, and remaining active utility lines and related appurtenances. Dated photographs or video files, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing, demolition and construction. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SITE PREPARATION OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 4 31 10 00 1.4 ACCESS A. Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes. Minimize interference with public use of roads, streets, alleys, sidewalks, and adjacent facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, fire lanes, sidewalks, alleys or passageways without permission from Owner, City and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Protection of existing conditions: Provide, erect, and maintain barricades, coverings and other types of protection measures necessary to prevent damage to existing trees, structures, utilities, landscaping, and other features to remain in place. Restore any improvements damaged by this Work to their original condition or better, as acceptable to the Owner. B. Verify existing utility locations and elevations at least 10 working days in advance of construction and demolition. Contact the underground location center to locate and mark utilities not less than four business days, and not more than ten business days before beginning demolition or Earthwork. Compare existing utility locations and elevations with drawings and new utilities. Immediately notify Owner’s Representative of potential conflicts to allow for mitigation without down time. C. Public and private utilities shall remain in service unless otherwise noted on the Contract Documents. Notify underground utility owners at least three working days in advance of excavation and in accordance with RCW Chapter 19.122 and WSDOT Section 1-07.17. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off or cap services that are to be disconnected. Provide schedule of excavation to underground utility owners in accordance with RCW 19.122. Do not shut off or cap utilities without prior notice to Owner’s Representative. Verify that temporarily shut off utilities are restored. Provide written notification five days in advance of utility service interruptions. D. Construct temporary erosion and sediment control (TESC) plan in accordance with Section 01 57 13 – Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control. Maintain street drains and sewers clear and free of debris to allow stormwater to be collected and conveyed. E. Preserve and maintain benchmarks, control points and stakes, and other reference points, unless otherwise approved by the Owner’s Representative. F. Repair and/or restore utilities, benchmarks, stakes and control points and other site structures and features designated as protected or outside construction limits, if damaged by construction activities, at no cost to the Owner and as directed by the Owner’s Representative. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SITE PREPARATION OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 4 31 10 00 G. Objectionable Noises: Limit use of air hammers and other noisy equipment as much as possible. Conform to local governing requirements regarding noise control. H. Provide (including AHJ permitting, if required, and design) interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of adjacent facilities and structures to remain including but not limited to utility poles, trees, retaining walls, rockeries, utility structures, building foundations, etc. Contact facility owner to determine existing loads on the facility and any additional constraints the shoring, bracing or support design must incorporate. Comply with WISHA, WAC 296-155, and local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Obtain required permits and permission from local governing authorities and Owner prior to commencing Work. B. Arrange a preconstruction meeting and notify Owner of date, time and meeting place location. C. Before construction and mobilizing to the site, meet with the Owner’s Representative and review Contract Documents on site. Identify existing trees, utilities, and other site improvements that may be affected by construction. Identify trees, structures and other features to be left undisturbed. D. Provide, erect and maintain barricades, coverings, flagging or other types of protection necessary to prevent damage to existing structures, areas, utilities, vegetation, and other facilities or features. Restore existing facilities or features damaged by construction activity to their original condition as acceptable to the Owner, including, but not limited to, landscaping, rockeries, walls, pavement, walks, structures, utilities, fences and planters, and at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Install temporary erosion and sediment control in accordance with Section 01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control and the Contract Documents. F. Verify that clearing, grubbing, stripping and demolition and site improvements may safely and appropriately begin. G. Locate existing utilities within the project limits. H. Maintain hauling routes clean and free of debris resulting from Work on this Project. I. Sprinkle water as necessary to limit dust to the lowest practicable level. Do not use water to such an extent to cause flooding or icing. J. Properly recycle and dispose of refuse, debris and excess materials resulting from work in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local regulations and requirements. Do not HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SITE PREPARATION OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 4 31 10 00 leave these materials on the project site, unless authorized in writing by Owner’s Representative. 3.2 EROSION CONTROL A. Construct and maintain the TESC system in accordance with Section 01 57 13 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control, local governing authorities and as conditions dictate. 3.3 SITE IMPROVEMENT REMOVALS A. Care shall be taken that damage to the existing structures and features, such as but not limited to, utilities, pavement, fences or irrigation lines, which are to remain in place does not occur during the removal of pavement, structure, and other items and features to be removed. All removals are accomplished by making a neat vertical saw cut at the boundaries of the area to be removed. Adjacent materials designated to remain that are damaged by the Contractor due to his or her operations shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Sprinkle with water excavated material and access roads as necessary to limit dust to lowest practicable level. Do not use water to extent causing flooding, contaminated runoff or icing. 3.4 DRAINAGE A. Keep site drains open for drainage at all times. Mud/sediment build-up shall be removed. B. Open pits and holes caused as a result of demolition Work shall be kept free of standing water. 3.5 FILLING DEPRESSIONS A. Fill depressions caused by clearing, grubbing, and utility removal operations with Structural Fill material unless further excavation or Earthwork is indicated. Structural Fill shall be in accordance with Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS A. The Contractor, in a manner consistent with all government regulations, shall dispose of the refuse resulting from clearing, stripping and grubbing. In no case shall refuse material be left on the Project Site, shoved onto abutting private properties, or be buried in embankments or trenches on the Project Site. Debris shall not be deposited in any stream or body of water or in any street or alley, or upon any private property except by written consent of the private property owner. Maintain hauling routes clean and free of any debris resulting from Work of this Section. END OF SECTION HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 2 32 13 13 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work includes but is not limited to: Cast in place cement concrete walkways. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference the following standards: AHJ Public Authority Having Jurisdiction AHJ is an abbreviation for public Authorities Having Jurisdiction. For this project the AHJ includes permitting agencies including but not limited to City of Renton, King County, Ecology. WSDOT Washington Department of Transportation 2021 Standard Specifications and Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information in accordance with submittal procedures noted in Division 01. Concrete mix components and mix design as required per WSDOT. Concrete test results PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CEMENT CONCRETE WALKWAYS A. Cement concrete walkways and sidewalks shall conform to WSDOT Section 8-14 and the details shown in the Contract Documents. 2.2 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT A. Materials for cement concrete pavement for each mix design(s) shall conform to WSDOT Section 5-05.2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes Contractor’s acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. B. Verify existing dimensions and shapes. Allow for transitions to existing grades where applicable. C. Conform to the details, dimensions and grades specified on the Contract Documents. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 2 32 13 13 Prepare subgrade in all areas to be paved in accordance with Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork. Slope all paved surfaces to prevent standing water. D. Protect surrounding areas, structures, features, and surfaces from damage. Protect work of other trades. Take special care when work is adjacent to buildings. Should any defacement or damage occur, repair or replace damaged areas or structures at no cost to the Owner. Where new pavement abuts existing concrete or asphalt pavement, sawcut the existing pavement to provide a neat and straight edge at the joint. E. Where existing cement concrete pavement on a granular base is required to be removed, define the area uniformly in size and shape. Remove the existing concrete by sawcutting pavement vertically at a sufficient distance of at least six inches outside the undisturbed base surface before removing the affected pavement. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Prepare subgrade in conformance with Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork of this Project Manual. B. Install cement concrete walkways in accordance with WSDOT Section 8-14 and shown on the Contract Documents. Score and surface finish pool deck pavement to match existing adjacent pavement. Provide expansion joints as shown on drawings. 3.3 CLEANING A. Leave premises clean and free of residue of work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 of this Project Manual. END OF SECTION HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SYNTHETIC GRASS SAFETY UNDERLAYMENT AND PLAY MOUND OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 5 32 18 16.13 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT A. Drawings and general provisions of this Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work of this section includes establishment of subbase, provision and installation of structural foam and resilient foam underlayment as grading fill and base material for synthetic grass surfacing. The final assembly will be generally referred to as a Play Mound. B. Resilient EPP foam underlayment. The finished product fits together through a series of puzzle-piece connectors, which join each panel to form a fully connected consistent protective layer. The thickness of the EPP foam varies dependent on the required critical fall height. Work includes all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and applicable taxes to perform all work and services for the installation of the sub-surface. C. Resilient EPS structural foam capped with a layer of Expanding Polyurethane Adhesive with a layer of EPP on top for mounds. Mounds come in shippable pieces that are secured together by the adhesive to form one large unit where only the layer of EPP is visi ble. Synthetic turf is then laid over top to protect the foam from UV rays. Work includes all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and applicable taxes to perform all work and services for the installation of the sub-surface. 1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS A. Materials and methods of construction shall comply with the latest provisions of the following standards: 1. ASTM F 1292-04: Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment. 2. ASTM F1951-99: Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment. 3. ASTM F1551: Standard Test Methods for Comprehensive Characterization of Synthetic Turf Surfaces and Materials: Part 6: Water Permeability of Synthetic Turf Systems and Permeable Bases. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Coordinate with the Manufacturer. Provide plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments for the manufacturing of the EPS foam Play Mound a minimum of twenty-one (21) days prior to shipping of the materials. 1. Provide plan confirming layout and dimensions to edge of safety surfacing. 2. Provide two (2) sections/elevations confirming vertical layout dimensions. 3. Plans and sections to confirm the shape and form of the Play Mound. 4. Provide any attachment details not shown on plans, including leveling method. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SYNTHETIC GRASS SAFETY UNDERLAYMENT AND PLAY MOUND OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 5 32 18 16.13 B. Any alternate product must be submitted with prior approval packages a minimum of ten twenty-one (21) days prior to shipping of the materials. C. . Include all required product information for product alternates. D. Product Information. Include, at a minimum: 1. Laboratory Test Reports: Materials certificates certifying each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Certificates of compliance must be signed by materials producer and contractor. 2. Product Verification: Delivery slip for each material shipment. 3. Warranties: Product and maintenance warranties must be provided to the owner prior to installation. 4. Field test inspection reports and samples for material including impact attenuation, permeability, and flammability. E. Product Substitution Submittals: Contractor shall provide the following material for playground foam material substitution. 1. At least one mound project completed in the two (2) years. 2. Product warranty and guarantee from manufacture warranting against all defects for a fifteen (15) year period. 3. A written guarantee from manufacturer for workmanship. 1.5 TESTING OF EPP FOAM A. The following are test results from an independent testing laboratory which must also be submitted: 1. Impact Attenuation: ASTM 1292-04: Impact attenuation test results will be provided. These test results shall be certified and submitted on the letterhead of an independent testing lab. Impact attenuation test results shall meet or exceed Consumer Product Safety Commission Guidelines for impact attenuation (G-max and Head Injury Criterion “H.I.C.”). Test results must be administered and evaluated under the same test and these results must be shown for three drops at each required temperature: 32o, 72o, 120o; yield less than 200 G’s and less than 1,000 H.I.C. Only test results from ASTM testing approved laboratories, F8 committee will be acceptable. Approved testing laboratories are TSI and Detroit Testing. 1.6 WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The EPP foam is to be installed per manufacturer’s plans and specifications by manufacturer. B. The EPS foam Play Mound is to be installed per manufacturer’s plans and specifications by manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. EPP foam shall be delivered on pallets wrapped in 1 year UV protected pallet bags and strapped to avoid materials dispersing in high wind conditions. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SYNTHETIC GRASS SAFETY UNDERLAYMENT AND PLAY MOUND OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 5 32 18 16.13 B. EPS foam Play Mounds shall be delivered either on crates if small enough or on dedicated truck loads. The responsibility to cover and protect the foam pieces will be on the party that unloads the truck on site. C. Products will be stored out of site (as much as possible) and secured the same to prevent tampering. 1.8 GUARANTEE / WARRANTY OF THE MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP A. The EPP foam and EPS foam Play Mound installed under this contract will be warranted for a period of fifteen (15) years for material breakdown. Vandalism and force majeure will not be covered. Written warranty must be submitted by the installer. B. When defective material or workmanship is discovered which will require repair or replacement, all such repair work or replacement work shall be done by the contractor at its own expense after written notification is given of such required repairs. 1. Any unsafe conditions that arise shall be secured and maintained by the installer until all required repairs or replacements have been completed. 2. All resurfacing will conform in kind and quality to the specifications set forth in the plans and specifications will be free of defects in workmanship and material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CRUSHED GRAVEL BEDDING A. Crushed gravel bedding shall be manufactured from screened crushed gravel. The finished product shall be clean, uniform in quality, and free from wood, bark, roots, and other deleterious Materials. The crushed screenings shall be substantially free from adherent coatings. The presence of a thin, firmly adhering film of weathered rock shall not be considered as coating unless it exists on more than 50 percent of the surface area of any size between successive laboratory sieves. The portion of aggregate retained on a U.S. No. 4 sieve shall not contain more than 0.1 percent deleterious materials by weight. 2.2 EPP FOAM A. Resilient EPP foam shall be: 1. SafetyFoam Pro as manufactured by: ForeverLawn® Inc. PO Box 204, East Olympia, WA 98540; Phone 360-455-9500; Fax 360-438-1025. 2. Or, approved equal. B. The foam underlayment shall meet all of the following requirements independently and collectively: 1. Material: Molded Low Density Expanded Polypropylene (EPP) Beads 2. Weight: 1.3 # Density 3. Connectors: Puzzle piece design HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SYNTHETIC GRASS SAFETY UNDERLAYMENT AND PLAY MOUND OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 5 32 18 16.13 2.3 EPS FOAM PLAY MOUND A. Resilient EPS structural foam covered by a layer of EPP resilient foam shall be PlayMounds as manufactured by: ForeverLawn® Inc. PO Box 204, East Olympia, WA 98540; Phone 360-455-9500; Fax 360-438-1025. B. Or, approved equal. C. This foam mound structure shall meet all of the following requirements independently and collectively: D. 1. Material: Structural 1.5 # Density EPS Foam covered by a 1/2" layer of Expanded Polypropylene (EPP) E. 2. Weight: 1.5 # Density EPS and 1.3 # Density EPP F. 3. Connecting: GREAT STUFF PRO™ Construction Adhesive for adhering PlayMound component pieces together to form various styles of PlayMounds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 BASE REQUIREMENTS A. The Synthetic Grass base contractor shall strictly adhere to the installation procedures outlined under this section and by the Engineer’s drawings. Any variance from these requirements must be accepted in writing, by the Synthetic Grass vendor, and submitted to the Owner or Owner’s Representative, verifying that the changes do not adversely affect the performance or warranty. 1. Excavation: Existing ground cover shall be excavated to the depth established on the plans. The subgrade shall also be compacted to a minimum of a 90% compaction rate. 2. Base Drainage Aggregate: Installation of the free draining Crushed Gravel Bedding, shall follow procedures that protect the base grade soils. It shall be installed to a minimum depth of 4 inches. The drainage network and its existing elevations shall not be disrupted through ground pressures from trucks, dozers or by any other means. The aggregate shall be left firm, but not over-compacted as to protect the porosity and drainage capabilities of the aggregate profile. The drainage aggregate shall be compacted to a minimum of a 90% compaction rate. 3. Base Inspection and Acceptance: Prior to commencing the work of this section, aggregate installer shall request inspection with the Owner’s Representative and the synthetic grass installer to inspect the finished Base Course. The Synthetic Grass Surfacing Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a written acceptance certification that the permeable aggregate base preparation meets or exceeds the Synthetic Grass Surfacing Manufacturer’s requirements as suitable for installation and warranty validation. 4. The base shall be cleared, leveled, and compacted. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cleaning: the entire surface shall be clean and free from any foreign and loose material. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SYNTHETIC GRASS SAFETY UNDERLAYMENT AND PLAY MOUND OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 5 32 18 16.13 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install EPP Foam Pro and EPS Foam PlayMound per Construction Documents. B. EPP Foam resilient surfacing: EPP Foam will be connected in 2’ x 4’ sections over the stone. C. A EPS PlayMounds’ resilient contours will be glued together to form one large cohesive mound. D. Install EPP Foam so that the mound is capped with a layer of EPP, adhered to the EPS Foam PlayMound foam with expanding Polyurethane Adhesive, per manufacturer recommendations / instructions. END OF SECTION HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 6 32 18 16.23 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary for the complete installation of Synthetic Grass Surfacing with a stable base as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Finished products shall be seamed to provide a resilient, continuous surface over the entirety of the contiguous surface of this material. The installation of all materials shall be performed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and in accordance with all approved Shop Drawings. The complete synthetic grass surfacing system shall consist of, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: subgrade, base, safety foam, structural foam, and synthetic grass surface. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Finishing Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork Section 32 11 23 - Mineral Aggregates Section 32 18 16_13 - Synthetic Grass Safety Underlayment & Play Mound 1.3 REFRENCES: A. ASTM F1951 Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment. B. ASTM D2859: Flammability Standard and passes the Federal Flammability Standard DOC FF 1-70 C. ANSI/ESD STM97.2-2016: Standard for the Protection of Electrostatic Discharge Susceptible Items: Footwear/Flooring System-Voltage Measurement in Combination with a Person 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Strictly adhere to the manufacturer's instructions regarding product handling, sub-grade preparation, surfacing system application and all other aspects of the surfacing installation. B. The contractor who is installing the surfacing shall be IPEMA Certified and have at least five (5) recent (within the last three (3) years) installations of Synthetic Grass Surfacing and shall have personnel, facilities, and equipment for the specified work. The contractor shall also submit evidence of the recent installations of the surfacing materials per this section. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Accessibility: Products shall meet the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. Finish grade of Synthetic Grass Surfacing with adjacent pavement shall not exceed 1/4” vertical elevation change between two surfaces. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 6 32 18 16.23 2. All components and their installation method shall be designed and manufactured for use on playgrounds. The materials as hereinafter specified shall withstand full climatic exposure in the location to be installed, be resistant to insect infestation, rot, fungus, mold and mildew; they shall also withstand ultra-violet rays and extreme heat; and allow the free flow of water vertically through the surface and into the permeable aggregate base below the surface. 3. The seams of all system components shall provide a permanent, tight, secure, and hazard free surface. 4. Flammability: The Synthetic Grass system shall pass all required ASTM D285th tests: flash point of greater than 600 degrees F. It shall be resistant to damage and spreading of ignition in typical exposures such as a lighted cigarette dropped on this surface. 5. Anti-static: The Synthetic Grass system shall pass the electrostatic testing meeting ANSI/ESD STM97.2 Standard for the Protection of Electrostatic Discharge Susceptible Items: Footwear/Flooring System-Voltage Measurement in Combination with a Person. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. A minimum of two (2) weeks prior to delivery of the following products to the project site, provide to the Engineer for approval two (2) complete sets of the following: 1. List of the most recent five (5) installations for projects of similar scope to this project completed in last three (3) years. List project scope, project cost, date completed, and Owner contact information. 2. Certified copies of independent (third-party) laboratory test reports indicating each material item complies with or exceeds performance requirements detailed in section 1. 3. ADA Compliance: Certifying the proposed surface system is fully compliant with ASTM 1951 Standardized test for ADA Compliance. 4. 12”x12” loose sample of proposed synthetic grass product. Field test inspection reports including permeability and flammability. 5. Manufacturers written warranty for materials and Contractors written warranty for workmanship of Synthetic Grass Surfacing. 6. Composite bender board: Catalog cut, technical literature, sample, and edge detail. 7. Manufacturer’s shop drawings and detailed installation instructions for Synthetic Grass System used. 8. Product Verification: Delivery slip for each material shipment meeting manufacturer’s quantity requirements. 9. Detailed maintenance procedures and equipment requirements for the Synthetic Grass system supplied. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Provide for delivery of all materials required to complete the work of this section. Handle all materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations or requirements for maintenance of the requirements of warranty. 1. General: Comply with Product Requirement Section. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 6 32 18 16.23 2. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. 3. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and a maximum temperature of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). Prevent ground contact or exposure to sun, wind, or rain. 1.7 WARRANTY: A. Provide manufacturer's warranty which warrants the usability and playability of the synthetic grass surfacing for its intended uses with the following minimum characteristics: 1. Provide full coverage of materials for a minimum of fifteen (15) years from the date of physical completion. 2. Warrant that the materials installed meet or exceed the product specifications. 3. Be from a single source covering workmanship and all materials. 4. Assure the availability of exact or substantially the same replacement materials for the synthetic grass system for the full warranty period. 5. Include general wear and damage caused by UV degradation. The warranty may specifically exclude vandalism and Acts of God beyond the control of the manufacturer or installer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: A. Supply all products necessary to provide for the complete installation of the Synthetic Grass System as indicated in the Contract Drawings, including materials which may not be mentioned here but are required either by the manufacturer or installer to complete the installation. 2.2 SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING: A. Synthetic Grass System shall be: 1. ‘Playground Grass Ultra’ as manufactured by: Foreverlawn Inc, PO Box 204, East Olympia, WA 98540; Phone 360-455-9500; Fax 360-438-1025. 2. Or approved equal. B. The Synthetic Grass Surfacing System shall meet performance requirements of section 1. C. Synthetic Grass Surfacing Properties: 1. Blades: Primary blades are a slit film polyethylene with antimicrobial agent AlphaSan®, or approved equal, integrated into the primary yarn. Anti-static technology must also be integrated into the construction so as to not allow static charge build-up. Secondary blade is a heat textured nylon monofilament. Tufting construction requires dual primaries in the same row. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING OCTOBER 2024 Page 4 of 6 32 18 16.23 2. Weight: The product face weight will be 48 ounces. With backing, the total weight of the product will be 98 ounces. 3. Tufting: Dual yarn, same row. The tufting gauge will be 3/8”, pile height 1-5/8”. 4. Backing: The three-layer backing is made with first layer consisting of polyester, fiberglass, and polyurethane; Second layer consisting of minimum 40-ounce urethane layer; and third layer consisting of nonwoven, recycled, geotextile fleece. 5. Seams: Primary seaming system shall be a micromechanical seam, utilizing hook and loop technology. 2.3 EDGING: A. All edges of the Synthetic Grass Surfacing installation shall be secured using min. 1”x 4”x12’ (dimensional or nominal) recycled plastic or pressure treated nailer board as approved. Recycled plastic materials shall be thoroughly blended and homogenized within the full cross section of any extrusion. Edges of edging shall be eased. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 BASE REQUIREMENTS A. The Synthetic Grass Surfacing base contractor shall strictly adhere to the installation procedures outlined under this section and by the Contract’s drawings. Any variance from these requirements must be accepted in writing, by the Synthetic Grass Surfacing vendor, and submitted to the Owner or Owner’s Representative, verifying that the changes do not adversely affect the performance or warranty. B. Coordinate with other trades to ensure that all work in progress and completed work is protected and maintain all completed work in a like-new condition. Correct all damage to a condition acceptable to Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 EDGING: A. Plastic or pressure treated nailer board: Coordinate with the Synthetic Grass Surfacing contractor for their installation of the Synthetic Grass perimeter fastening structure (nailer board) prior to installation of the drainage aggregate. Nailer board shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendation and mounted maximum ½” below adjacent concrete surface or designated finish grade of the synthetic grass surfacing. B. Install edging in such a manner as to allow the finished Synthetic Grass Surfacing System to conform to the finish grade lines and elevations as indicated in the Contract Drawings. Nailer board shall be mounted maximum 1/2” below finished grade of adjacent concrete surface or designated finish grade of the surface. Drill each length of timber a minimum of 3 places per timber, beginning 6” from each end and spaced equally a maximum of 18” on center. Drilled holes shall be sized to insure a tight friction bond with concrete wedge anchors, generally 1/2” diameter. Use 1” staples to secure the synthetic grass to the boards. Staples will be placed every 1”. 3.3 SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING INSTALLATION: HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING OCTOBER 2024 Page 5 of 6 32 18 16.23 A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the installation procedures outlined under this section. Any variance from these requirements must be accepted in writing, by the Manufacturer’s onsite representative, and submitted to the Engineer, verifying that the changes do not in any way affect the warranty. B. Synthetic Grass rolls shall be joined via micro-mechanical bond seaming and reinforced with specialty grass adhesive where necessary. 1. Seams shall be flat, tight, and permanent with no separation or fraying. 2. Seams shall be rolled with weighted roller to ensure adhesion. 3. Synthetic Grass yarn fabric that is trapped or glued between seams shall be freed from the seams by hand or other approved method to an upright position prior to the commencement of brushing and top-dressing Synthetic Grass rolls by the manufacturer wherever possible. C. Synthetic Grass Perimeter Attachment: 1. After final layout and seaming of the Synthetic Grass product, the Synthetic Grass Surfacing material shall be wrapped over the edge of the curb nailer board and secured the full depth of the nailer board. 2. The grass shall be attached to the nailer board by stainless steel staples, screws, and/or nails. 3.4 INSPECTIONS & TESTING: A. Initial Installation: 1. Following the installation of the first two panels of carpet fabric and the sewing of those two panels, request review and approval by the Owner’s Representative. Do not proceed beyond the first two panels without this approval. Notify Owner’s represenative at least 48 hours prior to intended field review. The Engineer will make every effort not to delay progress of the Synthetic Grass Surfacing installation due to this field review requirement. 2. The Engineer will inspect the work on a regular basis for compliance with the approved manufacturers detailed installation instructions. Work that appears not to be in compliance will be rejected and must be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. Following completion of the defibrillation of the carpet fibers, and cleanup of the installation debris, perform an on-site permeability test establishing initial benchmark data for warranty performance. C. Extra materials: Owner shall be given option to retain and store excess materials, such as excess Synthetic Grass Surfacing, that is not installed. 3.5 CLEAN UP: A. Contractor shall provide the labor, supplies and equipment as necessary for final cleaning of surfaces and installed items. B. During the contract and at intervals as directed by the Owner or Owner’s Representative and as Synthetic Grass Surfacing system installation is completed, HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SYNTHETIC GRASS SURFACING OCTOBER 2024 Page 6 of 6 32 18 16.23 clear the site of all extraneous materials, rubbish, or debris and leave the site in a clean, safe, well-draining, neat condition. C. Surfaces, recesses, enclosures, etc. shall be cleaned as necessary to leave the work area in a clean, immaculate condition ready for immediate occupancy and use by the Owner. D. Synthetic Grass Surfacing Acceptance: Until the Physical Completion of the complete work of the Contract, protect and maintain the installation. Keep the surface of the field free of construction debris, leaves, and other litter. Repair or replace any damage caused by vandalism, other trades, traffic, or weather. END OF SECTION HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SITE FURNISHINGS OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 3 32 33 00 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Work of this Section includes furnishing labor, materials, equipment and supplies as defined herein and as shown on the Plans, including without limitation, procurement, and installation of the following site furnishings: Shade structures 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate with related Work specified in other parts of the Project Manual. B. Coordinate with the General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions in the Contract. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference the following standards: AHJ Public Authority Having Jurisdiction AHJ is an abbreviation for public Authorities Having Jurisdiction. For this project the AHJ includes permitting agencies including but not limited to the City of Renton. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. All materials shall be submitted in one complete package. B. Provide submittals to Owner’s Representative for approval a minimum of eight (8) weeks prior to start of work under this Section: Product Data: Catalog cuts or other descriptive literature, including addresses and contact information for specified equipment and materials. a. Obtain approval from Owner’s Representative of products and materials prior to ordering. b. Product Data: For each type of product. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Coordinate with Manufacturer. Provide plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments for the following site furnishings: Shade structures. Provide plan confirming layout and locations of all posts/anchors, layout, and dimensions to edge of safety surfacing and any fixed objects adjacent. Provide section/elevations confirming layout dimensions. Provide any attachment details not shown in above, including leveling method. D. Material and Maintenance Certificates and Manuals: Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to be included in maintenance manuals. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SITE FURNISHINGS OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 3 32 33 00 E. Qualifications: Provide documentation for quality assurance, including project name and locations, names of key staff, and general description for a minimum 3 similar projects installed within the past 5 years. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Site Furnishing Installer shall be a company specializing in the Work of this Section with a minimum 5 years documented experience in the installation of a similar nature. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials to the project site in undamaged condition. B. Store and handle the site furnishings and related materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breakage, chipping, or other causes. 1.7 REVIEW BY OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE A. Provide Owner’s Representative with a minimum (3) working days’ notice as to when the layout of site furnishings will be ready for review. Do not schedule review by Owner’s Representative until Contractor has confirmed that the specified site furnishings are undamaged and that the relevant requirements of the Plans and this Section have been met. Do not install site furnishings prior to Owner’s Representative’s approval of layout. B. Failure to comply with the review and approval procedures described in this Section may require reinstallation at no additional expense to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHADE STRUCTURES A. Shade structures (qty: three) shall be Skyways Single Post Pyramid Shade Model #237671, 16’x16’, 12’ entry height, with Rapid Release. Or approved equal. Skyways,by Landscape Structures 601 7th Street South, Delano, Minnesota 55328, 763-972-3391 (www.playlsi.com/en/commercial-shade/) B. Shade fabric and ProShield color and finish to be determined. Submit options for review and selection by Owner’s Representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. In general, the Work is to proceed as rapidly as the site becomes available. B. Remove debris from other trades prior to beginning work. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS SITE FURNISHINGS OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 3 32 33 00 3.2 SHADE STRUCTURES INSTALLATION A. Install shade structure(s) in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations and at location(s) approved by the Owner’s Representative. Shade structure footings and mountings to be plumb and level and per Manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Ensure adequate placement and operation of the shade structures. C. Provide an orientation to the Owner’s Representative(s) for routine and seasonal operations and maintenance needs for the shade structure(s). Provide any spare parts and accessories included with the shade structure(s) to the Owner’s Representative. 3.3 CLEAN UP A. Clean paved surfaces and site furnishings during installation and upon completion of the Work. B. Remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment packaging, shipping containers, debris, and the like. C. Apply touch up paint in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations to any flaws or minor damage on the site furnishings. D. Repair any damage to the site resulting from installation of site furnishings as directed by Owner’s Representative. END OF SECTION HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OCTOBER 2024 Page 1 of 3 33 40 00 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes, but is not limited to: Area drains, storm drain pipes, fittings and other appurtenances/storm drainage systems as shown on the Plans. Verification of location (invert elevation and horizontal location) of existing service stubs and points of connection in advance of improvement installation. Coordination with City of Renton. Connections to existing private system. Construction records. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference the following standards: AHJ Public Authority Having Jurisdiction. For this project the AHJ denotes permitting agencies including but not limited to the COR SWDSM and Ecology SWM. COR SWDM City of Renton Surface Water Design Manual, 2022 (www.rentonwa.gov/city_hall/public_works/utility_systems/surfac e_water_utility_engineering/surface_water_design_standards) Ecology SWM State of Washington Department of Ecology Stormwater Management Manual for Western Washington, 2019. (www.ecy.wa.gov/programs/wq/stormwater/manual.html) 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with all applicable Federal, State and Local codes and safety requirements. If there are any conflicts among reference standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern. 1.4 PERMITS A. Obtain and pay for all permits as required. B. Pay permit fees, new service fees and schedule inspections at no additional cost to Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with submittal procedures noted in Division 01. Product data sheets and shop drawings for materials, such as pipe, area drains, and fittings. Documentation of permits and fees paid for the Work described in this Section. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OCTOBER 2024 Page 2 of 3 33 40 00 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) DRAIN PIPE A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Drain Pipe: conform to WSDOT Section 9-05.12(1) with rubber gasket joints. Fittings shall be same material as pipe. 2.2 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE A. HDPE pipe shall conform to WSDOT Section 9-05.23 with minimum SDR 21. B. Corrugated High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe: use dual walled with smooth interior pipe wall and corrugated exterior with watertight joints. Corrugated HDPE pipe 12” or greater in diameters shall conform to AASHTO M294 Type S and have minimum cell classification of 335400C, as defined in ASTM D3350. For HDPE Connections to MH use sand collar adapter. 2.3 AREA DRAIN A. Area Drain shall be per plans. 2.4 TRENCH DRAIN A. Trench drain cap shall be Spee-D Channel End Cap, Model #247, Manufactured by NDS, 851 N Harvard Avenue, Lindsay, CA 93247, 877-412-7467, or approved equivalent. 2.5 FITTINGS, COUPLINGS AND JOINTS A. Fittings shall be the same material as the pipe. B. Tees on existing pipe and new connections to maintenance holes shall be connected by core drilling and flexible connections. C. Connections between pipes of differing material shall be made with a flexible gasketed coupling, adaptor, or coupling-adaptor to make a watertight joint. Couplings shall be those manufactured by Romac, Caulder, or Fernco or approved equivalent product. 2.6 BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Bedding and backfill material shall be in accordance with Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork and as noted on the Plans. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK A. Verify a minimum of 72 hours in advance of installation the invert elevation and location of services at crossings and points of connections. B. Verify location of existing utilities in accordance in other Sections. HMAC – MAINTENANCE & REPAIRS BID DOCUMENTS STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM OCTOBER 2024 Page 3 of 3 33 40 00 C. Prior to the construction, make proper provisions to avoid interferences with installation of other work and/or other Contractors. Make any changes caused by neglect to coordinate work as directed by the Owner’s Representative and at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Compare Storm Drainage Drawings and Specifications with Drawings and Specifications of other trades and report any discrepancies between the documents to the Owner’s Representative prior to beginning work. E. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 3.2 TRENCHING AND PIPE INSTALLATION A. Use PVC or DIP for storm drain pipe outside the right-of-way unless otherwise specified on plan. Pipe material shall be the same from storm drain structure to storm drain structure within a run. B. Excavate trench and install pipe to alignments, elevations, grades and slopes indicated on the drawings. C. Excavate and prepare trench in accordance with Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork. D. Place bedding and backfill in conformance with Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork. E. Install plastic foam between utilities when utility separation conditions require a cushion. F. Install conductive warning tape in accordance with Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork. 3.3 AREA DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Install area drains in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation requirements. 3.4 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Clean and test pipe in conformance with WSDOT Section 7-04.3 Replace sections that do not pass testing as directed by Owner’s Representative or AHJ at no additional cost to Owner. B. Service drains shall be tested in conformance with WSDOT 7-18. Service drains shall pass all tests required by the AHJ. Replace service drains that do not pass testing as directed by the Owner’s Representative or AHJ at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Leave premises clean and free of residue of work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of this Project Manual. END OF SECTION